MongoDB Ops Manager Manual Opsmanager V1.6

opsmanager-manual-v1.6

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 457 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

MongoDB Ops Manager Manual
Release 1.6
MongoDB, Inc.
Dec 04, 2017
© MongoDB, Inc. 2008 - 2016
2
Contents
1 Ops Manager Introduction 11
1.1 Functional Overview ........................................... 11
Overview ................................................. 12
Monitoring ................................................ 12
Automation ................................................ 12
Backup .................................................. 12
1.2 Ops Manager Components ........................................ 13
Network Diagram ............................................. 14
Ops Manager Application ......................................... 14
Backup Daemon .............................................. 15
Dedicated MongoDB Databases for Operational Data .......................... 15
1.3 Install a Simple Test Ops Manager Installation .............................. 16
Overview ................................................. 16
Procedure ................................................. 16
2 Install Ops Manager 20
2.1 Installation Checklist ........................................... 20
Overview ................................................. 20
Topology Decisions ............................................ 21
Security Decisions ............................................ 23
Backup Decisions ............................................. 23
2.2 Example Installation Diagrams ...................................... 23
Overview ................................................. 24
Non-Durable, Test Install on a Single Server ............................... 24
Durable Production Install ........................................ 24
Durable, Highly Available Install with Multiple Backup Databases ................... 25
2.3 Ops Manager Hardware and Software Requirements ........................... 27
Hardware Requirements ......................................... 27
EC2 Security Groups ........................................... 30
Software Requirements .......................................... 30
2.4 Deploy Backing MongoDB Replica Sets ................................. 32
Overview ................................................. 32
Replica Sets Requirements ........................................ 32
Server Prerequisites ............................................ 33
Procedures ................................................. 33
2.5 Install Ops Manager ............................................ 35
Install Ops Manager with deb Packages ................................. 35
Install Ops Manager with rpm Packages ................................. 40
Install Ops Manager from tar.gz or zip Archives .......................... 45
Install Ops Manager on Windows ..................................... 50
2.6 Upgrade Ops Manager .......................................... 54
Upgrade Ops Manager with deb Packages ................................ 54
Upgrade Ops Manager with rpm Packages ................................ 57
Upgrade Ops Manager from tar.gz or zip Archives ......................... 61
Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier .................................. 64
2.7 Configure Local Mode if Ops Manager has No Internet Access ..................... 65
Overview ................................................. 66
Prerequisites ................................................ 66
Required Access ............................................. 68
Procedure ................................................. 68
2.8 Configure High Availability ........................................ 70
3
Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application ......................... 70
Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Backup Service ...................... 72
2.9 Configure Backup Jobs and Storage ................................... 73
Configure Multiple Blockstores in Multiple Data Centers ........................ 73
Move Jobs from a Lost Backup Service to another Backup Service ................... 76
2.10 Test Ops Manager Monitoring ...................................... 77
Overview ................................................. 78
Procedure ................................................. 78
3 Create a New MongoDB Deployment 80
3.1 Add Servers for Use by Automation ................................... 80
Overview ................................................. 80
Add Existing Servers to Ops Manager .................................. 81
3.2 Deploy a Replica Set ........................................... 82
Overview ................................................. 82
Consideration ............................................... 83
Prerequisites ................................................ 83
Procedure ................................................. 83
3.3 Deploy a Sharded Cluster ......................................... 84
Overview ................................................. 84
Prerequisites ................................................ 84
Procedure ................................................. 84
3.4 Deploy a Standalone MongoDB Instance ................................. 85
Overview ................................................. 85
Prerequisites ................................................ 85
Procedure ................................................. 86
3.5 Connect to a MongoDB Process ..................................... 86
Overview ................................................. 86
Firewall Rules ............................................... 86
Procedures ................................................. 87
4 Import an Existing MongoDB Deployment 88
4.1 Add Existing MongoDB Processes to Monitoring ............................ 88
Overview ................................................. 88
Prerequisite ................................................ 89
Add MongoDB Processes ......................................... 89
4.2 Add Monitored Processes to Automation ................................. 90
Overview ................................................. 90
Prerequisites ................................................ 90
Procedures ................................................. 91
4.3 Reactivate Monitoring for a Process ................................... 92
Overview ................................................. 92
Procedure ................................................. 92
4.4 Remove Hosts ............................................... 93
Overview ................................................. 93
Procedure ................................................. 93
5 Manage Deployments 93
5.1 Edit a Replica Set ............................................. 94
Overview ................................................. 94
Procedures ................................................. 94
Additional Information .......................................... 97
5.2 Migrate a Replica Set Member to a New Server ............................. 97
Overview ................................................. 98
4
Considerations .............................................. 98
Procedure ................................................. 98
5.3 Move or Add a Monitoring or Backup Agent ............................... 99
Overview ................................................. 100
Procedures ................................................. 100
5.4 Change the Version of MongoDB ..................................... 101
Overview ................................................. 101
Considerations .............................................. 102
Procedure ................................................. 102
5.5 Restart a MongoDB Process ....................................... 102
Overview ................................................. 103
Considerations .............................................. 103
Procedure ................................................. 103
5.6 Shut Down MongoDB Processes ..................................... 103
Overview ................................................. 104
Procedure ................................................. 104
Additional Information .......................................... 104
5.7 Remove Processes from Monitoring ................................... 104
Overview ................................................. 104
Considerations .............................................. 105
Procedure ................................................. 105
5.8 Alerts ................................................... 105
Manage Host Alerts ............................................ 105
Create an Alert Configuration ....................................... 105
Manage Alert Configuration ....................................... 108
Manage Alerts ............................................... 110
Alert Conditions .............................................. 112
5.9 Monitoring Metrics ............................................ 119
Deployment ................................................ 119
Host Statistics ............................................... 120
Aggregated Cluster Statistics ....................................... 122
Replica Set Statistics ........................................... 123
Profile Databases ............................................. 124
5.10 View Logs ................................................. 126
Overview ................................................. 127
MongoDB Real-Time Logs ........................................ 127
MongoDB On-Disk Logs ......................................... 128
Agent Logs ................................................ 128
6 Back Up MongoDB Deployments 129
6.1 Backup Flows ............................................... 130
Introduction ................................................ 130
Initial Sync ................................................ 130
Routine Operation ............................................. 131
Snapshots ................................................. 131
Grooms .................................................. 132
6.2 Backup Preparations ........................................... 132
Overview ................................................. 132
Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy ................................ 132
Excluded Namespaces .......................................... 133
Storage Engine .............................................. 133
Resyncing Production Deployments ................................... 133
Checkpoints ................................................ 133
Snapshots when Agent Cannot Stop Balancer .............................. 134
5
Snapshots when Agent Cannot Contact a mongod ........................... 134
6.3 Activate Backup .............................................. 134
Overview ................................................. 134
Prerequisites ................................................ 134
Procedure ................................................. 134
6.4 Edit a Backup’s Settings ......................................... 135
Overview ................................................. 136
Procedure ................................................. 136
6.5 Restore MongoDB Deployments ..................................... 138
Restore Flows ............................................... 138
Restore a Sharded Cluster from a Backup ................................ 142
Restore a Replica Set from a Backup ................................... 151
6.6 Restore MongoDB Instances with Backup ................................ 156
Restore from a Stored Snapshot ..................................... 157
Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery ................................. 159
Restore from a Point in the Last 24 Hours ................................ 160
Restore a Single Database ........................................ 160
Seed a New Secondary from Backup Restore .............................. 162
6.7 Backup Maintenance ........................................... 164
Select Backup File Delivery Method and Format ............................. 164
Delete Snapshots for Replica Sets and Sharded Clusters ......................... 166
Stop, Start, or Disable the Ops Manager Backup Service ........................ 166
Resync Backup .............................................. 168
7 Security 170
7.1 Security Overview ............................................ 170
Overview ................................................. 170
Security Options ............................................. 171
Supported User Authentication Per Release ............................... 171
Supported MongoDB Security Features on Linux ............................ 171
Supported MongoDB Security Features on Windows .......................... 172
7.2 Firewall Configuration .......................................... 173
Overview ................................................. 173
Ports .................................................... 173
Monitoring HTTP Endpoints ....................................... 174
7.3 Change the Ops Manager Ports ...................................... 175
Overview ................................................. 175
Procedures ................................................. 175
7.4 Configure SSL Connections to Ops Manager ............................... 178
Overview ................................................. 178
Run the Ops Manager Application Over HTTPS ............................. 178
7.5 Configure the Connections to the Backing MongoDB Instances ..................... 179
Overview ................................................. 179
Prerequisites ................................................ 179
Procedures ................................................. 179
7.6 Configure SSL for MongoDB ....................................... 182
Overview ................................................. 182
Procedures ................................................. 183
7.7 Configure Users and Groups with LDAP for Ops Manager ....................... 183
Overview ................................................. 184
Prerequisites ................................................ 185
Procedure ................................................. 185
7.8 Configure MongoDB Authentication and Authorization ......................... 186
Overview ................................................. 187
6
Access Control Mechanisms ....................................... 187
Edit Host Credentials ........................................... 187
7.9 Manage Two-Factor Authentication for Ops Manager .......................... 189
Overview ................................................. 189
Procedures ................................................. 190
7.10 Manage Your Two-Factor Authentication Options ............................ 191
Overview ................................................. 191
Procedures ................................................. 192
8 Administration 194
8.1 Manage Your Account .......................................... 194
Account Page ............................................... 195
Personalization Page ........................................... 195
API Keys & Whitelists Page ....................................... 196
My Groups Page ............................................. 196
Group Settings Page ........................................... 196
Users Page ................................................ 196
Agents Page ................................................ 196
Billing/Subscriptions ........................................... 196
Payment History ............................................. 196
8.2 Administer the System .......................................... 197
General Tab ................................................ 197
Backup Tab ................................................ 199
Control Panel Tab ............................................. 203
8.3 Manage Groups .............................................. 204
Overview ................................................. 204
Working with Multiple Environments .................................. 204
Procedures ................................................. 204
8.4 Manage Ops Manager Users and Roles .................................. 206
Manage Ops Manager Users ....................................... 206
Ops Manager Roles ............................................ 208
8.5 Manage MongoDB Users and Roles ................................... 212
Enable MongoDB Role-Based Access Control .............................. 212
Manage MongoDB Users and Roles ................................... 213
Manage Custom Roles .......................................... 215
8.6 Configure Available MongoDB Versions ................................. 218
Overview ................................................. 218
Procedure ................................................. 219
8.7 Backup Alerts ............................................... 219
Backup Agent Down ........................................... 219
Backups Broken .............................................. 219
Cluster Snapshot Failed .......................................... 220
Bind Failure ................................................ 220
Snapshot Behind Snitch .......................................... 220
8.8 Start and Stop Ops Manager Application ................................. 220
Start the Ops Manager Server ....................................... 221
Stop the Ops Manager Server ....................................... 221
Startup Log File Output .......................................... 221
Optional: Run as Different User ..................................... 222
Optional: Ops Manager Application Server Port Number ........................ 222
8.9 Back Up Ops Manager .......................................... 222
Back Up with the Public API ....................................... 223
Shut Down and Back Up ......................................... 223
Online Backup .............................................. 223
7
9 API 223
9.1 Public API Principles ........................................... 223
Overview ................................................. 224
HTTP Methods .............................................. 224
JSON ................................................... 224
Linking .................................................. 225
Lists .................................................... 226
Envelopes ................................................. 226
Pretty Printing ............................................... 227
Response Codes .............................................. 227
Errors ................................................... 227
Authentication ............................................... 228
Automation ................................................ 228
Additional Information .......................................... 228
9.2 Public API Resources ........................................... 228
Root .................................................... 229
Hosts ................................................... 230
Metrics .................................................. 236
Clusters .................................................. 241
Groups ................................................... 244
Users ................................................... 249
Alerts ................................................... 255
Alert Configurations ........................................... 261
Backup Configurations .......................................... 270
Snapshot Schedule ............................................ 274
Snapshots ................................................. 276
Restore Jobs ................................................ 280
Whitelist .................................................. 285
Automation Configuration ........................................ 288
Automation Status ............................................ 295
9.3 Public API Tutorials ........................................... 297
Enable the Public API ........................................... 297
Deploy a Cluster through the API .................................... 299
Update the MongoDB Version of a Deployment ............................. 307
10 Troubleshooting 310
10.1 Getting Started Checklist ......................................... 310
Authentication Errors ........................................... 310
Check Agent Output or Log ....................................... 310
Confirm Only One Agent is Actively Monitoring ............................ 310
Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Monitored Hosts ....................... 311
Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Ops Manager Server ..................... 311
Allow Agent to Discover Hosts and Collect Initial Data ......................... 311
10.2 Installation ................................................ 311
Why doesn’t the monitoring server startup successfully? ........................ 311
10.3 Monitoring ................................................ 311
Alerts ................................................... 311
Deployments ............................................... 312
Monitoring Agent Fails to Collect Data ................................. 313
Hosts ................................................... 313
Groups ................................................... 313
Munin ................................................... 314
10.4 Authentication ............................................... 315
Two-Factor Authentication ........................................ 315
8
LDAP ................................................... 315
Cannot Enable LDAP ........................................... 315
Forgot to Change MONGODB-CR Error ................................. 316
All Deployments ............................................. 316
10.5 Backup .................................................. 317
Logs Display MongodVersionException ................................. 317
10.6 System ................................................... 318
Logs Display OutOfMemoryError .................................... 318
10.7 Automation Checklist ........................................... 318
11 Frequently Asked Questions 318
11.1 Monitoring FAQs ............................................. 319
Host Configuration ............................................ 319
Monitoring Agent ............................................. 319
Data Presentation ............................................. 321
Data Retention .............................................. 322
11.2 Backup FAQs ............................................... 322
Requirements ............................................... 322
Interface .................................................. 323
Operations ................................................. 323
Configuration ............................................... 325
Restoration ................................................ 325
11.3 Administration FAQs ........................................... 328
User and Group Management ....................................... 328
Activity .................................................. 328
Operations ................................................. 329
About Ops Manager ............................................ 329
12 Reference 329
12.1 Ops Manager Configuration Files ..................................... 330
Overview ................................................. 330
Settings .................................................. 331
Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials ................................... 345
MongoDB User Access .......................................... 346
12.2 Automation Agent ............................................ 346
Install the Automation Agent ....................................... 346
Automation Agent Configuration ..................................... 355
12.3 Monitoring Agent ............................................. 358
Install Monitoring Agent ......................................... 358
Monitoring Agent Configuration ..................................... 374
Required Access for Monitoring Agent .................................. 377
Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control ............................. 380
Configure Monitoring Agent for SSL ................................... 385
Configure Hardware Monitoring with munin-node .......................... 387
Start or Stop the Monitoring Agent .................................... 389
Remove Monitoring Agents from Ops Manager ............................. 391
12.4 Backup Agent ............................................... 392
Install Backup Agent ........................................... 392
Backup Agent Configuration ....................................... 410
Required Access for Backup Agent .................................... 412
Configure Backup Agent for Access Control ............................... 414
Configure Backup Agent for SSL ..................................... 421
Start or Stop the Backup Agent ...................................... 422
Remove the Backup Agent from Ops Manager .............................. 424
9
12.5 Audit Events ............................................... 425
User Audits ................................................ 425
Host Audits ................................................ 426
Alert Config Audits ............................................ 427
Backup Audits .............................................. 427
Group Audits ............................................... 428
12.6 Monitoring Reference ........................................... 428
Host Types ................................................ 428
Host Process Types ............................................ 429
Event Types ................................................ 429
Alert Types ................................................ 429
Chart Colors ................................................ 429
Database Commands Used by the Monitoring Agent .......................... 430
12.7 Supported Browsers ............................................ 431
12.8 Advanced Options for MongoDB Deployments ............................. 431
Overview ................................................. 431
Advanced Options ............................................. 431
12.9 Automation Configuration ........................................ 432
Overview ................................................. 433
Fields ................................................... 433
12.10Supported MongoDB Options for Automation .............................. 445
Overview ................................................. 445
MongoDB 2.6 and Later Configuration Options ............................. 445
MongoDB 2.4 and Earlier Configuration Options ............................ 447
13 Release Notes 448
13.1 Ops Manager Server Changelog ..................................... 448
Ops Manager Server 1.6.4 ........................................ 448
Ops Manager Server 1.6.3 ........................................ 448
Ops Manager Server 1.6.2 ........................................ 448
Ops Manager Server 1.6.1 ........................................ 449
Ops Manager Server 1.6.0 ........................................ 449
MMS Onprem Server 1.5.5 ........................................ 450
MMS Onprem Server 1.5.4 ........................................ 450
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.3 ........................................ 451
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.2 ........................................ 451
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.1 ........................................ 451
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.0 ........................................ 451
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.3 ........................................ 452
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.2 ...................................... 453
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.1 ...................................... 453
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.0 ...................................... 453
MMS OnPrem Server 1.3.0 ...................................... 453
MMS OnPrem Server 1.2.0 ...................................... 454
13.2 Automation Agent Changelog ...................................... 454
Automation Agent 1.4.18.1199-1 .................................. 454
Automation Agent 1.4.16.1075 ................................... 454
Automation Agent 1.4.15.999 .................................... 454
Automation Agent 1.4.14.983 .................................... 454
13.3 Monitoring Agent Changelog ....................................... 455
Monitoring Agent 2.9.2.184 ..................................... 455
Monitoring Agent 2.9.1.176 ..................................... 455
Monitoring Agent 2.4.2.113 ..................................... 455
Monitoring Agent 2.3.1.89-1 .................................... 455
10
Monitoring Agent 2.1.4.51-1 .................................... 456
Monitoring Agent 2.1.3.48-1 .................................... 456
Monitoring Agent 2.1.1.41-1 .................................... 456
Monitoring Agent 1.6.6 ........................................ 456
13.4 Backup Agent Changelog ......................................... 456
Backup Agent 3.1.2.274 ....................................... 456
Backup Agent 3.1.1.263 ....................................... 456
Backup Agent 2.3.3.209-1 ...................................... 457
Backup Agent 2.3.1.160 ....................................... 457
Backup Agent 1.5.1.83-1 ...................................... 457
Backup Agent 1.5.0.57-1 ...................................... 457
Backup Agent 1.4.6.42-1 ...................................... 457
Ops Manager is a package for managing MongoDB deployments. Ops Manager provides Ops Manager Monitoring
and Ops Manager Backup, which helps users optimize clusters and mitigate operational risk.
You can also download a PDF edition of the Ops Manager Manual.
Introduction Describes Ops Manager components and provides steps to install a test deployment.
Install Ops Manager Install Ops Manager.
Create New Deployments Set up servers and create MongoDB deployments.
Import Existing Deployments Import your existing MongoDB deployments to Ops Manager.
Manage Deployments Monitor, update, and manage your deployments.
Back Up Deployments Initiate and restore backups.
Security Describes Ops Manager security features.
Administration Configure and manage Ops Manager.
API Manage Ops Manager through the API.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting advice for common issues.
Frequently Asked Questions Common questions about the operation and use of Ops Manager.
Reference Reference material for Ops Manager components and operations.
Release Notes Changelogs and notes on Ops Manager releases.
1 Ops Manager Introduction
Functional Overview Describes Ops Manager services and operations.
Ops Manager Components Describes Ops Manager components.
Install a Simple Test Ops Manager Set up a simple test installation in minutes.
1.1 Functional Overview
On this page
•Overview
•Monitoring
11
•Automation
•Backup
Overview
MongoDB Ops Manager is a service for managing, monitoring and backing up a MongoDB infrastructure. Ops
Manager provides the services described here.
Monitoring
Ops Manager Monitoring provides real-time reporting, visualization, and alerting on key database and hardware indi-
cators.
How it Works: A lightweight Monitoring Agent runs within your infrastructure and collects statistics from the nodes
in your MongoDB deployment. The agent transmits database statistics back to Ops Manager to provide real-time
reporting. You can set alerts on indicators you choose.
Automation
Ops Manager Automation provides an interface for configuring MongoDB nodes and clusters and for upgrading your
MongoDB deployment.
How it Works: Automation Agents on each server maintain your deployments. The Automation Agent also maintains
the Monitoring and Backup agents and starts, restarts, and upgrades the agents as needed.
Automation allows only one agent of each type per machine and will remove additional agents. For example, when
maintaining Backup Agents, automation will remove a Backup Agent from a machine that has two Backup Agents.
Backup
Ops Manager Backup provides scheduled snapshots and point-in-time recovery of your MongoDB replica sets and
sharded clusters.
12
How it Works: A lightweight Backup Agent runs within your infrastructure and backs up data from the MongoDB
processes you have specified.
Data Backup
When you start Backup for a MongoDB deployment, the agent performs an initial sync of the deployment’s data as
if it were creating a new, “invisible” member of a replica set. For a sharded cluster the agent performs a sync of
each shard’s primary and of each config server. The agent ships initial sync and oplog data over HTTPS back to Ops
Manager.
The Backup Agent then tails each replica set’s oplog to maintain on disk a standalone database, called a head database.
Ops Manager maintains one head database for each backed-up replica set. The head database is consistent with the
original primary up to the last oplog supplied by the agent.
Backup performs the initial sync and the tailing of the oplog using standard MongoDB queries. The production replica
set is not aware of the copy of the backup data.
Backup uses a mongod with a version equal to or greater than the version of the replica set it backs up.
Backup takes and stores snapshots based on a user-defined snapshot retention policy. Sharded clusters snapshots
temporarily stop the balancer via the mongos so that they can insert a marker token into all shards and config servers
in the cluster. Ops Manager takes a snapshot when the marker tokens appear in the backup data.
Compression and block-level de-duplication technology reduce snapshot data size. The snapshot only stores the
differences between successive snapshots. Snapshots use only a fraction of the disk space required for full snapshots.
Data Restoration
Ops Manager Backup lets you restore data from a scheduled snapshot or from a selected point between snapshots. For
sharded clusters you can restore from checkpoints between snapshots. For replica sets, you can restore from selected
points in time.
When you restore from a snapshot, Ops Manager reads directly from the Backup Blockstore database and transfers
files either through an HTTPS download link or by sending them via HTTPS or SCP.
When you restore from checkpoint or point in time, Ops Manager first creates a local restore of a snapshot from the
blockstore and then applies stored oplogs until the specified point is reached. Ops Manager delivers the backup via
the same HTTPS or SCP mechanisms.
The amount of oplog to keep per backup is configurable and affects the time window available for checkpoint and
point-in-time restores.
1.2 Ops Manager Components
On this page
•Network Diagram
•Ops Manager Application
•Backup Daemon
•Dedicated MongoDB Databases for Operational Data
13
An Ops Manager installation consists of the Ops Manager Application and optional Backup Daemon. Each package
also requires a dedicated MongoDB database to hold operational data.
Network Diagram
Ops Manager Application
The front-end Ops Manager Application contains the UI the end user interacts with, as well as HTTPS services used
by the Monitoring Agent and Backup Agent to transmit data to and from Ops Manager. All three components start
automatically when the Ops Manager Application starts. These components are stateless. Multiple instances of the
front-end package can run as long as each instance has the same configuration. Users and agents can interact with any
instance.
For Monitoring, you only need to install the application package. The application package consists of the following
components:
•Ops Manager HTTP Service
•Backup HTTP Service
•Backup Alert Service
14
Ops Manager HTTP Service
The HTTP server runs on port 8080 by default. This component contains the web interface for managing Ops
Manager users, monitoring of MongoDB servers, and managing those server’s backups. Users can sign up, create new
accounts and groups, as well as join an existing group.
Backup HTTP Service
The HTTP server runs on port 8081 by default. The Backup HTTP Service contains a set of web services used by
the Backup Agent. The agent retrieves its configuration from this service. The agent also sends back initial sync and
oplog data through this interface. There is no user interaction with this service. The Backup HTTP service runs on
port 8081 by default.
The Backup HTTP Service exposes an endpoint that reports on the state of the service and the underlying database
to support monitoring of the Backup service. This status also checks the connections from the service to the Ops
Manager Application Database and the Backup Blockstore Database. See Backup HTTP Service Endpoint.
Backup Alert Service
The Backup Alert Service watches the state of all agents, local copies of backed up databases, and snapshots. It sends
email alerts as problems occur. The Backup Alert Service exposes a health-check endpoint. See Backup Alert Service
Endpoint.
Backup Daemon
The Backup Daemon manages both the local copies of the backed-up databases and each backup’s snapshots. The
daemon does scheduled work based on data coming in to the Backup HTTP Service from the Backup Agents. No
client applications talk directly to the daemon. Its state and job queues come from the Ops Manager Application
Database.
The Backup Daemon’s local copy of a backed-up deployment is called the head database. The daemon stores all its
head databases in its rootDirectory path. To create each head database, the daemon’s server acts as though it
were an “invisible” secondary for each replica set designated for backup.
If you run multiple Backup Daemons, Ops Manager selects the Backup Daemon to use when a user enables backup
for a deployment. The local copy of the deployment resides with that daemon’s server.
The daemon will take scheduled snapshots and store the snapshots in the Backup Blockstore database. It will also act
on restore requests by retrieving data from the Blockstore and delivering it to the requested destination.
Multiple Backup Daemons can increase your storage by scaling horizontally and can provide manual failover.
The Backup Daemon exposes a health-check endpoint. See Backup Daemon Endpoint.
Dedicated MongoDB Databases for Operational Data
Ops Manager uses dedicated MongoDB databases to store the Ops Manager Application’s monitoring data and the
Backup Daemon’s snapshots. To ensure redundancy and high availability, the backing databases run as replica sets.
The replica sets host only Ops Manager data. You must set up the backing replica sets before installing Ops Manager.
15
Ops Manager Application Database
This database contains application metadata used by the Ops Manager Application. The database stores:
• Monitoring data collected from Monitoring Agents.
• Metadata for Ops Manager users, groups, hosts, monitoring data, and backup state.
For topology and specifications, see Ops Manager Application Database Hardware.
Backup Blockstore Database
This database contains all snapshots of databases backed up and oplogs retained for point in time restores. The Backup
Blockstore database requires disk space proportional to the backed-up databases.
Configure the Blockstore as a replica set to provide durability and automatic failover to the backup and restore com-
ponents. The replica set must have at least three members that hold data.
You cannot back up the Blockstore database with Ops Manager Backup. To back up Ops Manager Backup, see Back
Up Ops Manager.
For additional specifications, see Ops Manager Backup Blockstore Database Hardware.
1.3 Install a Simple Test Ops Manager Installation
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
To evaluate Ops Manager, you can quickly create a test installation by installing the Ops Manager Application and
Ops Manager Application Database on a single server. This setup provides all the functionality of Ops Manager
monitoring and automation but provides no failover or high availability. This is not a production setup.
Unlike a production installation, the simple test installation uses only one mongod for the Ops Manager Application
database. In production, the database requires a dedicated replica set.
This procedure includes optional instructions to install Ops Manager Backup, in which case you would install the
Backup Daemon and Backup Blockstore database on the same server as the other Ops Manager components. The
Backup Blockstore database uses only one mongod and not a dedicated replica set, as it would in production.
This procedure installs the test deployment on servers running either RHEL 6+ or Amazon Linux.
Procedure
Warning: This setup is not suitable for a production deployment.
To install Ops Manager for evaluation:
16
Step 1: Set up a RHEL 6+ or Amazon Linux server that meets the following requirements:
• The server must have 15 GB of memory and 50 GB of disk space for the root partition. You can meet the size
requirements by using an Amazon Web Services EC2 m3.xlarge instance and changing the size of the root
partition from 8 GB to 50 GB. When you log into the instance, execute “df -h” to verify the root partition has
50 GB of space.
• You must have root access to the server.
Step 2: Configure the yum package management system to install the latest stable release of Mon-
goDB.
Issue the following command to set up a yum repository definition:
echo "[MongoDB]
name=MongoDB Repository
baseurl=http://downloads-distro.mongodb.org/repo/redhat/os/x86_64
gpgcheck=0
enabled=1" | sudo tee /etc/yum.repos.d/mongodb.repo
Step 3: Install MongoDB.
Issue the following command to install the latest stable release of MongoDB:
sudo yum install -y mongodb-org mongodb-org-shell
Step 4: Create the data directory for the Ops Manager Application database.
Issue the following two commands to create the data directory and change its ownership:
sudo mkdir -p /data/db
sudo chown -R mongod:mongod /data
OPTIONAL: To also install the Backup feature, issue following additional commands for the Backup Blockstore
database:
sudo mkdir -p /data/backup
sudo chown mongod:mongod /data/backup
Step 5: Start the MongoDB backing instance for the Ops Manager Application database.
Issue the following command to start MongoDB as the mongod user. Start MongoDB on port 27017 and specify
the /data/db for both data files and logs. Include the --fork option to run the process in the background and
maintain control of the terminal.
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27017 --dbpath /data/db --logpath /data/db/mongodb.log --
˓→fork
OPTIONAL: To also install the Backup feature, issue following command to start a MongoDB instance similar to the
other but on port 27018 and with the data directory and log path of the Backup Blockstore database:
17
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27018 --dbpath /data/backup --logpath /data/backup/
˓→mongodb.log --fork
Step 6: Download the Ops Manager Application package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Fill out and submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the RPM link for Monitoring, Au-
tomation and Core. OPTIONAL: If you will install Backup, copy the link address of the RPM link for Backup
as well.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Ops Manager Application package by issuing a curl command that uses the link address copied
for the RPM for Monitoring, Automation and Core:
curl -OL <link-address-for-monitoring-automation-core-rpm>
OPTIONAL: Download the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command that uses the link address
copied for the Backup RPM:
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-rpm>
Step 7: Install the Ops Manager Application.
Install the Monitoring, Automation and Core RPM package that you downloaded. Issue the rpm --install com-
mand with root privileges and specify the package name:
sudo rpm --install <rpm-package-for-monitoring-automation-core>
OPTIONAL: To also install Backup, issue the rpm --install command with root privileges and specify the
Backup RPM package:
sudo rpm --install <rpm-package-for-backup>
Step 8: Get your server’s public IP address.
If you are using an EC2 instance, this is available on the instance’s Description tab.
Alternately, you can get the public IP address by issuing the following:
curl -s http://whatismijnip.nl |cut -d ""-f 5
18
Step 9: Configure the Ops Manager Application.
Edit /opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties with root privileges and set the following options.
For detailed information on each option, see Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Set mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl as follows, where <ip_address> is the IP address of
the server running the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl=http://<ip_address>:8080
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://<ip_address>:8081
Set the following Email Address Settings as appropriate. You can use the same email address throughout, or specify a
different address for each field.
mms.fromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.replyToEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.bounceEmailAddr=<email_address>
Set the mongo.mongoUri option to the port hosting the Ops Manager Application database:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://localhost:27017
OPTIONAL: If you installed the Backup Daemon, edit /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/
conf-daemon.properties with root privileges and set the mongo.mongoUri value to the port hosting the
Ops Manager Application database:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://localhost:27017
Step 10: Start the Ops Manager Application.
To start the Ops Manager Application, issue the following:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
OPTIONAL: To start the Backup Daemon, issue the following:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
Step 11: Open the Ops Manager home page.
In a browser, enter the following URL, where <ip_address> is the IP address of the server:
http://<ip_address>:8080
Step 12: To begin testing Ops Manager, click Register and follow the prompts to create the first user
and group.
The first user receives Global Owner permissions for the test install.
19
Step 13: At the Welcome page, follow the prompts to set up Automation or Monitoring.
Automation lets you define a MongoDB deployment through the Ops Manager interface and rely on the Automation
Agent to construct the deployment. If you select Automation, Ops Manager prompts you to download the Automation
Agent and Monitoring Agent to the server.
Monitoring lets you manage a MongoDB deployment through the Ops Manager interface. If you select Monitoring,
Ops Manager prompts you to download only the Monitoring Agent to the server.
OPTIONAL: If you installed the Backup Daemon, do the following to enable Backup: click the Admin link
in at the top right of the Ops Manager page and click the Backup tab. In the <hostname>:<port> field, enter
localhost:27018 and click Save.
2 Install Ops Manager
Installation Checklist Prepare for your installation.
Example Installation Diagrams Provides diagrams of Ops Manager deployments.
Hardware and Software Requirements Describes the hardware and software requirements for the servers that run the
Ops Manager components, including the servers that run the backing MongoDB replica sets.
Deploy Application and Backup Databases Set up the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Database.
Install Ops Manager Operating-system specific instructions for installing the Ops Manager Application and the
Backup Daemon.
Upgrade Ops Manager Operating-system specific instructions for upgrading the Ops Manager Application and the
Backup Daemon.
Configure Offline Binary Access Configure local mode for an installation that uses Automation but has no internet
access for downloading the MongoDB binaries.
Configure High Availability Configure the Ops Manager application and components to be highly available.
Configure Backup Jobs and Storage Manage and control the jobs used by the Backup system to create snapshots.
Test Ops Manager Monitoring Set up a replica set for testing Ops Manager Monitoring.
2.1 Installation Checklist
On this page
•Overview
•Topology Decisions
•Security Decisions
•Backup Decisions
Overview
You must make the following decisions before you install Ops Manager. During the install procedures you will make
choices based on your decisions here.
20
If you have not yet read the Ops Manager Components page, please do so for a description of the system’s components.
The sequence for installing Ops Manager is to:
• Plan your installation according to the questions on this page.
• Provision servers that meet the Hardware and Software Requirements
• Set up the Ops Manager Application Database and optional Backup Database.
• Install the Ops Manager Application and optional Backup Daemon.
Note: To install a simple evaluation deployment on a single server, see Install a Simple Test Ops Manager Installation.
Topology Decisions
Do you require durability and/or high availability?
Ops Manager stores application metadata and snapshots in the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup
Database respectively. To provide data durability, run each database as a three-member replica set on multiple servers.
To provide high availability for write operations to the databases, set up each replica set so that all three members hold
data. This way, if a member is unreachable the replica set can still write data. Ops Manager uses w:2 write concern,
which requires acknowledgement from the primary and one secondary for each write operation.
To provide high availability for the Ops Manager Application, run at least two instances of the application and use a
load balancer. For more information, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
The following tables describe the pros and cons for each combination of durability and high availability.
Non-Durable, Test Install
This is a non-durable install that runs on one server. If you lose the server, you must start over from scratch.
Pros: Needs only needs one server.
Cons: If you lose the server, you lose everything: users and groups, metadata, backups, automation
configurations, stored monitoring metrics, etc.
Durable Production Install
This install runs on at least three servers and provides durability for your metadata and snapshots. The replica sets for
the Ops Manager Application Database and the Backup Database are each made up of two data-bearing members and
an arbiter. This installation does not provide high availability.
21
Pros: Can run on as few as three servers. Ops Manager metadata and backups are durable from the
perspective of the Ops Manager Application.
Cons: No high availability, neither for the databases nor the application:
1. If the Ops Manager Application Database or the Backup Database loses a data-bearing
member, the data is durable but you must restart the member to gain back full Ops Manager
functionality. For the Backup Database, Ops Manager will not write new snapshots until
the member is again running.
2. Loss of the Ops Manager Application requires you to manually start a new Ops Manager
Application. No Ops Manager functionality is available while the application is down.
Durable Production Install with Highly Available Backup and Application Data
This install requires at least three servers. The replica sets for the Ops Manager Application Database and the Backup
Database each comprise at least three data-bearing members. This requires more storage and memory than for the
Durable Production Install.
Pros: You can lose a member of the Ops Manager Application Database or Backup Database and still
maintain Ops Manager availability. No Ops Manager functionality is lost while the member is
down.
Cons: Loss of the Ops Manager Application requires you to manually start a new Ops Manager Appli-
cation. No Ops Manager functionality is available while the application is down.
Durable Production Install with a Highly Available Ops Manager Application
This runs multiple Ops Manager Applications behind a load balancer and requires infrastructure outside of what Ops
Manager offers. For details, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
Pros: Ops Manager continues to be available even when any individual server is lost.
Cons: Requires a larger number of servers, and requires a load balancer capable of routing traffic to
available application servers.
Will you deploy managed MongoDB instances on servers that have no internet access?
If you use Automation and if the servers where you will deploy MongoDB do not have internet access, then you must
configure Ops Manager to locally store and share the binaries used to deploy MongoDB so that the Automation agents
can download them directly from Ops Manager.
You must configure local mode and store the binaries before you create the first managed MongoDB deployment from
Ops Manager. For more information, see Configure Local Mode if Ops Manager has No Internet Access.
Will you use a proxy for the Ops Manager application’s outbound network connections?
If Ops Manager will use a proxy server to access external services, you must configure the proxy settings in Ops
Manager’s conf-mms.properties configuration file. If you have already started Ops Manager, you must restart
after configuring the proxy settings.
22
Security Decisions
Will you use authentication and/or SSL for the connections to the backing databases?
If you will use authentication or SSL for connections to the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Database,
you must configure those options on each database when deploying the database and then you must configure Ops
Manager with the necessary certificate information for accessing the databases. For details, see Configure the Connec-
tions to the Backing MongoDB Instances
Will you use LDAP for user authenticate to Ops Manager?
If you will use LDAP for user management, you must configure LDAP authentication before you register any Ops
Manager user or group. If you have already created an Ops Manager user or group, you must start from scratch with a
fresh Ops Manager install.
During the procedure to install Ops Manager, you are given the option to configure LDAP before creating users or
groups. For details on LDAP authentication, see Configure Users and Groups with LDAP for Ops Manager.
Will you use SSL (HTTPS) for connections to the Ops Manager application?
If you will use SSL for connections to Ops Manager from agents, users, and the API, then you must configure Ops
Manager to use SSL. The procedure to install Ops Manager includes the option to configure SSL access.
Backup Decisions
Will the servers that run your Backup Daemons have internet access?
If the servers that run your Backup Daemons have no internet access, you must configure offline binary access for the
Backup Daemon before running the Daemon. The install procedure includes the option to configure offline binary
access.
Are certain backups required to be in certain data centers?
If you need to assign backups of particular MongoDB deployments to particular data centers, then each data center re-
quires its own Ops Manager Application, Backup Daemon, and Backup Agent. The separate Ops Manager Application
instances must share a single dedicated Ops Manager Application Database. The Backup Agent in each data center
must use the URL for its local Ops Manager Application, which you can configure through either different hostnames
or split-horizon DNS. For detailed requirements, see Configure Multiple Blockstores in Multiple Data Centers.
2.2 Example Installation Diagrams
On this page
•Overview
•Non-Durable, Test Install on a Single Server
•Durable Production Install
23
•Durable, Highly Available Install with Multiple Backup Databases
Overview
The following diagrams show example Ops Manager deployments.
Non-Durable, Test Install on a Single Server
For a test deployment, you can deploy all of the Ops Manager components to a single server, as described in Install a
Simple Test Ops Manager Installation. Ensure you configure the appropriate ulimits for the deployment.
The head databases are dynamically created and maintained by the Backup Daemon. They reside on the disk partition
specified in the conf-daemon.properties file.
Durable Production Install
The basic deployment provides durability in case of failure by keeping a redundant copy of the application data and
snapshots. However, the basic deployment does not provide high availability and cannot accept writes to the backing
databases in the event that a replica set memeber is lost. See Durable, Highly Available Install with Multiple Backup
Databases for a deployment that can continue to accept writes with the loss of a member.
Server 1 must satisfy the combined hardware and software requirements for the Ops Manager Application hardware
and Ops Manager Application Database hardware.
24
Server 2 must satisfy the combined hardware and software requirements for the Backup Daemon hardware and Backup
Blockstore database hardware. The Backup Daemon automatically creates and maintains the head databases. These
databases reside on the disk partition specified in the conf-daemon.properties file. Do not place the head
databases on the same disk partition as the Backup Blockstore database, as this will reduce Backup’s performance.
Server 3 hosts replica set members for the Backup Blockstore and Ops Manager Application databases. Replica sets
provide data redundancy and are strongly recommended, but are not required for Ops Manager. Server 3 must satisfy
the combined hardware and software requirements for the Ops Manager Application database hardware and Backup
Blockstore database hardware.
For an example tutorial on installing the minimally viable Ops Manager installation on RHEL 6+ or Amazon Linux,
see /tutorial/install-basic-deployment.
Durable, Highly Available Install with Multiple Backup Databases
The following is a highly available deployment that you can scale out to add additional Backup Databases.
The deployment includes two servers that host the Ops Manager Application and the Ops Manager Application
Database, four servers that host two Backup deployments, and an additional server to host the arbiters for each replica
set.
Deploy an HTTP Load Balancer to balance the HTTP traffic for the Ops Manager HTTP Service and Backup service.
Ops Manager does not supply an HTTP Load Balancer: you must deploy and configure it yourself.
All of the software services need to be able to communicate with the Ops Manager Application databases, and the
Backup Blockstore databases. Configure your firewalls to allow traffic between these servers on the appropriate ports.
•Server 1 and Server 2 must satisfy the combined hardware and software requirements for the Ops Manager
Application hardware and Ops Manager Application Database hardware.
•Server 3,Server 4,Server 5, and Server 6 must satisfy the combined hardware and software requirements for
the Backup Daemon hardware and Backup Database hardware.
The Backup Daemon creates and maintains the head databases. They reside on the disk partition specified
in the conf-daemon.properties file. Only the Backup Daemon needs to communicate with the head
databases. As such, their net.bindIp value is 127.0.0.1 to prevent external communication. net.
bindIp specifies the IP address that mongod and mongos listens to for connections coming from applications.
25
26
For best performance, each Backup server should have 2 partitions. One for the Backup Blockstore database,
and one for the head databases.
•Server 7 and Server 8 host secondaries for the Ops Manager Application database, and for the two Backup
Blockstore databases. They must satisfy the combined hardware and software requirements for the databases.
To deploy Ops Manager with high availability, see: Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
2.3 Ops Manager Hardware and Software Requirements
On this page
•Hardware Requirements
•EC2 Security Groups
•Software Requirements
This page describes the hardware and software requirements for the servers that run the Ops Manager Components,
including the servers that run the backing MongoDB replica sets.
The servers that run the Backup Daemon and the backing replica sets must also meet the configuration requirements
in the MongoDB Production Notes in addition to the requirements on this page. The Production Notes include infor-
mation on ulimits,NUMA,Transparent Huge Pages (THP), and other configuration options.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
This page also includes requirements for the EC2 security group used when installing on AWS servers.
Hardware Requirements
Each server must meet the sum of the requirements for all its components.
Ops Manager Monitoring and Automation require servers for the following components:
•Ops Manager Application.
•Ops Manager Application Database replica set members
Note: Usually the Ops Manager Application and one of the Application database’s replica set members run on
the same server.
If you run Backup, Ops Manager also requires servers for the following:
•Backup Daemon
•Backup Blockstore database replica set members
Note: The following requirements are specific to a given component. You must add together the requirements for the
components you will install. For example, the requirements for the Ops Manager Application do not cover the Ops
Manager Application database.
27
Ops Manager Application Hardware
The Ops Manager Application requires the hardware listed here.
Number of Monitored Hosts CPU Cores RAM
Up to 400 monitored hosts 4+ 15 GB
Up to 2000 monitored hosts 8+ 15 GB
More than 2000 hosts Contact MongoDB Account Manager Contact MongoDB Account Manager
Ops Manager Application Database Hardware
The Ops Manager Application Database holds monitoring and other metadata for the Ops Manager Application.
The database runs as a three-member replica set. If you cannot allocate space for three data-bearing members, the third
member can be an arbiter, but keep in mind that Ops Manager uses w:2 write concern, which reports a write operation
as successful after acknowledgement from the primary and one secondary. If you use a replica set with fewer than 3
data-bearing members, and if you lose one of the data-bearing members, MongoDB blocks write operations, meaning
the Ops Manager Application Database has durability but not high availability.
Run the replica set on dedicated servers. You can optionally run one member of the replica set on the same physical
server as the Ops Manager Application.
For a test deployment, you can use a MongoDB standalone in place of a replica set.
Each server that hosts a MongoDB process for the Ops Manager Application database must comply with the Pro-
duction Notes in the MongoDB manual. The Production Notes include important information on ulimits,NUMA,
Transparent Huge Pages (THP), and other configuration options.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Each server also requires the following:
Number of Moni-
tored Hosts
RAM Disk Space
Up to 400 monitored
hosts
8 GB additional RAM beyond the RAM required for the
Ops Manager Application
200 GB of storage space
Up to 2000 monitored
hosts
15 GB additional RAM beyond the RAM required for the
Ops Manager Application
500 GB of storage space
More than 2000 hosts Contact MongoDB account manager Contact MongoDB ac-
count manager
For the best results use SSD-backed storage.
Ops Manager Backup Daemon Hardware
The Backup Daemon server must meet the requirements in the table below and also must meet the configuration
requirements in the MongoDB Production Notes. The Production Notes include information on ulimits,NUMA,
Transparent Huge Pages (THP), and other options.
28
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
If you wish to install the Backup Daemon on the same physical server as the Ops Manager Application, the server
must satisfy these requirements separately from the requirements in Ops Manager Application Hardware.
The server running the Backup Daemon acts like a hidden secondary for every replica set assigned to it, receiving the
streamed oplog entries each replica set’s primary. However, the Backup Daemon differs from a hidden secondary in
that the replica set is not aware of it.
The server must have the disk space and write capacity to maintain the replica sets plus the space to store an additional
copy of the data to support point-in-time restore. Typically, the Backup Daemon must be able to store 2 to 2.5 times the
sum of the size on disk of all the backed-up replica sets, as it also needs space locally to build point-in-time restores.
Before installing the Backup Daemon, we recommend contacting your MongoDB Account Manager for assistance in
estimating the storage requirements for your Backup Daemon server.
Number of Hosts CPU Cores RAM Disk Space Storage IOPS/s
Up to 200 hosts 4+ 2Ghz+ 15 GB
additional
RAM
Contact MongoDB
Account Manager
Contact MongoDB
Account Manager
Ops Manager Backup Blockstore Database Hardware
Blockstore servers store snapshots of MongoDB deployments. Only provision Blockstore servers if you are deploying
Ops Manager Backup.
Replica Set for the Blockstore Database
Backup requires a separate, dedicated MongoDB replica set to hold snapshot data. This cannot be a replica set used
for any purpose other than holding the snapshots.
For durability, the replica set must have at least two data-bearing members. For high availability the replica set must
have at least three data-bearing members.
Note: Ops Manager uses w:2 write concern, which reports a write operation as successful after acknowledgement
from the primary and one secondary. If you use a replica set with two data-bearing members and an arbiter, and you
lose one of the data-bearing members, write operations will be blocked.
For testing only you may use a standalone MongoDB deployment in place of a replica set.
Server Size for the Blockstore Database
Snapshots are compressed and de-duplicated at the block level in the Blockstore database. Typically, depending on
data compressibility and change rate, the replica set must run on servers with enough capacity to store 2 to 3 times the
total backed-up production data size.
Contact your MongoDB Account Manager for assistance in estimating the use-case and workload-dependent storage
requirements for your Blockstore servers.
29
Configuration Requirements from the MongoDB Production Notes
Each server that hosts a MongoDB process for the Blockstore database must comply with the Production Notes in the
MongoDB manual. The Production Notes include important information on ulimits,NUMA,Transparent Huge Pages
(THP), and other configuration options.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Other Requirements for the Blockstore Databsase
For each data-bearing member of the replica set member
CPU
Cores
RAM Disk Space Storage IOPS
4 x
2ghz+
8 GB of RAM for every 1 TB disk of Blockstore to
provide good snapshot and restore speed. Ops Man-
ager defines 1 TB of Blockstore as 10244bytes.
Contact your
MongoDB
Account
Manager.
Medium grade HDDs should
have enough I/O throughput to
handle the load of the Block-
store.
EC2 Security Groups
If you install on AWS servers, you must have at least one EC2 security group configured with the following inbound
rules:
• An SSH rule on the ssh port, usually port 22, that allows traffic from all IPs. This is to provide administrative
access.
• A custom TCP rule that allows connection on ports 8080 and 8081 on the server that runs the Ops Manager
Application. This lets users connect to Ops Manager.
• A custom TCP rule that allows traffic on all MongoDB ports from any member of the security group. This
allows communication between the various Ops Manager components. MongoDB usually uses ports between
27000 and 28000.
Software Requirements
Operating System
The Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon(s) can run on 64-bit versions of the following operating systems:
• CentOS 5 or later
• Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 or later
• SUSE 11 or Later
• Amazon Linux AMI (latest version only)
• Ubuntu 12.04 or later
• Windows Server 2008 R2 or later
30
Warning: Ops Manager supports Monitoring and Backup on Windows but does not support Automation
on Windows.
Ulimits
The Ops Manager packages automatically raise the open file, max user processes, and virtual memory ulimits. On Red
Hat, be sure to check for a /etc/security/limits.d/90-nproc.conf file that may override the max user
processes limit. If the /etc/security/limits.d/90-nproc.conf file exists, remove it before continuing.
See MongoDB ulimit Settings for recommended ulimit settings.
Warning: Always refer to the MongoDB Production Notes to ensure healthy server configurations.
Authentication
If you are using LDAP for user authentication to Ops Manager (as described in Configure Users and Groups with
LDAP for Ops Manager), you must enable LDAP before setting up Ops Manager, beyond starting the service.
Important: You cannot enable LDAP once you have opened the Ops Manager user interface and registered the first
user. You can enable LDAP only on a completely blank, no-hosts, no-users installation.
MongoDB
The Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Blockstore Database must run on MongoDB 2.4.9 or later.
Note: Ops Manager 1.8.0, when released, will not support MongoDB 2.4 for the Ops Manager Application database
and Backup Blockstore database.
Your backed-up sharded cluster deployments must run at least MongoDB 2.4.3 or later. Your backed-up replica set
deployments must run at least MongoDB 2.2 or later.
Web Browsers
Ops Manager supports clients using the following browsers:
• Chrome 8 and greater
• Firefox 12 and greater
• IE 9 and greater
• Safari 6 and greater
The Ops Manager Application will display a warning on non-supported browsers.
31
SMTP
Ops Manager requires email for fundamental server functionality such as password reset and alerts.
Many Linux server-oriented distributions include a local SMTP server by default, for example, Postfix, Exim, or
Sendmail. You also may configure Ops Manager to send mail via third party providers, including Gmail and Sendgrid.
SNMP
If your environment includes SNMP, you can configure an SMNP trap receiver with periodic heartbeat traps to monitor
the internal health of Ops Manager. Ops Manager uses SNMP v2c.
For more information, see Configure SNMP Heartbeat Support.
2.4 Deploy Backing MongoDB Replica Sets
On this page
•Overview
•Replica Sets Requirements
•Server Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
Ops Manager uses two dedicated replica sets to store operational data: one replica set to store the Ops Manager Appli-
cation Database and another to store the Backup Blockstore Database. If you use multiple application or blockstore
databases, set up separate replica sets for each database.
The backing MongoDB replica sets are dedicated to operational data and must store no other data.
Replica Sets Requirements
Each replica set that hosts the Ops Manager Application Database or a Backup Database:
• Stores data in support of Ops Manager operations only and stores no other data.
• Must run on a server that meets the server prerequisites below.
• Must run MongoDB 2.4.9 or later.
• Must use the MMAPv1 storage engine.
• Must have the MongoDB security.javascriptEnabled set to true, which is the default. The Ops
Manager Application uses the $where query and requires this setting be enabled on the Ops Manager Appli-
cation database.
• Must not run the MongoDB notablescan option.
32
Server Prerequisites
The servers that run the replica sets must meet the following requirements.
• The hardware requirements described in Ops Manager Application Database Hardware or Ops Manager Backup
Blockstore Database Hardware, depending on which database the server will host. If a server hosts other Ops
Manager components in addition to the database, you must sum the hardware requirements for each component
to determine the requirements for the server.
• The system requirements in the MongoDB Production Notes. The Production Notes include important informa-
tion on ulimits,NUMA,Transparent Huge Pages (THP), and other configuration options.
• The MongoDB ports requirements described in Firewall Configuration. Each server’s firewall rules must allow
access to the required ports.
•RHEL servers only: if the /etc/security/limits.d directory contains the 90-nproc.conf file,
remove the file. The file overrides limits.conf, decreasing ulimit settings. Issue the following command
to remove the file:
sudo rm /etc/security/limits.d/90-nproc.conf
Procedures
Install MongoDB on Each Server
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Use servers that meet the above prerequisites.
The following procedure assumes that you are installing MongoDB on a server running Red Hat Enterprise Linux
(RHEL). If you are installing MongoDB on another Linux operating system, or you prefer to use cURL rather than
yum, refer to the installation guides in the MongoDB manual.
Step 1: Create a repository file on each server by issuing the following command:
echo "[mongodb-org-3.0]
name=MongoDB Repository
baseurl=http://repo.mongodb.org/yum/redhat/\$releasever/mongodb-org/3.0/x86_64/
gpgcheck=0
enabled=1" | sudo tee -a /etc/yum.repos.d/mongodb-org-3.0.repo
Step 2: Install MongoDB on each server by issuing the following command:
sudo yum install -y mongodb-org mongodb-org-shell
Deploy a Backing Replica Set
This procedure deploys a three-member replica set dedicated to store either the Ops Manager Application database or
Backup Blockstore database. Deploy the replica set to three servers that meet the requirements for the database.
33
Repeat this procedure for each backing replica set that your installation requires.
Step 1: Create a data directory on each server.
Create a data directory on each server and set mongod as the directory’s owner. For example:
sudo mkdir -p /data
sudo chown mongod:mongod /data
Step 2: Start each MongoDB process.
For each replica set member, start the mongod process and specify mongod as the user. Start each process on its own
dedicated port and point to the data directory you created in the previous step. Specify the same replica set for all three
members.
The following command starts a MongoDB process as part of a replica set named operations and specifies the
/data directory.
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27017 --dbpath /data --replSet operations --logpath /
˓→data/mongodb.log --fork
Step 3: Connect to the MongoDB process on the server that will initially host the database’s primary.
For example, the following command connects on port 27017 to a MongoDB process running on mongodb1.
example.net:
mongo --host mongodb1.example.net --port 27017
When you connect, the MongoDB shell displays its version as well as the database to which you are connected.
Step 4: Initiate the replica set.
To initiate the replica set, issue the following command:
rs.initiate()
MongoDB returns 1upon successful completion, and creates a replica set with the current mongod as the initial
member.
The server on which you initiate the replica set becomes the initial primary. The mongo shell displays the replica set
member’s state in the prompt.
MongoDB supports automatic failover, so this mongod may not always be the primary.
Step 5: Add the remaining members to the replica set.
In a mongo shell connected to the primary, use the rs.add() method to add the other two replica set members. For ex-
ample, the following adds the mongod instances running on mongodb2.example.net:27017 and mongodb3.
example.net:27017 to the replica set:
34
rs.add(’mongodb2.example.net:27017’)
rs.add(’mongodb3.example.net:27017’)
Step 6: Verify the replica set configuration.
To verify that the configuration includes the three members, issue rs.conf():
rs.conf()
The method returns output similiar to the following.
{
"_id" :"operations",
"version" :3,
"members" :[
{
"_id" :0,
"host" :"mongodb1.example.net:27017"
},
{
"_id" :1,
"host" :"mongodb2.example.net:27017"
},
{
"_id" :2,
"host" :"mongodb3.example.net:27017",
}
]
}
Optionally, run rs.status() </reference/method/rs.status to verify the status of the replica set and see the state of each
replica set member.
For more information on deploying replica sets, see Deploy a Replica Set in the MongoDB manual.
2.5 Install Ops Manager
Install with DEB Packages Install Ops Manager on Debian and Ubuntu systems.
Install with RPM Packages Install Ops Manager on Red Hat, Fedora, CentOS, and Amazon AMI Linux.
Install from Archives on Linux Install Ops Manager on other Linux systems, without using package management.
Install on Windows Install Ops Manager on Windows.
Install Ops Manager with deb Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Install Procedures
35
Overview
To install Ops Manager you install the Ops Manager Application and the optional Backup Daemon. This tutorial
describes how to install both using deb packages. The Ops Manager Application monitors MongoDB deployments,
and the Backup Daemon creates and stores deployment snapshots.
If you are instead upgrading an existing deployment, please see Upgrade Ops Manager.
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
Prerequisites
Deploy Servers
Prior to installation, you must set up servers for the entire Ops Manager deployment, including the Ops Manager
Application, the optional Backup Daemon, and the backing replica sets. For deployment diagrams, see Example
Installation Diagrams.
Deploy servers that meet the hardware requirements described in Ops Manager Hardware and Software Requirements.
Servers for the Backup Daemon and the backing replica sets must also comply with the Production Notes in the
MongoDB manual. Configure as many servers as needed for your deployment.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Deploy MongoDB
Install MongoDB on the servers that will store the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Blockstore
Database. The Backup Blockstore database is required only if you run the Backup Daemon. The databases require
dedicated MongoDB instances. Do not use MongoDB installations that store other data.
Install separate MongoDB instances for the two databases and install the instances as replica sets. Ensure that firewall
rules on the servers allow access to the ports that the instances runs on.
The Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon must authenticate to their databases as a MongoDB user with
appropriate access. The user must have the following roles:
•readWriteAnyDatabase
•dbAdminAnyDatabase.
•clusterAdmin if the database is a sharded cluster, otherwise clusterMonitor
36
Install Procedures
You must have administrative access on the machines to which you install.
Install and Start the Ops Manager Application
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Ops Manager Application package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Monitoring, Automation and
Core” DEB link.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Ops Manager Application package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-monitoring-automation-core-deb>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.deb, where <version> is the
version number.
Step 2: Install the Ops Manager Application package.
Install the .deb package by issuing the following command, where <version> is the version of the .deb package:
sudo dpkg --install mongodb-mms_<version>_x86_64.deb
When installed, the base directory for the Ops Manager software is /opt/mongodb/mms/. The .deb package
creates a new system user mongodb-mms under which the server will run.
Step 3: Configure Monitoring.
Open <install-directory>/conf/conf-mms.properties with root privileges and set values for the set-
tings described in this step. For detailed information on each setting, see the Ops Manager Configuration Files page.
Set mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl as follows, where <host> is the fully qualified domain
name of the server running the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl=http://<host>:8080
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://<host>:8081
Set the following Email Address Settings as appropriate. Each may be the same or different.
37
mms.fromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.replyToEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.bounceEmailAddr=<email_address>
Set mongo.mongoUri to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
If you use HTTPS to encrypt user connections to Ops Manager, set mms.https.PEMKeyFile to a PEM file
containing an X509 certificate and private key, and set mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword to the password for
the certificate. For example:
mms.https.PEMKeyFile=<path_and_name_of_pem_file>
mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword=<password_for_pem_file>
To configure authentication, email, and other optional settings, see Ops Manager Configuration Files. To run the Ops
Manager application in a highly available configuration, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
Step 4: Start the Ops Manager Application.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
Step 5: Open the Ops Manager home page and register the first user.
To open the home page, enter the following URL in a browser, where <host> is the fully qualified domain name of
the server:
http://<host>:8080
Click the Register link and follow the prompts to register the first user and create the first group. The first user is
automatically assigned the Global Owner role. When you finish, you are logged into the Ops Manager Application as
the new user. For more information on creating and managing users, see Manage Ops Manager Users.
Step 6: At the Welcome page, follow the prompts to set up Automation (which includes Monitoring)
or just Monitoring alone.
Automation lets you deploy and configure MongoDB processes from Ops Manager as well as monitor and manage
them. If you select Automation, Ops Manager prompts you to download the Automation Agent and Monitoring Agent.
Monitoring lets you manage a MongoDB deployment from Ops Manager. If you select Monitoring, Ops Manager
prompts you to download only the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Backup Daemon (Optional)
If you use Backup, install the Backup Daemon.
38
Step 1: Download the Backup Daemon package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Backup” DEB link.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-deb-package>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-backup-daemon-<version>.x86_64.deb, where
<version> is replaced by the version number.
Step 2: Install the Backup Daemon package.
Issue dpkg --install with root privileges and specify the name of the downloaded package:
sudo dpkg --install <downloaded-package>
When installed, the base directory for the Ops Manager software is /opt/mongodb/mms/. The .deb package
creates a new system user mongodb-mms under which the server will run.
Step 3: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/conf-daemon.properties file with root privi-
leges and set the mongo.mongoUri value to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database.
For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Step 4: Synchronize the gen.key file
Synchronize the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file from an Ops Manager Application server. This is only re-
quired if the Backup Daemon was installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 5: Start the back-end software package.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If everything worked the following displays:
39
Start Backup Daemon [OK ]
If you run into any problems, the log files are at /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/logs.
Step 6: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
Step 7: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Install Ops Manager with rpm Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Install Procedures
Overview
To install Ops Manager you install the Ops Manager Application and the optional Backup Daemon. This tutorial
describes how to install both using rpm packages. The Ops Manager Application monitors MongoDB deployments,
and the Backup Daemon creates and stores deployment snapshots.
If you are instead upgrading an existing deployment, please see Upgrade Ops Manager.
40
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
Prerequisites
Deploy Servers
Prior to installation, you must set up servers for the entire Ops Manager deployment, including the Ops Manager
Application, the optional Backup Daemon, and the backing replica sets. For deployment diagrams, see Example
Installation Diagrams.
Deploy servers that meet the hardware requirements described in Ops Manager Hardware and Software Requirements.
Servers for the Backup Daemon and the backing replica sets must also comply with the Production Notes in the
MongoDB manual. Configure as many servers as needed for your deployment.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Deploy MongoDB
Install MongoDB on the servers that will store the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Blockstore
Database. The Backup Blockstore database is required only if you run the Backup Daemon. The databases require
dedicated MongoDB instances. Do not use MongoDB installations that store other data.
Install separate MongoDB instances for the two databases and install the instances as replica sets. Ensure that firewall
rules on the servers allow access to the ports that the instances runs on.
The Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon must authenticate to their databases as a MongoDB user with
appropriate access. The user must have the following roles:
•readWriteAnyDatabase
•dbAdminAnyDatabase.
•clusterAdmin if the database is a sharded cluster, otherwise clusterMonitor
Install Procedures
You must have administrative access on the machines to which you install.
41
Install and Start the Ops Manager Application
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Ops Manager Application package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation for production installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Monitoring, Automation and
Core” RPM link.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Ops Manager Application package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-monitoring-automation-core-rpm>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.rpm, where <version> is the
version number.
Step 2: Install the Ops Manager Application package.
Install the .rpm package by issuing the following command, where <version> is the version of the .rpm package:
sudo rpm -ivh mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.rpm
When installed, the base directory for the Ops Manager software is /opt/mongodb/mms/. The RPM package
creates a new system user mongodb-mms under which the server runs.
Step 3: Configure Monitoring.
Open <install-directory>/conf/conf-mms.properties with root privileges and set values for the set-
tings described in this step. For detailed information on each setting, see the Ops Manager Configuration Files page.
Set mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl as follows, where <host> is the fully qualified domain
name of the server running the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl=http://<host>:8080
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://<host>:8081
Set the following Email Address Settings as appropriate. Each may be the same or different.
mms.fromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.replyToEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.bounceEmailAddr=<email_address>
Set mongo.mongoUri to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
42
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
If you use HTTPS to encrypt user connections to Ops Manager, set mms.https.PEMKeyFile to a PEM file
containing an X509 certificate and private key, and set mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword to the password for
the certificate. For example:
mms.https.PEMKeyFile=<path_and_name_of_pem_file>
mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword=<password_for_pem_file>
To configure authentication, email, and other optional settings, see Ops Manager Configuration Files. To run the Ops
Manager application in a highly available configuration, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
Step 4: Start the Ops Manager Application.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
Step 5: Open the Ops Manager home page and register the first user.
To open the home page, enter the following URL in a browser, where <host> is the fully qualified domain name of
the server:
http://<host>:8080
Click the Register link and follow the prompts to register the first user and create the first group. The first user is
automatically assigned the Global Owner role. When you finish, you are logged into the Ops Manager Application as
the new user. For more information on creating and managing users, see Manage Ops Manager Users.
Step 6: At the Welcome page, follow the prompts to set up Automation (which includes Monitoring)
or just Monitoring alone.
Automation lets you deploy and configure MongoDB processes from Ops Manager as well as monitor and manage
them. If you select Automation, Ops Manager prompts you to download the Automation Agent and Monitoring Agent.
Monitoring lets you manage a MongoDB deployment from Ops Manager. If you select Monitoring, Ops Manager
prompts you to download only the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Backup Daemon (Optional)
If you use Backup, install the Backup Daemon.
Step 1: Download the Backup Daemon package.
To download the Backup Daemon package:
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
43
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Backup” RPM link.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-rpm>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-backup-daemon-<version>.x86_64.rpm, where
<version> is replaced by the version number.
Step 2: Install the Backup Daemon package.
Issue rpm --install with root privileges and specify the name of the downloaded package:
sudo rpm --install <downloaded-package>
The software is installed to /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon.
Step 3: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/conf-daemon.properties file with root privi-
leges and set the mongo.mongoUri value to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database.
For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Step 4: Synchronize the gen.key file
Synchronize the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file from an Ops Manager Application server. This is only re-
quired if the Backup Daemon was installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 5: Start the back-end software package.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If everything worked the following displays:
Start Backup Daemon [OK ]
If you run into any problems, the log files are at /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/logs.
44
Step 6: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
Step 7: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Install Ops Manager from tar.gz or zip Archives
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Install Procedures
Overview
To install Ops Manager you install the Ops Manager Application and the optional Backup Daemon. This tutorial
describes how to install both using tar.gz or zip packages. The tutorial installs to a Linux OS. The Ops Manager
Application monitors MongoDB deployments, and the Backup Daemon creates and stores deployment snapshots.
If you are instead upgrading an existing deployment, please see Upgrade Ops Manager.
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
45
Prerequisites
Deploy Servers
Prior to installation, you must set up servers for the entire Ops Manager deployment, including the Ops Manager
Application, the optional Backup Daemon, and the backing replica sets. For deployment diagrams, see Example
Installation Diagrams.
Deploy servers that meet the hardware requirements described in Ops Manager Hardware and Software Requirements.
Servers for the Backup Daemon and the backing replica sets must also comply with the Production Notes in the
MongoDB manual. Configure as many servers as needed for your deployment.
Warning: Failure to configure servers according to the MongoDB Production Notes can lead to production
failure.
Deploy MongoDB
Install MongoDB on the servers that will store the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Blockstore
Database. The Backup Blockstore database is required only if you run the Backup Daemon. The databases require
dedicated MongoDB instances. Do not use MongoDB installations that store other data.
Install separate MongoDB instances for the two databases and install the instances as replica sets. Ensure that firewall
rules on the servers allow access to the ports that the instances runs on.
The Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon must authenticate to their databases as a MongoDB user with
appropriate access. The user must have the following roles:
•readWriteAnyDatabase
•dbAdminAnyDatabase.
•clusterAdmin if the database is a sharded cluster, otherwise clusterMonitor
Install Procedures
You must have administrative access on the machines to which you install.
Install and Start the Ops Manager Application
Step 1: Download the Ops Manager Application package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Monitoring, Automation and
Core” TAR.GZ link.
46
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Ops Manager Application package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-monitoring-automation-core-tar.gz>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.tar.gz, where <version>
is the version number.
Step 2: Extract the Ops Manager Application package.
Navigate to the directory to which to install the Ops Manager Application. Extract the archive to that directory:
tar -zxf mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.tar.gz
When complete, Ops Manager is installed.
Step 3: Configure Monitoring.
Open <install-directory>/conf/conf-mms.properties with root privileges and set values for the set-
tings described in this step. For detailed information on each setting, see the Ops Manager Configuration Files page.
Set mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl as follows, where <host> is the fully qualified domain
name of the server running the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl=http://<host>:8080
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://<host>:8081
Set the following Email Address Settings as appropriate. Each may be the same or different.
mms.fromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.replyToEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.bounceEmailAddr=<email_address>
Set mongo.mongoUri to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
If you use HTTPS to encrypt user connections to Ops Manager, set mms.https.PEMKeyFile to a PEM file
containing an X509 certificate and private key, and set mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword to the password for
the certificate. For example:
mms.https.PEMKeyFile=<path_and_name_of_pem_file>
mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword=<password_for_pem_file>
To configure authentication, email, and other optional settings, see Ops Manager Configuration Files. To run the Ops
Manager application in a highly available configuration, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application.
Step 4: Start the Ops Manager Application.
To start Ops Manager, issue the following command:
47
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms start
Step 5: Open the Ops Manager home page and register the first user.
To open the home page, enter the following URL in a browser, where <host> is the fully qualified domain name of
the server:
http://<host>:8080
Click the Register link and follow the prompts to register the first user and create the first group. The first user is
automatically assigned the Global Owner role. When you finish, you are logged into the Ops Manager Application as
the new user. For more information on creating and managing users, see Manage Ops Manager Users.
Step 6: At the Welcome page, follow the prompts to set up Automation (which includes Monitoring)
or just Monitoring alone.
Automation lets you deploy and configure MongoDB processes from Ops Manager as well as monitor and manage
them. If you select Automation, Ops Manager prompts you to download the Automation Agent and Monitoring Agent.
Monitoring lets you manage a MongoDB deployment from Ops Manager. If you select Monitoring, Ops Manager
prompts you to download only the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Backup Daemon (Optional)
If you use Backup, install the Backup Daemon.
Step 1: Download the Backup Daemon package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Backup” TAR.GZ link.
6. Open a system prompt.
7. Download the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command that uses the copied link address:
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-tar.gz>
The downloaded package is named mongodb-mms-backup-daemon-<version>.x86_64.tar.gz,
where <version> is replaced by the version number.
48
Step 2: To install the Backup Daemon, extract the downloaded archive file.
tar -zxf <downloaded-archive-file>
Step 3: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the <install-dir>/conf/conf-daemon.properties file and set the mongo.mongoUri value to
the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Additionally, ensure that the file system that holds the rootDirectory has sufficient space to accommodate the
current snapshots of all backed up instances.
Step 4: Synchronize the mms-gen-key file.
Synchronize the <install-dir>/bin/mms-gen-key file from the Ops Manager Application server. This is
required only if the Backup Daemon is installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 5: Start the Backup Daemon.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If you run into any problems, the log files are at <install_dir>/logs.
Step 6: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
Step 7: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
49
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Install Ops Manager on Windows
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Next Step
Overview
This tutorial describes how to install the Ops Manager Application, which monitors MongoDB deployments, and the
optional Backup Daemon, which creates and stores deployment snapshots. This tutorial installs to Windows servers.
Ops Manager supports Monitoring and Backup on Windows but does not support Automation on Windows.
Prerequisites
Prior to installation you must:
• Configure Windows servers that meet the hardware and software requirements. Configure as many servers as
needed for your deployment. For deployment diagrams, see Example Installation Diagrams.
• Deploy the dedicated MongoDB instances that store the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Block-
store Database. Do not use MongoDB instances that store other data. Ensure that firewall rules allow access to
the ports the instances runs on. See Deploy Backing MongoDB Replica Sets.
• Optionally install an SMTP email server.
Procedures
You must have administrative access on the machines to which you install.
Install and Start the Ops Manager Application
Step 1: Download Monitoring.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
50
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, click the “Monitoring and Core” MSI link.
Step 2: Install the Ops Manager Application.
Right-click on the mongodb-mms-<version>.msi file and select Install. Follow the instructions in the Setup
Wizard.
During setup, the Configuration/Log Folder screen prompts you to specify a folder for configuration and log files. The
installation restricts access to the folder to administrators only.
Step 3: Configure the Ops Manager Application.
In the folder you selected for configuration and log files, navigate to \Server\Config. For example, if you chose
C:\MMSData for configuration and log files, navigate to C:\MMSData\Server\Config.
Open the conf-mms.properties file and configure the required settings below, as well as any additional settings
your deployment uses, such as authentication settings. For descriptions of all settings, see Ops Manager Configuration
Files.
Set mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl as follows, where <host> is the fully qualified domain
name of the server running the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl=http://<host>:8080
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://<host>:8081
Set the following Email Address Settings as appropriate. Each can be the same or different values.
mms.fromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.replyToEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.adminEmailAddr=<email_address>
mms.bounceEmailAddr=<email_address>
Set the mongo.mongoUri option to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For
example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Step 4: Start the MongoDB Ops Manager HTTP Service.
Before starting the service, make sure the MongoDB instances that store the Ops Manager Application Database are
running and that they are reachable from the Ops Manager Application’s host machine. Ensure that firewall rules allow
access to the ports the MongoDB instances runs on.
To start the service, open Control Panel, then System and Security, then Administrative Tools,
and then Services.
In the Services list, right-click on the MongoDB Ops Manager HTTP Service and select Start.
Step 5: If you will also run MMS Backup, start the two Backup services.
In the Services list, right-click on the following services and select Start:
51
•MMS Backup HTTP Service
•MMS Backup Alert Service
Step 6: Open the Ops Manager home page and register the first user.
To open the home page, enter the following URL in a browser, where <host> is the fully qualified domain name of
the server:
http://<host>:8080
Click the Register link and follow the prompts to register the first user and create the first group. The first user is
automatically assigned the Global Owner role. When you finish, you are logged into the Ops Manager Application as
the new user. For more information on creating and managing users, see Manage Ops Manager Users.
Step 7: At the Welcome page, follow the prompts to set up Monitoring.
Ops Manager prompts you to download only the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Backup Daemon (Optional)
If you use Backup, install the Backup Daemon.
Step 1: Download the Backup Daemon package.
1. In a browser, go to http://www.mongodb.com/download.
2. Submit the subscription form.
3. On the MongoDB Enterprise Downloads page, go to the MongoDB Ops Manager section and click the here
link.
4. On the Ops Manager Download page, acknowledge the recommendation to contact MongoDB for production
installs.
5. On the MongoDB Ops Manager Downloads page, copy the link address of the “Backup” MSI link.
Step 2: Install the Backup Daemon.
Right-click on the mongodb-mms-backup-daemon-<version>.msi file and select Install. Follow the in-
structions in the Setup Wizard.
During setup, the Daemon Paths screen prompts you to specify the following folders. The installer will restrict access
to these folders to administrators only:
•Configuration/Log Path. The location of the Backup Daemon’s configuration and log files.
•Backup Data Root Path. The path where the Backup Daemon stores the local copies of the backed-up databases.
This location must have enough storage to hold a full copy of each database being backed up.
•MongoDB Releases Path. The location of the MongoDB software releases required to replicate the backed up
databases. These releases will be downloaded from mongodb.org by default.
52
Step 3: Configure the Backup Daemon.
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
In the folder you selected for storing configuration and log files, navigate to \BackupDaemon\Config. For exam-
ple, if you chose C:\MMSData, navigate to C:\MMSData\BackupDaemon\Config.
Open the conf-daemon.properties file and configure the mongo.mongoUri property to point the Backup
Daemon to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
Step 4: Copy the gen-key file from the Ops Manager Application server to the Backup Daemon
server.
Important: You must copy the file as a whole. Do not open the file and copy its content.
Copy the gen.key file from the C:\MMSData\Secrets folder on the Ops Manager Application server to the
empty C:\MMSData\Secrets folder on the Backup Daemon server.
Step 5: If you have not already done so, start the Backup services on the Ops Manager Application
server.
On the Ops Manager Application server, open Control Panel, then System and Security, then
Administrative Tools, and then Services. Right-click on the following services and select Start:
•MMS Backup HTTP Service
•MMS Backup Alert Service
Step 6: Start the Backup Daemon.
On the Backup Daemon server, open Control Panel, then System and Security, then
Administrative Tools, and then Services. Right-click on the MMS Backup Daemon Service
and select Start.
Step 7: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you registered when installing the Ops Manager Application.
Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup tab.
Step 8: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described here, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database. For test deployments, you can use a standalone MongoDB instance for
the database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
53
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Next Step
Set up security for your Ops Manager servers, Ops Manager agents, and MongoDB deployments.
Note: To set up a deployment for a test environment, see Test Ops Manager Monitoring. The tutorial populates the
replica set with test data, registers a user, and installs the Monitoring and Backup Agents on a client machine in order
to monitor the test replica set.
2.6 Upgrade Ops Manager
Upgrade with DEB Packages Upgrade Ops Manager on Debian and Ubuntu systems.
Upgrade with RPM Packages Upgrade Ops Manager on Red Hat, Fedora, CentOS, and Amazon AMI Linux.
Upgrade from Archives on Linux Upgrade Ops Manager on other Linux systems, without using package manage-
ment.
Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier Upgrade from a version before 1.3.
Upgrade Ops Manager with deb Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Procedures
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
54
Overview
This tutorial describes how to upgrade an existing Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon using deb packages.
Prerequisite
You must have administrative access on the machines on which you perform the upgrade.
You must have the download link available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB. If you do
not have this link, you can access the download page for evaluation at http://www.mongodb.com/download.
Procedures
If your version is earlier than 1.3, please see instead Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier.
Upgrade the Ops Manager Application from Version 1.3 and Later
If you have an existing Ops Manager Application, use the following procedure to upgrade to the latest release. There
are no supported downgrade paths for Ops Manager.
Step 1: Recommended. Take a full backup of the Ops Manager database before beginning the
upgrade procedure.
Step 2: Shut down Ops Manager.
For example:
sudo service mongodb-mms stop
Step 3: If you are running Ops Manager Backup, shutdown the Ops Manager Backup Daemon.
The daemon may be installed on a different server. It is critical that this is also shut down. To shut down, issue a
command similar to the following:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 4: Save a copy of your previous configuration file.
For example:
sudo cp /opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties ~/.
55
Step 5: Upgrade the package.
For example:
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms_<version>_x86_64.deb
Step 6: Edit the new configuration file.
Fill in the new configuration file at /opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties using your old file
as a reference point.
Step 7: Start Ops Manager.
For example:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
Step 8: Update all Monitoring Agents.
See Install Monitoring Agent for more information.
Step 9: Update the Backup Daemon and any Backup Agent, as appropriate.
If you are running Backup, update the Backup Daemon package and any Backup Agent.
See Install Backup Agent for more information.
Upgrade the Backup Daemon
Step 1: Stop the currently running instance.
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Backup Daemon.
Download the new version of the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command with the download link
available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB.
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-deb-package>
Step 3: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/conf-daemon.properties file with root privi-
leges and set the mongo.mongoUri value to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database.
For example:
56
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Step 4: Synchronize the gen.key file
Synchronize the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file from an Ops Manager Application server. This is only re-
quired if the Backup Daemon was installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 5: Start the back-end software package.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If everything worked the following displays:
Start Backup Daemon [OK ]
If you run into any problems, the log files are at /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/logs.
Step 6: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
Step 7: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Upgrade Ops Manager with rpm Packages
On this page
57
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Procedures
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
Overview
This tutorial describes how to upgrade an existing Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon using rpm packages.
Prerequisite
You must have administrative access on the machines on which you perform the upgrade.
You must have the download link available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB. If you do
not have this link, you can access the download page for evaluation at http://www.mongodb.com/download.
Procedures
If your version is earlier than 1.3, please see instead Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier.
Upgrade the Ops Manager Application from Version 1.3 and Later
If you have an existing Ops Manager Application, use the following procedure to upgrade to the latest release. There
are no supported downgrade paths for Ops Manager.
Step 1: Recommended. Take a full backup of the Ops Manager database before beginning the
upgrade procedure.
Step 2: Shut down Ops Manager.
For example:
sudo service mongodb-mms stop
58
Step 3: If you are running Ops Manager Backup, shutdown the Ops Manager Backup Daemon.
The daemon may be installed on a different server. It is critical that this is also shut down. To shut down, issue a
command similar to the following:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 4: Save a copy of your previous configuration file.
For example:
sudo cp /opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties ~/.
Step 5: Upgrade the package.
For example:
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.rpm
Step 6: Move the new version of the configuration file into place.
Move the conf-mms.properties configuration file to the following location:
/opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties
Step 7: Edit the new configuration file.
Fill in the new configuration file at /opt/mongodb/mms/conf/conf-mms.properties using your old file
as a reference point.
Step 8: Start Ops Manager.
For example:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
Step 9: Update all Monitoring Agents.
See Install Monitoring Agent for more information.
Step 10: Update the Backup Daemon and any Backup Agent, as appropriate.
If you are running Backup, update the Backup Daemon package and any Backup Agent.
See Install Backup Agent for more information.
59
Upgrade the Backup Daemon
Step 1: Stop the currently running instance.
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Backup Daemon.
Download the new version of the Backup Daemon package by issuing a curl command with the download link
available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB.
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-rpm>
Step 3: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/conf-daemon.properties file with root privi-
leges and set the mongo.mongoUri value to the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database.
For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
Step 4: Synchronize the gen.key file
Synchronize the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file from an Ops Manager Application server. This is only re-
quired if the Backup Daemon was installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 5: Start the back-end software package.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If everything worked the following displays:
Start Backup Daemon [OK ]
If you run into any problems, the log files are at /opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/logs.
Step 6: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
60
Step 7: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Upgrade Ops Manager from tar.gz or zip Archives
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Procedures
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
Overview
This tutorial describes how to upgrade an existing Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon using tar.gz or zip
files.
Prerequisite
You must have administrative access on the machines on which you perform the upgrade.
You must have the download link available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB. If you do
not have this link, you can access the download page for evaluation at http://www.mongodb.com/download.
61
Procedures
If your version is earlier than 1.3, please see instead Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier.
Upgrade the Ops Manager Application from Version 1.3 and Later
If you have an existing Ops Manager Application, use the following procedure to upgrade to the latest release. There
are no supported downgrade paths for Ops Manager.
To upgrade a tarball installation, backup the configuration file and logs, and then re-install the Ops Manager server.
Important: It is crucial that you back up the existing configuration because the upgrade process will delete existing
data.
In more detail:
Step 1: Shutdown the Ops Manager server and take a backup of your existing configuration and
logs.
For example:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms stop
cp -a <install_dir>/conf ~/mms_conf.backup
cp -a <install_dir>/logs ~/mms_logs.backup
Step 2: If you are running Ops Manager Backup, shutdown the Ops Manager Backup Daemon.
The daemon may be installed on a different server. It is critical that this is also shut down. To shut down, issue a
command similar to the following:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 3: Remove your existing Ops Manager server installation entirely and extract the latest release
in its place.
For example:
cd <install_dir>/../
rm -rf <install_dir>
tar -zxf -C . /path/to/mongodb-mms-<version>.x86_64.tar.gz
Step 4: Compare and reconcile any changes in configuration between versions.
For example:
diff -u ~/mms_conf.backup/conf-mms.properties <install_dir>/conf/conf-mms.properties
diff -u ~/mms_conf.backup/mms.conf <install_dir>/conf/mms.conf
62
Step 5: Edit your configuration to resolve any conflicts between the old and new versions.
Make configuration changes as appropriate. Changes to mms.centralUri, email addresses, and MongoDB are the
most common configuration changes.
Step 6: Restart the Ops Manager server.
For example:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms start
Step 7: Update all Monitoring Agents.
See Install Monitoring Agent for more information.
Step 8: Update the Backup Daemon and any Backup Agent, as appropriate.
If you are running Backup, update the Backup Daemon package and any Backup Agent.
See Install Backup Agent for more information.
Upgrade the Backup Daemon
Step 1: Stop the currently running instance.
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon stop
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Backup Daemon.
Download the new version of the Backup Daemon archive by issuing a curl command with the download link
available on the customer downloads page provided to you by MongoDB.
curl -OL <link-address-for-backup-tar.gz>
Step 3: To install the Backup Daemon, extract the downloaded archive file.
tar -zxf <downloaded-archive-file>
Step 4: Point the Backup Daemon to the Ops Manager Application database.
Open the <install-dir>/conf/conf-daemon.properties file and set the mongo.mongoUri value to
the servers and ports hosting the Ops Manager Application database. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodb1.example.net:27017,mongodb2.example.net:27017,
˓→mongodb3.example.net:27017
63
Additionally, ensure that the file system that holds the rootDirectory has sufficient space to accommodate the
current snapshots of all backed up instances.
Step 5: Synchronize the mms-gen-key file.
Synchronize the <install-dir>/bin/mms-gen-key file from the Ops Manager Application server. This is
required only if the Backup Daemon is installed on a different server than the Ops Manager Application.
Step 6: Start the Backup Daemon.
To start the Backup Daemon run:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon start
If you run into any problems, the log files are at <install_dir>/logs.
Step 7: Open Ops Manager and access the Backup configuration page.
Open the Ops Manager home page and log in as the user you first registered when installing the Ops Manager Appli-
cation. (This user is the global owner.) Then click the Admin link at the top right of the page. Then click the Backup
tab.
Step 8: Enter configuration information for the Backup database.
Enter the configuration information described below, and then click Save. Ops Manager uses this information to create
the connection string URI used to connect to the database.
<hostname>:<port>: Enter a comma-separated list of the fully qualified domain names and port numbers for all
replica set members for the Backup database.
MongoDD Auth Username and MongoDB Auth Password: Enter the user credentials if the database uses authentica-
tion.
Encrypted Credentials: Check this if the user credentials use the Ops Manager credentialstool. For more
information, see Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Use SSL: Check this if the MongoDB database uses SSL. If you select this, you must configure SSL settings for both
the Ops Manager Application and Backup Daemon. See Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Connection Options: To add additional connection options, enter them using the MongoDB Connection String URI
Format.
Upgrade from Version 1.2 and Earlier
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
64
Warning: To use Ops Manager 1.6 Automation to manage MongoDB Enterprise deployments, you must first
install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies to each server that runs MongoDB Enterprise. You must install the
dependencies to the servers before using Automation.
Note that Automation does not yet support use of the MongoDB Enterprise advanced security features (SSL,
LDAP, Kerberos, and auditing). Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
To run MongoDB Enterprise with advanced security now, deploy MongoDB Enterprise manually (not through
Automation) and use Ops Manager only for Monitoring and Backup.
Overview
Because of a company name change, the name of the Ops Manager package changed between versions 1.2 and 1.3.
Therefore, to upgrade from any version before 1.3, use the following procedure:
Procedure
1. Recommended. Take a full backup of the MMS database before beginning the upgrade procedure.
2. Shut down MMS, using the following command:
/etc/init.d/10gen-mms stop
3. Download the latest Ops Manager package from the downloads page and proceed with the instructions for a
fresh install. Do not attempt to use your package manager to do an upgrade.
4. Follow the procedure for a new install, including steps to configure the conf-mms.properties file. If
you used encrypted authentication credentials you will need to regenerate these manually. Do not copy the
credentials from your old properties file. Old credentials will not work.
5. Start Ops Manager using the new package name.
For upgrades using rpm or deb packages, issue:
sudo /etc/init.d/mongodb-mms start
For upgrades using tar.gz or zip archives, issue:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms start
6. Update the Monitoring Agent. See Install Monitoring Agent for more information.
2.7 Configure Local Mode if Ops Manager has No Internet Access
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Required Access
•Procedure
65
Overview
The Automation Agent requires access to MongoDB binaries in order to install MongoDB on new deployments or
change MongoDB versions on existing ones. In a default configuration, the agents access the binaries over the internet
from MongoDB Inc. If you deploy MongoDB on servers that have no internet access, you can run Automation by
configuring Ops Manager to run in “local” mode, in which case the Automation Agents access the binaries from a
directory on the Ops Manager Application server.
Specify the directory in the conf-mms.properties configuration file and then place .tgz archives of the binaries in that
directory. The Automation Agents will use these archives for all MongoDB installs. The “mongodb-mms” user must
possess the permissions to read the .tgz files in the “binaries” directory.
The following shows the ls -l output of the “binaries” directory for an example Ops Manager install that deploys
only the versions of MongoDB listed:
$cd /opt/mongodb/mms/mongodb-releases
$ ls -l
total 355032
-rw-r----- 1mongodb-mms staff 116513825 Apr 27 15:06 mongodb-linux-x86_64-2.6.9.tgz
-rw-r----- 1mongodb-mms staff 50194275 Apr 27 15:05 mongodb-linux-x86_64-3.0.2.tgz
-rw-r----- 1mongodb-mms staff 95800685 Apr 27 15:05 mongodb-linux-x86_64-enterprise-
˓→amzn64-2.6.9.tgz
-rw-r----- 1mongodb-mms staff 50594134 Apr 27 15:04 mongodb-linux-x86_64-enterprise-
˓→amzn64-3.0.2.tgz
-rw-r----- 1mongodb-mms staff 50438645 Apr 27 15:04 mongodb-linux-x86_64-enterprise-
˓→suse11-3.0.2.tgz
Prerequisites
Download Binaries Before Importing a Deployment
Populate the binaries directory with all required MongoDB versions before you import the deployment. If a version
is missing, the Automation Agents will not be able to take control of the deployment.
Determine Which Binaries to Store
Your binaries directory will require archives of following versions:
• versions used by existing deployments that you will import
• versions you will use to create new deployments
• versions you will use during an intermediary step in an upgrade. For example, if you will import an existing
MongoDB 2.6 Community deployment and upgrade it first to MongoDB 3.0 Community and then to MongoDB
3.0 Enterprise, you must include all those editions and versions.
If you use both the MongoDB Community edition and the MongoDB Enterprise subscription edition, you must include
the required versions of both.
The following table describes the archives required for specific versions:
66
Edition Version Archive
Community 2.6+, 2.4+ Linux archive at http://www.mongodb.org/downloads.
Community 3.0+ Linux 64-bit legacy version at http://www.
mongodb.org/downloads.
Enterprise 3.0+, 2.6+, 2.4+ Platform-specific archive available from http:
//mongodb.com/download.
Warning: If you run Ops Manager 1.6 and use Automation to deploy MongoDB Enterprise, then you must
pre-install the MongoDB Enterprise Dependencies on your servers.
If your MongoDB Enterprise deployments use Enterprise’s advanced security features (SSL, LDAP, Kerberos, and
auditing), you can use Ops Manager for Monitoring and Backup only. You cannot currently use Automation with
the advanced security features. Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
Prerequisite Packages Required for MongoDB Enterprise
If you use MongoDB Enterprise you must install the following prerequisite packages to each server that will run
MongoDB Enterprise:
•net-snmp
•net-snmp-libs
•openssl
•net-snmp-utils
•cyrus-sasl
•cyrus-sasl-lib
•cyrus-sasl-devel
•cyrus-sasl-gssapi
To install these packages on RHEL, CentOS and Amazon Linux, you can issue the following command:
sudo yum install openssl net-snmp net-snmp-libs net-snmp-utils cyrus-sasl cyrus-sasl-
˓→lib cyrus-sasl-devel cyrus-sasl-gssapi
Version Manifest
When you run in local mode, you must provide Ops Manager with the MongoDB version manifest, which lists all
released MongoDB versions. You provide the manifest to make Ops Manager aware of MongoDB versions, but
to make a version available to the Automation Agent, you must install the version’s archive on the Ops Manager
Application server and then select it for use in the associated group’s Version Manager.
To provide Ops Manager with the manifest, , in the Ops Manager web interface, click Admin in the upper right,
then click General, and then click Version Manifest. Here, you can update the manifest directly, if your browser has
internet access. Otherwise, copy the manifest from https://opsmanager.mongodb.com/static/version_manifest/1.6.json
and click the link for pasting in the manifest.
When MongoDB releases new versions, update the manifest.
67
Required Access
You must have Global Automation Admin or Global Owner access to perform this procedure.
Procedure
Step 1: Stop the Ops Manager Application if not yet running in local mode.
Use the command appropriate to your operating system.
On a Linux system installed with a package manager:
sudo service mongodb-mms stop
On a Linux system installed with a .tar file:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms stop
Step 2: Edit the conf-mms.properties configuration file to enable local mode and to specify the
local directory for MongoDB binaries.
Open conf-mms.properties with root privileges and set the following automation.versions values:
Set the automation.versions.source setting to the value local:
automation.versions.source=local
Set automation.versions.directory to the directory on the Ops Manager Application server where you
will store .tgz archives of the MongoDB binaries for access by the Automation Agent.
For example:
automation.versions.directory=/opt/mongodb/mms/mongodb-releases/
Step 3: Start the Ops Manager Application.
Use the command appropriate to your operating system.
On a Linux system installed with a package manager:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
On a Linux system installed with a .tar file:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms start
Step 4: Populate the Ops Manager Application server directory with the .tgz files for the MongoDB
binaries.
Populate the directory you specified in the automation.versions.directory setting with the necessary ver-
sions of MongoDB as determined by the Determine Which Binaries to Store topic on this page.
68
Important: If you have not yet read the Determine Which Binaries to Store topic on this page, please do so before
continuing with this procedure.
For example, to download MongoDB Enterprise 3.0 on Amazon Linux, issue a command similar to the following,
replacing <download-url.tgz> with the download url for the archive:
sudo curl -OL <download-url.tgz>
Step 5: Ensure that the “mongodb-mms” user can read the MongoDB binaries.
The “mongodb-mms” user must be able to read the .tgz files placed in the directory you specified in the
automation.versions.directory.
For example, if on a Linux platform you place the .tgz files in the /opt/mongodb/mms/mongodb-releases/
directory, you could use the following sequence of commands to change ownership for all files in that directory to
“mongodb-mms”:
cd /opt/mongodb/mms/mongodb-releases/
sudo chown mongodb-mms:mongodb-mms ./*
Step 6: Open Ops Manager.
If you have not yet registered a user, click the Register link and follow the prompts to register a user and create the
first group. The first registered user is automatically assigned the Global Owner role.
Step 7: Copy the version manifest to Ops Manager.
1. If you have not already done so, copy the version manifest from https://opsmanager.mongodb.com/static/
version_manifest/1.6.json.
2. Click the Admin link in the upper right to go to the system-wide Administration settings.
3. Click the General tab and then click Version Manifest.
4. Do one of the following:
• If your browser has internet access, click Update the MongoDB Version Manifest and paste in the manifest.
• If your browser does not have internet access, follow the instructions on the page.
Step 8: Specify which versions are available for download by Automation Agents associated with
each group.
1. Click Ops Manager in the upper left to leave the system-wide Administration settings.
2. Click Deployment and then click Version Manager.
3. Select the checkboxes for the versions of MongoDB that you have made available on the Ops Manager Appli-
cation server.
4. Click Review & Deploy at the top of the page.
5. Click Confirm & Deploy.
69
Step 9: Install the Automation Agent on each server on which you will manage MongoDB processes.
1. Click Administration and then Agents.
2. In the Automation section of the page, click the link for the operating system to which you will install. Following
the installation instructions.
3. Pre-install the MongoDB Enterprise Dependencies if deploying MongoDB Enterprise.
2.8 Configure High Availability
Application High Availability Outlines the process for achieving a highly available Ops Manager deployment.
Backup High Availability Make the Backup system highly available.
Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
•Additional Information
Overview
The Ops Manager Application provides high availability through horizontal scaling and through use of a replica set
for the backing MongoDB instance that hosts the Ops Manager Application Database.
Horizontal Scaling
The components of the Ops Manager Application are stateless between requests. Any Ops Manager Application server
can handle requests as long as all the servers read from the same backing MongoDB instance. If one Ops Manager
Application becomes unavailable, another fills requests.
To take advantage of this for high availability, configure a load balancer to balance between the pool of Ops Man-
ager Application servers. Use the load balancer of your choice. Configure each application server’s conf-mms.
properties file to point the mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl properties to the load balancer.
For more information, see Ops Manager Configuration Files.
The mms.remoteIp.header property should reflect the HTTP header set by the load balancer that contains the
original client’s IP address, i.e. X-Forwarded-For. The load balancer then manages the Ops Manager HTTP
Service and Backup HTTP Service each application server provides.
The Ops Manager Application uses the client’s IP address for auditing, logging, and white listing for the API.
70
Replica Set for the Backing Instance
Deploy a replica set rather than a standalone as the backing MongoDB instance for monitoring. Replica sets have
automatic failover if the primary becomes unavailable.
When deploying a replica set with members in multiple facilities, ensure that a single facility has enough votes to elect
aprimary if needed. Choose the facility that hosts the core application systems. Place a majority of voting members
and all the members that can become primary in this facility. Otherwise, network partitions could prevent the set from
being able to form a majority. For details on how replica sets elect primaries, see Replica Set Elections.
To deploy a replica set, see Deploy a Replica Set.
You can create backups of the replica set using file system snapshots. File system snapshots use system-level tools to
create copies of the device that holds replica set’s data files.
Prerequisites
Deploy a replica set for the backing instance for the Ops Manager Application Database. To deploy a replica set, see
Deploy a Replica Set.
Procedure
To configure multiple application servers with load balancing:
Step 1: Configure a load balancer with the pool of Ops Manager Application servers.
This configuration depends on the general configuration of your load balancer and environment.
Step 2: Update each Ops Manager Application server with the load balanced URL.
On each server, edit the conf-mms.properties file to configure the mms.centralUrl and mms.
backupCentralUrl properties to point to the load balancer URL.
The conf-mms.properties file is located in the <install_dir>/conf/ directory. See Ops Manager Con-
figuration Files for more information.
Step 3: Update each Ops Manager Application server with the replication hosts information.
On each server, edit the conf-mms.properties file to set the mongo.mongoUri property to the connection
string of the Ops Manager Application Database. You must specify at least 3hosts in the mongo.mongoUri
connection string. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://<mms0.example.net>:<27017>,<mms1.example.net>:<27017>,<mms2.
˓→example.net>:<27017>/?maxPoolSize=100
Step 4: Synchronize the gen.key file across all the Ops Manager Application servers.
Synchronize the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file across all Application Servers. The Ops Manager Applica-
tion server uses this file to encrypt sensitive information before storing the data in a database.
71
Additional Information
For information on making Ops Manager Backup highly available, see Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager
Backup Service.
Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Backup Service
On this page
•Overview
•Additional Information
Overview
The Backup Daemon maintains copies of the data from your backed up mongod instances and creates snapshots used
for restoring data. The file system that the Backup Daemon uses must have sufficient disk space and write capacity to
store the backed up instances.
For replica sets, the local copy is equivalent to an additional secondary replica set member. For sharded clusters the
daemon maintains a local copy of each shard as well as a copy of the config database.
To configure high availability
• scale your deployment horizontally by using multiple backup daemons, and
• provide failover for your Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Database by deploying replica sets
for the dedicated MongoDB processes that host the databases.
Multiple Backup Daemons
To increase your storage and to scale horizontally, you can run multiple instances of the Backup Daemon. With
multiple daemons, Ops Manager binds each backed up replica set or shard to a particular Backup Daemon. For
example, if you run two Backup Daemons for a cluster that has three shards, and if Ops Manager binds two shards to
the first daemon, then that daemon’s server replicates only the data of those two shards. The server running the second
daemon replicates the data of the remaining shard.
Multiple Backup Daemons allow for manual failover should one daemon become unavailable. You can instruct Ops
Manager to transfer the daemon’s backup responsibilities to another Backup Daemon. Ops Manager reconstructs the
data on the new daemon’s server and binds the associated replica sets or shards to the new daemon. See Move Jobs
from a Lost Backup Service to another Backup Service for a description of this process.
Ops Manager reconstructs the data using a snapshot and the oplog from the Backup Blockstore Database. Installing
the Backup Daemon is part of the procedure to Install Ops Manager. Select the procedure specific to your operation
system.
Replica Sets for Application and Backup Data
Deploy replica sets rather than standalones for the dedicated MongoDB processes that host the Ops Manager Applica-
tion Database and Backup Database. Replica sets provide automatic failover should the primary become unavailable.
72
When deploying a replica set with members in multiple facilities, ensure that a single facility has enough votes to elect
aprimary if needed. Choose the facility that hosts the core application systems. Place a majority of voting members
and all the members that can become primary in this facility. Otherwise, network partitions could prevent the set from
being able to form a majority. For details on how replica sets elect primaries, see Replica Set Elections.
To deploy a replica set, see Deploy a Replica Set.
Additional Information
To move jobs from a lost Backup server to another Backup server, see Move Jobs from a Lost Backup Service to
another Backup Service.
For information on making the Ops Manager Application highly available, see Configure a Highly Available Ops
Manager Application.
2.9 Configure Backup Jobs and Storage
Backup Data Locality Use multiple Backup daemons and blockstore instances to improve backup data locality.
Manage Backup Daemon Jobs Manage job assignments among the backup daemon
Configure Multiple Blockstores in Multiple Data Centers
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Backup Blockstore databases are the primary storage systems for the backup data of your MongoDB deployments.
You can add new blockstores to your data center if existing ones have reached capacity.
If needed, you can also deploy blockstores in multiple data centers and assign backups of particular MongoDB deploy-
ments to particular data centers, as described on this page. You assign backups to data centers by attaching specific
Ops Manager groups to specific blockstores.
Deploy blockstores to multiple data centers when:
• Two sets of backed up data cannot have co-located storage for regulatory reasons.
• You have multiple data centers and want to reduce cross-data center network traffic by keeping each blockstore
in the data center it backs.
This tutorial sets up two blockstores in two separate data centers and attaches a separate group to each.
73
Prerequisites
Each data center hosts a Backup Blockstore database and requires its own Ops Manager Application,Backup Daemon,
and Backup Agent
The two Ops Manager Application instances must share a single dedicated Ops Manager Application Database. You
can put members of the Ops Manager Application database replica set in each data center.
Configure each Backup Agent to use the URL for its local Ops Manager Application. You can configure each Ops
Manager Application to use a different hostname, or you can use split-horizon DNS to point each agent to its local
Ops Manager Application.
The Ops Manager Application database and the Backup Blockstore databases are MongoDB databases and can run as
standalones or replica sets. For production deployments, use replica sets to provide database high availability.
Procedures
Provision Servers in Each Data Center
Each server must meet the cumulative hardware and software requirements for the components it runs. See Ops
Manager Hardware and Software Requirements.
Servers that run the Backup Damon, Ops Manager Application database, and the Backup Blockstore databases all run
MongoDB. They must meet the configuration requirements in the MongoDB Production Notes.
Install MongoDB
Install MongoDB on the servers that host the:
• Backup Daemon
• Ops Manager Application database
• Backup Blockstore databases
See Install MongoDB in the MongoDB manual to find the correct install procedure for your operating system. To run
replica sets for the Ops Manager Application database and Backup Blockstore databases, see Deploy a Replica Set in
the MongoDB manual.
Install the Ops Manager Application
Install the Ops Manager Application in each data center but do not perform the step to start the service. See Install
Ops Manager to find the procedure for your operating system.
In the step for configuring the conf-mms.properties file, set the same Ops Manager Application URL in both
data centers. For example, in both data centers, set mms.centralUrl and mms.centralBackupUrl to point to
the server in Data Center 1:
mms.centralUrl =<application-server-in-data-center-1>:<8080>
mms.centralBackupUrl =<application-server-in-data-center-1>:<8081>
74
Start the Ops Manager Application
The Ops Manager Application creates a gen.key file on initial startup. You must start the Ops Manager Application
in one data center and copy its gen.key file before starting the other Ops Manager Application. Ops Manager uses
the same gen.key file for all servers in both data centers.
The gen.key file is binary. You cannot copy the contents: you must copy the file. For example, use SCP.
Step 1: Start the Ops Manager Application in Data Center 1.
Issue the following:
service mongodb-mms start
Step 2: Copy the gen.key file.
Copy the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file from the Ops Manager Application server in Data Center 1 to the:
•/etc/mongodb-mms directory on the Ops Manager Application server in Data Center 2.
•/etc/mongodb-mms directory of each Backup Daemon server in each data center.
Step 3: Start the Ops Manager Application server in Data Center 2.
Issue the following:
service mongodb-mms start
Install the Backup Daemon
Install and start the Backup Daemon in each data center. See Install Ops Manager for instructions for your operating
system.
Bind Groups to Backup Resources
Step 1: In a web browser, open Ops Manager.
Step 2: Create a new Ops Manager group for the first data center.
To create a group, select the Administration tab and open the My Groups page. Then, click Add Group and specify the
group name.”
Step 3: Create a second Ops Manager group for the second data center.
Step 4: Open the Admin interface.
In Ops Manager, select the Admin link in the upper right.
75
Step 5: Configure backup resources.
Select the Backup tab and do the following:
• Select the Daemons page and ensure there are two daemons listed.
• Select the Blockstores page. Add a blockstore with the hostname and port of the blockstore for the second data
center and click Save.
• Select the Sync Stores page. Add a sync store with the hostname and port of the blockstore for the second data
center and click Save.
• Select the Oplog Stores page. Add an oplog store with the hostname and port of the blockstore for the second
data center and click Save.
Step 6: Assign resources to the data centers.
Open the General tab, then the Groups page. Select the group you will house in the first data center, and then select
the View link for the Backup Configuration.
For each of the following, click the drop-down box and select the local option for the group:
•Backup Daemons
•Sync Stores
•Oplog Stores
•Block Stores
Repeat the above steps for the second group.
Step 7: Install agents.
If you are using Automation, install the Automation Agent for the group in Data Center 1 on each server in Data Center
1. Install the Automation Agent for Data Center 2 on each server in Data Center 2. The Automation Agent will then
install Monitoring and Backup agents as needed.
If you are not using Automation, download and install the Monitoring and Backup agents for the group assigned to
Data Center 1 by navigating to the Administration and then Agents page while viewing that group in Ops Manager.
Then, switch to the group in Data Center 2 by choosing it from the drop-down menu in the top navigation bar in Ops
Manager, and download and install its Monitoring and Backup agents.
See the following pages for the procedures for installing the agents manually:
•Install Monitoring Agent
•Install Backup Agent
Move Jobs from a Lost Backup Service to another Backup Service
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
76
Overview
If the server running a Backup Daemon fails, and if you run multiple Backup Daemons, then an administrator with the
global owner or global backup admin role can move all the daemon’s jobs to another Backup Daemon.
The new daemon takes over the responsibility to back up the associated shards and replica sets.
When you move jobs, the destination daemon reconstructs the data using a snapshot and the oplog from the Backup
Blockstore database. Reconstruction of data takes time, depending on the size of the databases on the source.
During the time it takes to reconstruct the data and reassign the backups to the new Backup Daemon:
• Ops Manager Backup does not take new snapshots of the jobs that are moving until the move is complete. Jobs
that are not moving are not affected.
• Ops Manager Backup does save incoming oplog data. Once the jobs are on the new Backup Daemon’s server,
Ops Manager Backup takes the missed snapshots at the regular snapshot intervals.
• Restores of previous snapshots are still available.
• Ops Manager can produce restore artifacts using existing snapshots with point-in-time recovery for replica sets
or checkpoints for sharded clusters.
Procedure
With administrative privileges, you can move jobs between Backup daemons using the following procedure:
Step 1: Click the Admin link at the top of Ops Manager.
Step 2: Select Backup and then select Daemons.
The Daemons page lists all active Backup Daemons.
Step 3: Locate the failed Backup Daemon and click the Move all heads link.
Ops Manager displays a drop-down list from which to choose the destination daemon. The list displays only those
daemons with more free space than there is used space on the source daemon.
Step 4: Move the jobs to the new daemon.
Select the destination daemon and click the Move all heads button.
2.10 Test Ops Manager Monitoring
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
77
Overview
The following procedure creates a MongoDB replica set and sets up a database populated with random data for use in
testing an Ops Manager installation. Create the replica set on a separate machine from Ops Manager.
These instructions create the replica set on a server running RHEL 6+ or Amazon Linux. The procedure installs all
the members to one server.
Procedure
Step 1: Increase each server’s default ulimit settings.
If you are installing to RHEL, check whether the /etc/security/limits.d directory contains the 90-nproc.
conf file. If the file exists, remove it. (The 90-nproc.conf file overrides limits.conf.) Issue the following
command to remove the file:
sudo rm /etc/security/limits.d/90-nproc.conf
For more information, see UNIX ulimit Settings in the MongoDB manual.
Step 2: Install MongoDB on each server.
First, set up a repository definition by issuing the following command:
echo "[mongodb-org-3.0]
name=MongoDB Repository
baseurl=https://repo.mongodb.org/yum/redhat/$releasever/mongodb-org/3.0/x86_64/
gpgcheck=0
enabled=1" | sudo tee -a /etc/yum.repos.d/mongodb-org-3.0.repo
Second, install MongoDB by issuing the following command:
sudo yum install -y mongodb-org mongodb-org-shell
Step 3: Create the data directories for the replica set.
Create a data directory for each replica set member and set mongod.mongod as each data directory’s owner.
For example, the following command creates the directory /data and then creates a data directory for each member
of the replica set. You can use different directory names:
sudo mkdir -p /data /data/mdb1 /data/mdb2 /data/mdb3
The following command sets mongod.mongod as owner of the new directories:
sudo chown mongod:mongod /data /data/mdb1 /data/mdb2 /data/mdb3
Step 4: Start a separate MongoDB instance for each replica set member.
Start each mongod instance on its own dedicated port number and with the data directory you created in the last step.
For each instance, specify mongod as the user. Start each instance with the replSet command-line option specifying
the name of the replica set.
78
For example, the following three commands start three members of a new replica set named rs0:
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27017 --dbpath /data/mdb1 --replSet rs0 --logpath /data/
˓→mdb1/mongodb.log --fork
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27018 --dbpath /data/mdb2 --replSet rs0 --logpath /data/
˓→mdb2/mongodb.log --fork
sudo -u mongod mongod --port 27019 --dbpath /data/mdb3 --replSet rs0 --logpath /data/
˓→mdb3/mongodb.log --fork
Step 5: Connect to one of the members.
For example, the following command connects to the member running on port 27017:
mongo --port 27017
Step 6: Initiate the replica set and add members.
In the mongo shell, issue the rs.initiate() and rs.add() methods, as shown in the following example. Replace the
hostnames in the example with the hostnames of your servers:
rs.initiate()
rs.add("mdb.example.net:27018")
rs.add("mdb.example.net:27019")
Step 7: Verify the replica set configuration.
Issue the rs.conf() method and verify that the members array lists the three members:
rs.conf()
Step 8: Add data to the replica set.
Issue the following for loop to create a collection titled testData and populate it with 25,000 documents, each
with an _id field and a field xset to a random string.
for (var i=1;i<= 25000; i++) {
db.testData.insert( { x :Math.random().toString(36).substr(2,15) } );
sleep(0.1);
}
Step 9: Confirm data entry.
After the script completes, you can view a document in the testData collection by issuing the following:
db.testData.findOne()
To confirm that the script inserted 25,000 documents into the collection, issue the following:
79
db.testData.count()
Step 10: Open the Ops Manager home page in a web browser and register the first user.
The first user created for Ops Manager is automatically assigned the Global Owner role.
Enter the following URL in a web browser, where <ip_address> is the IP address of the server:
http://<ip_address>:8080
Click the Register link and enter information for the new Global Owner user. When you finish, you are logged into
the Ops Manager Application as that user. For more information on creating and managing users, see Manage Ops
Manager Users.
Step 11: Set up monitoring for the replica set.
If you have installed the Backup Daemon, click the Get Started button for Backup and follow the instructions. This
will set up both monitoring and backup. Otherwise click the Get Started button for Monitoring and follow instructions.
When prompted to add a host, enter the hostname and port of one of the replica set members in the form
<hostname>:<port>. For example: mdb.example.net:27018
When you finish the instructions, Ops Manager is running and monitoring the replica set.
3 Create a New MongoDB Deployment
Add Servers for Use by Automation Add servers to Ops Manager.
Deploy a Replica Set Use Ops Manager to deploy a managed replica set.
Deploy a Sharded Cluster Use Ops Manager to deploy a managed sharded cluster.
Deploy a Standalone For testing and deployment, create a new standalone MongoDB instance.
Connect to a MongoDB Process Connect to a MongoDB deployment managed by Ops Manager.
3.1 Add Servers for Use by Automation
This section describes how to add servers for use by Ops Manager Automation.
Overview How to add servers to Ops Manager.
Add Existing Servers to Ops Manager Add your existing servers to Ops Manager.
Overview
On this page
•Add Servers for Use by Automation
•Server Requirements
80
Add Servers for Use by Automation
You can add servers to Automation in the following ways:
• Provision existing systems and infrastructure. Ops Manager can deploy and manage MongoDB on your existing
servers. To use your existing hardware, you must deploy the Automation Agent to each server on which Ops
Manager will deploy MongoDB. See Add Existing Servers to Ops Manager.
• Use your local system for testing. Ops Manager can deploy MongoDB to your laptop or desktop system. Do
not use local systems for production deployments. To use your local system, you must deploy the Automation
Agent.
Server Requirements
The following are the minimum requirements for the servers that will host your MongoDB deployments:
Hardware:
• At least 10 GB of free disk space plus whatever space is necessary to hold your MongoDB data.
• At least 4 GB of RAM.
• If you use Amazon Web Services (AWS) EC2 instances, we recommend at least an m3.medium instance.
Networking:
• For each server that hosts a MongoDB process managed by Ops Manager, the output of hostname -f must
generate a hostname that is resolvable from all other servers in the MongoDB deployment.
Software:
If you provision your own servers and if you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite packages on
the servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise to the servers.
Add Existing Servers to Ops Manager
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
You can allow Ops Manager to install, manage, and discover MongoDB processes on your existing servers. To do so,
you install the Automation Agent on each server.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the directories used by the Automation Agent have appropriate permissions for the user running the agent.
You can install the Automation Agent on the operating systems listed in Ops Manager on the Administration tab’s
Agents page.
81
To install the agent using rpm or deb packages, you must have root access.
Important: If a server runs MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite packages on the server before
deploying MongoDB Enterprise on the servers.
Procedure
Install the Automation Agent on each each server that you want Ops Manager to manage. The following procedure
applies to all operating systems. For instructions for a specific operating system, see Install the Automation Agent.
Step 1: Select the Administration tab and then select Agents.
Step 2: Under Automation at the bottom of the page, click your operation system and follow the
instructions to install and run the agent.
If the install file is a tar.gz archive file, make sure to extract the archive after download.
Step 3: Ensure that the directories used by the Automation Agent have appropriate permissions for
the user that runs the agent.
Set the required permissions described in Directory and File Permissions.
Once you have installed the agent to all your servers, you can deploy your first replica set,cluster, or standalone.
3.2 Deploy a Replica Set
On this page
•Overview
•Consideration
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
Areplica set is a group of MongoDB deployments that maintain the same data set. Replica sets provide redundancy and
high availability and are the basis for all production deployments. See the Replication Introduction in the MongoDB
manual for more information about replica sets.
Use this procedure to deploy a new replica set managed by Ops Manager. After deployment, use Ops Manager to
manage the replica set, including such operations as adding, removing, and reconfiguring members.
82
Consideration
Use unique replica set names for different replica sets within an Ops Manager group. Do not give different replica sets
the same name. Ops Manager uses the replica set name to identify which set a member belongs to.
Prerequisites
You must have an existing set of servers to which to deploy, and Ops Manager must have access to the servers.
The servers can exist on your own system or on Amazon Web Services (AWS). To give Ops Manager access to servers
on your system, install the Automation Agent to each server.
Important: If you provision your own servers and if you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite
packages on the servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on the servers.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click Add and select Create New Replica Set.
Step 3: Configure the replica set.
Enter information as required and click Apply.
To select specific servers to use for the deployment, enter the prefix of the servers in the Eligible Server RegExp field.
You can use regular expressions. To use all provisioned servers, enter a period (“.”). To run the deployment on your
local machine, enter the name of the machine.
For information on replica set options in the Member Options box, see Replica Set Members in the MongoDB Manual.
The votes field applies only to pre-2.6 versions of MongoDB.
To configure additional mongod runtime options, such as specifying the oplog size, or modifying journaling settings,
click Advanced Options. For option descriptions, see Advanced Options for MongoDB Deployments.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
83
3.3 Deploy a Sharded Cluster
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
Sharded clusters provide horizontal scaling for large data sets and enable high throughput operations by distributing
the data set across a group of servers. See the Sharding Introduction in the MongoDB manual for more information.
Use this procedure to deploy a new sharded cluster managed by Ops Manager. Later, you can use Ops Manager to add
shards and perform other maintenance operations on the cluster.
Prerequisites
You must have an existing set of servers to which to deploy, and Ops Manager must have access to the servers.
The servers can exist on your own system or on Amazon Web Services (AWS). To give Ops Manager access to servers
on your system, install the Automation Agent to each server.
Important: If you provision your own servers and if you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite
packages on the servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on the servers.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click Add and select Create New Cluster.
Step 3: Configure the sharded cluster.
Enter information as required and click Apply.
To select specific servers to use for the deployment, enter the prefix of the servers in the Eligible Server RegExp field.
You can use regular expressions. To use all provisioned servers, enter a period (“.”). To run the deployment on your
local machine, enter the name of the machine.
For information on replica set options in the Member Options box, see Replica Set Members in the MongoDB Manual.
The votes field applies only to pre-2.6 versions of MongoDB.
To configure additional mongod or mongos options, such as specifying the oplog size, or modifying journaling
settings, click Advanced Options. For option descriptions, see Advanced Options for MongoDB Deployments.
84
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
3.4 Deploy a Standalone MongoDB Instance
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
You can deploy a standalone MongoDB instance managed by Ops Manager. Use standalone instances for testing and
development. Do not use these deployments, which lack replication and high availability, for production systems. For
all production deployments use replica sets. See Deploy a Replica Set for production deployments.
Prerequisites
You must have an existing server to which to deploy. For testing purposes, you can use your localhost, or another
machine to which you have access.
Important: If you provision your own server and if you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite
packages to the server before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on it.
85
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and click Add and select Create New Standalone.
Step 3: Configure the standalone MongoDB instance.
Enter information as required and click Apply. For descriptions of Advanced Options, see Advanced Options for
MongoDB Deployments.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
3.5 Connect to a MongoDB Process
On this page
•Overview
•Firewall Rules
•Procedures
Overview
To connect to a MongoDB instance, retrieve the hostname and port information from the Ops Manager console and
then use a MongoDB client, such as the mongo shell or a MongoDB driver, to connect to the instance. You can
connect to a cluster,replica set,orstandalone.
Firewall Rules
Firewall rules and user authentication affect your access to MongoDB. You must have access to the server and port of
the MongoDB process.
If your MongoDB instance runs on Amazon Web Services (AWS), then the security group associated with the AWS
servers also affects access. AWS security groups control inbound and outbound traffic to their associated servers.
86
Procedures
Get the Connection Information for the MongoDB Instance
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the process.
For a replica set, click the primary. For a sharded cluster, click the mongod.
Ops Manager displays the hostname and port of the process at the top of the charts page.
Connect to a Deployment Using the Mongo Shell
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the process.
For a replica set, click the primary. For a sharded cluster, click the mongod.
Ops Manager displays the hostname and port of the process above the status charts.
Step 4: On a system shell, run mongo and specify the host and port of the deployment.
Issue a command in the following form:
mongo --username <user> --password <pass> --host <host> --port <port>
Connect to a Deployment Using a MongoDB Driver
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the process.
For a replica set, click the primary. For a sharded cluster, click the mongod.
Ops Manager displays the hostname and port of the process at the top of the charts on the page.
Step 4: Connect from your driver.
Use your driver to create a connection string that specifies the hostname and port of the deployment. The connection
string for your driver will resemble the following:
87
mongodb://[<username>:<password>@]hostname0<:port>[,hostname1:<port1>][,hostname2:
˓→<port2>][...][,hostnameN:<portN>]
If you specify a seed list of all hosts in a replica set in the connection string, your driver will automatically connect to
the term:primary.
For standalone deployments, you will only specify a single host. For sharded clusters, only specify a single mongos
instance.
Retrieve the Command to Connect Directly from the Process’s Server
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the instance’s gear icon and select Connect to this Instance.
Ops Manager provides a mongo shell command that you can use to connect to the MongoDB process if you are
connecting from the system where the deployment runs.
4 Import an Existing MongoDB Deployment
Add Existing Processes to Monitoring Add existing MongoDB processes to Ops Manager Monitoring.
Add Monitored Processes to Automation Add an existing MongoDB deployment to be managed through Ops Man-
ager Automation.
Reactivate Monitoring for a Process Reactivate a deactivated MongoDB process.
Remove Hosts Remove processes you no longer use from monitoring.
4.1 Add Existing MongoDB Processes to Monitoring
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Add MongoDB Processes
Overview
You can monitor existing MongoDB processes in Ops Manager by adding the hostnames and ports of the processes.
Ops Manager will start monitoring the mongod and mongos instances.
If you add processes from an environment that uses authentication, you must add each mongod instance separately
and explicitly set the authentication credentials on each.
88
If you add processes in an environment that does not use authentication, you can manually add one process from a
replica set or a sharded cluster as a seed. Once the Monitoring Agent has the seed, it automatically discovers all the
other nodes in the replica set or sharded cluster.
Unique Replica Set Names
Do not add two different replica sets with the same name. Ops Manager uses the replica set name to identify which
set a member belongs to.
Preferred Hostnames
If the MongoDB process is accessible only by specific hostname or IP address, or if you need to specify the hostname
to use for servers with multiple aliases, set up a preferred hostname. For details, see the Preferred Hostnames setting
in Group Settings.
Prerequisite
You must install a Monitoring Agent to your infrastructure.
To monitor or back up MongoDB 3.0 deployments, you must install Ops Manager 1.6 or higher. To monitor a Mon-
goDB 3.0 deployment, you must also run Monitoring Agent version 2.7.0 or higher.
Important: If you provision your own servers and if you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must install the prerequisite
packages on the servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on the servers.
Add MongoDB Processes
If your deployments use authentication, perform this procedure for each process. If your deployment does not use
authentication, add one process from a replica set or sharded cluster and Ops Manager will discover the other nodes in
the replica set or sharded cluster.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Select view mode and then select Add Host.
Step 3: Enter information for the MongoDB process.
Enter the following information, as appropriate:
89
Host Type The type of MongoDB deployment.
Internal Hostname The hostname of the MongoDB instance as seen from the Monitoring
Agent.
Port The port on which the MongoDB instance runs.
Auth Mechanism The authentication mechanism used by the host.
•MONGODB-CR,
•LDAP (PLAIN), or
•Kerberos(GSSAPI).
See Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR,Configure Monitor-
ing Agent for LDAP, or Configure the Monitoring Agent for Kerberos for
setting up user credentials.
DB Username If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the user-
name used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB deploy-
ment.
DB Password If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the pass-
word used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB deploy-
ment.
My deployment supports SSL for Mon-
goDB connections
If checked, the Monitoring Agent must have a trusted CA certificate in
order to connect to the MongoDB instances. See Configure Monitoring
Agent for SSL.
Step 4: Click Add.
To view agent output logs, click the Administration tab, then Agents, and then view logs for the agent.
To view process logs, click the Deployment tab, then the Deployment page, then the process, and then the Logs tab.
For more information on logs, see View Logs.
4.2 Add Monitored Processes to Automation
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
Ops Manager can automate operations for your monitored MongoDB processes. Adding your processes to Automation
lets you reconfigure, stop, and restart MongoDB through the Ops Manager interface.
Adding monitored processes involves two steps. First, install the Automation Agent on each server hosting a monitored
MongoDB process. Second, add the processes to Automation through the Ops Manager interface.
Prerequisites
Automation Agents can run only on 64-bit architectures.
90
Automation supports most but not all available MongoDB options. Automation supports the options described in
Supported MongoDB Options for Automation.
The user running the Automation Agent must the same as the user running the MongoDB process to be managed.
The servers that host the MongoDB processes must have full networking access to each other through their fully
qualified domain names (retrieved on each server by issuing hostname -f). Each server must be able to reach
every other server through the FQDN.
Ensure that your network configuration allows each Automation Agent to connect to every MongoDB process listed
on the Deployment tab. Ensure that the network and security systems, including all interfaces and firewalls, allow
these connections.
Ops Manager must be currently monitoring the MongoDB processes, and the Monitoring Agent must be running. The
processes must appear in the Ops Manager Deployment tab.
Procedures
Install the Automation Agent on Each Server
Install the Automation Agent on each server that hosts a monitored MongoDB process. Ensure that the Automation
Agent has adequate permissions to stop and restart the existing Monitoring Agent so that it can update the Monitoring
Agent as new versions are released.
On each server, you must download the agent, create the necessary directories, and configure the agent’s local.
config file with the Group ID and API key.
Step 1: In Ops Manager, select the Administration tab and then select Agents.
Step 2: Under Automation at the bottom of the page, click your operation system and follow the
instructions to install and run the agent.
For additional information on installing the agent, see Install the Automation Agent.
Add the Processes to Automation
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the Add button and select Attach to Existing.
Step 3: Select the MongoDB processes.
Click the Deployment Item field to display your currently monitored processes. Select the cluster, replica set or
standalone to add.
Step 4: Click Start Import.
Ops Manager displays the progress of the import for each MongoDB process, including any errors. If you need to
correct errors, click Stop Import, correct them, and restart this procedure.
91
Step 5: Click Confirm Import.
Step 6: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 7: Click Confirm & Deploy.
Ops Manager Automation takes over the management of the processes and peforms a rolling restart. To view progress,
click View Agent Logs.
If you diagnose an error that causes Automation to fail to complete the deployment, click Edit Configuration to correct
the error.
4.3 Reactivate Monitoring for a Process
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
If the Monitoring Agent cannot collect information from a MongoDB process, Ops Manager stops monitoring the
process. By default, Ops Manager stops monitoring a mongos that is unreachable for 24 hours and a mongod that is
unreachable for 7 days. Your group might have different default behavior. Ask your system administrator.
When the system stops monitoring a process, the Deployment page marks the process with an xin the Last Ping
column. If the instance is a mongod, Ops Manager displays a caution icon at the top of each Deployment page.
You can reactivate monitoring for the process whether or not the process is running. When you reactivate monitoring,
the Monitoring Agent has an hour to reestablish contact and provide a ping to Ops Manager. If a process is running
and reachable, it appears marked with a green circle in the Last Ping column. If it is unavailable, it appears marked
with a red square. If it remains unreachable for an hour, Ops Manager again stops monitoring the process.
You can optionally remove a process that you are no longer using. Removed processes are permanently hidden from
Ops Manager. For more information, see Remove Hosts.
Procedure
To reactivate monitoring for a process:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click the warning icon at the top of the page.
Step 3: Click Reactivate ALL hosts.
The processes that are now running and reachable by the Monitoring Agent will appear marked with green circles in
the Last Ping column.
92
The processes that are unavailable or unreachable will appear marked with a red square. If a process does not send a
ping within an hour after reactivation, it is deactivated again.
Step 4: Add the mongos instances.
To activate the mongos instances, click the Add Host button and enter the hostname, port, and optionally an admin
database username and password. Then click Add.
4.4 Remove Hosts
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
You can remove hosts that you no longer use, but when you do they are hidden permanently. If you run the instance
again, Ops Manager will not discover it. If you choose to add the host again, Ops Manager will not display it.
Only a global administrator can undelete the host so that it will again display if added. The administrator can add the
host back through the Deleted Hosts page in the Ops Manager Admin interface.
Instead of removing a host, you can optionally disable alerts for the host, which does not remove it from the Deploy-
ment pages. See Manage Host Alerts.
Procedure
To remove a host from Ops Manager:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: On the line listing the process, click the gear icon and select Remove Host.
Step 3: Click Delete.
Step 4: If prompted for a two-factor authentication code, enter it, click Verify, and then click Delete
again.
5 Manage Deployments
Edit a Replica Set Add hosts to, remove hosts from, or modify the configuration of hosts in an Ops Manager managed
replica set. - ‘cloud’ - ‘onprem’
Migrate a Replica Set Member to a New Server Migrate replica sets to new underlying systems by adding members
to the set and decommissioning existing members.
93
Move or Add a Monitoring or Backup Agent Migrate a backup and monitoring agents to different servers.
Change the Version of MongoDB Upgrade or downgrade MongoDB deployments managed by Ops Manager.
Restart a MongoDB Process Restart MongoDB deployments managed by Ops Manager.
Shut Down MongoDB Processes Shut down MongoDB deployments managed by Ops Manager.
Remove Processes from Monitoring Remove MongoDB deployments from management by Ops Manager.
Alerts Set up and manage alert configurations.
Monitoring Metrics Interpreting the metrics.
Logs View host and agent logs.
5.1 Edit a Replica Set
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
•Additional Information
Overview
You can add, remove, and reconfigure members in a replica set directly in the Ops Manager console.
Procedures
Add a Replica Set Member
You must have an existing server to which to deploy the new replica set member. To add a member to an existing
replica set, increasing the size of the set:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Edit the replica set.
Click edit mode. Then click the arrow to the right of the replica set and click the Edit button.
Step 3: Add the member.
In the MongoDs Per Replica Set field, click +to increase the number of members for the replica set.
Configure the new members as desired in the Member Options box.
Then click Apply.
94
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
Edit a Replica Set Member
Use this procedure to:
• Reconfigure a member as hidden
• Reconfigure a member as delayed
• Reset a member’s priority level in elections
• Reset a member’s votes (for pre-2.6 versions of MongoDB)
To reconfigure a member as an arbiter, see Replace a Member with an Arbiter.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the replica set and click the Edit
button.
Step 3: In the Member Options box, configure each member as needed.
For information on member options, see the following in the MongoDB manual:
•Hidden Members
•Delayed Members
•Elections, which describes priority levels.
The Votes field applies to pre-2.6 versions of MongoDB.
Step 4: Click Apply.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
95
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
Replace a Member with an Arbiter
You cannot directly reconfigure a member as an arbiter. Instead, you must must add a new member to the replica set
as an arbiter. Then you must shut down an existing secondary.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode.
Step 3: Click the arrow to the right of the replica set and then click the Edit button.
Step 4: Add an arbiter.
In the MongoDs Per Replica Set field, increase the number of members by 1.
In the Member Options box, click the member’s drop-down arrow and select Arbiter.
Click Apply.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
Step 7: Remove the secondary.
When the deployment completes, click the arrow to the right of the secondary to remove. Click the gear icon drop-
down list, and select Remove Member.”
Step 8: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 9: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
96
Upon completion, Ops Manager removes the member from the replica set, but it will continue to run as a standalone
MongoDB instance. To shut down the standalone, see Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
Remove a Replica Set Member
Removing a member from a replica set does not shut down the member or remove it from Ops Manager. Ops Manager
still monitors the mongod as as standalone instance. To remove a member:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the member to be removed.
Step 3: Click the gear icon drop-down list and select Remove Member.
Step 4: Click Remove to confirm.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
Upon completion, Ops Manager removes the member from the replica set, but it will continue to run as a standalone
MongoDB instance. To shut down the standalone, see Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
Additional Information
To view data from all replica set members at once, see Replica Set Statistics.
For more information on replica set configuration options, see, Replica Set Configuration in the MongoDB manual.
5.2 Migrate a Replica Set Member to a New Server
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Procedure
97
Overview
For Ops Manager managed replica sets, you can replace one member of a replica set with another new member from
the Ops Manager console. Use this process to migrate members of replica sets to new underlying servers. From a high
level, this procedure requires that you: you add a member to the replica set on the new server and then shut down the
existing member on the old server. Specifically, you will
1. Provision the new server.
2. Add an extra member to the replica set.
3. Shut down old member of the replica set.
4. Un-manage the old member (Optional).
Considerations
Initial Sync
When you add a new replica set member, the member must perform an initial sync, which takes time to complete,
depending on the size of your data set. For more information on initial sync, see Replica Set Data Synchronization.
Migrating Multiple Members
If you are moving multiple members to new servers, migrate each member separately to keep the replica set available.
Procedure
Perform this procedure separately for each member of a replica set to migrate.
Step 1: Provision the new server.
See Add Existing Servers to Ops Manager.
Step 2: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 3: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the replica set and click the Edit
button.
Step 4: Add a member to the replica set.
In the Nodes Per Replica Set field, increase the number of members by 1, and then click Apply.
Step 5: Verify changes.
Verify the server to which Ops Manager will deploy the new replica set member. If necessary, select a different server.
The Deployment page’s Topology View lists the new replica set member and indicates the server to which Ops Manager
will deploy it.
98
If Ops Manager has not chosen the server you intended, click the Deployment page’s Server View to display your
available servers and their processes. Processes not yet deployed can be dragged to different servers. Drag the new
replica set member to the server to which to deploy it.
Step 6: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 7: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
Step 8: Verify that the new member has synchronized.
Select the Deployment page’s view mode to view the new member’s status. Verify that the new member has synchro-
nized and is no longer in the Recovering state.
Step 9: Remove the old member from the replica set.
Select the Deployment page’s edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the replica set member. Then click
the gear icon and select Remove Member. Then click Review & Deploy. Then click Confirm & Deploy.
Step 10: Shut down the old member.
Select the arrow to the right of the removed replica set member, and then click the gear icon and select Shut Down.
Then click Review & Deploy. Then click Confirm & Deploy.
Step 11: Optionally, unmanage the old member.
Select the arrow to the right of the removed replica set member, and then click the gear icon and select Unmanage.
Then click Review & Deploy. Then click Confirm & Deploy.
5.3 Move or Add a Monitoring or Backup Agent
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
99
Overview
When you deploy MongoDB as a replica set or sharded cluster to a group of servers, Ops Manager selects one server
to run the Monitoring Agent. If you enable Ops Manager Backup, Ops Manager also selects a server to run the Backup
Agent.
You can move the Monitoring and Backup Agents to different servers in the deployment. You might choose to do this,
for example, if you are terminating a server.
You also can add additional instances of each agent as hot standbys for high availability. However, this is not standard
practice. A single Monitoring Agent and single Backup Agent are sufficient and strongly recommended. If you run
multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent and one Backup Agent per group or environment are primary. Only the
primary agent reports cluster status and performs backups. If you run multiple agents, see Confirm Only One Agent is
Actively Monitoring.
Procedures
Move a Monitoring or Backup Agent to a Different Server
To move an agent to a new server, you install a new instance of the agent on the target server, and then remove the
agent from its original server.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then select the Server View.
The Server View displays each provisioned server that is currently running one or more agents.
Step 3: On the server to which to move the agent, click the gear icon and select to install that type
of agent.
Step 4: On the server from which to remove the agent, click the gear icon and remove the agent.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
100
Install Additional Agent as Hot Standby for High Availability
In general, using only one Monitoring Agent and one Backup Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. If you
run multiple agents, see Confirm Only One Agent is Actively Monitoring to ensure no conflicts.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then select the Server View.
The Server View displays each provisioned server that is currently running one or more agents.
Step 3: On the server to which to add an additional agent, click the gear icon and select the agent
to add.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
5.4 Change the Version of MongoDB
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Procedure
Overview
For Ops Manager managed MongoDB, Ops Manager supports safe automatic upgrade and downgrade operations
between releases of MongoDB while maximizing the availability of your deployment. Ops Manager supports upgrade
and downgrade operations for sharded clusters,replica sets,and standalone MongoDB instances.
101
Considerations
Before changing a deployment’s MongoDB version:
• Consult the following documents for any special considerations or application compatibility issues:
–The MongoDB Release Notes
–The documentation for your driver.
• Plan the version change during a predefined maintenance window.
• Before changing version on a production environment, change versions on a staging environment that reproduces
your production environment to ensure your configuration is compatible with all changes.
• To monitor or back up MongoDB 3.0 deployments, you must install Ops Manager 1.6 or higher. To monitor a
MongoDB 3.0 deployment, you must also run Monitoring Agent version 2.7.0 or higher.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the deployment.
Step 3: In the configuration screen, click the gear icon and select Edit.
Step 4: In the Version field select the version. Then click Apply.
If the drop-down menu does not include the desired MongoDB version, you must first enable it in the Version Manager.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
5.5 Restart a MongoDB Process
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
102
•Procedure
Overview
If an Ops Manager-managed MongoDB process is not currently running, you can restart it directly from the Ops
Manager console.
Considerations
If the Monitoring Agent cannot collect information from a MongoDB process, Ops Manager stops monitoring the
process. By default, Ops Manager stops monitoring a mongos that is unreachable for 24 hours and a mongod that is
unreachable for 7 days. Your group might have different default behavior. Ask your system administrator.
Procedure
To restart a process:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the deployment.
Step 3: In the box displaying the deployment configuration, click the gear icon and select Start Up.
Step 4: Click Startup to confirm.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy to review the configuration.
Ops Manager displays the full configuration for you to review.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
To view deployment progress, click View Agent Logs and select an agent at the top of the Agent Logs page. To check
for updated entries, refresh the page.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration, click Edit Configuration and then click Edit
Configuration again. Reconfigure the deployment through the deployment arrow button or through the Add button. If
you cannot find a solution, shut down the deployment. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and
then Confirm & Deploy.
5.6 Shut Down MongoDB Processes
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
103
•Additional Information
Overview
You can shut down selected mongod and mongos processes, or you can shut down all the processes at once for a
sharded cluster or replica set. Ops Manager continues to monitor the processes, and you can later restart them. If you
no longer want Ops Manager to monitor the processes, you can remove them from monitoring.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the deployment.
Step 3: Click the gear icon drop-down list and select Shut Down.
Step 4: Click Shutdown to confirm.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 6: Click Confirm & Deploy.
Additional Information
To restart processes after shutting them down, see Restart a MongoDB Process.
To remove processes from Ops Manager monitoring, see Remove Processes from Monitoring.
5.7 Remove Processes from Monitoring
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Procedure
Overview
You can remove mongod or mongos processes from Ops Manager monitoring by “unmanaging” them. Unmanaging
a process removes it from the Deployment page and from management by Ops Manager but does not shut it down.
When you unmanage a mongod or mongos process, it continues to run. It simply isn’t managed by Ops Manager
anymore.
104
Considerations
If you intend to shut down a process and intend to do so through Ops Manager, do that first, before unmanaging the
process. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
Instead of removing processes from monitoring, you can optionally disable their alerts, which allows you to continue
to view the processes in the Deployment page. See Manage Host Alerts.
Procedure
To unmanage a process:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click edit mode, and then click the arrow to the right of the deployment.
Step 3: In the box displaying the deployment configuration, click the gear icon and select Unman-
age.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
5.8 Alerts
Manage Host Alerts Procedure to enable/disable alerts for hosts.
Create an Alert Configuration Procedures to create alert configurations.
Manage Alert Configuration Procedures for managing alert configurations.
Manage Alerts Procedures for managing alerts.
Alert Conditions Identifies all available alert triggers and conditions.
Manage Host Alerts
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: On the line listing the process, click the gear icon and select Edit Host.
To narrow or expand the list of processes, click the drop-down box above the list and select the type of processes to
display.
Step 3: Select Alert Status and then modify the alert settings.
Create an Alert Configuration
105
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
An alert configuration defines the conditions that trigger an alert and defines the notifications to be sent.
You can create an alert configuration from scratch or clone it from an existing alert.
Considerations
Costs
Costs to send alerts depend on your telephone service contract. Many factors may affect alert delivery, including do
not call lists, caps for messages sent or delivered, delivery time of day, and message caching.
Alert Intervals
To implement alert escalation, you can create multiple alert configurations with different minimum frequencies. Ops
Manager processes alerts on a 5-minute interval. Therefore, the minimum frequency for an alert is 5 minutes. The time
between re-notifications increases by the frequency amount every alert cycle (e.g. 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes,
20 minutes, etc.) up to a maximum of 24 hours. The default frequency for a new alert configuration is 60 minutes.
When an alert state triggers, you can set a time to elapse before Ops Manager will send alert messages at the specified
interval. This helps eliminate false positives. Type in the after waiting field the number of minutes to wait before
sending the alert at the specified interval for each recipient.
Procedures
You can create a new alert configuration or clone an existing one. This section provides both procedures.
Create an Alert Configuration
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select Alert Settings.
Step 2: Click the Add Alert button.
Step 3: Select the component to monitor and the condition that triggers the alert.
In Alert if, select the target component. If you select Host, you must also select the type of host.
Next, select the condition and, if applicable, specify the threshold for the metric. For explanations of alert conditions
and metrics, see Alert Conditions.
106
If the options in the For section are available, you can optionally filter the alert to apply only to a subset of the
monitored targets. is,is not,contains,does not contain,starts with, and ends with use direct string comparison, while
matches uses regular expressions. These options are available only if the targets are hosts or replica sets.
Step 4: Select the alert recipients and choose how they receive the alerts.
In Send to, specify the alert interval and distribution method for each alert recipient. Click Add to add more recipients.
To receive an SMS alert, a user must have correctly entered their telephone number in their Account page on the
Administration tab. Ops Manager removes all punctuation and letters and only uses the digits for the telephone
number.
If you are outside of the United States or Canada, you will need to include ‘011’ and your country code. For instance,
for New Zealand (country code 64), you would need to enter ‘01164’, followed by your phone number. Alternately,
you can sign up for a Google Voice number, and use that number for your authentication.
For HipChat alerts, enter the HipChat room name and API token. Alerts will appear in the HipChat room message
stream. See the Group Settings page to define default group settings for HipChat.
For PagerDuty alerts, enter only the service key. Define escalation rules and alert assignments in PagerDuty. See the
Group Settings page to define default group settings for PagerDuty.
For SNMP alerts, specify the hostname that will receive the v2c trap on standard port 162. The MIB file for SNMP
is available for download here.
Step 5: Click Save.
Clone an Alert Configuration
You can create new alert configurations by cloning an existing one then editing it.
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select Alert Settings.
Step 2: Click the gear icon to the right of an alert and then select Clone.
Step 3: Select the component to monitor and the condition that triggers the alert.
In Alert if, select the target component. If you select Host, you must also select the type of host.
Next, select the condition and, if applicable, specify the threshold for the metric. For explanations of alert conditions
and metrics, see Alert Conditions.
If the options in the For section are available, you can optionally filter the alert to apply only to a subset of the
monitored targets. is,is not,contains,does not contain,starts with, and ends with use direct string comparison, while
matches uses regular expressions. These options are available only if the targets are hosts or replica sets.
Step 4: Select the alert recipients and choose how they receive the alerts.
In Send to, specify the alert interval and distribution method for each alert recipient. Click Add to add more recipients.
To receive an SMS alert, a user must have correctly entered their telephone number in their Account page on the
Administration tab. Ops Manager removes all punctuation and letters and only uses the digits for the telephone
number.
107
If you are outside of the United States or Canada, you will need to include ‘011’ and your country code. For instance,
for New Zealand (country code 64), you would need to enter ‘01164’, followed by your phone number. Alternately,
you can sign up for a Google Voice number, and use that number for your authentication.
For HipChat alerts, enter the HipChat room name and API token. Alerts will appear in the HipChat room message
stream. See the Group Settings page to define default group settings for HipChat.
For PagerDuty alerts, enter only the service key. Define escalation rules and alert assignments in PagerDuty. See the
Group Settings page to define default group settings for PagerDuty.
For SNMP alerts, specify the hostname that will receive the v2c trap on standard port 162. The MIB file for SNMP
is available for download here.
Step 5: Click Save.
Manage Alert Configuration
On this page
•Overview
•Manage Alert Configurations
Overview
You can manage alert configurations from the Activity tab. An alert configuration defines the conditions that trigger an
alert and defines the notifications to be sent.
Manage Alert Configurations
View Alert Configurations
To view alert configurations, click the Activity tab and then select the Alert Settings page.
Alert configurations define the conditions that trigger alerts and the notifications sent when alerts are triggered.
Ops Manager creates the following alert configurations automatically when you create a new group:
• Users awaiting approval to join group
• Host is exposed to the public internet
• User added to group
• Monitoring Agent is down
If you enable backup, Ops Manager creates the following alert configurations for the group if they do not already exist:
• Oplog Behind
• Resync Required
• Cluster Mongos Is Missing
108
Create or Clone an Alert Configuration
To create or clone an alert configuration, see Create an Alert Configuration.
Modify an Alert Configuration
Each alert configuration has a distribution list, a frequency for sending the alert, and a waiting period after an alert
state triggers before sending the first alert.
By default, an alert configuration sends alerts at 60-minute intervals. You can modify the interval. The minimum
interval is 5 minutes.
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select Alert Settings.
Step 2: Click the gear icon to the right of an alert and then select Edit.
Step 3: Select the component to monitor and the condition that triggers the alert.
In Alert if, select the target component. If you select Host, you must also select the type of host.
Next, select the condition and, if applicable, specify the threshold for the metric. For explanations of alert conditions
and metrics, see Alert Conditions.
If the options in the For section are available, you can optionally filter the alert to apply only to a subset of the
monitored targets. is,is not,contains,does not contain,starts with, and ends with use direct string comparison, while
matches uses regular expressions. These options are available only if the targets are hosts or replica sets.
Step 4: Select the alert recipients and choose how they receive the alerts.
In Send to, specify the alert interval and distribution method for each alert recipient. Click Add to add more recipients.
To receive an SMS alert, a user must have correctly entered their telephone number in their Account page on the
Administration tab. Ops Manager removes all punctuation and letters and only uses the digits for the telephone
number.
If you are outside of the United States or Canada, you will need to include ‘011’ and your country code. For instance,
for New Zealand (country code 64), you would need to enter ‘01164’, followed by your phone number. Alternately,
you can sign up for a Google Voice number, and use that number for your authentication.
For HipChat alerts, enter the HipChat room name and API token. Alerts will appear in the HipChat room message
stream. See the Group Settings page to define default group settings for HipChat.
For PagerDuty alerts, enter only the service key. Define escalation rules and alert assignments in PagerDuty. See the
Group Settings page to define default group settings for PagerDuty.
For SNMP alerts, specify the hostname that will receive the v2c trap on standard port 162. The MIB file for SNMP
is available for download here.
109
Step 5: Click Save.
Delete an Alert Configuration
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select Alert Settings.
Step 2: Click the gear icon to the right of an alert and then select Delete.
Step 3: Click Confirm.
When you delete an alert configuration that has open alerts associated to it, Ops Manager cancels the open alerts and
sends no further notifications. This is true whether users have acknowledged the alerts or not.
Disable or Enable an Alert Configuration
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select Alert Settings.
Step 2: Click the gear icon to the right of an alert and then select either Disable or Enable.
When you disable an alert configuration it remains visible in a grayed out state. Ops Manager automatically cancels
active alerts related to a disabled alert configuration. You can reactivate disabled alerts.
For example, if you have an alert configured for Host Down and you currently have an active alert telling you a host is
down, Ops Manager automatically cancels active Host Down alerts if you disable the default Host Down configuration.
Ops Manager will send no further alerts of this type unless the disabled alert is re-enabled.
Manage Alerts
On this page
•Overview
•Manage Alerts
Overview
You can manage alerts from the Activity tab.
When a condition triggers an alert, users receive the alert at regular intervals until the alert is resolved or canceled.
Users can mark the alert as acknowledged for a period of time but will again receive notifications when the acknowl-
edgment period ends if the alert condition still exists.
Alerts end when the alert is resolved or canceled. An alert is resolved, also called “closed,” when the condition that
triggered the alert has been corrected. Ops Manager sends users a notification at the time the alert is resolved.
An alert is canceled if the alert configuration that triggered the alert is deleted or disabled, or if the target of the alert is
removed from the system. For example, if you have an open alert for “Host Down” and you delete that host from Ops
Manager, then the alert is canceled. When an alert is canceled, Ops Manager does not send a notification and does not
record an entry in the activity feed.
110
Manage Alerts
View Open Alerts
To view open alerts, click the Activity tab and then select All Activity. The All Activity page displays a feed of all events
tracked by Ops Manager. If you have open alerts, the page displays them above the feed.
Filter Activity Feed
You can filter the event feed by date.
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select All Activity.
Step 2: Click the gear icon and specify a date range.
Download Activity Feed
You can download the event feed as a CSV file (comma-separated values).
Step 1: Select the Activity tab and then select All Activity.
Step 2: Click the gear icon and select Download as CSV File.
You can download all events or choose to filter the feed before downloading. Ops Manager limits the number of events
returned to 10,000.
Acknowledge an Open Alert
Step 1: Select the Activity tab.
The All Activity page appears.
Step 2: On the line item for the alert, click Acknowledge.
Step 3: Select the time period for which to acknowledge the alert.
Ops Manager will send no further alert messages for the period of time you select.
Step 4: Click Acknowledge.
After you acknowledge the alert, Ops Manager sends no further notifications to the alert’s distribution list until the
acknowledgement period has passed or until the alert is resolved. The distribution list receives no notification of the
acknowledgment.
111
If the alert condition ends during the acknowledgment period, Ops Manager sends a notification of the resolution. For
example, if you acknowledge a host-down alert and the host comes back up during the acknowledgement period, Ops
Manager sends you a notification that the host is up.
If you configure an alert with PagerDuty, a third-party incident management service, you can only acknowledge the
alert on your PagerDuty dashboard.
Unacknowledge an Acknowledged Alert
Step 1: Select the Activity tab.
The All Activity page appears.
Step 2: On the line item for the alert, click Unacknowledge.
Step 3: Click Confirm.
If the alert condition continues to exist, Ops Manager will resend alerts.
View Closed Alerts
To view closed alerts, click the Activity tab and then select Closed Alerts. The Closed Alerts page displays alerts that
users have closed explicitly or where the metric has dropped below the threshold of the alert.
Alert Conditions
On this page
•Overview
•Host Alerts
•Replica Set Alerts
•Agent Alerts
•Backup Alerts
•User Alerts
•Group Alert
Overview
Ops Manager provides configurable alert conditions that you can apply to Ops Manager components, such as hosts,
clusters, or agents. This document groups the conditions according to the target components to which they apply.
Select alert conditions when configuring alerts, for more information on configuring alerts, see the Create an Alert
Configuration and Manage Alerts documents.
112
Host Alerts
The Host Alerts are applicable to MongoDB hosts (i.e. mongos and mongod instances). and are grouped here
according to the category monitored.
Host Status
is down
Sends an alert when Ops Manager does not receive a ping from a host for more than 9 minutes. Under normal
operation the Monitoring Agent connects to each monitored host about once per minute. Ops Manager will
not alert immediately, however, but waits nine minutes in order to minimize false positives, as would occur, for
example, during a host restart.
is recovering
Sends an alert when a secondary member of a replica set enters the RECOVERING state. For information on the
RECOVERING state, see Replica Set Member States.
does not have latest version
This does not apply to Ops Manager.
Sends an alert when the version of MongoDB running on a host is more than two releases behind. For example
if the current production version of MongoDB is 2.6.0 and the previous release is 2.4.9 then a host running
version 2.4.8 will trigger this alert but a host running 2.4.9 (previous) 2.6.0 (current) or 2.6.1-rc2 (nightly) will
not.
Asserts
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s asserts chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a
Host’s Statistics.
Asserts: Regular is
Sends an alert if the rate of regular asserts meets the specified threshold.
Asserts: Warning is
Sends an alert if the rate of warnings meets the specified threshold.
Asserts: Msg is
Sends an alert if the rate of message asserts meets the specified threshold. Message asserts are internal server
errors. Stack traces are logged for these.
Asserts: User is
Sends an alert if the rate of errors generated by users meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s opcounters chart. To view the chart, see Accessing
a Host’s Statistics.
Opcounter: Cmd is
Sends an alert if the rate of commands performed meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Query is
Sends an alert if the rate of queries meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Update is
Sends an alert if the rate of updates meets the specified threshold.
113
Opcounter: Delete is
Sends an alert if the rate of deletes meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Insert is
Sends an alert if the rate of inserts meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Getmores is
Sends an alert if the rate of getmore (i.e. cursor batch) operations meets the specified threshold. For more
information on getmore operations, see the Cursors page in the MongoDB manual.
Opcounter - Repl
These alert conditions apply to hosts that are secondary members of replica sets. The alerts use the metrics found on
the host’s opcounters - repl chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
Opcounter: Repl Cmd is
Sends an alert if the rate of replicated commands meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Repl Update is
Sends an alert if the rate of replicated updates meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Repl Delete is
Sends an alert if the rate of replicated deletes meets the specified threshold.
Opcounter: Repl Insert is
Sends an alert if the rate of replicated inserts meets the specified threshold.
Memory
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s memory and non-mapped virtual memory
charts. To view the charts, see Accessing a Host’s Statistics. For additional information about these metrics, click the
iicon for each chart.
Memory: Resident is
Sends an alert if the size of the resident memory meets the specified threshold. It is typical over time, on a
dedicated database server, for the size of the resident memory to approach the amount of physical RAM on the
box.
Memory: Virtual is
Sends an alert if the size of virtual memory for the mongod process meets the specified threshold. You can
use this alert to flag excessive memory outside of memory mapping. For more information, click the memory
chart’s iicon.
Memory: Mapped is
Sends an alert if the size of mapped memory, which maps the data files, meets the specified threshold. As
MongoDB memory-maps all the data files, the size of mapped memory is likely to approach total database size.
Memory: Computed is
Sends an alert if the size of virtual memory that is not accounted for by memory-mapping meets the specified
threshold. If this number is very high (multiple gigabytes), it indicates that excessive memory is being used out-
side of memory mapping. For more information on how to use this metric, view the non-mapped virtual
memory chart and click the chart’s iicon.
114
B-tree
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s btree chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a Host’s
Statistics.
B-tree: accesses is
Sends an alert if the number of accesses to B-tree indexes meets the specified average.
B-tree: hits is
Sends an alert if the number of times a B-tree page was in memory meets the specified average.
B-tree: misses is
Sends an alert if the number of times a B-tree page was not in memory meets the specified average.
B-tree: miss ratio is
Sends an alert if the ratio of misses to hits meets the specified threshold.
Lock %
This alert condition refers to metric found on the host’s lock % chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a Host’s
Statistics.
Effective Lock % is
Sends an alert if the amount of time the host is write locked meets the specified threshold. For details on this
metric, view the lock % chart and click the chart’s iicon.
Background
This alert condition refers to metric found on the host’s background flush avg chart. To view the chart, see
Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
Background Flush Average is
Sends an alert if the average time for background flushes meets the specified threshold. For details on this
metric, view the background flush avg chart and click the chart’s iicon.
Connections
The following alert condition refers to a metric found on the host’s connections chart. To view the chart, see
Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
Connections is
Sends an alert if the number of active connections to the host meets the specified average.
Queues
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s queues chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a
Host’s Statistics.
Queues: Total is
Sends an alert if the number of operations waiting on a lock of any type meets the specified average.
Queues: Readers is
Sends an alert if the number of operations waiting on a read lock meets the specified average.
115
Queues: Writers is
Sends an alert if the number of operations waiting on a write lock meets the specified average.
Page Faults
These alert conditions refer to metrics found on the host’s Record Stats and Page Faults charts. To view the
charts, see Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
Accesses Not In Memory: Total is
Sends an alert if the rate of disk accesses meets the specified threshold. MongoDB must access data on disk if
your working set does not fit in memory. This metric is found on the host’s Record Stats chart.
Page Fault Exceptions Thrown: Total is
Sends an alert if the rate of page fault exceptions thrown meets the specified threshold. This metric is found on
the host’s Record Stats chart.
Page Faults is
Sends an alert if the rate of page faults (whether or not an exception is thrown) meets the specified threshold.
This metric is found on the host’s Page Faults chart.
Cursors
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s cursors chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a
Host’s Statistics.
Cursors: Open is
Sends an alert if the number of cursors the server is maintaining for clients meets the specified average.
Cursors: Timed Out is
Sends an alert if the number of timed-out cursors the server is maintaining for clients meets the specified average.
Cursors: Client Cursors Size is
Sends an alert if the cumulative size of the cursors the server is maintaining for clients meets the specified
average.
Network
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s network chart. To view the chart, see Accessing a
Host’s Statistics.
Network: Bytes In is
Sends an alert if the number of bytes sent to the database server meets the specified threshold.
Network: Bytes Out is
Sends an alert if the number of bytes sent from the database server meets the specified threshold.
Network: Num Requests is
Sends an alert if the number of requests sent to the database server meets the specified average.
Replication
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on a primary’s replication oplog window chart or a sec-
ondary’s replication lag chart. To view the charts, see Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
116
Replication Oplog Window is
Sends an alert if the approximate amount of time available in the primary’s replication oplog meets the specified
threshold.
Replication Lag is
Sends an alert if the approximate amount of time that the secondary is behind the primary meets the specified
threshold.
Replication Headroom is
Sends an alert when the difference between the primary oplog window and the replication lag time on a sec-
ondary meets the specified threshold.
Oplog Data per Hour is
Sends an alert when the amount of data per hour being written to a primary’s oplog meets the specified threshold.
DB Storage
This alert condition refers to the metric displayed on the host’s db storage chart. To view the chart, see Accessing
a Host’s Statistics.
DB Storage is
Sends an alert if the amount of on-disk storage space used by extents meets the specified threshold. Extents are
contiguously allocated chunks of datafile space.
DB storage size is larger than DB data size because storage size measures the entirety of each extent, including
space not used by documents. For more information on extents, see the collStats command.
DB Data Size is
Sends an alert if approximate size of all documents (and their paddings) meets the specified threshold.
Journaling
These alert conditions refer to the metrics found on the host’s journal - commits in write lock chart and
journal stats chart. To view the charts, see Accessing a Host’s Statistics.
Journaling Commits in Write Lock is
Sends an alert if the rate of commits that occurred while the database was in write lock meets the specified
average.
Journaling MB is
Sends an alert if the average amount of data written to the recovery log meets the specified threshold.
Journaling Write Data Files MB is
Sends an alert if the average amount of data written to the data files meets the specified threshold.
Replica Set Alerts
These alert conditions are applicable to replica sets.
Primary Elected
Sends an alert when a set elects a new primary. Each time Ops Manager receives a ping, it inspects the output
of the replica set’s rs.status() method for the status of each replica set member. From this output, Ops Manager
determines which replica set member is the primary. If the primary found in the ping data is different than the
current primary known to Ops Manager, this alert triggers.
117
Primary Elected does not always mean that the set elected a new primary. Primary Elected may
also trigger when the same primary is re-elected. This can happen when Ops Manager processes a ping in the
midst of an election.
No Primary
Sends an alert when a replica set does not have a primary. Specifically, when none of the members of a replica
set have a status of PRIMARY, the alert triggers. For example, this condition may arise when a set has an even
number of voting members resulting in a tie.
If the Monitoring Agent collects data during an election for primary, this alert might send a false positive. To
prevent such false positives, set the alert configuration’s after waiting interval (in the configuration’s Send to
section).
Number of Healthy Members is below
Sends an alert when a replica set has fewer than the specified number of healthy members. If the replica set has
the specified number of healthy members or more, Ops Manager triggers no alert.
A replica set member is healthy if its state, as reported in the rs.status() output, is either PRIMARY or
SECONDARY. Hidden secondaries and arbiters are not counted.
As an example, if you have a replica set with one member in the PRIMARY state, two members in
the SECONDARY state, one hidden member in the SECONDARY, one ARBITER, and one member in the
RECOVERING state, then the healthy count is 3.
Number of Unhealthy Members is above
Sends an alert when a replica set has more than the specified number of unhealthy members. If the replica set
has the specified number or fewer, Ops Manager sends no alert.
Replica set members are unhealthy when the agent cannot connect to them, or the member is in a rollback or
recovering state.
Hidden secondaries are not counted.
Agent Alerts
These alert conditions are applicable to Monitoring Agents and Backup Agents.
Monitoring Agent is down
Sends an alert if the Monitoring Agent has been down for at least 7 minutes. Under normal operation, the
Monitoring Agent sends a ping to Ops Manager roughly once per minute. If Ops Manager does not receive a
ping for at least 7 minutes, this alert triggers. However, this alert will never trigger for a group that has no hosts
configured.
Important: When the Monitoring Agent is down, Ops Manager will trigger no other alerts. For example, if a
host is down there is no Monitoring Agent to send data to Ops Manager that could trigger new alerts.
Backup Agent is down
Sends an alert if the Backup Agent has been down for at least 15 minutes. Under normal operation, the Backup
Agent periodically sends data to Ops Manager. This alert is never triggered for a group that has no running
backups.
Monitoring Agent is out of date
Sends an alert when the Monitoring Agent is not running the latest version of the software.
Backup Agent is out of date
Sends an alert when the Backup Agent is not running the latest version of the software.
118
Backup Alerts
These alert conditions are applicable to the Ops Manager Backup service.
Oplog Behind
Sends an alert if the most recent oplog data received by Ops Manager is more than 75 minutes old.
Resync Required
Sends an alert if the replication process for a backup falls too far behind the oplog to catch up. This occurs when
the host overwrites oplog entries that backup has not yet replicated. When this happens, backup must be fully
resynced.
Cluster Mongos Is Missing
Sends an alert if Ops Manager cannot reach a mongos for the cluster.
User Alerts
These alert conditions are applicable to the Ops Manager Users.
Added to Group
Sends an alert when a new user joins the group.
Removed from Group
Sends an alert when a user leaves the group.
Changed Roles
Sends an alert when a user’s roles have been changed.
Group Alert
This alert condition applies to Ops Manager groups.
Users awaiting approval to join group
Sends an alert if there are users who have asked to join the group. A user can ask to join a group when first
registering for Ops Manager.
5.9 Monitoring Metrics
Deployment Description of the Deployment tab, which lists all hosts that are currently being monitored.
Host Statistics In-depth guide to host statistics and the options that you can specify to customize your view.
Aggregated Cluster Statistics Compare hosts dynamically across the cluster.
Replica Set Statistics Compare hosts dynamically across a replica set.
Profile Databases Collect profile data for the host.
Deployment
On this page
•Deployment Page
119
•Host Mapping Page
Deployment provides access to all your monitored objects. The Deployment tab includes the pages described here.
Deployment Page
The Deployment page provides access to all monitored mongod and mongos instances. The page includes the
following information:
Field Description
Last Ping The last time this agent sent a ping to the Ops Manager servers. Click a ping to view a
detailed status from the ping.
Host The hostname and port of the instance. Click the hostname to view host statistics.
Orange triangle icon
under a host name.
The startup warning indicator for the host. Only displayed when warnings exist. Click
the host’s last ping for warning details. Ops Manager startup warnings can include the
following:
• Ops Manager suspects the host has a low ulimit setting of less than 1024. Ops
Manager infers the host’s ulimit setting using the total number of available and
current connections. See the UNIX ulimit Settings reference page.
• Ops Manager flags a deactivated host.
Important: If you have deactivated hosts, review all deactivated hosts to ensure
that they are still in use, and remove all hosts that are not active. Then click on the
warning icon and select Reactive ALL hosts.
Type The type of host. Possible types include the following:
•PRIMARY
•SECONDARY
•STANDALONE
•ARBITER
When the host recovers, the rectangle flag turns yellow and displays RECOVERING. When
the host returns a fatal error, the flag displays FATAL. The flag also can display NO DATA.
Cluster The name of the cluster to which this instance belongs. Only cluster members display this
value. Click the cluster name to display aggregated information on the cluster’s replica sets.
See Aggregated Cluster Statistics for details.
Shard The name of the shard.
Repl Set The name of the shard’s replica set. Click the replica set name to display replica set statis-
tics. See Replica Set Statistics for details.
Up Since The date the host first pinged Ops Manager.
Version The version of the MongoDB running on this instance.
Host Mapping Page
The Host Mapping page shows the mapping between system hostnames and the names provided by the monitored
mongod and mongos processes.
Host Statistics
120
On this page
•Accessing a Host’s Statistics
•Accessing Information on a Host’s Chart
•Chart Annotations
For each host, Ops Manager provides an extensive set of charts for analyzing the statistics collected by the Monitoring
Agent.
Accessing a Host’s Statistics
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the name of the cluster, replica set or process for which to view statistics.
Step 4: Hover the mouse pointer over a chart to display chart controls.
To use the controls, see Accessing Information on a Host’s Chart.
Accessing Information on a Host’s Chart
Hover the mouse cursor over the chart to display the chart controls.
• Click the iicon for a description of the chart.
• Click-and-drag to select a portion of the chart to zoom into. All charts on the page zoom to the same level.
• Double-click to revert the charts back to the default zoom setting.
• Hover the mouse pointer over a point on the chart to display statistics for that point in time.
• Click the two-way arrow to open an expanded version of the chart.
• Click the curved arrow for a list of additional actions:
–Chart Permalink opens a page that displays only this chart.
–Email Chart opens a dialogue box where you can input an email address and short message to send the
chart by email.
• Click and hold the upper-left triangular grabber to move the chart to a different place on the page.
Chart Annotations
Annotations may appear as colored vertical lines on your charts to indicate server events. The following color/event
combinations are:
• A red bar indicates a server restart.
• A purple bar indicates the server is now a primary.
• A yellow bar indicates the server is now a secondary.
121
If you do not wish to see the chart annotations, you can disable them on the Administration tab’s Personalization page.
Aggregated Cluster Statistics
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
Cluster statistics provide an interface to view data for an entire cluster at once. You can compare components dynam-
ically across the cluster and view host-specific and aggregated data, as well as pinpoint moments in time and isolate
data to specific components.
Procedure
To view cluster statistics:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the name of the sharded cluster.
Ops Manager displays a chart and table with an initial set of cluster statistics. At the top of the chart, the DATA SIZE
field measures the cluster’s data size on disk. For more information, see the explanation of dataSize on the dbStats
page.
If Backup is enabled, hover the mouse pointer over the “clock” icon to view the time of the last snapshot and time of
the next scheduled snapshot. Click the icon to view snapshots.
Step 4: Select the components to display.
In the buttons above the chart, select whether to display the cluster’s shards,mongos instances, or config servers.
If you select shards, select whether to display Primaries,Secondaries, or Both using the buttons at the chart’s lower
right.
The chart displays a different colored line for each component. The table below displays additional data for each
component, using the same colors.
Step 5: Select the data to display.
Select the type of data in the CHART drop-down list. Ops Manager graphs the data for each component individually.
You can instead graph the data as an average or sum by clicking the Averaged or Sum button at the chart’s lower right.
122
Step 6: Change the granularity and zoom.
To the right of the chart, select a GRANULARITY for the data. The option you select determines the available ZOOM
options. Whenever you change the granularity, the selected zoom level changes to the closest zoom level available for
that granularity.
To zoom further and isolate a specific region of data, click-and-drag on that region of the chart. To reset the zoom
level, double-click anywhere on the chart.
Step 7: View metrics for a specific date and time.
Move the mouse pointer over the chart to view data for a point in time. The data in the table below the chart changes
as you move the pointer.
Step 8: Isolate certain components for display.
To remove a component from the chart, click its checkmark in the table below the chart. To again display it, click the
checkmark again.
To quickly isolate just a few components from a large number displayed, select the None button below the chart
and then select the checkmark for the individual components to display. Alternatively, select the All button and then
deselect the checkmark for individual components not to display.
Step 9: View statistics for a specific component.
In the table below the chart, click a component’s name to display its statistics page.
If your are viewing shards, you can click the replica set name in the SHARDS column to display replica set statistics,
or you can click the Por Sicon in the MEMBERS column to display host statistics for a primary or secondary. Hover
over an icon for tooltip information.
Step 10: Change the name of the cluster.
If you want to change the name of the cluster, hover the mouse pointer over the cluster name. A pencil icon appears.
Click the icon and enter the new name.
Replica Set Statistics
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
The Replica set statistics interface makes is possible to view data from all replica set members at once.
123
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the name of the replica set.
Ops Manager displays a separate chart for each replica set member.
Step 4: Select the members to display.
In the TOGGLE MEMBERS section at the top of the page, click the Pand Sicons to choose which members to display.
Hover the mouse pointer over an icon to display member information.
Step 5: Select the granularity and the zoom.
Select the GRANULARITY of the data displayed. The selected granularity option determines the available ZOOM
options.
To isolate a specific region of data, click-and-drag on that region of the chart. All other charts automatically zoom to
the same region.
To reset the zoom level, double-click anywhere on the chart.
Step 6: Add, remove, and reorder charts.
Add and remove charts using either the Add Chart drop-down list or the buttons at bottom of the page.
Move a chart within the display by hovering the mouse over the chart, clicking the grabber in the upper left corner,
and dragging the chart to the new position.
Step 7: View an explanation of a chart’s data.
Hover the mouse pointer over the and click the iicon.
Step 8: View metrics for a specific date and time.
Move the mouse pointer over the chart to view data for a point in time.
Profile Databases
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
124
•Procedures
Overview
Monitoring can collect data from MongoDB’s profiler to provide statistics about performance and database operations.
Considerations
Before enabling profiling, be aware of these issues:
• Profile data can include sensitive information, including the content of database queries. Ensure that exposing
this data to Monitoring is consistent with your information security practices.
• The profiler can consume resources which may adversely affect MongoDB performance. Consider the implica-
tions before enabling profiling.
Procedures
Enable Profiling
To allow Monitoring to collect profile data for a specific process:
Note: The Monitoring Agent attempts to minimize its effect on the monitored systems. If resource intensive opera-
tions, like polling profile data, begins to impact the performance of the database, Monitoring will throttle the frequency
that it collects data. See How does Ops Manager gather database statistics? for more information about the agent’s
throttling process.
When enabled, Monitoring samples profiling data from monitored processes. The agent sends only the most recent 20
entries from last minute.
With profiling enabled, configuration changes made in Ops Manager can take up to 2 minutes to propagate to the agent
and another minute before profiling data appears in the Ops Manager interface.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode, and then click the process’s gear icon and select Edit Host.
Step 3: Click the Profiling tab.
Step 4: Turn on profiling.
Click the button to toggle between Off and On. When the button is On, Ops Manager receives database profile
statistics.
125
Step 5: Start database profiling by using the mongo shell to modify the setProfilingLevel com-
mand.
See the database profiler documentation for instructions for using the profiler.
Display Profiling Levels
When profiling is on, the Profile Data tab displays profiled data. For more information on profiling, see the database
profiler documentation in the MongoDB manual.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Select the Profile Data tab.
Delete Profile Data
Deleting profile data deletes the Web UI cache of the current profiling data. You must then disable profiling or drop or
clear the source collection, or Ops Manager will repopulate the profiling data.
If Monitoring is storing a large amount of profile data for your instance, the removal process will not be instantaneous.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode, and then click the process.
Step 3: Select the Profile Data tab.
Step 4: Click the Delete Profile Data button at the bottom of the page.
Step 5: Confirm the deletion.
Ops Manager begins removing stored profile data from the server’s record. Ops Manager removes only the Web UI
cache of the current profiling data. The cache quickly re-populates with the same data if you do not disable profiling
or drop or clear the profiled collection.
5.10 View Logs
On this page
•Overview
•MongoDB Real-Time Logs
•Agent Logs
126
Overview
Ops Manager collects log information for both MongoDB and the Ops Manager agents. For MongoDB deployments,
Ops Manager provides access to both real-time logs and on-disk logs.
The MongoDB logs provide the diagnostic logging information for your mongod and mongos instances. The Agent
logs provide insight into the behavior of your Ops Manager agents.
MongoDB Real-Time Logs
The Monitoring Agent collects real-time log information from each MongoDB deployment by issuing the getLog
command with every monitoring ping. The getLog command collects log entries from the MongoDB RAM cache.
Ops Manager enables real-time log collection by default. You can disable log collection for either the whole Ops
Manager group or for individual MongoDB instances. If you disable log collection, Ops Manager continues to display
previously collected log entries.
View MongoDB Real-Time Logs
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the process.
Step 4: Click the Logs tab.
The tab displays log information. If the tab instead diplays the Collect Logs For Host option, toggle the option to On
and refresh the page.
Step 5: Refresh the browser window to view updated entries.
Enable or Disable Log Collection for a Deployment
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Click view mode.
Step 3: Click the deployment’s gear icon and select Edit Host.
Step 4: Click the Logs tab and toggle the Off /On button as desired.
Step 5: Click Xto close the Edit Host box.
The deployment’s previously existing log entries will continue to appear in the Logs tab, but Ops Manager will not
collect new entries.
127
Enable or Disable Log Collection for the Group
Step 1: Select the Administration tab, then the Group Settings page.
Step 2: Set the Collect Logs For All Hosts option to On or Off, as desired.
MongoDB On-Disk Logs
Ops Manager can collect on-disk logs even if the MongoDB instance is not running. The Automation Agent collects
the logs from the location specified by the MongoDB systemLog.path configuration option. The MongoDB
on-disk logs are a subset of the real-time logs and therefore less verbose.
You can configure log rotation for the on-disk logs. Ops Manager enables log rotation by default.
View MongoDB On-Disk Logs
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then Mongo Logs page.
Alternatively, you can select the Deployment page’s edit mode, then the arrow to the right of a deployment, then the
gear icon drop-down list, and then Request Logs.
Step 2: Request the latest logs.
To request the latest logs:
1. Click the Manage drop-down button and select Request Server Logs.
2. Select the checkboxes for the logs you want to request, then click Request Logs.
Step 3: To view a log, select the Show Log link for the desired date and hostname.
Configure Log Rotation
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then Mongo Logs page.
Step 2: Click the Manage drop-down button and select MongoDB Log Settings.
Step 3: Configure the log rotation settings and click Save.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
Agent Logs
Ops Manager collects logs for all your Automation Agents, Monitoring Agents, and Backup Agents.
128
View Agent Logs
Step 1: From any page, click an agent icon at the top of the page and select Logs.
Ops Manager opens the Agent Logs page and displays the log entries for agents of the same type.
You can also open the Agent Logs page by selecting the Administration tab, then Agents page, and then view logs link
for a particular agent. The page displays the agent’s log entries.
Step 2: Filter the log entries.
Use the drop-down list at the top of the page to display different types of agents.
Use the gear icon to the right of the page to clear filters and to export logs.
Configure Agent Log Rotation
Step 1: Select the Administration tab and then Agents page.
Step 2: Edit the log settings.
Under the Agent Log Settings header, click the pencil icon to edit the log settings for the appropriate agent.
You can modify the following fields:
Name Type Description
Linux Log Path string The path to which the agent writes its logs.
Rotate Logs boolean Specifies whether Ops Manager should rotate the logs for the agent.
Size Threshold (MB) num-
ber
Max size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
Time Threshold
(Hours)
inte-
ger
Max time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
Max Uncompressed
Files
inte-
ger
Optional Max number of total log files to leave uncompressed, including the
current log file.
Max Percent of Disk num-
ber
Optional Max percent of the total disk space all log files can occupy before
deletion.
When you are done modifying the agent log settings, click Confirm.
Step 3: Return to the Deployment page
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 5: Click Confirm & Deploy.
6 Back Up MongoDB Deployments
Backup Flows Describes how Ops Manager backs up MongoDB deployments.
129
Backup Preparations Before backing up your cluster or replica set, decide how to back up the data and what data to
back up.
Activate Backup Activate Backup for a cluster or replica set.
Edit a Backup’s Settings Modify a backup’s schedule, storage engines, and excluded namespaces.
Restore MongoDB Deployments Procedures to restore complete MongoDB deployments using Backup data.
Restore MongoDB Data Procedures to restore data from Backup to MongoDB instances.
Backup Maintenance Procedures to manage backup operations for maintenance.
6.1 Backup Flows
On this page
•Introduction
•Initial Sync
•Routine Operation
•Snapshots
•Grooms
Introduction
The Backup service’s process for keeping a backup in sync with your deployment is analogous to the process used by
a secondary to replicate data in a replica set. Backup first performs an initial sync to catch up with your deployment
and then tails the oplog to stay caught up. Backup takes scheduled snapshots to keep a history of the data.
Initial Sync
Transfer of Data and Oplog Entries
When you start a backup, the Backup Agent streams your deployment’s existing data to the Backup HTTP Service
in batches of documents totaling roughly 10MB. The batches are called “slices.” The Backup HTTP Service stores
the slices in a sync store for later processing. The sync store contains only the data as it existed when you started the
backup.
While transferring the data, the Backup Agent also tails the oplog and also streams the oplog updates to the Backup
HTTP Service. The service places the entries in the oplog store for later processing offline.
By default, both the sync store and oplog store reside on the backing MongoDB replica set that hosts the Backup
Blockstore database.
Building the Backup
When the Backup HTTP Service has received all of the slices, a Backup Daemon creates a local database on its server
and inserts the documents that were captured as slices during the initial sync. The daemon then applies the oplog
entries from the oplog store.
130
The Backup Daemon then validates the data. If there are missing documents, Ops Manager queries the deployment
for the documents and the Backup Daemon inserts them. A missing document could occur because of an update that
caused a document to move during the initial sync.
Once the Backup Daemon validates the accuracy of the data directory, it removes the data slices from the sync store.
At this point, Backup has completed the initial sync process and proceeds to routine operation.
Routine Operation
The Backup Agent tails the deployment’s oplog and routinely batches and transfers new oplog entries to the Backup
HTTP Service, which stores them in the oplog store. The Backup Daemon applies all newly received oplog entries in
batches to its local replica of the backed-up deployment.
Snapshots
During a preset interval, the Backup Daemon takes a snapshot of the data directory for the backed-up deployment,
breaks it into blocks, and transfers the blocks to the Backup Blockstore database. For a sharded cluster, the daemon
takes a snapshot of each shard and of the config servers. The daemon uses checkpoints to synchronize the shards and
config servers for the snapshots.
When a user requests a snapshot, a Backup Daemon retrieves the data from the Backup Blockstore database and
delivers it to the requested destination. See: Restore Flows for an overview of the restore process.
131
Grooms
Groom jobs perform periodic “garbage collection” on the Backup Blockstore database to remove unused blocks and
reclaim space. Unused blocks are those that are no longer referenced by a live snapshot. A scheduling process
determines when grooms are necessary.
6.2 Backup Preparations
On this page
•Overview
•Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy
•Excluded Namespaces
•Storage Engine
•Resyncing Production Deployments
•Checkpoints
•Snapshots when Agent Cannot Stop Balancer
•Snapshots when Agent Cannot Contact a mongod
Overview
Before backing up your cluster or replica set, decide how to back up the data and what data to back up. This page
describes items you must consider before starting a backup.
For an overview of how Backup works, see Backup.
Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy
By default, Ops Manager takes a base snapshot of your data every 6 hours. If desired, administrators can change the
frequency of base snapshots to 8, 12, or 24 hours. Ops Manager creates snapshots automatically on a schedule. You
cannot take snapshots on demand.
Ops Manager retains snapshots for the time periods listed in the following table. If you terminate a backup, Ops
Manager immediately deletes the backup’s snapshots.
Snapshot Default Retention Policy Maximum Retention Setting
Base snapshot. 2 days 5 days.
Daily snapshot 1 week 1 year
Weekly snapshot 1 month 1 year
Monthly snapshot 1 year 3 years.
You can change a backed-up deployment’s schedule through its Edit Snapshot Schedule menu option, available through
the Backup tab. Administrators can change snapshot frequency and retention through the snapshotSchedule resource
in the API. If you change the schedule to save fewer snapshots, Ops Manager does not delete existing snapshots
to conform to the new schedule. To delete unneeded snapshots, see Delete Snapshots for Replica Sets and Sharded
Clusters.
132
Excluded Namespaces
Excluded namespaces are databases or collections that Ops Manager will not back up. Exclude namespaces to prevent
backing up collections that contain logging data, caches, or other ephemeral data. Excluding these kinds of databases
and collections will allow you to reduce backup time and costs.
Storage Engine
When you enable backups for a cluster or replica set that runs on MongoDB 3.0 or higher, you can choose the
storage engine for the backups. Your choices are the MMAPv1 engine or WiredTiger engine. If you do not specify a
storage engine, Ops Manager uses MMAPv1 by default. For more information on storage engines, see Storage in the
MongoDB manual.
You can choose a different storage engine for a backup than you do for the original data. There is no requirement
that the storage engine for a backup match that of the data it replicates. If your original data uses MMAPv1, you can
choose WiredTiger for backing up, and vice versa.
You can change the storage engine for a cluster or replica set’s backups at any time, but doing so requires an initial
sync of the backup on the new engine.
If you choose the WiredTiger engine to back up a collection that already uses WiredTiger, the initial sync repli-
cates all the collection’s WiredTiger options. For information on these options, see the storage.wiredTiger.
collectionConfig section of the Configuration File Options page in the MongoDB manual.
For collections created after initial sync, the Backup Daemon uses its own defaults for storing data. The Daemon will
not replicate any WiredTiger options for a collection created after iniitial sync.
Important: The storage engine chosen for a backup is independent from the storage engine used by the Backup
Database. If the Backup Database uses the MMAPv1 storage engine, it can store backup snapshots for WiredTiger
backup jobs in its blockstore.
Index collection options are never replicated.
Resyncing Production Deployments
For production deployments, it is recommended that as a best practice you periodically (annually) resync all backed-up
replica sets. When you resync, data is read from a secondary in each replica set. During resync, no new snapshots are
generated.
Checkpoints
For sharded clusters, checkpoints provide additional restore points between snapshots. With checkpoints enabled, Ops
Manager Backup creates restoration points at configurable intervals of every 15, 30 or 60 minutes between snapshots.
To create a checkpoint, Ops Manager Backup stops the balancer and inserts a token into the oplog of each shard
and config server in the cluster. These checkpoint tokens are lightweight and do not have a consequential impact on
performance or disk use.
Backup does not require checkpoints, and they are disabled by default.
Restoring from a checkpoint requires Ops Manager Backup to apply the oplog of each shard and config server to
the last snapshot captured before the checkpoint. Restoration from a checkpoint takes longer than restoration from a
snapshot.
133
Snapshots when Agent Cannot Stop Balancer
For sharded clusters, Ops Manager disables the balancer before taking a cluster snapshot. In certain situations, such
as a long migration or no running mongos, Ops Manager tries to disable the balancer but cannot. In such cases, Ops
Manager will continue to take cluster snapshots but will flag the snapshots with a warning that data may be incomplete
and/or inconsistent. Cluster snapshots taken during an active balancing operation run the risk of data loss or orphaned
data.
Snapshots when Agent Cannot Contact a mongod
For sharded clusters, if the Backup Agent cannot reach a mongod instance, whether a shard or config server, then the
agent cannot insert a synchronization oplog token. If this happens, Ops Manager will not create the snapshot and will
display a warning message.
6.3 Activate Backup
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
You can back up a sharded cluster or replica set. To back up a standalone mongod process, you must first convert it
to a single-member replica set. You can choose to back up all databases and collections on the deployment or specific
ones.
Prerequisites
• Ops Manager must be monitoring the deployment. For a sharded cluster, Ops Manager must also be monitoring
at least one mongos in the cluster.
• A replica set must be MongoDB version 2.2.0 or later.
• A sharded-cluster must be MongoDB version 2.4.3 or later.
• Each replica set must have an active primary.
• For a sharded cluster, all config servers must be running and the balancing round must have completed within
the last hour.
• If you explicitly select a sync target, ensure that the sync target is accessible on the network and keeping up with
replication.
Procedure
Before using this procedure, see the Backup Preparations to decide how to back up the data and what data to back up.
134
Step 1: Select the Backup tab.
Step 2: Select the replica set or cluster to back up.
If you have not yet enabled Backup, select Begin Setup and follow the prompts. Skip the rest of the this procedure.
If you have already enabled Backup, navigate to either the Sharded Cluster Status or Replica Set Status page. Then
click the Start button for the replica set or cluster to back up.
Step 3: Select which process to use for the initial Sync Source.
To minimize the impact on the primary, sync off a secondary.
Step 4: If using access control, specify mechanism and credentials, as needed.
Auth Mechanism The authentication mechanism used by the host. Can specify
MONGODB-CR,LDAP (PLAIN), or Kerberos(GSSAPI).
Current DB Username If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the user-
name used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB de-
ployment. See Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR,Configure
Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication, or Configure the Backup Agent
for Kerberos for setting up user credentials.
Current DB Password If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the pass-
word used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB de-
ployment. See Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR,Configure
Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication, or Configure the Backup Agent
for Kerberos for setting up user credentials.
My deployment supports SSL for Mon-
goDB connections
If checked, the Monitoring Agent must have a trusted CA certificate in
order to connect to the MongoDB instances. See Configure Monitoring
Agent for SSL.
You can optionally configure authentication credentials later through the deployment’s gear icon.
Step 5: To optionally select a storage engine or exclude namespaces, click Show Advanced Options.
Select the following as desired:
Storage Engine: Select MongoDB Memory Mapped for the MongoDB default MMAPv1 engine or WiredTiger for
the 64-bit WiredTiger engine available beginning with MongoDB 3.0. Before selecting a storage engine, see the
considerations in Storage Engines.
Manage Excluded Namespaces: Click Manage Excluded Namespaces and enter the databases and collections to ex-
clude. For colletions, enter the full namespace: <database>.<collection>. Click Save. You can later add or
remove namespaces from the backup, as needed. For more information, see Excluded Namespaces.
Step 6: Click Start Backup.
6.4 Edit a Backup’s Settings
135
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
You can modify a backup’s schedule,excluded namespaces, and storage engine.
Procedure
To edit Backup’s settings, select the Backup tab and then the Overview page. The Overview page lists all available
backups. You can then access the settings for each backup using the ellipsis icon.
Enable Cluster Checkpoints
Step 1: Select Edit Snapshot Schedule.
On the line listing the process, click the ellipses icon and click Edit Snapshot Schedule.
Step 2: Enable cluster checkpoints.
Select Create cluster checkpoint every and set the interval. Then click Submit.
Change Snapshot Settings
Step 1: Select Edit Snapshot Schedule
On the line listing the process, click the ellipses icon and click Edit Snapshot Schedule.
Step 2: Configure the Snapshot
Enter the following information as needed and click Submit.
136
Take snapshots every ... and save for Sets how often Ops Manager takes a base snapshot of the deployment and
how long Ops Manager retains base snapshots. For information on how
these settings affect Ops Manager, see Snapshot Frequency and Retention
Policy.
Create cluster checkpoint every
(Sharded Clusters only)
Sets how often Ops Manager creates a checkpoint in between snapshots
of a sharded cluster. Checkpoints provide restore points that you can use
to create custom “point in time” snapshots. For more information, see
Checkpoints.
Store daily snapshots for Sets the time period that Ops Manager retains daily snapshots. For de-
faults, see Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy.
Store weekly snapshots for Sets the time period that Ops Manager retains weekly snapshots. For
defaults, see Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy.
Store monthly snapshots for Sets the time period that Ops Manager retains monthly snapshots. For
defaults, see Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy.
Configure Excluded Namespaces
Step 1: Select Edit Excluded Namespaces
On the line listing the process, click the ellipses icon and click Edit Excluded Namespaces.Excluded namespaces are
databases and collections that Ops Manager will not back up.
Step 2: Modify the excluded namespaces.
Add or remove excluded namespaces as desired and click Submit.
Modify the Storage Engine Used for Backups
Step 1: Select Edit Storage Engine
On the line listing the process, click the ellipses icon and click Edit Storage Engine.
Step 2: Select the storage engine.
Select the storage engine. See: Storage Engine for more about choosing an appropriate storage engine for your backup.
Step 3: Select the sync source.
Select the Sync source from which to create the new backup. In order to use the new storage engine, Ops Manager
must resync the backup on the new storage engine.
137
Step 4: Click Submit.
6.5 Restore MongoDB Deployments
Use these procedures to restore an entire MongoDB deployment using Backup artifacts. For more specific tutorials
for restoration, please see the Restore MongoDB Instances with Backup procedures.
Restore Flows Overview of the different restore types, and how they operate internally.
Restore Sharded Cluster Restore a sharded cluster from a stored snapshot.
Restore Replica Set Restore a replica set from a stored snapshot or custom point-in-time snapshot.
Restore Flows
On this page
•Overview
•Restore Flows
Overview
Ops Manager Backup enables you to restore your mongod instance, replica set, or sharded cluster using stored snap-
shots, or from a point in time as far back as the retention period of your longest snapshot.
The general flows and options are the same whether you are restoring a mongod, replica set, or sharded cluster; the
only major difference is that sharded cluster restores result in the production of multiple restore files that must be
copied to the correct destination.
This page describes the different types of restores and different delivery options, and then provides some insight into
the actual process that occurs when you request a restore through Ops Manager.
For a step-by-step guide to restoring a replica set or sharded cluster using Backup, see: Restore MongoDB Deploy-
ments.
Restore Types
With Backup, you can restore from a stored snapshot or build a custom snapshot reflecting a specific point in time.
For all backups, restoring from a stored snapshot is faster than restoring from a specific point in time.
Snapshots provide a complete backup of the state of your MongoDB deployment at a given point in time. You can
take snapshots every 6, 8, 12, or 24 hours and set a retention policy to determine for how long the snapshots are stored.
Point-in-time restores let you restore your mongod instance or replica set to a specific point in time in the past. You
can restore to any point back to your oldest retained snapshot. For sharded clusters, point-in-time restores let you
restore to a checkpoint. See Checkpoints for more information.
Point-in-time restores take longer to perform than snapshot restores, but allow you to restore more granularly. When
you perform a point-in-time restore, Ops Manager takes the most recent snapshot that occurred prior to that point and
then applies the oplog to bring the database up to the state it was in at that point in time. This way, Ops Manager
creates a custom snapshot, which you can then use in your restore.
138
Delivery Methods and File Formats
Ops Manager provides two delivery methods: HTTP delivery, and SCP.
With HTTP delivery, Ops Manager creates a link that you can use to download the snapshot file or files. See: Advanced
Backup Restore Settings for informaton about configuring the restore behaviors.
With the SCP delivery option, the Backup Daemon securely copies the restore file or files directly to your system. The
Backup File Format and Method tutorial describes how to select a restore’s delivery method and file format.
For SCP delivery, you can choose your file format to better suit your restore needs. With the Individual DB Files
format, Ops Manager transmits the MongoDB data files directly to the target directory. The individual files format
only requires sufficient space on the destination server for the data files.
In contrast, the Archive (tar.gz) option bundles the database files into a single tar.gz archive file, which you must
extract before reconstruction your databases. This is generally faster than the individual files option, but requires
temporary space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon and sufficient space on the destination server to hold the
archive file and extract it.
Windows does not come with SCP and require additional setup outside the scope of this manual.
Restore Flows
Regardless of the delivery method and restore type, Ops Manager’s restore flow follows a consistent pattern: when
you request a restore, the MMS HTTP service calls out to the Backup Daemon, which prepares the snapshot you will
receive, then either the user downloads the files from the MMS HTTP service, or the Backup Daemon securely copies
the files to the destination server.
The following sections describe the restore flows for both snapshot restores and point-in-time restores, for each deliv-
ery and file format option.
HTTP Restore
Snapshot
With the HTTP PULL snapshot restore, the Backup Daemon simply creates a link to the appropriate snapshot in the
Backup Blockstore database. When the user clicks the download link, they download the snapshot from the MMS
HTTP Service, which streams the file out of the Backup Blockstore.
This restore method has the advantage of taking up no space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon: the file passes
directly from the Backup Blockstore to the destination server.
Point-In-Time
The HTTP PULL point-in-time restore follows the same pattern as the HTTP PULL snapshot restore, with added steps
for applying the oplog. When the user requests the restore, the Backup Daemon retrieves the snapshot that immediately
precedes the point in time and writes that snapshot to disk. The Backup Daemon then retrieves oplog entries from the
Backup Blockstore and applies them, creating a custom snapshot from that point in time. The Daemon then writes
the snapshot back to the Backup Blockstore. Finally, when the user clicks the download link, the user downloads the
snapshot from the MMS HTTP Service, which streams the file out of the Backup Blockstore.
This restore method requires that you have adequate space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon for the snapshot
files and oplog.
139
Archive SCP Restore
Snapshot
For a snapshot restore, with SCP archive delivery, the Backup Daemon simply retrieves the snapshot from the Backup
Blockstore and writes it to its disk. The Backup Daemon then combines and compresses the snapshot into a .tar.gz
archive and securely copies the archive to the destination server.
This restore method requries that you have adequate space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon for the snapshot
files and archive.
Point-In-Time
The point-in-time restore with SCP archive delivery follows the same pattern as the snapshot restore, but with added
steps for applying the oplog.
When the user requests the restore, the Backup Daemon retrieves the snapshot that immediately precedes the point in
time and writes that snapshot to disk. The Backup Daemon then retrieves oplog entries from the Backup Blockstore and
applies them, creating a custom snapshot for that point in time. The Backup Daemon then combines and compresses
the snapshot into a tar.gz archive and securely copies the archive to the destination server.
This restore method requries that you have adequate space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon for the snapshot
files, oplog, and archive.
140
Individual Files SCP Restore
Snapshot
For a snapshot restore, with SCP individual files delivery, the Backup Daemon simply retrieves the snapshot from the
Backup Blockstore and securely copies the data files to the target directory on the desintation server.
This restore method also has the advantage of taking up no space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon: the file
passes directly from the Backup Blockstore to the destination server. The destination server requires only sufficient
space for the uncompressed data files. The data is compressed during transmission.
Point-In-Time
The point-in-time restore with SCP individual files delivery follows the same pattern as the snapshot restore, but with
added steps for applying the oplog.
When the user requests the restore, the Backup Daemon retrieves the snapshot that immediately precedes the point in
time and writes that snapshot to disk. The Backup Daemon then retrieves oplog entries from the Backup Blockstore
and applies them, creating a custom snapshot for that point in time. The Backup Daemon then securely copies the data
files to the target directory on the desintation server
This restore method also requries that you have adequate space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon for the
snapshot files and oplog. The destination server requires only sufficient space for the uncompressed data files. The
data is compressed during transmission.
141
Restore a Sharded Cluster from a Backup
On this page
•Overview
•Sequence
•Considerations
•Procedures
Overview
You can restore a sharded cluster onto new hardware from the artifacts captured by Backup.
You can restore from a snapshot or checkpoint. You must enable checkpoints to use them. When you restore from
a checkpoint, Ops Manager takes the snapshot previous to the checkpoint and applies the oplog to create a custom
snapshot. Checkpoint recovery takes longer than recovery from a stored snapshot.
Ops Manager provides restore files as downloadable archive; Ops Manager can also scp files directly to your system.
The scp delivery method requires additional configuration but provides faster delivery.
Ops Manager provides a separate backup artifacts for each shard and one file for the config servers.
142
Sequence
The sequence to restore a snapshot is to:
• select and download the restore files,
• distribute the restore files to their new locations,
• start the mongod instances,
• configure each shard’s replica set, and
• configure and start the cluster.
Considerations
Client Requests During Restoration
You must ensure that the MongoDB deployment does not receive client requests during restoration. You must either:
• restore to new systems with new hostnames and reconfigure your application code once the new deployment is
running, or
• ensure that the MongoDB deployment will not receive client requests while you restore data.
143
Snapshots when Agent Cannot Stop Balancer
Ops Manager displays a warning next to cluster snapshots taken while the balancer is enabled. If you restore from
such a snapshot, you run the risk of lost or orphaned data. For more information, see Snapshots when Agent Cannot
Stop Balancer.
Procedures
Select and Download the Snapshot Files
Step 1: Select the Backup tab and then select Sharded Cluster Status.
Step 2: Click the name of the sharded cluster to restore.
Ops Manager displays your selection’s stored snapshots.
Step 3: Click the Restore button and select the snapshot from which to restore.
Click the Restore button at the top of the page. On the resulting page, choose from restoring from a stored snapshot or
creating a custom snapshot.
To select a stored snapshot, click the Restore this snapshot link next to the snapshot.
144
To create a custom snapshot from a checkpoint, select the Use Custom Point In Time checkbox and enter the point in
time in the Date and Time fields, and click Next.
Step 4: Select the checkpoint.
Ops Manager lists the checkpoints that are the closest match to the point in time that you selected. Select a checkpoint
from which to create the snapshot, and click Next.
Step 5: Select HTTP as the delivery method for the snapshot.
In the Delivery Method field, select Pull via Secure HTTP (HTTPS).
Optionally, you can instead choose SCP as the delivery method. See: Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery for
the SCP delivery option’s configuration. If you choose SCP, you must provide the hostname and port of the server to
receive the files and provide access to the server through a username and password or though an SSH key. Follow the
instructions on the Ops Manager screen.
Step 6: Select tar.gz as the download format.
In the Format drop-down list, select Archive (tar.gz).
145
Step 7: Finalize the request.
Click Finalize Request and confirm your identify via two-factor verification. Then click Finalize Request again.
Step 8: Retrieve the snapshot.
Ops Manager creates one-time links to tar files for the snapshot. The links are available for one download each, and
each expires after an hour.
To download the tar files, select the Ops Manager Backup tab and then Restore Jobs. When the restore job completes,
the download link appears for every config server and shard in the cluster. Click each link to download the tar files
and copy each tar file to its server. For a shard, copy the file to every member of the shard’s replica set.
If you optionally chose SCP as the delivery method, the files are copied to the server directory you specfied. To verify
that the files are complete, see the section on how to validate an SCP restore.
Restore Each Shard’s Primary
For all shards, restore the primary. You must have a copy of the snapshot on the server that provides the primary:
Step 1: Shut down the entire replica set.
Shut down the replica set’s mongod processes using one of the following methods, depending on your configuration:
•Automated Deployment:
If you use Ops Manager Automation to manage the replica set, you must shut down through the Ops Manager
console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
Connect to each member of the set and issue the following:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
Connect to each member of the set and issue the following:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
Step 2: Restore the snapshot data files to the primary.
Extract the data files to the location where the mongod instance will access them through the dbpath setting. If
you are restoring to existing hardware, use a different data directory than used previously. The following are example
commands:
tar -xvf <backup-restore-name>.tar.gz
mv <backup-restore-name> /data
146
Step 3: Start the primary with the new dbpath.
For example:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name> --logpath /<path-to-data>
˓→/mongodb.log --fork
Step 4: Connect to the primary and initiate the replica set.
For example, first issue the following to connect:
mongo
And then issue rs.initiate():
rs.initiate()
Step 5: Restart the primary as a standalone, without the --replSet option.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as a standalone:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --logpath /<path-to-data>/mongodb.log --fork
Step 6: Connect to the primary and drop the oplog.
For example, first issue the following to connect:
mongo
And then issue rs.drop() to drop the oplog.
use local
db.oplog.rs.drop()
147
Step 7: Run the seedSecondary.sh script on the primary.
The seedSecondary.sh script re-creates the oplog collection and seeds it with the timestamp of the snapshot’s creation.
This will allow the secondary to come back up to time without requiring a full initial sync. This script is customized
by Ops Manager for this particular snapshot and is included in the backup restore file.
To run the script, issue the following command at the system prompt, where <mongod-port> is the port of the
mongod instance and <oplog-size-in-gigabytes> is the size of the replica set’s oplog:
./seedSecondary.sh <mongod-port> <oplog-size-in-gigabytes>
Step 8: Restart the primary as part of a replica set.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as part of a replica set:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name>
Restore All Secondaries
After you have restored the primary for a shard you can restore all secondaries. You must have a copy of the snapshot
on all servers that provide the secondaries:
Step 1: Connect to the server where you will create the new secondary.
Step 2: Restore the snapshot data files to the secondary.
Extract the data files to the location where the mongod instance will access them through the dbpath setting. If
you are restoring to existing hardware, use a different data directory than used previously. The following are example
commands:
tar -xvf <backup-restore-name>.tar.gz
mv <backup-restore-name> /data
148
Step 3: Start the secondary as a standalone, without the --replSet option.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as a standalone:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --logpath /<path-to-data>/mongodb.log --fork
Step 4: Run the seedSecondary.sh script on the secondary.
The seedSecondary.sh script re-creates the oplog collection and seeds it with the timestamp of the snapshot’s creation.
This will allow the secondary to come back up to time without requiring a full initial sync. This script is customized
by Ops Manager for this particular snapshot and is included in the backup restore file.
To run the script, issue the following command at the system prompt, where <mongod-port> is the port of the
mongod instance and <oplog-size-in-gigabytes> is the size of the replica set’s oplog:
./seedSecondary.sh <mongod-port> <oplog-size-in-gigabytes>
Step 5: Restart the secondary as part of the replica set.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as part of a replica set:
149
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name>
Step 6: Connect to the primary and add the secondary to the replica set.
Connect to the primary and use rs.add() to add the secondary to the replica set.
rs.add("<host>:<port>")
Repeat this operation for each member of the set.
Restore Each Config Server
Perform this procedure separately for each config server. Each config server must have a copy of the tar file with the
config server data.
Step 1: Restore the snapshot to the config server.
Extract the data files to the location where the config server’s mongod instance will access them. This is the location
you will specify as the dbPath when running mongod for the config server.
tar -xvf <backup-restore-name>.tar.gz
mv <backup-restore-name> /data
Step 2: Start the config server.
The following example starts the config server using the new data:
mongod --configsvr --dbpath /data
Step 3: Update the sharded cluster metadata.
If the new shards do not have the same hostnames and ports as the original cluster, you must update the shard metadata.
To do this, connect to each config server and update the data.
First connect to the config server with the mongo shell. For example:
mongo
Then access the shards collection in the config database. For example:
use config
db.shards.find().pretty()
The find() method returns the documents in the shards collection. The collection contains a document for each
shard in the cluster. The host field for a shard displays the name of the shard’s replica set and then the hostname and
port of the shard. For example:
{"_id" :"shard0000","host" :"shard1/localhost:30000" }
150
To change a shard’s hostname and port, use the MongoDB update() command to modify the documents in the
shards collection.
Start the mongos
Start the cluster’s mongos bound to your new config servers.
Restore a Replica Set from a Backup
On this page
•Overview
•Sequence
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
You can restore a replica set from the artifacts captured by Ops Manager Backup. You can restore either a stored
snapshot or a point in time in the last 24 hours between snapshots. If you restore from a point in time, Ops Manager
Backup creates a custom snapshot for the selected point by applying the oplog to the previous regular snapshot. Point-
in-time recovery takes longer than recovery from a stored snapshot.
When you select a snapshot to restore, Ops Manager creates a link to download the snapshot as a tar file. The link
is available for one download only and times out after an hour. You can optionally have Ops Manager scp the tar
file directly to your system. The scp delivery method requires additional configuration but provides faster delivery.
Windows does not come with scp and require additional setup outside the scope of this manual.
You can restore either to new hardware or existing hardware. If you restore to existing hardware, use a different data
directory than used previously.
Sequence
The sequence used here to restore a replica set is to download the restore file and distribute it to each server, restore
the primary, and then restore the secondaries. For additional approaches to restoring replica sets, see the procedure
from the MongoDB Manual to Restore a Replica Set from a Backup.
Prerequisites
Oplog Size
To seed each replica set member, you will use the seedSecondary.sh script included in the backup restore file.
When you run the script, you will provide the replica set’s oplog size, in gigabytes. If you do not have the size, see the
section titled “Check the Size of the Oplog” on the Troubleshoot Replica Sets page of the MongoDB manual.
151
Client Requests
You must ensure that the MongoDB deployment does not receive client requests during restoration. You must either:
• restore to new systems with new hostnames and reconfigure your application code once the new deployment is
running, or
• ensure that the MongoDB deployment will not receive client requests while you restore data.
Procedures
Select and Download the Snapshot
Step 1: Select the Backups tab and then select Replica Set Status.
Step 2: Click the name of the replica set to restore.
Ops Manager displays your selection’s stored snapshots.
Step 3: Select the snapshot from which to restore.
To select a stored snapshot, click the Restore this snapshot link next to the snapshot.
To select a custom snapshot, click the Restore button at the top of the page. In the resulting page, select a snapshot
as the starting point. Then select the Use Custom Point In Time checkbox and enter the point in time in the Date and
Time fields. Ops Manager includes all operations up to but not including the point in time. For example, if you select
12:00, the last operation in the restore is 11:59:59 or earlier. Click Next.
Step 4: Select HTTP as the delivery method for the snapshot.
In the Delivery Method field, select Pull via Secure HTTP (HTTPS).
Optionally, you can instead choose SCP as the delivery method. See: Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery for
the SCP delivery option’s configuration. If you choose SCP, you must provide the hostname and port of the server to
receive the files and provide access to the server through a username and password or though an SSH key. Follow the
instructions on the Ops Manager screen.
Step 5: Finalize the request.
Click Finalize Request and confirm your identify via two-factor verification. Then click Finalize Request again.
Step 6: Retrieve the snapshot.
Ops Manager creates a one-time link to a tar file of the snapshot. The link is available for one download and times out
after an hour.
To download the snapshot, select the Ops Manager Backup tab and then select Restore Jobs. When the restore job
completes, select the download link next to the snapshot.
If you optionally chose SCP as the delivery method, the files are copied to the server directory you specfied. To verify
that the files are complete, see the section on how to validate an SCP restore.
152
Step 7: Copy the snapshot to each server to restore.
Restore the Primary
You must have a copy of the snapshot on the server that provides the primary:
Step 1: Shut down the entire replica set.
Shut down the replica set’s mongod processes using one of the following methods, depending on your configuration:
•Automated Deployment:
If you use Ops Manager Automation to manage the replica set, you must shut down through the Ops Manager
console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
Connect to each member of the set and issue the following:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
Connect to each member of the set and issue the following:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
Step 2: Restore the snapshot data files to the primary.
Extract the data files to the location where the mongod instance will access them through the dbpath setting. If
you are restoring to existing hardware, use a different data directory than used previously. The following are example
commands:
tar -xvf <backup-restore-name>.tar.gz
mv <backup-restore-name> /data
Step 3: Start the primary with the new dbpath.
For example:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name> --logpath /<path-to-data>
˓→/mongodb.log --fork
Step 4: Connect to the primary and initiate the replica set.
For example, first issue the following to connect:
mongo
And then issue rs.initiate():
153
rs.initiate()
Step 5: Restart the primary as a standalone, without the --replSet option.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as a standalone:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --logpath /<path-to-data>/mongodb.log --fork
Step 6: Connect to the primary and drop the oplog.
For example, first issue the following to connect:
mongo
And then issue rs.drop() to drop the oplog.
use local
db.oplog.rs.drop()
Step 7: Run the seedSecondary.sh script on the primary.
The seedSecondary.sh script re-creates the oplog collection and seeds it with the timestamp of the snapshot’s creation.
This will allow the secondary to come back up to time without requiring a full initial sync. This script is customized
by Ops Manager for this particular snapshot and is included in the backup restore file.
To run the script, issue the following command at the system prompt, where <mongod-port> is the port of the
mongod instance and <oplog-size-in-gigabytes> is the size of the replica set’s oplog:
./seedSecondary.sh <mongod-port> <oplog-size-in-gigabytes>
Step 8: Restart the primary as part of a replica set.
Use the following sequence:
154
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as part of a replica set:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name>
Restore Each Secondary
After you have restored the primary you can restore all secondaries. You must have a copy of the snapshot on all
servers that provide the secondaries:
Step 1: Connect to the server where you will create the new secondary.
Step 2: Restore the snapshot data files to the secondary.
Extract the data files to the location where the mongod instance will access them through the dbpath setting. If
you are restoring to existing hardware, use a different data directory than used previously. The following are example
commands:
tar -xvf <backup-restore-name>.tar.gz
mv <backup-restore-name> /data
Step 3: Start the secondary as a standalone, without the --replSet option.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
155
2. Restart the process as a standalone:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --logpath /<path-to-data>/mongodb.log --fork
Step 4: Run the seedSecondary.sh script on the secondary.
The seedSecondary.sh script re-creates the oplog collection and seeds it with the timestamp of the snapshot’s creation.
This will allow the secondary to come back up to time without requiring a full initial sync. This script is customized
by Ops Manager for this particular snapshot and is included in the backup restore file.
To run the script, issue the following command at the system prompt, where <mongod-port> is the port of the
mongod instance and <oplog-size-in-gigabytes> is the size of the replica set’s oplog:
./seedSecondary.sh <mongod-port> <oplog-size-in-gigabytes>
Step 5: Restart the secondary as part of the replica set.
Use the following sequence:
1. Shut down the process using one of the following methods:
•Automated Deployment:
Shut down through the Ops Manager console. See Shut Down MongoDB Processes.
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.6 or Later:
use admin
db.shutdownServer()
•Non-Automated Deployment on MongoDB 2.4 or earlier:
use admin
db.shutdownServer( { force:true } )
2. Restart the process as part of a replica set:
mongod --dbpath /<path-to-data> --replSet <replica-set-name>
Step 6: Connect to the primary and add the secondary to the replica set.
Connect to the primary and use rs.add() to add the secondary to the replica set.
rs.add("<host>:<port>")
Repeat this operation for each member of the set.
6.6 Restore MongoDB Instances with Backup
Use the procedures in these tutorials to restore data from Backup artifacts to MongoDB instances. If you want to
restore an entire MongoDB deployment, use the Restore MongoDB Deployments tutorials.
Restore from a Stored Snapshot with HTTP Pull Restore a replica set or sharded cluster from a stored snapshot with
HTTP Pull delivery.
156
Restore from a Stored Snapshot with SCP Delivery Restore a replica set or sharded cluster from a stored snapshot
with SCP delivery.
Restore from a Point in the Last Day Restore a replica set from a custom snapshot from any point within a 24-hour
period of time.
Restore a Single Database Restore only a portion of a backup to a new mongod instance.
Seed a New Secondary Use Ops Manager Backup to seed a new secondary in an existing replica set.
Restore from a Stored Snapshot
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
•Additional Information
Overview
With Backup, you can restore from a stored snapshot or build a custom snapshot reflecting a different point in the last
24 hours. For all backups, restoring from a stored snapshot is faster than restoring from a custom snapshot in the last
24 hours.
By default, Backup automatically takes and stores a snapshot every 6 hours. Snapshots remain available for restoration
following the snapshot retention policy.
For replica sets, you will receive one .tar.gz file containing your data; for sharded clusters, you will receive a series
of .tar.gz files.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Backups tab, and then select either Sharded Cluster Status or Replica Set Status.
Step 2: Click the name of the sharded cluster or replica set to restore.
Ops Manager displays your selection’s stored snapshots.
Step 3: Select the snapshot from which to restore.
To select a stored snapshot, click the Restore this snapshot link next to the snapshot.
To select a custom snapshot, click the Restore button at the top of the page. In the resulting page, select a snapshot
as the starting point. Then select the Use Custom Point In Time checkbox and enter the point in time in the Date and
Time fields. Ops Manager includes all operations up to but not including the point in time. For example, if you select
12:00, the last operation in the restore is 11:59:59 or earlier. Click Next.
157
Step 4: Select HTTP as the delivery method for the snapshot.
In the Delivery Method field, select Pull via Secure HTTP (HTTPS).
Optionally, you can instead choose SCP as the delivery method. See: Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery for
the SCP delivery option’s configuration. If you choose SCP, you must provide the hostname and port of the server to
receive the files and provide access to the server through a username and password or though an SSH key. Follow the
instructions on the Ops Manager screen.
Step 5: Finalize the request.
Click Finalize Request and confirm your identify via two-factor verification. Then click Finalize Request again.
Step 6: Retrieve the snapshot.
To download the snapshot, select the Ops Manager Backup tab and then select Restore Jobs. When the restore job
completes, select the download link next to the snapshot.
For a sharded clusters, Ops Manager provides several download links for the several .tar.gz files.
Step 7: Extract the data files from the .tar.gz archive created by the backup service.
tar -zxvf <tarball-name>.tar.gz
Step 8: Select the location where the mongod will access the data files.
The directory you choose will become the mongod’s data directory. You can either create a new directory or use the
existing location of the extracted data files.
If you create a new directory, move the files to that directory.
If you use the existing location of the extracted data files, you can optionally create a symbolic link to the location
using the following command, where <hash>-<rsname>-<time> is the name of the snapshot and <dbpath> is
the data directory:
ln -s <hash>-<rsname>-<time>/ <dbpath>
Step 9: Start the mongod with the new data directory as the dbpath.
In the mongod configuration, set the dbpath option to the path of the data directory that holds the data files from the
Backup snapshot.
mongod --dbpath /data/db
Additional Information
Restore from a Point in the Last 24 Hours
158
Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery
On this page
•Requirements
•Procedure
•Additional Information
In addition to the PULL via Secure HTTP (HTTPS) delivery method, Ops Manager Backup supports snapshot delivery
using SCP. With Push via Secure Copy (SCP), Ops Manager copies the snapshot directly to the target system.
For an overview of Ops Manager’s internal behavior and a more detailed description of the restore types and delivery
options, see: Restore Flows.
Requirements
In order for Ops Manager to be able to securely copy your snapshots to your system, you must grant Ops Manager
access to the server, either by providing a username and password, or by providing a username with an SSH public
key. See: Select Backup File Delivery Method and Format for instructions.
Procedure
Step 1: Select the Backups tab, and then select either Sharded Cluster Status or Replica Set Status.
Step 2: Click the name of the sharded cluster or replica set to restore.
Ops Manager displays your selection’s stored snapshots.
Step 3: Select the snapshot from which to restore.
To select a stored snapshot, click the Restore this snapshot link next to the snapshot.
To select a custom snapshot, click the Restore button at the top of the page. In the resulting page, select a snapshot
as the starting point. Then select the Use Custom Point In Time checkbox and enter the point in time in the Date and
Time fields. Ops Manager includes all operations up to but not including the point in time. For example, if you select
12:00, the last operation in the restore is 11:59:59 or earlier. Click Next.
Step 4: Select Push via Secure Copy (SCP) as the delivery method.
In the Select Restore Destination screen’s Delivery Method field, select Push via Secure Copy (SCP) to transfer the
backup to your server via SCP.
Step 5: Enter the SCP details.
Enter the following:
Format: Select the file format. The Individual DB Files option copies the data files directly to the target directory.
159
With the Individual DB Files format, Ops Manager transmits the MongoDB data files directly to the target directory.
The individual files format only requires sufficient space on the destination server for the data files.
In contrast, the Archive (tar.gz) option bundles the database files into a single tar.gz archive file, which you must
extract before reconstruction your databases. This requires temporary space on the server hosting the Backup Daemon
and sufficient space on the destination server to hold the archive file and extract it.
SCP Host: Your server.
SCP Port: SCP runs over port 22 by default.
SCP User: A username for your server.
Auth Method: Select either password or SSH as the authentication method. See: Select Backup File Delivery Method
and Format for details about the authentication methods.
Password: If using a password for authentication, enter the password. To test the authentication, click Test.
Target Directory: The server location to which to transfer the snapshot.
Step 6: Finalize the request.
Click Finalize Request and confirm your identify via two-factor verification. Then click Finalize Request again.
Ops Manager pushes the snapshot to the location you specified.
Additional Information
The Restore a Sharded Cluster from a Backup and Restore a Replica Set from a Backup tutorials provide more detailed
instructions for restoring a sharded cluster or replica set using snapshot.
Restore from a Point in the Last 24 Hours
Backup lets you restore data from a point within the last 24-hour period. Ops Manager creates a backup that includes
all operations up to the point in time you select. The point in time is an upper exclusive bound: if you select a
timestamp of 12:00, then the last operation in the restore will be no later than 11:59:59.
To restore from a point in time, see the procedure for the resource you are restoring:
•Restore a Sharded Cluster from a Backup
•Restore a Replica Set from a Backup
Restore a Single Database
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
160
Overview
Backup snapshots contain a complete copy of your mongod data directory. In MongoDB 2.6 and earlier, you can
restore a portion of your data, such as a single database or collection, from a backup with the mongodump and
mongorestore tools and the --dbpath option.
Important: MongoDB 3.0 introduced major changes to the MongoDB tools in order to support additional storage
engines such as WiredTiger. In MongoDB 3.0, mongodump and mongorestore do not support the --dbpath
option. As such, you cannot use this procedure for a partial data restore on a mongod running MongoDB 3.0.
If you anticipate you will want to restore a single database, create a backup for just that database by excluding the
databases or collections that you do not want to back up using the Blacklist field in the Advanced Settings.
Procedure
Select and Download a Snapshot
Step 1: Select the Backups tab and then select Replica Set Status.
Step 2: Click the name of the replica set that contains the database to restore.
Ops Manager displays your selection’s stored snapshots.
Step 3: Select the snapshot from which to restore.
To select a stored snapshot, click the Restore this snapshot link next to the snapshot.
To select a custom snapshot, click the Restore button at the top of the page. In the resulting page, select a snapshot
as the starting point. Then select the Use Custom Point In Time checkbox and enter the point in time in the Date and
Time fields. Ops Manager includes all operations up to but not including the point in time. For example, if you select
12:00, the last operation in the restore is 11:59:59 or earlier. Click Next.
Step 4: Select HTTP as the delivery method for the snapshot.
In the Delivery Method field, select Pull via Secure HTTP (HTTPS).
Optionally, you can instead choose SCP as the delivery method. See: Retrieve a Snapshot with SCP Delivery for
the SCP delivery option’s configuration. If you choose SCP, you must provide the hostname and port of the server to
receive the files and provide access to the server through a username and password or though an SSH key. Follow the
instructions on the Ops Manager screen.
Step 5: Finalize the request.
Click Finalize Request and confirm your identify via two-factor verification. Then click Finalize Request again.
161
Step 6: Retrieve the snapshot.
Ops Manager creates a one-time link to a tar file of the snapshot. The link is available for one download and times out
after an hour.
To download the snapshot, select the Ops Manager Backup tab and then select Restore Jobs. When the restore job
completes, select the download link next to the snapshot.
If you optionally chose SCP as the delivery method, the files are copied to the server directory you specfied. To verify
that the files are complete, see the section on how to validate an SCP restore.
Restore the Database
Step 1: Use the mongodump command to dump a single database.
Use the unpacked snapshot restore directory as the dpath switch and the single database name as the --db switch
in the mongodump command:
mongodump --dbpath <path> --db <database-name>
Step 2: Use the mongorestore command to import the single database dump.
Enter this mongorestore command:
mongorestore --db <database-name> --drop
You also may specify the --drop switch to drop all collections from the target database before you restore them from
the bson file created with mongodump.
Seed a New Secondary from Backup Restore
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Considerations
•Procedure
Overview
When a natural synchronization of a new secondary host costs too much time or resources, seeding a secondary from an
Ops Manager Backup restore is a faster better alternative. Seeding also does not impact an active MongoDB instance
to retrieve data.
162
Prerequisites
To seed a secondary from a backup restore file, you must have:
• A backup restore file.
• The seedSecondary.sh script included in the backup restore file.
When you run the seedSecondary.sh script as part of this tutorial, you must provide the replica set’s oplog size,
in gigabytes. If you do not have the size, see the section titled “Check the Size of the Oplog” on the Troubleshoot
Replica Sets page of the MongoDB manual.
Considerations
An Ops Manager backup stores all database files in a single directory. If you run MongoDB with the
directoryPerDb option, then after restore you must redistribute the files to the different databases. Ops Man-
ager Backup does not provide restoration artifacts that use the directoryPerDb option.
The seedSecondary.sh file will not be in the backup restore if you have blacklisted dbs or collections or have resynced
your backup after the snapshot (or for config servers). In these cases, including the script would cause an inconsistent
secondary. In the case of a blacklist, your secondary would not include some collections which would cause problems
for your deployment.
Seeding a new secondary from a backup restore requires an oplog window on the current primary that spans back to
the snapshot’s timestamp.
Procedure
Step 1: Remove the broken secondary from your replica set.
rs.remove("SECONDARYHOST:SECONDARYPORT")
Step 2: Login to the server on which to create the new secondary.
Step 3: Bring up new node as a standalone.
tar -xvf backup-restore-name.tar.gz
mv backup-restore-name data
mongod --port <alternate-port> --dbpath /data
Where ALTERNATEPORT is not the usual port your secondary runs on.
Step 4: Run seedSecondary.sh script to create oplog collection and seed with correct timestamp.
The seedSecondary.sh script re-creates the oplog collection and seeds it with correct timestamp.
To run the script, issue the following command at the system prompt, where <mongod-port> is the port of the
mongod instance and <oplog-size-in-gigabytes> is the size of the replica set’s oplog:
./seedSecondary.sh <mongod-port> <oplog-size-in-gigabytes>
163
Step 5: Shut down the new secondary on the alternate port.
Step 6: Start up the new secondary.
mongod --port <secondary-port> --dbpath /data --replSet REPLICASETNAME
Step 7: Add the new secondary to the replica set on the primary host.
rs.add("<secondary-host>:<secondary-port>")
6.7 Backup Maintenance
Configure Backup Data Delivery Select Backup delivery method and file format.
Delete Backup Snapshots Manually remove unneeded stored snapshots from Ops Manager.
Stop, Disable, Restart Backup Procedures to stop, restart, or disable backup.
Resync Backup If your Backup oplog has fallen too far behind your deployment to catch up, you must resync the
Backup service.
Select Backup File Delivery Method and Format
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
•Next Steps
Overview
With Backup, you can restore from a stored snapshot or, if you are restoring a replica set, you may build a custom
snapshot reflecting a different point in the last 24 hours. For all backups, restoring from a stored snapshot is faster
than restoring from a custom snapshot in the last 24 hours.
Once you select a backup-enabled sharded cluster or replica set to restore, the next step is to select the delivery method
and file format.
Procedures
Select Backup File via Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
In the Select Restore Destination window, select Pull via Secure HTTP (HTTPS) to create a one-time direct download
link.
164
Select Backup File via Secure Copy (SCP)
In the Select Restore Destination window, select Push via Secure Copy (SCP). You can grant access by supplying Ops
Manager with a username and password to your server, or you can provide a username and grant access via SSH public
key.
To grant access via SSH public key:
Step 1: Select the Administration tab, and then select Group Settings.
Step 2: Scroll to the Public Key for SCP Restores setting.
Step 3: In the Passphrase box, enter a passphrase and then click the Generate a New Public Key
button.
Backup generates and displays a public key.
Step 4: Log in to your server using the same username you will supply in your restore request.
Step 5: Add the public key to the authorized_keys file for that user.
The authorized_keys file is often located in the ~/.ssh directory.
Important: For security reasons, you should remove this public key from the authorized_keys file once you
have obtained your backup file.
Note: For security reasons, you should remove this public key from the authorized hosts file once you have obtained
your backup file.
Select Backup File Format
In the Select Restore Destination window, select Individual DB Files or Archive (tar.gz) as the Format:
• Select Individual DB Files to transmit MongoDB data files produced by Ops Manager Backup directly to the
target directory. The individual database files are faster for Backup to construct, but require additional file space
on the destination server. The data is compressed during transmission.
• Select Archive (tar.gz) to deliver database files in a single tar.gz file you must extract before reconstructing
databases.
Next Steps
Restore from a Stored Snapshot
Restore from a Point in the Last 24 Hours
165
Delete Snapshots for Replica Sets and Sharded Clusters
On this page
•Overview
•Constraints
•Procedure
Overview
To delete snapshots for replica sets and sharded clusters, use the Ops Manager console to find then select a backup
snapshot to delete.
Constraints
You can delete any replica set or sharded cluster snapshot if it is not needed for replica set point-in-time restores.
Procedure
Step 1: Click the Ops Manager Backup tab.
Step 2: Select type of backup file to delete.
Select either Replica Set Status or Sharded Cluster Status.
Step 3: Click the name of the replica set or sharded cluster.
Displays replica set or sharded cluster details with a list of possible backup files to delete.
Step 4: Select backup file to delete.
On the list of snapshots, click the Delete link to the right of a snapshot.
Step 5: Confirm deletion.
Click the OK button on the Delete Snapshot interface to confirm deletion of the backup.
Stop, Start, or Disable the Ops Manager Backup Service
On this page
•Overview
166
•Procedures
Overview
Stopping the Ops Manager Backup Service for a replica set or sharded cluster suspends the service for that resource.
Ops Manager stops taking new snapshots but retains existing snapshots until their listed expiration date.
After stopping backups, you can restart the Backup Service at any time. Depending how much time has elapsed, the
Backup Service may perform an initial sync.
Disabling the Ops Manager Backup Service, by contrast, immediately deletes all snapshots. Later, if you want back
up the cluster or replica set, when you enable backup, Ops Manager behaves as if the resource has never been backed
up. Enabling backups on a previously disabled resource always requires an initial sync.
Procedures
Stop the Backup Service for a Cluster or Replica Set
Step 1: Click the Backup tab and then click either Sharded Cluster Status or Replica Set Status,
depending on the resource to stop backup for.
Step 2: Click Stop for the cluster or replica set.
If prompted, enter the two-factor authentication code, click Verify, and click Stop again.
Restart the Ops Manager Backup Service
Step 1: Click the Backup tab and then click either Sharded Cluster Status or Replica Set Status,
depending on the resource to re-enable.
Step 2: Click Restart for the cluster or replica set.
Step 3: Select a Sync source and click Restart.
Disable the Ops Manager Backup Service
Step 1: Stop and then terminate each sharded cluster enrolled in Backup.
In Ops Manager, click the Backup tab and select Sharded Cluster Status.
For each cluster enrolled in Backup, click Stop. If prompted, enter the two-factor authentication code, click Verify,
and click Stop again.
When the Terminate button appears, click Terminate. Click Terminate again.
167
Step 2: Stop and then terminate each replica set enrolled in Backup.
In Ops Manager, click the Backup tab and select Replica Set Status.
For each replica set enrolled in Backup, click Stop. If prompted, enter the two-factor authentication code, click Verify,
and click Stop again.
When the Terminate button appears, click Terminate. Click Terminate again.
Step 3: Stop all Backup Agents.
On Linux
Issue the following command:
service mongodb-mms-backup-agent stop
On Windows
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Services.
In the list of services, select the MMS Backup Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Stop.
Resync Backup
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Procedures
Overview
When a backup becomes out of sync with the MongoDB deployment, Ops Manager produces a Backup requires
resync alert. If you receive a Backup requires resync alert, you must resync the backup for the specified
MongoDB instance.
The following scenarios trigger a Backup requires resync alert:
•The Oplog has rolled over. This is by far the most common case for the Backup requires resync alert
and occurs whenever the Backup Agent’s tailing cursor cannot keep up with the deployment’s oplog. This is
similar to when a secondary falls too far behind the primary in a replica set. Without a resync, the Backups will
not catch up.
•Unsafe applyOps. This occurs when a document that Backup does not have a copy of is indicated.
•Data corruption or other illegal instruction. This typically causes replication, and therefore the backup job,
to break. When the daemon sees the broken job, it requests a resync.
168
During the resync, data is read from a secondary in each replica set and Ops Manager does not produce any new
snapshots.
Note: For production deployments, you should resync all backups annually.
Considerations
To avoid the need for resyncs, ensure the Backup oplog does not fall behind the deployment’s oplog. This requires
that:
• adequate machine resources are provisioned for the agent, and that
• you restart the Ops Manager agents in a timely manner following maintenance or other downtime.
To provide a buffer for maintenance and for occasional activity bursts, ensure that the oplog on the primary is large
enough to contain at least 24 hours of activity. For more information on the Backup oplog, see the Backup FAQs.
Procedures
Use the appropriate procedure below for your deployment type, sharded cluster or replica set.
Resync a Sharded Cluster
Step 1: Select the Backup tab and then select Sharded Cluster Status.
Step 2: Select See Shards/Configs.
The column expands to display the shards and config servers.
Step 3: Resync.
For the MongoDB instance to resync:
Click the resync link.
Accept the default selection in the Sync source drop-down list, and click the RESYNC button.
If prompted for a two-factor verification code, enter the code and click VERIFY. Then click the RESYNC button again.
Resync a Replica Set
Step 1: Select the Backup tab and then select Replica Set Status.
Step 2: In the replica set’s LAST SYNC column, select resync.
Step 3: Select a Sync source and click the RESYNC button.
If prompted for a two-factor verification code, enter the code and click VERIFY. Then click the RESYNC button again.
169
7 Security
Security Options & Support Matrices Describes Ops Manager security features.
Firewall Configuration Describes the ports used by Ops Manager components.
Change the Ops Manager Ports Describes how to change the default ports used by Ops Manager on Windows and
Unix-based systems.
SSL Connections with Ops Manager Run the Ops Manager Application over HTTPS and require users to have a
valid certificate to connect to the Ops Manager web interface.
SSL Connections with Backing Instances Configure SSL connections to the backing MongoDB processes that host
the databases that support Ops Manager.
SSL Connections with MongoDB Deployments Specify SSL use for host.
LDAP for Ops Manager Users Configure Ops Manager to use LDAP to store user data and permissions.
Configure Authentication for MongoDB Deployments Edit authentication credentials for host.
System-wide Two-Factor Authentication Configure two-factor authentication.
Manage Your Account’s Two-Factor Authentication Describes two-factor authentication, which is required for Ops
Manager.
7.1 Security Overview
Overview
Ops Manager provides security options to ensure the security of your Ops Manager agents, Ops Manager servers, and
MongoDB deployments. Ops Manager supports the options described in the tables on this page.
170
Security Options
Connections with Ops
Manager
Connections with Ops
Manager Backing In-
stances
Connections with Mon-
goDB Deployments
Ops Manager not applicable •SSL
•MONGODB-CR
•LDAP
•Kerberos
Ops Manager connects
to MongoDB through the
Monitoring, Backup, and
Automation agents.
Monitoring Agent •SSL not applicable •SSL
•MONGODB-CR
•LDAP
•Kerberos
Backup Agent •SSL not applicable •SSL
•MONGODB-CR
•LDAP
•Kerberos
Automation Agent •SSL not applicable •MONGODB-CR
Ops Manager user •SSL
•Ops Manager ac-
cess control
•LDAP
not applicable For user access to Mon-
goDB, see Authentication
in the MongoDB manual.
Supported User Authentication Per Release
The following table shows the available user authentication mechanisms and the release the mechanism became avail-
able.
Method Available beginning with. . .
Authentication against Ops Manager Application database OnPrem 1.0
Authentication against LDAP OnPrem 1.4
Supported MongoDB Security Features on Linux
This section describes supported security options on Linux.
Connections Between Ops Manager Servers and Backing Replica Sets
The following table shows the authentication and SSL options available between Ops Manager and the Ops Manager
Application Database and Backup Blockstore Database. These options do not apply to the HEAD databases that reside
on the Backup Daemon:
171
User-
name/Password
Authentication
MongoDB
SSL Connec-
tions
Kerberos
Authentica-
tion
MongoDB SSL Connec-
tions with Client Certifi-
cates
x509
Authenti-
cation
LDAP
Authenti-
cation
OnPrem 1.0+ Ops Manager
1.6+
OnPrem 1.3 Ops Manager 1.6+ Ops Man-
ager 1.6+
OnPrem
1.5+
Connections Between Agents and MongoDB Deployments
The following table shows the authentication and SSL options available between the Ops Manager agents and the
MongoDB deployments they manage and back up:
User-
name/Password
Authentication
MongoDB
SSL Con-
nections
Kerberos
Authenti-
cation
MongoDB SSL Con-
nections with Client
Certificates
x509
Authen-
tication
LDAP
Authenti-
cation
Moni-
toring
Agent
OnPrem 1.0 OnPrem 1.0 OnPrem
1.3
OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem
1.5+
Backup
Agent
OnPrem 1.4 OnPrem 1.4 OnPrem
1.4.1
OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem
1.5+
Au-
toma-
tion
Agent
Ops Manager
1.6+
Supported MongoDB Security Features on Windows
This section describes supported security options on Windows.
Connections Between Ops Manager Servers and Backing Replica Sets
The following table shows the authentication and SSL options available between Ops Manager and the Ops Manager
Application Database and Backup Blockstore Database. These options do not apply to the HEAD databases that reside
on the Backup Daemon:
User-
name/Password
Authentication
MongoDB
SSL Connec-
tions
Kerberos
Authentica-
tion
MongoDB SSL Connec-
tions with Client Certifi-
cates
x509
Authenti-
cation
LDAP
Authenti-
cation
OnPrem 1.5+ Ops Manager
1.6+
Ops Manager 1.6+ Ops Man-
ager 1.6+
OnPrem
1.5+
Connections Between Agents and MongoDB Deployments
The following table shows the authentication and SSL options available between the Ops Manager agents and the
MongoDB deployments they manage and back up:
172
User-
name/Password
Authentication
MongoDB
SSL Con-
nections
Kerberos
Authenti-
cation
MongoDB SSL Con-
nections with Client
Certificates
x509
Authen-
tication
LDAP
Authenti-
cation
Moni-
toring
Agent
OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem
1.5+
Backup
Agent
OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem 1.5+ OnPrem
1.5+
Au-
toma-
tion
Agent
Ops Manager
1.6+
7.2 Firewall Configuration
Overview
Ops Manager components use the default ports and health-check endpoints described here.
Ports
Although the following components are logically distinct, the Ops Manager HTTP Service,Backup HTTP Service, and
Backup Alert Service are all part of the Ops Manager Application and typically run on a single system. The Backup
Daemon typically runs on a distinct system.
Ops Manager HTTP Service
8080
Web server, available from browsers. The system running the Monitoring Agent must be able to access this port
as well.
Backup HTTP Service
8081
Available from browsers for HTTP restores, and from systems running the Backup Agent.
8091
Optional
Used for internal diagnostics. Only available on the localhost interface.
Backup Alert Service
8650
A “kill-port” that the control script uses to signal a shutdown.
Only available on the localhost interface.
173
8092
Optional
Used for internal diagnostics. Only available on the localhost interface.
Backup Daemon
8640
A “kill-port” that the control script uses to signal a shutdown.
Only available on the localhost interface.
27500-27503
The Backup Daemon uses this port range to on the localhost interface to run mongod instances to apply oplog
entries to maintain the local copies of the backed up database.
8090
Optional
Used for internal diagnostics. Only available on the localhost interface.
Monitoring HTTP Endpoints
Ops Manager provides health-check endpoints for the monitoring of the Ops Manager components via a standard
monitoring service, such as Zabbix or Nagios. These endpoints are only accessible on the localhost interface.
Backup HTTP Service Endpoint
The Backup HTTP Service on the Ops Manager Application exposes the following endpoint:
http://localhost:8091/health
The endpoint checks the connections from the service to the Ops Manager Application Database and the Backup
Blockstore Database.
A successful response from the endpoint returns the following:
{
"mms_db":"OK",
"backup_db":"OK"
}
Backup Alert Service Endpoint
The Backup Alert Service on the Ops Manager Application exposes the following health-check endpoint:
http://localhost:8092/health
Backup Daemon Endpoint
The Backup Daemon on the Backup Daemon server exposes a health-check endpoint at:
174
http://localhost:8090/health
7.3 Change the Ops Manager Ports
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
By default, Ops Manager uses port 8080 for the Ops Manager HTTP Service and port 8081 for the Backup HTTP
Service.
To use different ports, you need to configure Ops Manager to use the ports, update mms.centralUrl and mms.
backupCentralUrl, and restart Ops Manager.
Procedures
Change the Default Port on Unix-based Systems
To change the ports on Unix-based operating systems, you must edit the port settings in <install-directory>/
conf/mms.conf, update the mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl values in the conf-mms-
properties value, and restart Ops Manager.
Step 1: Open mms.conf for editing.
Open the mms.conf file with root access. mms.conf is located in the <install_dir>/conf/ directory.
Step 2: Set the BASE_PORT value to the port Ops Manager should use.
By default, Ops Manager uses port 8080. Change the BASE_PORT value to the desired port number.
BASE_PORT=11700
If you wish to change the port for Ops Manager connections over SSL, update BASE_SSL_PORT.
When changing the port, ensure that the chosen port is available for use.
Step 3: Set the BACKUP_BASE_PORT value to the port the Backup HTTP Service should use.
By default, the Backup HTTP Service uses port 8081. To change the port, set BACKUP_BASE_PORT to the desired
port number.
BACKUP_BASE_PORT=11701
175
If you wish to change the port for Ops Manager connections over SSL, update BACKUP_BASE_SSL_PORT.
When changing the port, ensure that the chosen port is available for use. You must use different ports for the
BASE_PORT and BACKUP_BASE_PORT.
Step 4: Save the changes.
Step 5: Edit mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl to use the new ports.
Open conf-mms.properties with root access for editing.
Set mms.centralUrl to the new port specified by the BASE_PORT:
mms.centralUrl=http://mms.example.com:11700
Set mms.backupCentralUrl to use the new port specified by the BACKUP_BASE_PORT:
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://mms.example.com:11701
Save the changes, and close the file.
Step 6: Restart Ops Manager.
Depending on how you installed Ops Manager, the command to restart Ops Manager will vary.
Installation with DEB or RPM package.
If you installed using a DEB or RPM package, use the following command to restart Ops Manager:
sudo service mongodb-mms restart
Installation from .tar.gz archive.
If you installed using a .tar.gz archive, use the following command to restart Ops Manager:
sudo /etc/init.d/mongodb-mms restart
Ops Manager will restart. The Ops Manager interface should be accessible at the new URL and port combination.
Change the Default Port on a Windows System
To change the ports on Windows, you need to edit two registry key values in the Windows registry, update the mms.
centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl values in the conf-mms.properties file, and restart Ops Manager.
Step 1: Open the Registry Editor.
From the Start menu, click Run, and then type regedit, and click OK. The Registry Editor will open.
176
Step 2: Set the port that Ops Manager should use.
By default, Ops Manager uses port 8080. You can change the port by editing the relevant registry value.
Open the following registry value:
SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Apache Software Foundation\Procrun 2.
˓→0\MMS\Parameters\Java\Options
Step 3: Add -Dbase-port=<portnumber> to the Options registry value, setting the value to the
desired port.
Add a new line in the Options file that resembles the following:
-Dbase-port=11700
When changing the port, ensure that the chosen port is available.
Step 4: To change the Backup HTTP Service’s port, open the
\MMSBSlurp\Parameters\Java\Options registry value.
Open the following registry value:
SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Apache Software Foundation\Procrun 2.
˓→0\MMSBSlurp\Parameters\Java\Options
Step 5: Edit -Dbase-port=8081 to point to the desired port.
-Dbase-port=8081 is already listed in the Options registry value. Edit it to use the desired port:
-Dbase-port=11701
When changing the port, ensure that the chosen port is available.
Step 6: When you are done editing the settings, click OK, and exit the Registry Editor.
Step 7: Edit mms.centralUrl and mms.backupCentralUrl to use the new ports.
Open conf-mms.properties with root access for editing.
Update mms.centralUrl to use the new port specified by -DBase-port in the
\MMS\Parameters\Java\Options registry value:
mms.centralUrl=http://mms.example.com:11700
177
Update mms.backupCentralUrl to use the new port specified by -DBase-port in the
\MMSBSlurp\Parameters\Java\Options registry value:
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://mms.example.com:11701
Save the changes, and close the file.
Step 8: Restart Ops Manager.
To restart the Ops Manager HTTP service, open the Control Panel, then System and Security, then Administrative
Tools, and finally, double click to open the Services window.
In the Services list, restart the MongoDB Ops Manager HTTP Service and MongoDB Backup HTTP
Service by right-clicking on them in the list, and choosing Restart.
Ops Manager will restart. The Ops Manager interface should be accessible at the new URL and port combination.
7.4 Configure SSL Connections to Ops Manager
On this page
•Overview
•Run the Ops Manager Application Over HTTPS
Overview
You can encrypt connections from the Monitoring and Backup Agents to Ops Manager and from website clients to the
Ops Manager web interface. You can encrypt connections in either of two ways:
• Set up an HTTPs proxy in front of Ops Manager.
• Run the Ops Manager Application over HTTPS, as described here.
Run the Ops Manager Application Over HTTPS
To run the Ops Manager Application over HTTPS, you can configure Ops Manager with the server’s certificate and
private key.
Step 1: Open the conf-mms.properties file with root privileges.
For the file location, see Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Step 2: Configure the mms.https.PEMKeyFile and mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword settings.
Set mms.https.PEMKeyFile to a PEM file containing an X509 certificate and private key, and set mms.https.
PEMKeyFilePassword to the password for the certificate. For example:
178
mms.https.PEMKeyFile=<path_and_name_of_pem_file>
mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword=<password_for_pem_file>
Set mms.centralUrl to the new HTTPS information. For example:
mms.centralUrl=https://mms.example.net:8443
8443 is the default port used by Ops Manager.
7.5 Configure the Connections to the Backing MongoDB Instances
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
If you set up your backing MongoDB instances to use access control or to run over SSL, then you must update Ops
Manager’s configuration files with the necessary information for accessing the MongoDB instances.
The conf-mms.properties file configures the connection from Ops Manager to the Ops Manager Application
database.
If you are using Backup, you also need to update the conf-daemon.properties file so that the Backup Daemon
can connect to the Ops Manager Application Database, and configure the Backup databases in the Ops Manager UI.
Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have deployed the Ops Manager Application Database and Backup Blockstore
Database, and that you have configured them to use access control and/or SSL. For information on deploying Mon-
goDB with access control or to use SSL, see Security Concepts in the MongoDB manual.
Procedures
Configure Ops Manager to Connect to Backing Databases with Access Control
MongoDB deployments can use MONGODB-CR/SCRAM-SHA-1 username-password authentication, Kerberos au-
thentication, LDAP authentication, or x.509 Client Certificate authentication to manage access to the database.
If your Ops Manager Application database uses access control, you must configure Ops Manager and the Backup
Daemon to be able to connect to the database.
Step 1: Open the Ops Manager configuration files with root privileges.
Open the files listed below. Ops Manager Configuration Files describes the locations of each file:
179
•conf-mms.properties, which configures Ops Manager’s connection to the Ops Manager Application
Database.
•Optional conf-daemon.properties, which configures the Backup Daemon’s connection to the Ops Man-
ager Application Database. You only need to open conf-daemon.propeties if you have installed the
Backup Daemon.
Step 2: Configure Ops Manager to connect to the Ops Manager Application database.
mongo.mongoUri contains the connection string used to access the Ops Manager Application Database.
The mongo.mongoUri reference provides examples of the connection string format for each authentication mecha-
nism and details the required permissions for the connecting user.
For an Ops Manager Application database using Kerberos authentication, the mongo.mongoUri setting would
resemble:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://username%40REALM.example.net@mydb1.example.net:40000/?
˓→authMechanism=GSSAPI
Step 3: Optional: Configure the Backup Daemon to connect to the Ops Manager Application
database.
If you have installed the Backup Daemon, you must configure mongo.mongoUri in conf-daemon.
properties so that the Backup Daemon can connect to the Ops Manager Application database.
mongo.mongoUri contains the connection string used to access the Ops Manager Application Database.
The mongo.mongoUri reference provides examples of the connection string format for each authentication mecha-
nism and details the required permissions for the connecting user.
For an Ops Manager Application database using Kerberos authentication, the mongo.mongoUri setting would
resemble:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://username%40REALM.example.net@mydb1.example.net:40000/?
˓→authMechanism=GSSAPI
mongo.mongoUri should be idential in both conf-mms.properties and conf-daemon.properties.
Step 4: Configure any other authentication mechanism-specific settings in both conf-mms.
properties and conf-daemon.properties.
If you are using Kerberos authentication, you must configure the Kerberos settings, as in the following:
jvm.java.security.krb5.kdc=kdc.example.com
jvm.java.security.krb5.realm=EXAMPLE.COM
mms.kerberos.principal=mms/mmsweb.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM
mms.kerberos.keyTab=/path/to/mms.keytab
If you are using x.509 Client Certificate Authentication, you must also be connecting over SSL. See: Configure SSL
Connections to the Ops Manager Application Database for the SSL configuration instructions.
180
Step 5: Restart Ops Manager and the Backup Daemon.
If the Ops Manager Application database is running over SSL, proceed to the SSL configuration tutorial.
Restart Ops Manager and the Backup Daemon using the appropriate command for your distribution:
Installed on Linux with DEB or RPM packages:
sudo service mongodb-mms restart
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon restart
Installed on Linux from an Archive:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms restart
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon restart
Installed on Windows:
• Open Control Panel, then System and Security, then Administrative Tools, and then
Services. In the Services list, right-click on the MongoDB Ops Manager HTTP Service and select
Restart.
• On the Backup Daemon server, open Control Panel, then System and Security, then
Administrative Tools, and then Services. Right-click on the MMS Backup Daemon Service
and select Restart.
Configure SSL Connections to the Ops Manager Application Database
Step 1: Open the Ops Manager configuration files with root privileges.
Open the files listed below. Ops Manager Configuration Files describes the locations of each file:
•conf-mms.properties, which configures Ops Manager’s connection to the Ops Manager Application
Database.
•Optional conf-daemon.properties, which configures the Backup Daemon’s connection to the Ops Man-
ager Application Database. You only need to open conf-daemon.propeties if you have installed the
Backup Daemon.
Step 2: Configure Ops Manager to connect to the Ops Manager Application database over SSL.
Configure the following settings in conf-mms.properties:
mongo.ssl: Set this to true to indicate that the Ops Manager Application Database is using SSL.
mongodb.ssl.CAFile: Specify the PEM file that contains the root certificate chain from the Certificate Authority
that signed the MongoDB server certificate.
mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFile: If the MongoDB instance is running with --sslCAFile option, specify the PEM
file containing an x.509 certificate and private key.
mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFilePassword: If the client PEM file contains an encrypted private key, specify the
password for PEM file. To encrypt this password in the configuration file, use the Ops Manager credentialstool
tool. See Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
181
Step 3: Optional: Configure the Backup Daemon to connect to the Ops Manager Application
database over SSL.
If you are using Backup, set the following settings in conf-daemon.properties:
Set mongo.ssl to true. This setting should match the mongo.ssl setting in conf-mms.properties.
Update the SSL settings with the SSL client certificate information to use to connect to the backing databases.
mongodb.ssl.CAFile,mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFile, and mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFilePassword
should match the settings in conf-mms.properties.
Step 4: Restart Ops Manager and the Backup Daemon.
Restart Ops Manager and the Backup Daemon using the appropriate command for your distribution:
Installed on Linux with DEB or RPM packages:
sudo service mongodb-mms restart
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-daemon restart
Installed on Linux from an Archive:
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms restart
<install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms-backup-daemon restart
Installed on Windows:
• Open Control Panel, then System and Security, then Administrative Tools, and then
Services. In the Services list, right-click on the MongoDB Ops Manager HTTP Service and select
Restart.
• On the Backup Daemon server, open Control Panel, then System and Security, then
Administrative Tools, and then Services. Right-click on the MMS Backup Daemon Service
and select Restart.
7.6 Configure SSL for MongoDB
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
If your MongoDB deployment uses SSL, then you must configure the Use SSL setting for the deployment, as described
here.
You also must configure the agents’ SSL settings, as described in Configure Monitoring Agent for SSL and Configure
Backup Agent for SSL.
182
Procedures
Edit Host SSL Use for Monitoring
Before editing these credentials, update the agent’s configuration file to use SSL. Configure Monitoring Agent for SSL.
To specify SSL use:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Select the process’s gear icon and select Edit Host.
Step 3: Select SSL.
Step 4: Turn ON or OFF.
Step 5: Close the dialog.
Edit Host Credential Information for Backup
Before editing these credentials, update the agent’s configuration file to use SSL. Configure Backup Agent for SSL.
To specify SSL use:
Step 1: Select the Backup tab and then select Replica Set Status or Sharded Cluster Status.
Step 2: On the line listing the cluster or replica set, click the gear icon.
Step 3: Select SSL.
Step 4: Turn ON or OFF
Step 5: Close the dialog.
7.7 Configure Users and Groups with LDAP for Ops Manager
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Important: You must start with a fresh installation of the latest version of Ops Manager. There is no method for
converting an existing Ops Manager deployment to use LDAP user management.
183
Overview
You can configure Ops Manager to use a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) service to manage user
authentication. Users log in using the standard Ops Manager interface. Ops Manager synchronizes user name and
email addresses in Ops Manager user records with the values in LDAP user records.
Note: If your MongoDB deployment uses LDAP, you must also create MongoDB users for the Ops Manager agents.
For more information, see Configure Monitoring Agent for LDAP and Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentica-
tion.
Additionally, and independently, the Ops Manager Application can also use LDAP to authenticate to its backing in-
stances. To use LDAP with backing instances, set the mongo.mongoUri in addition to the LDAP settings described
in the procedure below.
User Authentication
When a user logs in, Ops Manager searches LDAP for a matching user. To perform the search, Ops Manager
logs into LDAP as the “search” user, using the credentials specified in the mms.ldap.bindDn and mms.ldap.
bindPassword settings in the Ops Manager configuration file.
Ops Manager searches LDAP within the base distinguished name defined in the mms.ldap.user.baseDn setting
of the Ops Manager configuration file and matches the user according to the LDAP attribute defined in the mms.
ldap.user.searchAttribute setting. If a matching user is found, Ops Manager authenticates the supplied
password against the LDAP password.
Access Control
LDAP groups let you control access to Ops Manager. You map LDAP groups to Ops Manager roles and assign the
LDAP groups to the users who should have those roles.
To use LDAP groups effectively, create additional groups within Ops Manager to control access to specific deploy-
ments in your organization. For example, create separate Ops Manager groups for development environments and for
production environments. Provide access to a deployment by mapping an LDAP group to a role in the Ops Manager
group.
This tutorial describes how to map LDAP groups to global Ops Manager roles and to group-level Ops Manager roles.
You do the former through the Ops Manager configuration file and the latter through the Ops Manager interface.
Note: Changes made to LDAP groups can take up to an hour to appear in Ops Manager.
Global Owner Access
Your LDAP installation must include a group that you can assign to the Ops Manager mms.ldap.global.role.
owner setting. The first user to log into Ops Manager with LDAP authentication must belong to this LDAP group.
This user will also create the initial Ops Manager group.
For example, if LDAP has an admin group for use by Ops Manager administrators, set the mms.ldap.global.
role.owner property to admin during the appropriate step in the procedure below.
184
Prerequisites
The Ops Manager Application must be installed and configured. You must either start with a new Ops Manager
installation or reset your installation to a clean state. For assistance, contact your MongoDB account manager.
The LDAP server must be installed, configured, and accessible to Ops Manager.
Procedure
To configure LDAP authentication, define user records in LDAP, configure LDAP settings in Ops Manager, and then
associate LDAP groups with Ops Manager group-level roles, as described here:
Step 1: Define LDAP user records.
Step 2: Update the service class setting in conf-mms.properties.
Set the mms.userSvcClass setting in the Ops Manager conf-mms.properties configuration file to the value of the
LDAP service class. For example:
mms.userSvcClass=com.xgen.svc.mms.svc.user.UserSvcLdap
Step 3: Enter LDAP user settings in conf-mms.properties.
Enter values for the following settings. The LDAP group you specify for the mms.ldap.global.role.owner
setting must have a user assigned to it. You will sign in as this user later in this procedure. For more information on
setting or an example value, click the setting or see LDAP User Settings:
•mms.ldap.url.
•mms.ldap.bindDn.
•mms.ldap.bindPassword.
•mms.ldap.user.baseDn.
•mms.ldap.user.searchAttribute.
•mms.ldap.user.group.
•mms.ldap.global.role.owner
Optional settings:
•mms.ldap.user.firstName.
•mms.ldap.user.lastName.
•mms.ldap.user.email.
Step 4: Associate LDAP groups with global Ops Manager roles in conf-mms.properties.
In addition to the mms.ldap.global.role.owner setting that you assigned in the previous step, assign the
remaining global-role settings. Each provides the members of the specified LDAP group or groups with an Ops
Manager global role. Global roles provide access to all the Ops Manager groups in the Ops Manager deployment.
185
You can specify an LDAP group using any format, including Common Name (cn) or Distinguished Name (dn). The
format you choose must be consistent across settings and consistent with the format used in the LDAP user records in
the attribute specified in the mms.ldap.user.group setting.
For more information and example values, click the settings or see LDAP Global Role Settings:
•mms.ldap.global.role.automationAdmin
•mms.ldap.global.role.backupAdmin
•mms.ldap.global.role.monitoringAdmin
•mms.ldap.global.role.userAdmin
•mms.ldap.global.role.readOnly
Optional:
•mms.ldap.group.separator
Step 5: Log in as a global owner and create the first Ops Manager group.
Log into Ops Manager as an LDAP user that is part of the LDAP group specified in the Ops Manager mms.ldap.
global.role.owner setting.
Upon successful login, Ops Manager displays your groups page.
Step 6: Associate LDAP groups with group-level roles.
On the Ops Manager My Groups page (in the Administration tab), click the Add Group button.
Enter a name for the new Ops Manager group and enter the LDAP groups that should provide the permissions for each
group-level role.
Select the checkbox to agree to the terms of service.
Click Add Group.
Step 7: Add your MongoDB deployments.
Specify the LDAP authentication settings when adding a MongoDB deployment.
7.8 Configure MongoDB Authentication and Authorization
On this page
•Overview
•Access Control Mechanisms
•Edit Host Credentials
186
Overview
Your MongoDB deployments can use the access control mechanisms described here. You specify the authentication
settings when adding the deployment. You can also edit settings after adding a deployment, as described on this page.
If a deployment uses access control, the Monitoring and Backup Agents must authenticate to the deployment as
MongoDB users with appropriate access. See the following:
•Required Access for Monitoring Agent
•Required Access for Backup Agent
Access Control Mechanisms
MONGODB-CR
MongoDB Challenge-Response (MONGODB-CR) is the MongoDB default for authentication and authorization. To
enable, see MongoDB access control.
To create MongoDB users for the Ops Manager agents, see Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR and
Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR.
To configure the Ops Manager Application to authenticate to the backing instances using MONGODB-CR, see mongo.
mongoUri.
LDAP
To use LDAP for access control, see LDAP.
Kerberos
If your MongoDB deployment uses Kerberos for authentication, you must create the Kerberos Principal for the Ops
Manager agents, create a MongoDB user for that Kerberos Principal, edit the agent’s configuration file. If you are
running both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent on the same server, then both agents must connect as the
same Kerberos Principal.
To create a Kerberos Principal and the associated MongoDB user as well as edit the configuration file, see Configure
the Monitoring Agent for Kerberos and Configure the Backup Agent for Kerberos.
Specify Kerberos as the MongoDB process’s authentication mechanism when adding the deployment or in the proce-
dure on this page for editing a deployment.
To enable Kerberos authentication between the Ops Manager Application and the Ops Manager Application Database,
configure the Kerberos Settings and the mongo.mongoUri setting. You must configure all required Kerberos settings
to enable Kerberos authentication.
Edit Host Credentials
If you configure authentication credentials, the Ops Manager agents must authenticate to the deployment as a Mon-
goDB user with the proper access. Configure the agents with the proper credentials before configuring the credentials
on the deployment. See:
•Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
•Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
187
Edit Host Credential Information for Monitoring
Before editing these credentials, set up the agent as a user in MongoDB with appropriate access. See Configure
Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
To edit authentication credentials:
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment page.
Step 2: Select the process’s gear icon and select Edit Host.
Step 3: Select the Credentials tab.
Step 4: At the bottom of the dialog box, click the Change button.
Step 5: Enter the credentials.
Edit the following information, as appropriate:
Auth Mechanism The authentication mechanism used by the host. Can specify
MONGODB-CR,LDAP (PLAIN), or Kerberos(GSSAPI).
Current DB Username If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the user-
name used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB de-
ployment. See Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR,Config-
ure Monitoring Agent for LDAP, or Configure the Monitoring Agent for
Kerberos for setting up user credentials.
Current DB Password If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the pass-
word used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB deploy-
ment. See Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR,Configure
Monitoring Agent for LDAP, or Configure the Monitoring Agent for Ker-
beros for setting up user credentials.
Update other hosts in replica
set/sharded cluster as well
Only for cluster or replica set. If checked, apply the credentials to all other
hosts in the cluster or replica set.
Step 6: Click the Submit button.
Step 7: Close the dialog box.
Edit Host Credential Information for Backup
Before editing these credentials, set up the agent as a user in MongoDB with appropriate access. See Configure Backup
Agent for Access Control.
To edit authentication credential information:
188
Step 1: Select the Backup tab and then select Replica Set Status or Sharded Cluster Status.
Step 2: On the line listing the cluster or replica set, click the gear icon.
Step 3: Select Edit Credentials.
Step 4: Enter the credentials.
Edit the following information, as appropriate:
Auth Mechanism The authentication mechanism used by the host. Can specify
MONGODB-CR,LDAP (PLAIN), or Kerberos(GSSAPI).
Current DB Username If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the user-
name used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB de-
ployment. See Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR,Configure
Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication, or Configure the Backup Agent
for Kerberos for setting up user credentials.
Current DB Password If the authentication mechanism is MONGODB-CR or LDAP, the pass-
word used to authenticate the Monitoring Agent to the MongoDB de-
ployment. See Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR,Configure
Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication, or Configure the Backup Agent
for Kerberos for setting up user credentials.
My deployment supports SSL for Mon-
goDB connections
If checked, the Monitoring Agent must have a trusted CA certificate in
order to connect to the MongoDB instances. See Configure Monitoring
Agent for SSL.
Step 5: Click Save.
7.9 Manage Two-Factor Authentication for Ops Manager
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
When enabled, two-factor authentication requires a user to enter a verification code to log in and to perform certain
protected operations. Operations that require two-factor authentication include:
• restoring and deleting snapshots,
• stopping and terminating Backup for a sharded cluster or replica set,
• inviting and adding users,
• generating new two-factor authentication backup codes, and
• saving phone numbers for two-factor authentication.
189
Administrators with access to the Ops Manager Application’s <install_dir>/conf/conf-mms.
properties configuration file on your servers can enable two-factor authentication through the file’s mms.
multiFactorAuth.require setting. Administrators can also enable two-factor authentication to use Twilio to
send verification codes to uses.
Users configure two-factor authentication on their accounts through their Ops Manager user profiles, where they select
whether to receive their verification codes through voice calls, text messages (SMS), or the Google Authenticator
application. If your organization does not use Twilio, then users can receive codes only through Google Authenticator.
Administrators can reset accounts for individual users as needed. Reseting a user’s account clears out the user’s
existing settings for two-factor authentication. When the user next performs an action that requires verification, Ops
Manager forces the user to re-enter settings for two-factor authentication.
Procedures
Enable Two-factor Authentication
Step 1: Open the Ops Manager Application’s conf-mms.properties file.
The conf-mms.properties file is located in the <install_dir>/conf/ directory. See Ops Manager Con-
figuration Files for more information.
Step 2: Set the mms.multiFactorAuth.require property to true.
mms.multiFactorAuth.require=true
Step 3: Restart the Ops Manager Application.
sudo service mongodb-mms start
Enable Twilio Integration
Step 1: Configure Twilio integration.
Configure Twilio integration through the Twilio settings in the Ops Manager Application’s conf-mms.
properties file.
Step 2: Restart the Ops Manager Application.
For example:
sudo service mongodb-mms start
190
Reset a User’s Two-factor Authentication Account
Reseting the user’s account clears out any existing two-factor authentication information. The user will be forced to
set it up again at the next login.
You must have the global user admin or global owner role to perform this procedure.
Step 1: Open Ops Manager Administration.
To open Administration, click the Admin link in the Ops Manager banner.
Step 2: Select the Users page.
Step 3: Locate the user and click the pencil icon on the user’s line.
Step 4: Select the Clear Two Factor Auth checkbox.
7.10 Manage Your Two-Factor Authentication Options
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
When enabled, Ops Manager requires two-factor authentication to help users control access to their Ops Manager
accounts. To log into Ops Manager, a user must provide their password (i.e. “something you know”), as well as a
second time-sensitive verification code, delivered during authentication (i.e. “something you have”). By requiring
both factors, Ops Manager can grant authentication requests with a higher degree of confidence.
Ops Manager users receive verification codes through text messages (SMS), automated voice calls or an application
that implements the Time-based One-time Password Algorithm (TOTP), such as the Google Authenticator application.
Users can configure two-factor authentication mechanisms when signing up for Ops Manager or in the Administration
tab’s Account page in Ops Manager.
Authentication with Text or Voice Messages
Users can receive verification codes through text or voice by providing phone numbers when setting up their Ops
Manager profiles. When a user needs a code, Ops Manager sends the code using text (SMS) or through an automated
phone call that reads out the code.
Certain network providers and countries may impose delays on SMS messages. Users who experience delays should
consider Google Authenticator for verification codes.
Note: From India, use Google Authenticator for two-factor authentication. Google Authenticator is more reliable
than authentication with SMS text messages to Indian mobile phone numbers (i.e. country code 91).
191
Authentication with Applications
Authentication using Google Authenticator
Google Authenticator is a smartphone application that uses TOTP to generate verification codes. When a user needs
a code, the application generates a time-based code based on a private key that was shared between Ops Manager and
the user’s Google Authenticator application during the initial pairing process.
The Google Authenticator application does not require a Google account and does not connect a user’s Ops Manager
account to Google in any way. The has both iOS and Android versions, and the user does not need to associate the
application with a Google account. Ops Manager two-factor authentication using Google Authenticator is not in any
way integrated with Google’s own account authentication mechanisms, and Ops Manager does not provide two-factor
authentication codes to Google.
Authentication using Another Implementation of TOTP
There are implementations of the Time-based One-time Password Algorithm (TOTP) other than Google Authenticator.
For example, the Authenticator application for Windows Phones.
Ensure that whichever devices runs the TOTP application has it’s own set of robust authentication requirements.
For other implementations of TOTP, consider the list of TOTP implementations on Wikipedia.
Two-Factor Authentication on a Shared Account
A global team that shares the same Ops Manager account can use Google Authenticator and use the same seed code
for all team members. To generate a common seed code that all team members can use, select the Can’t scan the
barcode? link when Configuring Two-Factor Authentication with Google Authenticator.
Procedures
To enable or disable two-factor authentication for the entire Ops Manager environment, see Manage Two-Factor
Authentication for Ops Manager.
Configure Two-Factor Authentication with Text or Voice
Step 1: In Ops Manager, select the Administration tab and then Account.
Step 2: Select the pencil icon for Two Factor Authentication.
Or, if this is the first time you are setting up an account, click the Configure button to the right side of the Account
page and follow the instructions.
Step 3: Select Use Voice/SMS.
Step 4: Enter the phone number for the phone that will receive the codes.
If you are outside of the United States or Canada, you must include 011 and your country code. Alternatively, you
can sign up for a Google Voice number and use that number for your authentication.
192
Step 5: Select how to receive the codes.
Select either Text message (SMS) or Voice call (US/Canada only).
Step 6: Click Send Code.
Ops Manager sends the codes to your phone.
Step 7: Enter the code in the box provided in Ops Manager and click Verify.
Step 8: Click Save Changes.
Configure Two-Factor Authentication with Google Authenticator
Step 1: Install Google Authenticator from either the Google Play store or the iOS Apple Store, de-
pending on your device.
Step 2: Run Google Authenticator.
Step 3: Click Begin Setup.
Step 4: When prompted, select how you will enter the shared private key.
Under Manually Add an Account, select either Scan a barcode or Enter provided key. Stay on
this screen while you use the next steps to access the barcode or key in Ops Manager.
Step 5: In Ops Manager, select the Administration tab and then Account.
Step 6: Select the pencil icon for Two Factor Authentication.
Or, if this is the first time you are setting up an account, click the Configure button to the right side of the Account
page and follow the instructions.
Step 7: Select Use Google Authenticator.
Ops Manager provides a barcode and a Can’t scan the barcode? link.
Step 8: Scan or enter the shared private key.
If your smartphone can scan barcodes, then scan the barcode. Otherwise, click Can’t scan the barcode? and type the
provided Key into your smartphone.
Step 9: Enter the Google Authenticator code in Ops Manager.
After you scan the barcode or enter the key, Google Authenticator generates a 6-digit code. Enter that in the box
provided in Ops Manager and click Verify.
193
Step 10: Click Save Changes.
Generate New Recovery Codes
As a backup, you can generate recovery codes to use in place of a sent code when you do not have access to a phone or
your Google Authenticator application. Each recovery code is single-use, and you should save these codes in a secure
place. When you generate new recovery codes, you invalidate previously generated ones.
Step 1: In Ops Manager, select the Administration tab and then Account.
Step 2: Select the pencil icon for Two Factor Authentication.
Or, if this is the first time you are setting up an account, click the Configure button to the right side of the Account
page and follow the instructions.
Step 3: Select Generate New Recovery Codes.
Keep the codes in a safe place. Each code can be used in conjunction with your username and password to not only
access Ops Manager but to reset your security settings on Ops Manager.
8 Administration
Manage Your Account Administer your account and groups.
Administer the System Administer the Ops Manager system. This access is available only to administrators with
global access.
Manage Groups Create and manage Ops Manager groups.
Manage Ops Manager Users and Roles Control access to Ops Manager groups and group resources by creating Ops
Manager users and assigning roles.
Manage MongoDB Users and Roles Control access to your MongoDB deployments by enabling user authentication,
creating MongoDB users, and assigning roles.
Configure Available MongoDB Versions Configure the versions that are available for your Automation Agents to
download.
Backup Alerts Describes alert messages concerning the Ops Manager Backup system.
Start and Stop Ops Manager Application Manage the Ops Manager Application.
Back Up Ops Manager Options for backing up Ops Manager.
8.1 Manage Your Account
On this page
•Account Page
•Personalization Page
194
•API Keys & Whitelists Page
•My Groups Page
•Group Settings Page
•Users Page
•Agents Page
•Billing/Subscriptions
•Payment History
The Administration tab lets you personalize your console and activate or deactivate a variety of features. The Admin-
istration tab provides the pages described here.
Account Page
The Account page allows users to update their personal information.
•User Name: Displays the user’s name. You cannot change your username.
•Email Address: Displays the email address Ops Manager associates with your account. You can change your
email address by clicking on the “pencil” icon.
•Mobile Phone Number: The number to use to receive SMS alerts, including two-factor authentication codes.
•Password: Allows you to change your Ops Manager password. Passwords must fulfill Ops Manager’s password
requirements.
•Two-Factor Authentication: Ops Manager requires two factor authentication for login. For details, see Manage
Your Two-Factor Authentication Options.
To delete or reset two-factor authentication, contact your Ops Manager system administrator.
Personalization Page
The Personalization page allows users to configure the console to suit their needs and preferences. The available fields
depend on the user’s role.
•My Time Zone: Sets your local time zone.
•My Date Format: Allows you to select your preferred date format.
•Page Shown When Switching Groups: Sets which page of the Ops Manager console you will see when you select
a different group. If you select Current, Ops Manager will not change pages when you select a different group.
•Display Opcounters On Separate Charts: Allows you to control the presentation of Opcounter Charts. If en-
abled, Ops Manager charts each opcounter type separately. Otherwise, each opcounter type is overlaid together
in a single chart.
•Display Chart Annotations: Toggles the presence of chart annotations. Chart annotations overlay information
about significant system events on the charts. For example, with chart annotations Ops Manager will draw a red
vertical line over the charts.
•Receive |mms| Newsletters: Allows you to opt-in to, or opt-out of receiving e-mail newsletters about Ops Man-
ager.
195
API Keys & Whitelists Page
API Keys & Whitelists lets you generate an API key for your Ops Manager group. Use the API key to support
automated installation of your Monitoring Agent with scripts included with the agent installation files.
You can also define an API Whitelist of IP addresses permitted to invoke operations that require a higher level of
security. See Enable the Public API for more information.
My Groups Page
My Groups displays the Ops Manager groups you belong to. From here you can add a group.
Group Settings Page
These settings apply to all users in the group. To set group settings, see Manage Group Settings.
Users Page
Users displays the group’s users and their roles. From here you can add and manage users.
Agents Page
The Agent page displays the status of your installed agent and provides links to download new agents, in both .zip
and .tar.gz formats. The software is dynamically assembled with your API key. Instructions are included to set up
and start the downloaded agent, as well as create a new user for the agent if MongoDB authentication is used.
The Agents page includes the following information about your installed agents:
Field Description
Status The time of the last ping from the agent.
Type The type of agent.
Hostname The hostname for the agent and any warnings, such as that the agent is down or
out-of-date.
State Indicates whether the agent is active.
Ping Count The number of pings (i.e. data payloads) sent by the agent since midnight GMT.
Typically agents send pings every minute.
Version The version of the agent software running on this agent instance.
Log Click view logs to view the agent’s log.
If you have more than one Monitoring Agent, only one agent actively monitors MongoDB instances at a time. See
Monitoring Architecture for more information.
Billing/Subscriptions
For users with the appropriate permissions, this page displays the account’s payment method and billing history.
Payment History
For users with the appropriate permissions, this page displays the account’s payment history.
196
8.2 Administer the System
On this page
•General Tab
•Backup Tab
•Control Panel Tab
The Administration section of the Ops Manager application provides a tool to view system status, set cron jobs, manage
users and groups, and perform other administrative functions.
If you have administrative privileges for the Ops Manager deployment, click the Admin link in the top right corner of
Ops Manager to access the system administration tool.
This page describes the Admin section’s tabs and pages.
General Tab
The General tab provides overview information, messages, reports, and access to users.
Overview Page
The Overview page provides reports on system use and activity.
This page displays the summary table and Total Pages Viewed and Total Chart Requests charts.
A summary table reports totals for:
• groups
• active groups
• active hosts
• users
• users active
• ping spillover queue
• increment spillover queue
Additionally two charts report:
• total page views
• total chart requests
Users Page
The Users page displays a list of user information for all people with permission to use the Ops Manager application
as well as provides an interface to manage users. Use the search box on the upper right corner to find a user record.
197
Users Information
For each user, the users table reports:
• the username
• the available roles, if any
• the date and time of the last login.
• the date and time of the last access event.
• the total number of login.
• the user’s configured timezone.
• the creation date and time.
Edit a User Record
To edit a user record:
1. Click the pencil icon at the far right of the user record.
2. In the Edit User interface, you can:
• Edit the user’s email.
• Select the user’s groups and roles.
• Lock or unlock the account.
• Specify the user’s global roles.
3. When finished, click the Save button to save any changes and exit.
Groups Page
The Groups page lists all groups created with their date created and the last date and time an agent for the group pinged
Ops Manager. At the top right of the page is a search box to find a group by name. Click a group name to view the
group’s details.
Logs Page
The Logs page in General tab lists backup logs by job and class with messages grouped and counted by last hour, 6
hours, and last 2 days. Click a count number to see all messages in the group.
Messages Page
You can display a short message on any page of the Ops Manager application to notify or remind users, such as
impending maintenance windows. Messages may be active, i.e. visible, on all pages or a subset of pages.
The Messages page provides information on existing messages as well as an interface to add new messages or manage
existing messages.
198
UI Messages Table
The UI Messages table holds all available messages. Use the search box on the top right to filter the list of messages.
For each message, the table reports:
• which page or page prefix the message will appear on.
• the text of the message.
• whether the message is active or inactive. Active messages are also highlighted in orange.
• the creation date and time for the message.
• the date and time of the last modification for the message.
Add a Message
To add a message which appears on one page, or on all pages,
1. Click the:guilabel:Add Message button.
2. In the Add Message interface, enter
• the message, and
• the page URL or optionally, page prefix in the Add Message interface.
The page prefix allows you to specify a path of a single page or the URL prefix of a group of pages. The
prefix must begin with a /character.
3. Click the Active checkbox to make the message live. Optionally, you can leave the box unchecked to disable the
message.
4. Click the Add button to add the message.
Once added, active messages take 60 seconds before they display.
Disable a Message
To disable a message, click the orange square button to the right of any alert listed on the Messages page. The orange
button will change to a grey button.
To re-enable a disabled message, click the grey button; the grey button will change to back to an orange button.
Delete a Message
To delete a message, click the garbage can icon to the right of any alert listed on the Messages page.
Audits Page
The Audits page displays all events tracked by Ops Manager. This includes the group events as well as internal and
system events, which are not tracked at a group level.
Backup Tab
The Backup tab provides information on Backup resources, including jobs, daemons, and blockstores.
199
Jobs Page
You can see all active and stopped Backup jobs on the Jobs page. For each backup job, the tab lists job group, name,
last agent conf, last oplog, head time, last snapshot, what the agent is working on, the daemon, and the blockstore.
Ops Manager puts a yellow background on the following fields if they are delayed:
•Last Agent Conf, if older than 1 hour.
•Last Oplog, if older than 1 hour before the Last Agent Conf.
•Head Time, if older than 1 hour before Last Oplog.
•Last Snapshot, if older than the snapshot interval multiplied by 1.5.
Click the group name to go directly to the backup job page for the group. Click the job name to see the results of the
job on a detail page. On the job detail page, click links to see the logs, conf call, and download a zipped archive file
containing complete diagnostic information for the specified job.
Job Timeline Page
The Job Timeline page displays a graphical representation of information found on other Admin pages, in particular
the Jobs page. The Job Timeline page displays critical timestamps (head, last snapshot, next snapshot) and offers a
way to assign a daemon to a given job.
Click the Auto refresh checkbox to update the list automatically every 10 seconds. Click the Refresh button to refresh
data manually.
To view the backup job JSON, click the Show JSON link under the Group heading for any backup job. When the
JSON displays, click the View raw runtime data link under the code to view the raw data. To hide the daemon JSON,
click the Hide JSON link.
To move the job to a new Backup Daemon, click the Move head link under the Machine heading for a backup job.
Select the location and click the Move head button to move the job to a new Backup Daemon. Ops Manager does not
automatically move jobs between daemons.
You can bind a backup job to a head by clicking Set binding under the Machine heading for a backup job. You can
bind a job to a preferred Backup Daemon during initial sync. After initial sync completes, Ops Manager automatically
assigns jobs to Backup Daemons.
Logs Page
The Logs page on the backup tab lists backup logs by job and class with messages grouped and counted by last 2
hours, last day, and last 3 days. Click a count number to see all messages in the group.
Restores Page
The Restores page displays the last 100 requested restores and their progress. To show all restores ever requested,
click Show All.
Resource Usage Page
The Resource Usage page provides key size and throughput statistics on a per-job basis for all groups for which
Backup is enabled. The page displays such throughput statistics as the size of the data set, how active it is, and how
much space is being used on the blockstore.
200
To export the information, click EXPORT AS CSV.
Grooms Page
New in version 1.4.
Ops Manager performs periodic garbage collection on blockstores through groom jobs that remove unused blocks to
reclaim space. Unused blocks are those that are no longer referenced by a live snapshot. An Ops Manager scheduling
process determines when grooms are necessary.
This page lists active and recent groom jobs.
A groom job forces the backup process to:
• write all new data to a new location,
• copy all existing, needed data from the old location to the new one,
• update references, to maintain data relationships, and
• drop the old database.
During groom operations, you may notice that blockstore file size will fluctuate, sometimes dramatically.
You can manually direct Ops Manager to move blocks between Blockstores through the Groom Priority.
Groom Priority
New in version 1.6.
The Groom Priority page allows you to manually schedule jobs to move a backup’s blocks to a different blockstore
and to manually schedule grooms. The page lists each backup by its replica set and highlights a backup in blue if a
groom is in progress.
To move a backup’s chunks to a different blockstore, select the destination blockstore in the backup’s Blockstore List
column. You might want to do this, for example, if you add a new blockstore and would like to balance data.
Typically, you should not need to manually schedule groom jobs. Ops Manager runs the jobs automatically. If you do
need to initiate a job, click the Schedule button for the backup’s replica set.
Daemons Page
The Daemons page lists all active Backup Daemons and provides configuration options. Ops Manager automatically
detects Backup Daemons and displays them here. You can reconfigure daemons from this page. Changes can take up
to 5 minutes to take effect.
Use the Pre-Configure New Daemon button at the bottom of the page if you want to add a daemon but do not want it to
take new jobs. Type the <machine>:<roothead path> in the text field above the Pre-Configure New Daemon
button. Click the button to configure the new Backup Daemon.
For each daemon, the page lists the server name, configuration, head space used, head space free, the number of replica
sets backed up, the percentage of time the Backup Daemon Service was busy, and job runtime counts by 1 minute, 10
minutes, 60 minutes, less than or equal to 180 minutes, and greater than 180 minutes.
The page includes the following fields and links to manage and configure daemons:
201
Field Description
Show
Detailed
JSON
Displays the Backup Daemon JSON. When the JSON displays, the View raw runtime data link appears
under the code, allowing you to view the raw data.
Move all
heads
Moves all the Backup Daemon jobs that live on this daemon to a new daemon location. Click the link,
then select the location, and then click the Move all heads button.
Delete
Daemon
Deletes a Backup Daemon.
Assign-
ment
Allows the daemon to take more jobs. If a disk fills on daemon server, you can deselect this so the
server isn’t overloaded.
Backup
Jobs
Allows the daemon to take more backup jobs. Deselect this, for example, when performing mainte-
nance on a daemon’s server.
Restore
Jobs
Allows the daemon to take more restore jobs.
Re-
source
Usage
Collects information on Blockstore use (i.e., on how many blocks are still referenced by snapshots).
Ops Manager uses this information to generate the Resource Usage Page page and to prioritize garbage
collection.
Garbage
Collec-
tion
Enables garbage collection.
Head
Disk
Type
Indicates whether the disk type is SSD or HDD. If you change a daemon to SSD, then only jobs with
an oplog greater than 1GB/hour will go to this daemon. Any jobs with an oplog less than 1GB/hour
can only go to a daemon marked HDD.
Blockstores Page
The Blockstores page lists all Backup blockstores and provides the ability to add a new blockstore.
Edit an Existing Blockstore
To update an existing Blockstore, edit the <hostname>:<port> field, MongoDD Auth Username field, and MongoDB
Auth Password field. If the username and password had used the credentialstool for encryption, click the
Encrypted Credentials checkbox.
Add a Blockstore
To add a blockstore, first deploy the dedicated MongoDB instance(s) to host the blockstore.
Then, on the Blockstores page, enter the <id> and <hostname:port> in the text fields above the Add New Block-
store button. For replica sets, enter a comma-separated list for <hostname:port>. Finally, click the button to save
and add the blockstore. A newly configured blockstore becomes active when you select the assignment checkbox.
See also:
Configure Multiple Blockstores in Multiple Data Centers describes how to configure multiple blockstores in different
data centers.
Delete a Blockstore
To delete a blockstore, click the Delete blockstore link for the blockstore.
202
Sync Stores Page
This page configures the backing replica sets that store sync slices. Sync slices are temporary backups of your deploy-
ment batched into 10MB slices. The Backup Agent creates sync slices during an initial sync, and the Backup Daemon
uses them to create the permanent backup. Ops Manager deletes sync slices once the initial sync completes.
Do not modify a sync store’s connection string to point to a different replica set. Doing so requires all Ops Manager
components to be restarted. Existing data will not be copied automatically.
From this page you can:
• Add a member to a replica set by adding the host to the replica set connection string in the <hostname>:<port>
field. Do not modify the connection string to point to a different replica set.
• Change the authentication credentials or connection options for a sync store by modifying the appropriate fields.
• Add an additional sync store by clicking the Add New Sync Store button at the bottom of the page.
• Enable and disable new assignments to sync stores using the checkboxes in the Assignment Enabled column.
Oplog Stores Page
This page configures the backing replica sets that store oplog slices. Oplog slices are compressed batches of the entries
in the tailed oplogs of your backed-up deployments.
Do not modify the oplog store’s connection string to point to a different replica set. Doing so requires all Ops Manager
components to be restarted. Existing data will not be copied automatically.
From this page you can:
• Add a member to a replica set by adding the host to the replica set connection string in the <hostname>:<port>
field. Do not modify the connection string to point to a different replica set.
• Change the authentication credentials or connection options for a oplog store by modifying the appropriate
fields.
• Add an additional oplog store by clicking the Add New Oplog Store button at the bottom of the page.
• Enable and disable new assignments to oplog stores using the checkboxes in the Assignment Enabled column.
Control Panel Tab
The Control Panel tab provides access to Cron jobs and email history.
Email History Page
The Email History page displays all alerts emails sent, the subject, and the recipient. To view an email, click the
subject link. To filter the list, click FILTER BY RECIPIENT.
Cron Jobs Page
The Cron Jobs page displays all scheduled processes and their statuses. To disable a job, uncheck its box in the
ENABLED column. To run a job, click RUN NOW.
203
8.3 Manage Groups
On this page
•Overview
•Working with Multiple Environments
•Procedures
Overview
Groups associate Ops Manager users with MongoDB in the Ops Manager application. A group provides access to a
distinct Ops Manager environment or deployment. Each group has one Monitoring Agent and Backup Agent.
You create the first Ops Manager group when you register the first Ops Manager user. Create additional groups to
manage segregated systems or environments. For example, your deployment might have two or more environments
separated by firewalls. In this case, you would need two or more separate Ops Manager groups.
Ops Manager API and shared secret keys are unique to each group. Each group requires its own Monitoring Agent
with the appropriate API and shared secret keys. Within each group, the agent needs to be able to connect to all hosts
it monitors in the group.
The user who creates a group automatically has the Owner role and can manage user access.
Working with Multiple Environments
If you have multiple MongoDB systems in distinct environments and cannot monitor all systems with a single agent,
you will need to add a new group. Having a second group makes it possible to run two agents.
You may also use a second group and agent to monitor a different set of MongoDB instances in the same environment
if you want to segregate the hosts within the Ops Manager console. A user can only view data from the hosts monitored
in a single group at once.
After adding a second group, the Ops Manager interface will have a drop-down list that will allow you to change
groups. Selecting a new group will refresh the current page with the data available from the servers in this group.
Procedures
Create a Group
When you create a new group, you are automatically added as the first user to the group. The group is automatically
assigned a set of alert configurations.
Step 1: Select the Administration tab and then the My Groups page.
Step 2: Click the ADD GROUP button.
Step 3: Type a name for the new group and click CONTINUE.
For security and auditing reasons, you cannot use a name used earlier. Once you name a group, the group’s name
cannot be changed.
204
Step 4: Assign Hosts.
After you create the group, Ops Manager will log you into the group and displays a Welcome page. To create the
group’s first deployment, click either BEGIN SETUP to use the Ops Manager set-up wizard or click Advanced Setup
to add a deployment manually.
Remove a Group
Please contact your Ops Manager administrator to remove a company or group from your Ops Manager account.
Manage Group Settings
Step 1: Select the Administration tab and then select Group Settings.
Step 2: Modify group settings as desired.
See Group Settings options for a full description of the group settings.
If you have Global Owner access, the interface displays a second Group Settings link under the Admin Only section.
For information on these settings, see Admin Only Group Settings.
Group Settings
The following settings in the Administration tab’s Group Settings page apply to all users in the group:
•Group Time Zone: Sets your group’s time zone.
•Collect Logs For All Hosts: Activates or deactivates the collection of log data for all hosts. This overwrites the
statuses set on the individual hosts.
•Collect Profiling Information for All Hosts: Activates or deactivates the collection of profiling information
for all hosts. Ops Manager Monitoring can collect data from MongoDB’s profiler to provide statistics about
performance and database operations. Ensure exposing profile data to Ops Manager Monitoring is consistent
with your information security practices. Also be aware the profiler can consume resources which may adversely
affect MongoDB performance.
•Collect Database Specific Statistics: Allows you to enable or disable the collection of database statistics. For
more information, see “How does |mms| gather database statistics?”.
•Enable Public API: Allows you to use the Public API with the group.
•Reset Duplicates: Allows you to reset and remove all detected duplicate hosts. This is useful if your server
environment has drastically changed and you believe a host is incorrectly marked as a duplicate.
•Preferred Hostnames: Allows you to specify the hostname to use for servers with multiple aliases. This prevents
servers from appearing multiple times under different names. By default, the Monitoring Agent tries to connect
by resolving hostnames. If the agent cannot connect by resolving a hostname, you can force the Monitoring
Agent to prefer an IP address over its corresponding hostname for a specific IP address. To override this default
behavior, set an IP address as a preferred hostname. If your IP addresses have a common prefix, create a
preferred hostname with the ends-with button or click the regexp button to use a regular expression.
•Public Key for SCP Restores: If you use Ops Manager Backup, this setting allows you to generate a public key
for SCP backup restoration. If you restore a snapshot through SCP, Ops Manager uses the key to transmit the
snapshot. For more information on restores, see Restore MongoDB Instances with Backup, and how to validate
an SCP restore and other SCP FAQs.
205
•PagerDuty Service Key: Adds a service key for a PagerDuty account. This is the default key used if you create
an alert configuration that uses PageDuty.
•HipChat Settings: Adds a room and API token for a HipChat account. These are the default settings used if you
create an alert configuration that uses HipChat.
Admin Only Group Settings
The following group settings in the Admin Only section of the Administration tab could, in certain situations, affect
more than the group. For example, setting logging to a high verbosity would cause system logs to roll over faster.
Only users with the Global Owner role can edit these settings:
•Mongos Deactivation Threshold: Change the amount of time before Ops Manager stops monitoring an unreach-
able mongos. By default, the Monitoring Agent stops monitoring an unreachable mongos after 24 hours. Set
this to the amount of time in hours to wait before deactivation.
•Monitoring Agent Log Level: Change the verbosity of the Monitoring Agent log.
•Automation Agent Log Level: Change the verbosity of the Automation Agent log.
8.4 Manage Ops Manager Users and Roles
Ops Manager requires users to log in to verify who they are and to determine their access to features. Ops Manager
provides built-in user management for controlling authentication and access.
You can alternatively use LDAP to control authentication and access. If you do, you must start with a fresh installation
of Ops Manager. See Configure Users and Groups with LDAP for Ops Manager.
The section describes the following:
Manage Ops Manager Users Create and manage Ops Manager users and assign roles.
Ops Manager Roles Describes the user roles available within the Ops Manager.
Manage Ops Manager Users
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
Ops Manager users provide access to Ops Manager groups. You can create a new user in a group to give access to that
group. You can later give the user access to additional groups. When you create a user, you assign the user a role in
the group. A role determines the actions the user can perform and the data the user can access.
206
Procedures
Add Users
Step 1: Click the Administration tab and then select the Users page.
Step 2: Click the Add User button.
Step 3: Enter the new user’s email address and role.
Step 4: Click Add/Invite.
Step 5: If prompted, enter the two-factor verification code.
There might be a delay of a few seconds before you receive the prompt. Ops Manager will prompt you for a two-factor
verification code if you have not verified recently.
Step 6: Click the Send Email Invitation button.
Users can create accounts using the account registration page of your Ops Manager installation.
View Ops Manager Users
To view users, click the Administration tab and then Users page. The Users page lists users who have access to your
Ops Manager group, their roles, their time zones, and other information. The page also lists any invitations to join the
group waiting for a reply, as well as any requests from users who want to join the group. A user can request to join a
group when first registering for Ops Manager.
View Invitations
When you invite a user to join a group, Ops Manager then sends an email to the prospective new user. To view
invitations sent but not yet accepted, click the Administration tab and then select the Users page. The page lists any
users with pending invitations. To cancel an invitation, click CANCEL INVITE.
View Requests
Users can request access when they create their Ops Manager account, as on the registration page.
To view requests, click the Administration tab and then select the Users page. The Users page lists any pending
requests to join your group. To approve or deny a request, click the appropriate button.
207
Remove Ops Manager Users
Step 1: Click the Administration tab and then select the Users page.
Step 2: Remove the user.
Click the user’s gear icon and select Delete User.
Assign Roles to Ops Manager Users
Assign roles to Ops Manager users to limit the actions they can perform and the data they can view.
To assign roles to users in a group, you must have either the User Admin role or Owner role in the group. The user
who creates a group automatically has the Owner role.
To assign roles to any user in any group, you must have either the Global User Admin role or Global Owner role.
You can assign roles either through Ops Manager, as described here, or through an LDAP server after you have set up
LDAP integration and created LDAP groups for your Ops Manager roles.
To assign roles inside of Ops Manager, select the Administration tab and then the Users page. Click the user’s gear
icon and select Edit User. Click the appropriate checkboxes to assign roles.
Assign Ops Manager Roles with LDAP
To assign roles through an LDAP server, you must first set up LDAP integration and create LDAP groups for your Ops
Manager roles. You must also have the permissions described in Assign Roles to Ops Manager Users.
For LDAP authentication, the welcome form includes the ability to assign LDAP groups to the Ops Manager group-
level and global roles.
There is no planned upgrade path from existing Ops Manager user authentication to using LDAP. You will need to
recreate users, groups, and roles manually with your LDAP service, as described in the Configure Users and Groups
with LDAP for Ops Manager document.
1. Configure LDAP authentication.
2. Create groups on your LDAP server for each of the available Ops Manager group-level and global roles.
To assign LDAP groups to Ops Manager roles:
1. Click the Admin link at the top right of the Ops Manager page.
2. Click General and then click Groups.
3. Click the pencil icon at the far right of a group name. Edit the Roles interface by adding the appropriate LDAP
group name to its corresponding Ops Manager group name.
Because Ops Manager does not update role assignments stored in your LDAP server, assign roles by assigning users
to groups in your LDAP server.
Configure global roles in the conf-mms.properties configuration file.
Ops Manager Roles
208
On this page
•Overview
Overview
Ops Manager roles allow you to grant users different levels of access to Ops Manager. You can grant a user the
privileges needed to perform a specific set of tasks and no more.
If you use LDAP authentication for Ops Manager, you must create LDAP groups for each available role described
below then assign users to LDAP groups. There is no round trip synchronization between your LDAP server and Ops
Manager.
To assign user roles, see Assign Roles to Ops Manager Users. You cannot assign your own roles.
Read Only
The Read Only role has the lowest level of privileges. The user can generally see everything in a group, including all
activity, operational data, users, and user roles. The user, however, cannot modify or delete anything.
User Admin
The User Admin role grants access to do the following:
• Add an existing user to a group.
• Invite a new user to a group.
• Remove an existing group invitation.
• Remove a user’s request to join a group, which denies the user access to the group.
• Remove a user from a group.
• Modify a user’s roles within a group.
• Update the billing email address.
Monitoring Admin
The Monitoring Admin role grants all the privileges of the Read Only role and grants additional access to do the
following:
• Manage alerts (create, modify, delete, enable/disable, acknowledge/unacknowledge).
• Manage hosts (add, edit, delete, enable deactivated).
• Manage group-wide settings.
• Download Monitoring Agent.
209
Backup Admin
The Backup Admin role grants all the privileges of the Read Only role and grants access to manage backups, includ-
ing the following:
• Start, stop, and terminate backups.
• Request restores.
• View and edit excluded namespaces.
• View and edit host passwords.
• Modify backup settings.
• Generate SSH keys.
• Download the Backup Agent.
Automation Admin
The Automation Admin role grants all the privileges of the Read Only role and grants access to the following
management actions:
• View deployments.
• Provision machines.
• Edit configuration files.
• Modify settings.
• Download the Automation Agent.
Owner
The Owner role has the privileges of all the other roles combined, as well as additional privileges available only to
Owner. In addition to the privileges of other roles, an Owner can:
• Set up the Backup service.
• Update billing information.
• Enable the Public API.
Group Roles
The following roles grant privileges within a group:
Global Roles
Global roles have all the same privileges as the equivalent Group roles, except that they have these privileges for all
groups. They also have some additional privileges as noted below.
210
Global Read Only
The Global Read Only role grants read only access to all groups. The role additionally grants access to do the
following:
• View backups and other statistics through the admin UI.
• Global user search.
Global User Admin
The Global User Admin role grants user admin access to all groups. The role additionally grants access to do the
following:
• Add new groups.
• Manage UI messages.
• Send test emails, SMS messages, and voice calls.
• Edit user accounts.
• Manage LDAP group mappings.
Global Monitoring Admin
The Global Monitoring Admin role grants monitoring admin access to all groups. The role additionally grants access
to do the following:
• View system statistics through the admin UI.
Global Backup Admin
The Global Backup Admin role grants backup admin access to all groups. The role additionally grants access to do
the following:
• View system statistics through the admin UI.
• Manage blockstore, daemon, and oplog store configurations.
• Move jobs between daemons.
• Approve backups in awaiting provisioning state.
Global Automation Admin
The Global Automation Admin role grants automation admin access to all groups. The role additionally grants
access to view system statistics through the admin UI.
Global Owner
The Global Owner role for an Ops Manager account has the privileges of all the other roles combined.
211
8.5 Manage MongoDB Users and Roles
You can enable MongoDB access control and manage MongoDB users and roles directly from the Ops Manager
interface.
Enable MongoDB Role-Based Access Control Control access to MongoDB databases.
Manage MongoDB Users and Roles Add MongoDB users and assign roles.
Manage Custom Roles Create custom roles.
Enable MongoDB Role-Based Access Control
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Enable MongoDB Access Control
•Next Steps
Overview
MongoDB uses Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) to determine access to a MongoDB system. When run with
access control, MongoDB requires users to authenticate themselves to determine their access. MongoDB limits each
user to the resources and actions allowed by the user’s roles. If you leave access control disabled, any client can access
any database in your deployments and perform any action.
When you enable MongoDB access control, you enable it for all the deployments in your Ops Manager group. The
group shares one set of users for all deployments, but each user has permissions only for specific resources.
Access control applies to the Ops Manager agents as well as to clients. When you enable access control, Ops Manager
creates the appropriate users for the agents.
Considerations
Once you enable access control, you must create MongoDB users so that clients can access your databases. Always
use the Ops Manager interface to manage users and roles. Do not do so through direct connection to a MongoDB
instance.
When you enable access control, Ops Manager creates a user with global privileges used only by the Automation
Agent. The first user you create can be any type of user, as the Automation Agent guarantees you will always have
access to user management.
For more information on MongoDB access control, see the Authentication and Authorization pages in the MongoDB
manual.
212
Enable MongoDB Access Control
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authentication & Users.
Step 2: Turn on authentication.
Click the button for Auth Enabled to toggle it to Yes. This automatically creates users for your Monitoring, Backup,
and Automation agents.
Step 3: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 4: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
Next Steps
To create your first users and assign privileges, see Manage MongoDB Users and Roles.
Manage MongoDB Users and Roles
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Add a MongoDB User
•Edit a User’s Roles
•Remove a MongoDB User
Overview
When MongoDB access control is enabled, you provide client access to MongoDB by creating users and assigning
user roles. The users you create apply to all MongoDB instances in your Ops Manager group, but each user has a
specified authentication database. Together, the user’s name and database serve as a unique identifier for that user.
You can specify access using MongoDB’s built-in roles and also by creating custom roles. Ops Manager provides the
interface for doing so.
You can create users before enabling accessing control or after, but they don’t go into effect until you enable access
control. The MongoDB instances won’t require user credentials until access control is enabled.
To authenticate, a client must specify the username, password, database, and authentication mechanism. For example,
from the mongo shell, a client would specify the --username,--password,--authenticationDatabase,
and --authenticationMechanism options.
MongoDB users are separate from Ops Manager users. MongoDB users have access to MongoDB databases. Ops
Manager users access to Ops Manager groups.
213
Considerations
If you want Ops Manager to ensure that all deployments in a group have the same database users and roles, use only
the Ops Manager interface to manage users.
However, if you want certain deployments in a group to have certain users or roles not set at the group level, you can
add them through direct connection to the MongoDB instances.”
Add a MongoDB User
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authentication & Users.
Step 2: Select the Add User button.
Step 3: In the Identifier fields, enter the database on which the user authenticates and enter a
username.
Together, the database and username uniquely identify the user. Though the user has just one authentication database,
the user can have privileges on other database. You grant privileges when assigning the user roles.
Step 4: In the Roles drop-down list, select the user’s roles.
You can assign both user-defined roles and built-in roles.
Step 5: Enter the user’s password and click Add User.
Step 6: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 7: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
Edit a User’s Roles
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authentication & Users.
Step 2: Click the user’s gear icon and select Edit.
Step 3: Edit the user’s information.
In the Roles drop-down list, you can both add and delete roles. You can add both user-defined roles and built-in roles.
214
Step 4: Click SAVE CHANGES.
Step 5: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 6: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
Remove a MongoDB User
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authentication & Users.
Step 2: Click the user’s gear icon and select Remove.
Step 3: To confirm, click Delete User.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 5: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
Manage Custom Roles
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Considerations
•Procedures
Overview
Roles grant users access to MongoDB resources. By default, MongoDB provides a number of built-in roles, but if
these roles cannot describe a desired privilege set, you can create custom roles.
When you create a role, you specify the database to which it applies. Ops Manager stores your custom roles on all
MongoDB instances in your Ops Manager group but uniquely identifies a role by the combination of the database
name and role name. If a database with that name exists on multiple deployments within your Ops Manager group,
the role applies to each of those databases. If you create a role on the admin database, the role applies to all admin
databases in the deployment.
Roles consist of privileges that grant access to specific actions on specific resources. On most databases, a resource is
the database or a collection, but on the admin database a resource can be all databases, all collections with a given
name across databases, or all deployments.
A role can inherit privileges from other roles in its database. A role on the admin database can inherit privileges from
roles in other databases.
MongoDB roles are separate from Ops Manager roles.
215
Prerequisite
MongoDB access control must be enabled to apply roles. You can create roles before enabling accessing control or
after, but they don’t go into effect until you enable access control.
Considerations
Use only the Ops Manager interface to manage users and roles. Do not do so through direct connection to a MongoDB
instance.
Procedures
Create a Custom MongoDB Role
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authorization & Roles.
Step 2: Select the ADD ROLE button.
Step 3: In the Identifier fields, enter the database on which to define the role and enter a name for
the role.
A role applies to the database on which it is defined and can grant access down to the collection level. The role’s
database and name uniquely identify the role.
Step 4: Select the role’s privileges.
You can add privileges in two ways:
Give a role the privileges of another role.
To give a role all the privileges of one or more existing roles, select the roles in the Inherits From field. The field
provides a drop-down list that includes both MongoDB built-in roles and any custom roles you have already created.
Add a privilege directly.
To add specific privileges to the role, click ADD PRIVILEGES FOR A RESOURCE.
In the Resource field, specify the resource to which to apply the role. To specify the whole database, leave the field
blank. To specify a collection, enter the collection name. If the resource is on the admin database, you can click
ADMIN and apply the role outside the admin database.
In the Available Privileges section, select the actions to apply. For a description of each action, see Privilege Actions
in the MongoDB manual.
216
Step 5: Click ADD PRIVILEGES.
Step 6: Click ADD ROLE.
Step 7: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 8: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
Edit a Custom Role
You can change a custom role’s privileges. You cannot change its name or database.
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authorization & Roles.
Step 2: Click the role’s gear icon and select Edit.
Step 3: Remove privileges.
To remove an inherited role, click the xnext to the role.
To remove a privilege, click the trash icon next to the privilege.
Step 4: Add privileges.
You can add privileges to the role in two ways:
Give a role the privileges of another role.
To give a role all the privileges of one or more existing roles, select the roles in the Inherits From field. The field
provides a drop-down list that includes both MongoDB built-in roles and any custom roles you have already created.
Add a privilege directly.
To add specific privileges to the role, click ADD PRIVILEGES FOR A RESOURCE.
In the Resource field, specify the resource to which to apply the role. To specify the whole database, leave the field
blank. To specify a collection, enter the collection name. If the resource is on the admin database, you can click
ADMIN and apply the role outside the admin database.
In the Available Privileges section, select the actions to apply. For a description of each action, see Privilege Actions
in the MongoDB manual.
217
Step 5: Click ADD PRIVILEGES.
Step 6: Click SAVE CHANGES.
Step 7: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 8: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
View Privileges for a Role
To view a role’s privileges, select the Deployment tab, then the Roles page, and then select view privileges next to the
role.
Each privilege pairs a resource with a set of Privilege Actions. All roles are assigned a database. Each built-in role is
assigned to either admin database or every database.
Remove a Custom Role
Step 1: Select the Deployment tab and then select Authorization & Roles.
Step 2: Click the role’s gear icon and select Remove.
Step 3: To confirm, click DELETE ROLE.
Step 4: Click Review & Deploy.
Step 5: Review your changes, and click Confirm & Deploy.
8.6 Configure Available MongoDB Versions
On this page
•Overview
•Procedure
Overview
You can manage the versions that are available to your Automation Agents to download. MongoDB versions are
downloaded by the Automation Agents “lazily.” Automation Agents will not download selected versions unless the
version is in use by a MongoDB process on your server.
218
Procedure
Step 1: Click the Deployment tab and then Version Manager.
Step 2: Select the checkboxes for the versions of MongoDB the Automation Agent will use.
Step 3: Click Review & Deploy at the top of the page.
Step 4: Click Confirm & Deploy.
8.7 Backup Alerts
On this page
•Backup Agent Down
•Backups Broken
•Cluster Snapshot Failed
•Bind Failure
•Snapshot Behind Snitch
If a problem with the Ops Manager Backup system occurs, Ops Manager sends an alert to system administrators. This
page describes possible alerts and provides steps to resolve them.
Backup Agent Down
This alert is triggered if a Backup Agent for a group with at least one active replica set or cluster is down for more
than 1 hour.
To resolve this alert:
1. Open the group in Ops Manager by typing the group’s name in the GROUP box.
2. Select the Backup tab and then the Backup Agents page to see what server the Backup Agent is hosted on.
3. Check the Backup Agent log file on that server.
Backups Broken
If Ops Manager Backup detects an inconsistency, the Backup state for the replica set is marked as “broken.”
To debug the inconsistency:
1. Check the corresponding Backup Agent log. If you see a “Failed Common Points” test, one of the following
may have happened.
• A significant rollback event occurred on the Backup replica set.
• The oplog for the Backup replica set was resized or deleted.
• High oplog churn caused the agent to lose the tail of the oplog.
In such cases, you must resync the Backup replica set, as described in the procedure Resync Backup.
219
2. Check the corresponding job log for an error message explaining the problem. In Ops Manager, click Admin,
then Backup, and then Jobs. Then click the name of the job and then Logs. Contact MongoDB Support if you
need help interpreting the error message.
Cluster Snapshot Failed
This alert is generated if Ops Manager Backup cannot successfully take a snapshot for a sharded cluster backup. The
alert text should contain the reason for the problem. Common problems include the following:
• There was no reachable mongos. To resolve this issue, ensure that there is at least one mongos showing on the
Ops Manager Deployment page.
• The balancer could not be stopped. To resolve this issue, check the log files for the first config server to determine
why the balancer will not stop.
• Could not insert a token in one or more shards. To resolve this issue, ensure connectivity between the Backup
Agent and all shards.
Bind Failure
This alert is generated if a new replica set cannot be bound to a Backup Daemon. The alert test should contain a reason
for the problem. Common problems include:
• No primary is found. At the time the binding occurred, no primary could be detected by the Monitoring Agent.
Ensure that the replica set is healthy.
• Not enough space is available on any Backup Daemon.
In both cases, resolve the issue and then re-initiate the initial sync. Alternatively, the job can be manually bound
through the Ops Manager Admin interface. In Ops Manager, click Admin, then Backup, and then Job Timeline.
For information on initial sync, see Replica Set Data Synchronization.
Snapshot Behind Snitch
This alert is triggered if the latest snapshot for a replica set is significantly behind schedule. Check the job log in the
Ops Manager Admin interface for any obvious errors. In Ops Manager, click Admin, then Backup, and then Jobs.
Then click the name of the job and then Logs.
8.8 Start and Stop Ops Manager Application
On this page
•Start the Ops Manager Server
•Stop the Ops Manager Server
•Startup Log File Output
•Optional: Run as Different User
•Optional: Ops Manager Application Server Port Number
220
Start the Ops Manager Server
Note: If you installed from a tar.gz or zip archive, you must create a symlink located at the path /etc/init.
d/mongodb-mms that points to the <install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms.
After configuring your Monitoring deployment, you can start the Ops Manager server with this command:
sudo /etc/init.d/mongodb-mms start
In some situations, starting MongoDB may take several minutes to pre-allocate the journal files. This is normal
behavior.
You can now use the Monitoring instance by visiting the URL specified in the mms.centralUrl parameter (e.g.
http://mms.example.com:8080) to continue configuration:
Unlike the SaaS version of Ops Manager, Monitoring stores user accounts in the local MongoDB instance. When you
sign into the Monitoring instance for the first time, the system will prompt you to register and create a new “group”
for your deployment.
Because there are no Monitoring Agents attached to your account, the first page you see in Monitoring will provide
instructions for downloading the Monitoring Agent. Click the “download agent” link to download a pre-configured
agent for your account. Continue reading this document for installation and configuration instructions for the Ops
Manager agent.
Stop the Ops Manager Server
Enter the following command:
sudo /etc/init.d/mongodb-mms stop
Startup Log File Output
The Ops Manager server logs its output to a logs directory inside the installation directory. You can view this log
information with the following command:
sudo less <install_dir>/logs/mms0.log
If the server starts successfully, you will see content in this file that resembles the following:
[main] INFO ServerMain:202 - Starting mms...
[main] WARN AbstractConnector:294 - Acceptors should be <=2*availableProcessors:
˓→SelectChannelConnector@0.0.0.0:0
[null] LoginService=HashLoginService identityService=org.eclipse.jetty.security.
˓→DefaultIdentityService@1eb3319f
[main] INFO AppConfig:46 - Starting app for env: hosted
[main] INFO MmsAppConfig:67 - Not loading backup components
[main] INFO GraphiteSvcImpl:67 - Graphite service not configured, events will be
˓→ignored.
[main] INFO TwilioSvcImpl:48 - Twilio service not configured, SMS events will be
˓→ignored.
[main] INFO OpenDMKSnmpTrapAgentSvcImpl:91 - SNMP heartbeats hosts not configured,
˓→no heartbeat traps will be sent.
[main] INFO ServerMain:266 - Started |mms| in: 24979 (ms)
221
Optional: Run as Different User
1. Edit <install_dir>/conf/mms.conf:
|mms|_USER=foo_user
2. Change Ownership of <install_dir> for new user:
sudo chown -R foo_user:foo_group <install_dir>
3. Restart Ops Manager server:
sudo <install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms restart
Optional: Ops Manager Application Server Port Number
1. Edit <install_dir>/conf/conf-mms.properties:
mms.centralUrl=http://mms.acmewidgets.com:<newport>
2. Edit <install_dir>/conf/mms.conf
BASE_PORT=<newport>
3. Restart Ops Manager server:
sudo <install_dir>/bin/mongodb-mms restart
8.9 Back Up Ops Manager
On this page
•Back Up with the Public API
•Shut Down and Back Up
•Online Backup
Deploying the Ops Manager Backup Blockstore and Application databases as replica sets is key to protect the databases
from failure. Ensure you configure and deploy your replica sets for failover and redundancy. See Replica Set High
Availability and Replica Set Deployment Architectures for more about replica set architecture.
Beyond using MongoDB’s replication capabilities, you can create backups for the Backup Blockstore database and
Application database, both for longterm storage of snapshots, and for backing up Ops Manager for disaster recovery
purposes.
To restore Ops Manager, you only need backups of the Application database and the Backup Blockstore database. Ops
Manager’s other components are stateless: you can rebuild them from the installation packages if need be.
Important: Your Backup installation cannot back up Ops Manager. If you wish to use Ops Manager to back up Ops
Manager, you will need two Ops Manager installations: one to back up your MongoDB deployment, and another to
back up your Ops Manager databases.
222
Back Up with the Public API
The Ops Manager Public API provides the ability to programmatically restore snapshots on your desired schedule,
and store them offline. Ideally, you should save the backups to a tape drive, appending the new snapshots daily until
the drive is full, and then store the drive offsite.
Programmatically restoring snapshots has the same impact on the Backup Blockstore database as a typical restore.
You can then restore your MongoDB instance from the stored snapshots.
This method backs up the snapshots only: you cannot use the backups to restore Ops Manager in the event that the
Blockstore is lost.
Shut Down and Back Up
You can perform a full backup of all snapshots contained in Ops Manager, as well as the point-in-time restores that
Backup stores by shutting down Ops Manager and all of the hosts monitored and backed up by Ops Manager, and then
backing up their file systems while they’re offline.
The ‘Shut Down and Back Up’ approach has the advantage of providing all of Ops Manager’s backup snap shots as
well as the point-in-time restores that it stores. However, the process involves significant downtime and during the
shut down, Ops Manager is completely unavailable. As such, if a failure occurs in one of your MongoDB instances,
you may lose the data that was not backed up by Ops Manager prior to the shutdown.
Online Backup
Online backup is the riskiest option, as it involves backing up the databases while Ops Manager is running. If done
correctly, this provides you with all of the backup snapshots contained in Ops Manager, as well as the point-in-time
restores for the period leading up to the backup.
However, the process is complex and there is high potential for errors. To perform the online backup for databases
using the MMAPv1 storage engine, you must run fsyncLock on each mongod process that is part of the Ap-
plication and Backup Blockstore replica sets in the correct order, back up the underlying file system, and then call
fsyncUnlock. If you forget to call fsyncUnlock on a mongod instance, you risk significant long-term prob-
lems and failures.
Note: The fsyncLock command is not appropriate for databases that use the WiredTiger storage engine. See
db.fsyncLock() in the MongoDB manual.
9 API
Public API Principles Overview of the Public API.
Public API Resources The resources exposed by the Public API.
Public API Tutorials Enable the API, and create and modify a deployment.
9.1 Public API Principles
223
On this page
•Overview
•HTTP Methods
•JSON
•Linking
•Lists
•Envelopes
•Pretty Printing
•Response Codes
•Errors
•Authentication
•Additional Information
Overview
The Ops Manager Public API follows the principles of the REST architectural style to expose a number of internal
resources which enable programmatic access to Ops Manager’s features.
The API has the following features:
•JSON entities - All entities are expressed in JSON.
•Digest authentication - To ensure that your API key is never sent over the network, API requests are authenti-
cated using HTTP Digest Authentication.
•Browsable interface - Using a consistent linking mechanism, you can browse the entire API by starting at the
root resource and following links to related resources.
HTTP Methods
All resources support a subset of these common HTTP Methods:
•GET - Retrieve the JSON representation of a resource.
•POST - Create a new resource using the provided JSON representation.
•PUT - Replace a resource with the provided JSON representation.
•PATCH - Update the specified fields in a resource using the provided JSON representation.
•DELETE - Remove a resource.
JSON
All entities are represented in JSON. The following rules and conventions apply:
• When sending JSON to the server via POST or PUT, make sure to specify the correct content type request
header: Content-Type: application/json
224
• Invalid fields will be rejected rather than ignored. If, for example, you attempt to create a new entity and misspell
one of the fields, or if you attempt to update an existing entity and include a field that cannot be modified, the
server will respond with a 400 status code and an error message stating which field was invalid.
• All dates are returned as ISO-8601 formatted strings designated in UTC. When sending dates to the server (ie,
as query parameters or fields in POST or PATCH request entities), use ISO-8601 formatted dates. If you do
not specify a time zone, UTC is assumed. However, it is highly recommended that you include a time zone
designator to avoid any ambiguity.
• In some cases, a timestamp will be returned as a BSON timestamp, most notably in the backup resources. These
are represented in JSON documents as an object with two fields: date, an ISO-8601 formatted date string in
UTC with granularity to the second, and increment a 32-bit integer.
• Fields that contain numeric values in a particular unit will be named so as to disambiguate the unit being used.
For example, a host’s uptime is returned in millseconds, so the name of the host entity field is uptimeMsec.
• Fields that do not have a current value will be returned with an appropriate default value. For example, Ops
Manager will not have any statistics for a newly discovered host, so any statistics-related fields will have a value
of zero. Fields that do not have a sensible default value will be omitted from the entity. For example, a host that
is not using authentication will omit the username field from the returned entity.
• The fields in the JSON documents returned by the server are in no particular order, and it may change. Do not
depend on the order of the fields.
Linking
Each resource includes one or more links to sub-resources and/or related resources. For example, a host has a link to
the group it belongs to, the replica set it belongs to, and so on. Links are placed in the links field of an entity, which
is an array of link relation objects. Each link relation has two fields:
•rel - Name (or type) of the relation. Many of these are considered Extension Relation Types and will be
prefixed by http://mms.mongodb.com.
•href - The target URL.
All entities include at least one link relation called self, which is simply its own URL. When an entity is part of a list
(ie, when requesting all hosts in a group), then it only includes the self link relation. Here’s an example of a portion
of a host resource with a few links:
{
"id":"xxx",
"groupId":"yyy",
"hostname":"mongodb.foo.com",
"port":27017,
// additional host properties...
"links": [
{
"rel":"self",
"href":"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/xxx/hosts/yyy"
},
{
"rel":"http://mms.mongodb.com/group",
"href":"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/xxx"
}
]
}
For more information, refer to the Web Linking Specification. Note that although the specification describes a format
for including links in the HTTP response headers, doing so is not a requirement. To make the API easily browsable, it
225
includes the links in the response body rather than in the response headers.
Lists
Some resources return a list of entities. For example, you can request a list of all hosts in a group. When a list of
entities is expected in a response, the results will be returned in batches bounded by two query parameters:
•pageNum - Page number (1-based). Defaults to 1 if not specified.
•itemsPerPage - Maximum number of items to return, up to a maximum of 100. Defaults to 100 if not
specified.
The response entity contains three fields:
•totalCount - The total number of items in the entire result set. For example, if a group has a total of 57
hosts, and you make a request with pageNum=6 and itemsPerPage=10, then totalCount will be 57.
•results - The result set, which is an array of entity documents.
•links - Contains one to three link relations: previous for the previous page of results (omitted for the first
page); next for the next page of results (omitted for the last page); self for the current page (always present).
If you make a request for a list of entities and there are no results, then the API will respond with a 200 status code
and the results array will be empty. It does not respond with a 404 in this case, since the list of entities may not be
empty at some point in the future. However, had you requested a list of entities in a context that does not exist (ie, the
list of hosts for a non-existent group), then this will result in a 404 response status.
Here’s an example respoonse for the second page of 10 hosts in a group with a total of 57 hosts:
{
"totalCount":57,
"results": [
{
"id":"yyy",
"groupId":"xxx",
// additional host properties...
},
// additional host documents...
],
"links": [
{
"rel":"previous",
"href":"https://www.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/xxx/hosts?
˓→itemsPerPage=10&pageNum=1"
},
{
"rel":"next",
"href":"https://www.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/xxx/hosts?
˓→itemsPerPage=10&pageNum=3"
}
]
}
Envelopes
Some clients may not be able to access the HTTP response headers and/or status code. In that case, you can request
that the response include an “envelope,” which is simply an extra layer of information in the JSON document that
226
contains any relevant details that would normally be in the response headers. By default, the API will not include the
response in an envelope. To request one, simply add the query parameter envelope=true.
For responses that contain a single entity, the envelope will contain two fields:
•status - The HTTP status code.
•content - The requested entity.
For responses that contain a list of entities, there is already an envelope that wraps the results, so specifying
envelope=true in this case will only add the status field to the existing envelope.
Pretty Printing
By default, extraneous whitespace is stripped from the JSON returned by the server. To ask for pretty-printed JSON,
simply append the pretty=true query parameter to any request. Note that all the examples in this document show
pretty-printed JavaScript for clarity, although the example URLs do not contain this additional query parameter.
Response Codes
Responses utilize the standard HTTP response codes, including:
CodeMeaning Notes
200 OK The request was successful. This is typically the response to a successful GET request.
201 Created A new resource was created. This is typically the response to a succcessful POST
request.
202 Accepted A request for an asynchronous operation was accepted.
400 Bad Request Something was wrong with the client request.
401 Unauthorized Authentication is required but was not present in the request. Typically this means
that the digest authentication information was omitted from the request.
403 Forbidden Access to the specified resource is not permitted. Usually means that the user associ-
ated with the given API Key is not allowed to access the requested resource.
404 Not Found The requested resource does not exist.
405 Method Not Al-
lowed
The HTTP method is not supported for the specified resource. Keep in mind that
each resource may only support a subset of HTTP methods. For example, you are not
allowed to DELETE the root resource.
409 Conflict This is typically the response to a request to create or modify a property of an entity
that is unique when an existing entity already exists with the same value for that
property. For example, attempting to create a group with the same name as an existing
group is not allowed.
5xx Various server er-
rors
Something unexpected went wrong. Try again later and consider notifying Ops Man-
ager Support.
Errors
When a request results in an error, the response body will contain a document with additional details about what went
wrong. The document contains three fields:
•error - The error code, which is simply the HTTP status code.
•reason - A short description of the error, which is simply the HTTP status phrase.
•detail - A more detailed description of the error.
For example, here is the response body for a request for a host that does not exist:
227
{
"error":404,
"reason":"Not Found",
"detail":"No host exists with ID yyy in group xxx."
}
Authentication
As previously mentioned, the Ops Manager API uses HTTP Digest Authentication. The details of digest authentication
are beyond the scope of this document, but it essentially requires a username and a password which are hashed using
a unique server-generated value called a nonce. The username is the username of a registered Ops Manager account,
and the password is an API Key associated to that username.
Keep the following points in mind:
• The server-generated nonce is used by the client to hash the username and password before sending them back
to the server to authenticate a request. The nonce is only valid for a short amount of time as per the digest
authentication specification. This is to prevent replay attacks, so you can’t cache a nonce and use it forever.
• Some resource methods require even more security and are additionally protected by a whitelist, which is a list
of client IP addresses associated to a user account that are permitted to access these protected resources.
• The Ops Manager UI has a concept of roles, which allow more fine-grained control of the operations a user is
allowed to perform. The API resources also enforce the same authorization rules, so the resources and methods
that can be accessed by an API Key are governed by the roles granted to the associated user. For example, to
DELETE a host, the user that owns the API key used to make the request must be a Monitoring Admin or
Owner in the group that the host belongs to.
• Many resources are tied to a group, as evidenced by URLs of the form .../api/public/v1.0/groups/
<GROUP-ID>/.... For these resources, the user tied to the API key must be a member of the group or must
be assigned to one of the GLOBAL roles. Otherwise the server will respond with a 403 (Forbidden) status.
Automation
The API provides endpoints that let you modify a group’s deployment and retrieve deployment status. You can modify
a deployment by sending a new automation configuration to Ops Manager. The automation configuration is where you
describe and configure the MongoDB processes to be deployed. Ops Manager refers to this as the deployment’s “goal
state.” When you submit a new automation configuration through the API, the Automation Agents adjust the current
state of the system to match the goal state.
Important: There is no protection in the API to prevent concurrent modifications. If two administrators both start
with a configuration based on the current version, make their own modifications, and then submit their modifications,
the later modification wins.
Additional Information
See Public API Resources for a complete reference of all resources available in the Ops Manager Public API.
9.2 Public API Resources
The Ops Manager Public API exposes the following resources:
228
Root
Hosts
Metrics
Clusters
Groups
Users
Alerts
Alert Configurations
Backup Configurations
Snapshot Schedule
Snapshots
Restore Jobs
Whitelist
Automation Configuration
Automation Status
Root
On this page
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Example
This is the starting point (or the homepage, if you will) for the Ops Manager API. From here, you can traverse the
links to reach all other API resources.
Sample Entity
{
"throttling":false,
"links":[ ... ]
}
229
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
throttling boolean Tells whether or not Ops Manager is throttling data. This can be used as a simple indica-
tor of the current health of Ops Manager, since throttling is generally enabled when Ops
Manager is in an unhealthy state.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
groups Groups accessible to the current API user.
user The current API user.
Example
Retrieve the root resource:
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"throttling" : false,
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Hosts
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
You can typically access a host using a variety of names. DNS records and entries in the /etc/hosts file determine
what names you can use to access a given host.
When you add a host to Ops Manager, Ops Manager automatically discovers various valid hostname and port com-
binations for each monitored mongod and mongos process. Ops Manager then ranks the hostnames to choose a
“primary” hostname. Hostnames with the most periods are ranked highest, while the loopback address (127.0.0.1)
and localhost lowest. Ops Manager treats the “losing” hostnames as host aliases.
230
When Ops Manager processes a ping from the Monitoring agent, the algorithm for assigning a primary hostname
repeats. As a result, the primary hostname may change over time. You can also specify preferred hostnames in Ops
Manager’s group settings to override the hostname algorithm.
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts - Get all hosts in a group. Use the clusterId
query parameter to only get the hosts that belong to the specified cluster. The resulting list is sorted alphabeti-
cally by hostname:port.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID - Get a single host by ID.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/byName/HOSTNAME:PORT - Get a single
host by its hostname and port combination. You can specify either the primary hostname or an alias.
•POST /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts - Create a new host in the group. Note that
after a new host is created, Ops Manager will not know much about it except what is provided. Thus, the
document returned in the response will be missing many values until they are discovered, which could take
several minutes. Only these fields may be specified when creating a host:
–hostname - Required.
–port - Required.
–username - Required if authMechanismName is MONGODB_CR.Otherwise it’s illegal.
–password - Required if authMechanismName is MONGODB_CR. Otherwise it’s illegal.
–sslEnabled - Default is false if omitted.
–logsEnabled - Default is false if omitted.
–alertsEnabled - Default is true if omitted.
–profilerEnabled - Default is false if omitted.
–muninPort - Default is 0 and Munin stats are not collected if omitted.
–authMechanismName - Default is NONE if omitted. If set to MONGODB_CR then you must provide the
username and password.
•PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID - Update an existing host using
the fields provided. Unspecified fields will preserve their current values.
–Only these fields may be specified: username password sslEnabled logsEnabled
alertsEnabled profilerEnabled muninPort authMechanismName
–If authMechanismName is NONE then any existing value for username and password will be
cleared out. For MONGODB_CR you must provide both username and password.
•DELETE /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID - Remove a host.
Sample Entity
{
"id":"680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc",
"groupId":"2847387cd717dabc348a",
"hostname":"localhost",
"port":27017,
"typeName":"SHARD_SECONDARY",
231
"lastPing":"2014-02-15T16:03:47Z",
"ipAddress":"127.0.0.1",
"version":"2.4.3",
"deactivated":false,
"hasStartupWarnings":true,
"sslEnabled":false,
"logsEnabled":false,
"lastReactivated":"2013-12-15T09:17:23Z",
"uptimeMsec":48918394,
"lastRestart":"2014-01-16T12:34:01Z",
"shardName":"sh1",
"replicaSetName":"rs1",
"replicaStateName":"RECOVERING",
"created":"2013-11-05T03:04:05Z",
"hostEnabled":true,
"journalingEnabled":false,
"alertsEnabled":true,
"hidden":false,
"muninEnabled":false,
"profilerEnabled":false,
"lowUlimit":false,
"muninPort":4949,
"authMechanismName":"MONGODB_CR",
"username":"mongo",
"aliases":["127.0.0.1:27017" ],
"links":[ ... ]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
groupId string ID of the group that owns this host.
hostname string Primary hostname. A host typically has several aliases, so the primary is the best available
name as decided by Ops Manager.
port integer Port that MongoDB process (mongod or mongos) listens on.
typeName enum Type for this host. Possible values are:
•STANDALONE
•REPLICA_PRIMARY
•REPLICA_SECONDARY
•REPLICA_ARBITER
•RECOVERING
•MASTER
•SLAVE
•SHARD_MONGOS
•SHARD_CONFIG
•SHARD_STANDALONE
•SHARD_PRIMARY
•SHARD_SECONDARY
•NO_DATA
The host’s type for new hosts added to Ops Manager will be NO_DATA until the Monitoring
Agent receives its first ping.
Continued on next page
232
Table 1 – continued from previous page
Name Type Description
lastPing date When the last ping for this host was received.
ipAddress string IP address of this host.
version string Version of MongoDB running on this host.
deactivated boolean Has this host been deactivated by Ops Manager? A host will be marked as deactivated when
Ops Manager hasn’t received a ping from it in several days.
hasStartupWarningsboolean Are there startup warnings for this host?
sslEnabled boolean Is SSL enabled for this host?
logsEnabledboolean Is Ops Manager collecting logs for this host?
lastReactivateddate The last time this has was manually reactivated.
uptimeMseclong Number of milliseconds since this host’s last restart.
lastRestart date Date this host was last restarted.
shardName string Name of the shard this host belongs to. Only present if the host is part of a sharded cluster.
replicaSetNamestring Name of the replica set this host belongs to. Only present if this host is part of a replica set.
replicaStateNameenum Current state of this host within a replica set. Only present if this host is part of a replica
set. See Replica Set Member States for possible values.
created date Date this host was created or first discovered by Ops Manager.
hostEnabledboolean Is this host currently enabled? Hosts can be manually disabled in the Ops Manager UI.
journalingEnabledboolean Is journaling enabled for this host?
alertsEnabledboolean Are alerts enabled for this host?
muninEnabledboolean Are Munin stats being collected for this host?
hidden boolean Is this host currently hidden? When Ops Manager deactivates a host, it will also mark it as
hidden.
profilerEnabledboolean Is Ops Manager collecting profile information from this host?
lowUlimit boolean Does this host have a low ulimit setting?
muninPort integer What port should be used to collect Munin stats from this host?
authMechanismNameenum The authentication mechanism used to connect to this host. Possible values are:
•MONGODB_CR
•GSSAPI
•NONE
username string Username for connecting to this host. Only present when the authMechanismName is
MONGODB_CR.
password string Password for connecting to this host. If a host’s authMechanismName is MONGODB_CR,
then you must include this field when creating the host or updating its credentials. However,
it will never be exposed when a host entity is returned.
aliases array of
strings
A list of alternate hostname:port combinations that Ops Manager has discovered for the
host.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
cluster The cluster this host belongs to. Only present if the host is part of a replica set or master/slave.
parentClusterThe parent cluster. Only present if the host is part of a sharded cluster.
group The group that this host belongs to.
233
Examples
Create a New Host
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/hosts" --
˓→data ’
{
"hostname": "localhost",
"port": 27017
}’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/
˓→hosts/680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc
{
"id" : "4059580c20c4581872ef24d0b8f5dca0",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"hostname" : "localhost",
"port" : 27017,
"deactivated" : false,
"hasStartupWarnings" : false,
"sslEnabled" : false,
"logsEnabled" : false,
"created" : "2014-04-22T19:56:50Z",
"hostEnabled" : true,
"journalingEnabled" : false,
"alertsEnabled" : true,
"hidden" : false,
"muninEnabled" : false,
"profilerEnabled" : false,
"lowUlimit" : false,
"authMechanismName" : "NONE",
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Update a Host
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/533c5895b91030606f21033a/hosts/
˓→680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc" --data ’
{
"sslEnabled": true,
"username": "mongo",
"password": "M0ng0DB!:)"
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc",
"groupId" : "533c5895b91030606f21033a",
"hostname" : "localhost",
"port" : 26000,
234
"deactivated" : false,
"hasStartupWarnings" : false,
"sslEnabled" : true,
"logsEnabled" : false,
"created" : "2014-04-22T19:56:50Z",
"hostEnabled" : true,
"journalingEnabled" : false,
"alertsEnabled" : true,
"hidden" : false,
"muninEnabled" : false,
"profilerEnabled" : false,
"lowUlimit" : false,
"authMechanismName" : "MONGODB_CR",
"username" : "mongo",
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get One Host
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533c5895b91030606f21033a/hosts/56e9378f601dc49360a40949c8a6df6c"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "56e9378f601dc49360a40949c8a6df6c",
"groupId" : "533c5895b91030606f21033a",
"hostname" : "mymongo.test.com",
"port" : 26000,
"deactivated" : false,
"hasStartupWarnings" : false,
"sslEnabled" : true,
"logsEnabled" : false,
"created" : "2014-04-22T19:56:50Z",
"hostEnabled" : true,
"journalingEnabled" : false,
"alertsEnabled" : true,
"hidden" : false,
"muninEnabled" : false,
"profilerEnabled" : false,
"lowUlimit" : false,
"authMechanismName" : "MONGODB_CR",
"username" : "mongo",
"aliases": [ "mymongo:26000", "12.34.56.78:26000" ]
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get All Hosts
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533c5895b91030606f21033a/hosts"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
235
{
"totalCount" : 2,
"results" : [
{
"id" : "56e9378f601dc49360a40949c8a6df6c",
"groupId" : "533c5895b91030606f21033a",
"hostname" : "mymongo.test.com",
"port" : 26000,
"deactivated" : false,
"hasStartupWarnings" : false,
"sslEnabled" : true,
"logsEnabled" : false,
"created" : "2014-04-22T19:56:50Z",
"hostEnabled" : true,
"journalingEnabled" : false,
"alertsEnabled" : true,
"hidden" : false,
"muninEnabled" : false,
"profilerEnabled" : false,
"lowUlimit" : false,
"authMechanismName" : "MONGODB_CR",
"username" : "mongo",
"aliases": [ "mymongo:26000", "12.34.56.78:26000" ]
"links" : [ ... ]
},
{
...
}
]
}
Delete a Host
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/groups/533c5895b91030606f21033a/hosts/680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Metrics
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
236
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID/metrics - Get a list of all avail-
able metrics for the host. Each entity in the list will be a partial metric entity. No actual data points are returned,
but each entity contains a self link which you may follow to retrieve the full metric entity.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID/metrics/METRIC-NAME - Get
the data points for the specified host and metric. If no additional query parameters are given, then the
minute-level data for the past hour is returned. The METRIC-NAME may be any of the supported val-
ues listed for the metricName field, above. Note that if the provided metric is a database-level met-
ric (ie, DB_LOCK_PERCENTAGE) or a hardware metric for a specific device (ie, its name begins with
MUNIN_IOSTAT), then the response entity will contain a list of links to all available database (or hardware
device) metrics. You may also provide additional query parameters:
–granularity - The size of the epoch. Acceptable values are: MINUTE HOUR DAY.
–period - The ISO-8601 formatted time period that specifies how far back in the past to
query. For example, to request the last 36 hours of hour-level data, you must specify:
granularity=HOUR&period=P1DT12H.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID/metrics/DB-METRIC-NAME/
DB-NAME - Get the data points for the specified host, database metric, and database name. The only available
database-level metric is DB_LOCK_PERCENTAGE. The same query parameters described above are also
supported.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/hosts/HOST-ID/metrics/HW-METRIC-NAME/
DEVICE-NAME - Get the data points for the specified host, hardware metric, and device name. The
device-specific hardware metrics include the supported values for the metricName field that begin with
MUNIN_IOSTAT_. The same query parameters described above are also supported.
Sample Entity
{
"hostId":"680ab316473d6b28f966364b947134fc",
"groupId":"2847387cd717dabc348a",
"metricName" :"OPCOUNTERS_UPDATE",
"units" :"RAW",
"granularity" :"MINUTE",
"dataPoints" :[ {
"timestamp" :"2014-08-26T16:42:00Z",
"value" :10.3911
}, {
"timestamp" :"2014-08-26T16:43:00Z",
"value" :14.938
}, {
"timestamp" :"2014-08-26T16:44:00Z",
"value" :12.8882
},
...
],
"links" :[ ... ]
}
237
238
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
hostId string ID of the host to which this metric pertains.
groupId string ID of the group that owns this host.
metricNameenum The name of the metric. Possible values are:
•ASSERT_MSG
•ASSERT_REGULAR
•ASSERT_USER
•ASSERT_WARNING
•BACKGROUND_FLUSH_AVG
•COMPUTED_MEMORY
•CONNECTIONS
•CURSORS_TOTAL_CLIENT_CURSORS_SIZE
•CURSORS_TOTAL_OPEN
•CURSORS_TOTAL_TIMED_OUT
•DB_DATA_SIZE_TOTAL
•DB_LOCK_PERCENTAGE
•DB_STORAGE_TOTAL
•EFFECTIVE_LOCK_PERCENTAGE
•EXTRA_INFO_PAGE_FAULTS
•GLOBAL_ACCESSES_NOT_IN_MEMORY
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_READERS
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_TOTAL
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_WRITERS
•GLOBAL_PAGE_FAULT_EXCEPTIONS_THROWN
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_ACCESSES
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_HITS
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_MISSES
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_MISS_RATIO
•JOURNALING_COMMITS_IN_WRITE_LOCK
•JOURNALING_MB
•MEMORY_MAPPED
•MEMORY_RESIDENT
•MEMORY_VIRTUAL
•MUNIN_CPU_IOWAIT
•MUNIN_CPU_IRQ
•MUNIN_CPU_NICE
•MUNIN_CPU_SOFTIRQ
•MUNIN_CPU_STEAL
•MUNIN_CPU_SYSTEM
•MUNIN_CPU_USER
•MUNIN_IOSTAT_OP_READ
•MUNIN_IOSTAT_OP_WRITE
•MUNIN_IOSTAT_TIME_READ
•MUNIN_IOSTAT_TIME_WRITE
•NETWORK_BYTES_IN
•NETWORK_BYTES_OUT
•NETWORK_NUM_REQUESTS
•OPCOUNTERS_CMD
•OPCOUNTERS_DELETE
•OPCOUNTERS_GETMORE
•OPCOUNTERS_INSERT
•OPCOUNTERS_QUERY
•OPCOUNTERS_REPL_CMD
•OPCOUNTERS_REPL_INSERT
•OPCOUNTERS_REPL_UPDATE
•OPCOUNTERS_REPL_DELETE
•OPCOUNTERS_UPDATE
units enum The units in which the metric values are expressed. Possible values are:
•RAW
•BITS
•BYTES
•KILOBITS
•KILOBYTES
•MEGABITS
•MEGABYTES
•GIGABITS
•GIGABYTES
•TERABYTES
•PETABYTES
•MILLISECONDS
•SECONDS
•MINUTES
•HOURS
•DAYS
granularity enum The size of the epoch covered by each data point. Possible values are:
•MINUTE
•HOUR
•DAY
deviceNamestring The name of the device. Only present for hardware (ie, Munin) metrics.
databaseNamestring The name of the database. Only present for database-level metrics.
dataPoints object
array
An array of objects, where each object represents a single metric data point. When
there is no data point available for a particular epoch, then it will simply be missing
from the array. For example, if you request minute-level data points for 1:30PM through
2:00PM, but Ops Manager does not have a 1:31PM sample, then: dataPoints[0].timestamp
= ‘. . . T13:30:00Z’; dataPoints[1].timestamp = ‘. . . T13:32:00Z’; dataPoints[2].timestamp =
‘. . . T13:33:00Z’; etc.
dataPoints.$.timestampdate The timestamp of the beginning of the epoch represented by this data point.
dataPoints.$.valuefloat The value of the data point.
239
Links
Relation Description
self Me
group The group that the host belongs to.
host The host to which the metric pertains.
Examples
Get All Available Metrics
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4/hosts/04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78/metrics"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 53,
"results" : [ {
"hostId" : "04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78",
"groupId" : "51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4",
"metricName" : "ASSERT_REGULAR",
"units" : "RAW",
"links" : [ {
"rel" : "self",
"href" : "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4/hosts/04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78/metrics/ASSERT_
˓→REGULAR"
} ]
}, {
"hostId" : "04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78",
"groupId" : "51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4",
"metricName" : "ASSERT_WARNING",
"units" : "RAW"
"links" : [ {
"rel" : "self",
"href" : "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4/hosts/04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78/metrics/ASSERT_
˓→WARNING"
} ]
}, ... ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get a Single Metric
The following example gets hour-level data for the past 12 hours.
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4/hosts/04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78/metrics/OPCOUNTERS_
˓→QUERY?granularity=HOUR&period=PT12H"
240
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"groupId" : "51b9361d5ae9048f0aab01f4",
"hostId" : "04cf770dc43c9ff21747ecf71ff9ee78",
"metricName" : "OPCOUNTERS_QUERY",
"units" : "RAW",
"granularity" : "MINUTE",
"dataPoints" : [ {
"timestamp" : "2014-08-29T14:00:00Z",
"value" : 381.2
}, {
"timestamp" : "2014-08-29T15:00:00Z",
"value" : 407.23
}, {
"timestamp" : "2014-08-29T16:00:00Z",
"value" : 365.3124
}, ... ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Clusters
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
MongoDB supports two different kinds of clusters: replica sets and sharded clusters. Since a shard within a sharded
cluster is typically a replica set, a sharded cluster is a cluster of clusters. This relationship is reflected in the way Ops
Manager models clusters, and it might lead to unexpected results from the Clusters resource. As an example, consider
a deployment with one sharded cluster containing four shards, and each shard is a three-node replica set. In this
scenario, the Clusters resource will return five entities: one that represents the sharded cluster, and four to represent
the replica sets (shards). However, if each shard in this fictitious deployment was a standalone mongod instead of a
replica set, then the Clusters resource would only return one entity representing the sharded cluster.
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID - Get a single cluster by
ID.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters - Get all clusters in a group. Note that if
Ops Manager hasn’t received a ping from a cluster in several days, it will be considered inactive and will be
filtered from this list. Use the parentClusterId query parameter to get all clusters with the specified parent
cluster ID. The list of entities is sorted in ascending order by the date that Ops Manager discovered the cluster.
•PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID - Update a cluster by
241
ID. The only property that you may modify is the clusterName, since all other properties of a cluster are
discovered by Ops Manager. Additionally, this operation is only permitted on clusters of type SHARDED and
SHARDED_REPLICA_SET.
Sample Entity
{
"id":"yyy",
"groupId":"xxx",
"typeName":"REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName":"Cluster 0",
"shardName":"shard001",
"replicaSetName":"rs1",
"lastHeartbeat":"2014-02-26T17:32:45Z",
"links":[ ... ]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
groupId string ID of the group that owns this cluster.
typeName enum Specifies what kind of cluster this is. Possible values are:
•MASTER_SLAVE
•REPLICA_SET
•SHARDED
•SHARDED_REPLICA_SET
clusterNamestring Display name of the cluster. Only applies to sharded clusters. Note that mongod itself
doesn’t allow you to name a cluster; this name is supplied by (and editable within) Ops
Manager. For a replica set within a sharded cluster, the cluster name is the name of its
parent cluster.
shardName string Name of the shard. Only present for a cluster of type SHARDED or REPLICA_SET that is
part of a sharded cluster.
replicaSetNamestring Name of the replica set. Only present for a cluster of type REPLICA_SET.
lastHeartbeatdate The approximate last time Ops Manager processed a ping from this cluster.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
parentClusterThe parent cluster. Only present if the type is SHARDED or REPLICA_SET within a sharded cluster.
group The group that this cluster belongs to.
clusters The member shards that belong to this cluster. Only present if the type is SHARDED_REPLICA_SET.
hosts The member hosts that belong to this cluster. Present for all types except SHARDED_REPLICA_SET.
Note: to get the hosts of a sharded cluster, follow the clusters link and get the hosts for each
shard.
242
Examples
Get a Cluster
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533c5895b91030606f21033a/clusters/533d7d4730040be257defe88"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533d7d4730040be257defe88",
"typeName" : "SHARDED_REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName" : "Animals",
"lastHeartbeat" : "2014-04-03T15:26:58Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get all Clusters
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533c5895b91030606f21033a/clusters"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 3,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "533d7d4730040be257defe88",
"typeName" : "SHARDED_REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName" : "Animals",
"lastHeartbeat" : "2014-04-03T15:26:58Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "533d7d4630040be257defe85",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName" : "Animals",
"shardName" : "cats",
"replicaSetName" : "cats",
"lastHeartbeat" : "2014-04-03T15:24:54Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "533d7d4630040be257defe83",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName" : "Animals",
"shardName" : "dogs",
"replicaSetName" : "dogs",
"lastHeartbeat" : "2014-04-03T15:26:30Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
243
Update a Cluster
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/533c5895b91030606f21033a/clusters/
˓→533d7d4730040be257defe88" --data ’
{
"clusterName": "Zoo"
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533d7d4730040be257defe88",
"typeName" : "SHARDED_REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName" : "Zoo",
"lastHeartbeat" : "2014-04-03T15:26:58Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Groups
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID - Get a single group by ID.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups - Get all groups for the current user.
•POST /api/public/v1.0/groups - Create a new group. Only the name field may be specified. The
publicApiEnabled field will be set to true for groups created with the API. The response entity will
include the agentApiKey for the group.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/users - Get all users in a group.
•DELETE /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/users/USER-ID - Remove a user from a group.
•POST /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/users - Add existing user(s) to a group.
–You must send an array of entities, even if you’re only adding a single user.
–For each user being added, specify the user ID and role(s) to be assigned.
–If a user is specified that is already part of the group, then their existing role(s) will be overwritten.
244
•DELETE /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID - Delete a group. Once a group is deleted, its name
cannot be reclaimed. Thus, if you create a group named My Group and then delete it, you will not be able to
create another group named My Group.
Sample Entity
{
"id":"xxx",
"name":"My Group",
"hostCounts":{
"arbiter":2,
"config":1,
"primary":4,
"secondary":8,
"mongos":2.
"master":0,
"slave":0
},
"lastActiveAgent":ISODate("2014-02-05T07:23:34Z"),
"activeAgentCount":1,
"replicaSetCount":3,
"shardCount":2,
"publicApiEnabled":true,
"agentApiKey":"cbd728abd6a6d6c6b6d7826345dbcff0e",
"links":[ ... ]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
name string Display name for the group.
hostCounts object The total number of hosts by type. The embedded fields should be self-explanatory.
lastActiveAgentdate Date that a ping was last received from one of the group’s Monitoring Agents.
activeAgentCountinteger Number of Monitoring Agents sending regular pings to Ops Manager.
replicaSetCountinteger Total number of replica sets for this group.
shardCountinteger Total number of shards for this group.
publicApiEnabledboolean Is the Public API enabled for this group? This is a read-only field that will always be true
for groups created with the API. Note that for groups created in the Ops Manager UI, the
only way to set this flag to true is by enabling the Public API for the group in the Settings
tab.
agentApiKeystring The API key for your agent. This field is only present in the response entity to a POST
request. Thus, the API key will only be exposed at group creation time.
245
Links
Relation Description
self Me
hosts All hosts in the group.
users All users in the group.
clusters All clusters in the group.
alerts All open alerts for the group.
alertConfigsAll alert configurations for the group.
backupConfigsAll backup configurations for the group.
Examples
Get a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"name" : "API Example",
"hostCounts" : {
"arbiter" : 0,
"config" : 1,
"primary" : 3,
"secondary" : 4,
"mongos" : 2,
"master" : 0,
"slave" : 0
},
"lastActiveAgent" : "2014-04-03T18:18:12Z",
"activeAgentCount" : 1,
"replicaSetCount" : 3,
"shardCount" : 2,
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get All Groups for Current User
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 6,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"name" : "API Example",
"hostCounts" : {
"arbiter" : 0,
246
"config" : 1,
"primary" : 3,
"secondary" : 4,
"mongos" : 2,
"master" : 0,
"slave" : 0
},
"lastActiveAgent" : "2014-04-03T18:18:12Z",
"activeAgentCount" : 1,
"replicaSetCount" : 3,
"shardCount" : 2,
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
// etc.
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Create a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups" --data ’
{
"name": "API Example 2"
}’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/533daa30879bb2da07807696
{
"id" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"name" : "API Example 2",
"activeAgentCount" : 0,
"replicaSetCount" : 0,
"shardCount" : 0,
"publicApiEnabled": true,
"agentApiKey": "cbd747d7b7b711de45aa3ff0e",
"hostCounts" : {
"arbiter" : 0,
"config" : 0,
"primary" : 0,
"secondary" : 0,
"mongos" : 0,
"master" : 0,
"slave" : 0
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Add Users to a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/533daa30879bb2da07807696/users" --
˓→data ’
247
[
{
"id": "5329c8dfe4b0b07a83d67e7d",
"roles": [{
"roleName": "GROUP_READ_ONLY"
}]
},
{
"id": "5329c906e4b0b07a83d691ba",
"roles": [{
"roleName": "GROUP_MONITORING_ADMIN"
}, {
"roleName": "GROUP_BACKUP_ADMIN"
}]
}
]’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Delete a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/groups/533daa30879bb2da07807696"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Get Users in a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5356823bc0edc2788a835ed0/users"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 2,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "5357e25a300490374243f425",
"username" : "user1@foo.com",
"emailAddress" : "user1@foo.com",
"firstName" : "User",
"lastName" : "One",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "5356823bc0edc2788a835ed0",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "5356823b3004dee37132bb7b",
"username" : "user2@foo.com",
"emailAddress" : "user2@foo.com",
"firstName" : "User",
"lastName" : "Deux",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "5356823bc0edc2788a835ed0",
248
"roleName" : "GROUP_OWNER"
}, {
"groupId" : "5356823bc0edc2788a835ecd",
"roleName" : "GROUP_OWNER"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Delete a User from a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/groups/5356823bc0edc2788a835ed0/users/5357e25a300490374243f425"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Users
On this page
•Endpoints
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
Overview
The users resource allows you to create and update users and retrieve user information. This resource also provides
an endpoint for creating the first user in a system and retrieving an API key for use in future API calls. The endpoint
for creating the first user is the only endpoint you can use without first having an API key.
Endpoints
Get a User by ID
Get a single user by ID. You can always retrieve your own user account. Otherwise, you must be a global user or you
must have the user admin role in at least one group that is common between you and the user you are retrieving.
GET /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID
249
Get a User by Name
Get a single user by name. You can always retrieve your own user account. Otherwise, you must be a global user or
you must have the user admin role in at least one group that is common between you and the user you are retrieving.
GET /api/public/v1.0/users/byName/USER-NAME
Get All Users in a Group
Retrieve all users in a group.
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/users
Create the First User
This endpoint is available only when the Ops Manager instance has no users. This is the only API call you can make
without first having an API key.
The user created through this endpoint is automatically granted the GLOBAL_OWNER role. The returned document
includes the new user’s API key, which you can use to make further API calls.
The endpoint does not create a group, but you can use the new user and API key to create a group through the Groups
resource in the API. You cannot login to Ops Manager until after you have created a group.
POST /api/public/v1.0/unauth/users
Create a User
Create a new user. All fields are required.
POST /api/public/v1.0/users
Update a User
Update an existing user using the fields provided. Unspecified fields will preserve their current values. You cannot
specify the password for security reasons.
PATCH /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID
Sample Entity
{
"id":"xxx",
"username":"somebody",
"password":"abc123",
"emailAddress":"somebody@somewhere-else.com",
"mobileNumber":"2125551234",
"firstName":"John",
"lastName":"Doe",
250
"roles": [
{
"groupId":"8491812938cbda83918c",
"roleName":"GROUP_OWNER"
},
{
"groupId":"4829cbda839cbdac3819",
"roleName":"GROUP_READ_ONLY"
}
],
"links":[... ]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
username string Ops Manager username.
password string Password. This field is NOT included in the entity returned from the server. It can only be
sent in the entity body when creating a new user.
emailAddressstring Email address.
mobileNumberstring Mobile number. This field can only be set or edited using the Ops Manager UI because it is
tied to two factor authentication.
firstName string First name.
lastName string Last name.
roles object
array
Role assignments.
roles.groupIdstring The groupId in which the user has the specified role. Note that for the “global” roles (those
whose name starts with GLOBAL_) there is no groupId since these roles are not tied to a
group.
roles.roleNameenum The name of the role. Possible values are:
•GLOBAL_AUTOMATION_ADMIN
•GLOBAL_BACKUP_ADMIN
•GLOBAL_MONITORING_ADMIN
•GLOBAL_OWNER
•GLOBAL_READ_ONLY
•GLOBAL_USER_ADMIN
•GROUP_AUTOMATION_ADMIN
•GROUP_BACKUP_ADMIN
•GROUP_MONITORING_ADMIN
•GROUP_OWNER
•GROUP_READ_ONLY
•GROUP_USER_ADMIN
Links
Relation Description
self Me
whitelist The user’s whitelist.
251
Examples
Get a User by ID
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/
˓→533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"username" : "jane",
"emailAddress" : "jane@qa.example.com",
"firstName" : "Jane",
"lastName" : "D’oh",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}
Get a User by Name
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://cloud.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/
˓→users/byName/jane"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"emailAddress" : "jane@qa.example.com",
"firstName" : "Jane",
"id" : "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"lastName" : "D’oh",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}
Get All Users in a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533daa30879bb2da07807696/users"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount": 3,
"results": [ {
"id" : "5329c8dfe4b0b07a83d67e7d",
"username" : "jdoe",
252
"emailAddress" : "jdoe@example.com",
"firstName" : "John",
"lastName" : "Doe",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "5329cb6e879bb2da07806511",
"roleName" : "GROUP_OWNER"
}, {
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"roleName" : "GROUP_READ_ONLY"
}, {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_READ_ONLY"
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}, {
// etc.
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}
Create a User
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users" --data ’
{
"username": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"emailAddress": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"firstName": "Jane",
"lastName": "Doe",
"password": "M0ng0D8!:)",
"roles": [{
"groupId": "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName": "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
}]
}’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb
{
"id" : "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"username" : "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"emailAddress" : "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"firstName" : "Jane",
"lastName" : "Doe",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
253
Create the First User
curl -H "Content-Type: application/json" -i -X POST "http://<ops-manager-url>:<port>/
˓→api/public/v1.0/unauth/users" --data ’
{
"username": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"emailAddress": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"password": "Passw0rd.",
"firstName": "Jane",
"lastName": "Doe"
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"user": {
"username": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"roles": [
{
"roleName": "GLOBAL_OWNER"
}
],
"lastName": "Doe",
"id": "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"firstName": "Jane",
"emailAddress": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"links": [ ... ]
},
"apiKey": "1234abcd-ab12-cd34-ef56-1234abcd1234"
}
Create a User
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users" --data ’
{
"username": "jane",
"emailAddress": "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"firstName": "Jane",
"lastName": "Doe",
"password": "M0ng0D8!:)",
"roles": [{
"groupId": "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName": "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
}]
}’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb
{
"id" : "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"username" : "jane",
"emailAddress" : "jane.doe@mongodb.com",
"firstName" : "Jane",
"lastName" : "Doe",
254
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Update a User
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb" --data ’
{
"emailAddress": "jane@qa.example.com",
"lastName": "D’oh"
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533dc19ce4b00835ff81e2eb",
"username" : "jane",
"emailAddress" : "jane@qa.example.com",
"firstName" : "Jane",
"lastName" : "D’oh",
"roles" : [ {
"groupId" : "533daa30879bb2da07807696",
"roleName" : "GROUP_USER_ADMIN"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Alerts
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alerts - Gets all alerts with the specified status. Use
the status query parameter with one of these possible values: OPEN CLOSED
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alerts/ALERT-ID - Get a single alert by ID.
255
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alerts/ALERT-ID/alertConfigs - Get the
alert configuration(s) that triggered this alert.
•PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alerts/ALERT-ID - Update an existing alert.
The only field you may modify is the acknowledgedUntil field.
–To acknowledge an alert “forever” set the date to 100 years in the future.
–To unacknowledge a previously acknowledged alert, set the date in the past.
Sample Entity
{
"id":"yyy",
"groupId":"xxx",
"alertConfigId":"xxx",
"typeName":"HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName":"OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"status":"OPEN",
"acknowledgedUntil":"2014-03-01T12:00:00Z",
"created":"2014-02-01T12:34:12Z",
"updated":"2014-02-02T01:23:45Z",
"resolved":null,
"lastNotified":"2014-02-04T02:43:13Z",
"currentValue":{
"number":123.45,
"units":"MEGABYTES"
},
"links":[ ... ]
}
256
257
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
groupId string ID of the group that this alert was opened for.
alertConfigIdstring ID of the alert configuration that triggered this alert.
typeName enum The type of alert. Possible values are:
•AGENT
•BACKUP
•HOST
•HOST_METRIC
•REPLICA_SET
eventTypeNameenum The name of the event that triggered the alert. The possible values here depend on the
typeName:
•AGENT - Possible values:
–MONITORING_AGENT_DOWN
–BACKUP_AGENT_DOWN
•HOST - Possible values:
–HOST_DOWN
–HOST_RECOVERING
–VERSION_BEHIND
–HOST_EXPOSED
•HOST_METRIC - Possible values:
–OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD
•BACKUP - Possible values:
–OPLOG_BEHIND
–RESYNC_REQUIRED
status enum The current state of the alert. Possible values are:
•OPEN
•CLOSED
acknowledgedUntildate The date through which the alert has been acknowledged. Will not be present if the alert
has never been acknowledged.
acknowledgementCommentstring The comment left by the user who acknowledged the alert. Will not be present if the alert
has never been acknowledged.
acknowledgingUsernamestring The username of the user who acknowledged the alert. Will not be present if the alert has
never been acknowledged.
created date When the alert was opened.
updated date When the alert was last updated.
resolved date When the alert was closed. Only present if the status is CLOSED.
lastNotifieddate When the last notification was sent for this alert. Only present if notifications have been
sent.
metricNameenum The name of the metric whose value went outside the threshold. Only present for alerts of
type HOST_METRIC. Possible values are:
•ASSERT_REGULAR
•ASSERT_WARNING
•ASSERT_MSG
•ASSERT_USER
•OPCOUNTER_CMD
•OPCOUNTER_QUERY
•OPCOUNTER_UPDATE
•OPCOUNTER_DELETE
•OPCOUNTER_INSERT
•OPCOUNTER_REPL_UPDATE
•OPCOUNTER_REPL_DELETE
•OPCOUNTER_REPL_INSERT
•MEMORY_RESIDENT
•MEMORY_VIRTUAL
•MEMORY_MAPPED
•COMPUTED_MEMORY
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_ACCESSES
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_HITS
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_MISSES
•INDEX_COUNTERS_BTREE_MISS_RATIO
•GLOBAL_LOCK_PERCENTAGE
•BACKGROUND_FLUSH_AVG
•CONNECTIONS
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_TOTAL
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_READERS
•GLOBAL_LOCK_CURRENT_QUEUE_WRITERS
•CURSORS_TOTAL_OPEN
•CURSORS_TOTAL_TIMED_OUT
•CURSORS_TOTAL_CLIENT_CURSORS_SIZE
•NETWORK_BYTES_IN
•NETWORK_BYTES_OUT
•NETWORK_NUM_REQUESTS
•OPLOG_MASTER_TIME
•OPLOG_SLAVE_LAG_MASTER_TIME
•EXTRA_INFO_PAGE_FAULTS
•DB_STORAGE_TOTAL
•JOURNALING_COMMITS_IN_WRITE_LOCK
•JOURNALING_MB
•JOURNALING_WRITE_DATA_FILES_MB
currentValueobject The current value of the metric that triggered the alert. Only present for alerts of type
HOST_METRIC.
currentValue.numberfloat The value of the metric.
currentValue.unitsenum The units for the value. Depends on the type of metric. For example, a metric that measures
memory consumption would have a byte measurement, while a metric that measures time
would have a time unit. Possible values are:
•RAW
•BITS
•BYTES
•KILOBITS
•KILOBYTES
•MEGABITS
•MEGABYTES
•GIGABITS
•GIGABYTES
•TERABYTES
•PETABYTES
•MILLISECONDS
•SECONDS
•MINUTES
•HOURS
•DAYS
258
Links
Relation Description
self Me
group The group that this alert was triggered for.
alertConfig The alert configuration that triggered this alert.
alertConfigsA list of alert configurations that triggered this alert. This list will only contain a single element and is
present for backward compatibility. New code should use the alertConfig link instead.
host The host that triggered this alert. Only present for alerts of type HOST.
Examples
Get an Alert
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alerts/533cb4b8e4b0f1820cdabc7f"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533cb4b8e4b0f1820cdabc7f",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "BACKUP",
"eventTypeName" : "OPLOG_BEHIND",
"status" : "CLOSED",
"created" : "2014-04-03T01:09:12Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-03T01:14:12Z",
"resolved" : "2014-04-03T01:14:12Z",
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get Open Alerts
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alerts?status=OPEN"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount": 1,
"results": [ {
"alertConfigId":"55e756a6e4b0fa1210c695a2",
"id" : "533dc45ee4b00835ff81ec2a",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"hostId":"51714c7fa22cbe473a9573d3629ff53c",
"hostnameAndPort":"example.test.4182.mongodbdns.com:27017",
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"status" : "OPEN",
"created" : "2014-04-03T20:28:14Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-03T20:28:14Z",
"lastNotified" : "2014-04-03T20:28:23Z",
259
"metricName": "ASSERTS_REGULAR",
"currentValue" : {
"number" : 0.0,
"units" : "RAW"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get Alert Configurations that Triggered an Alert
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alerts/533cb4b8e4b0f1820cdabc7f/alertConfigs"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount": 3,
"results": [ {
"id" : "5271259ee4b00ece6b4754ef",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "BACKUP",
"eventTypeName" : "RESYNC_REQUIRED",
"created" : "2013-10-30T15:28:30Z",
"updated" : "2014-02-12T16:11:05Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "EMAIL",
"intervalMin" : 60,
"delayMin" : 0,
"emailAddress" : "somebody@somewhere.com"
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Acknowledge an Alert
curl -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -i -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alerts/
˓→533dc45ee4b00835ff81ec2a" --data ’
{
"acknowledgedUntil": "2014-04-15T00:00:00-0400",
"acknowledgementComment": "This is normal. Please ignore."
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "533dc45ee4b00835ff81ec2a",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
260
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"status" : "OPEN",
"acknowledgedUntil" : "2014-04-15T04:00:00Z",
"acknowledgementComment" : "This is normal. Please ignore.",
"acknowledgingUsername" : "someuser@yourcompany.com",
"created" : "2014-04-03T20:28:14Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-03T20:33:14Z",
"lastNotified" : "2014-04-03T20:33:23Z",
"metricName": "ASSERTS_REGULAR",
"currentValue" : {
"number" : 0.0,
"units" : "RAW"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Alert Configurations
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
Operations
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs/ALERT-CONFIG-ID
• Get a single alert configuration by ID.
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs
• Get all alert configurations for a group.
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs/ALERT-CONFIG-ID/alerts
• Get all open alerts that were triggered by an alert configuration.
POST /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfig
• Create a new alert configuration. All fields are required except created and updated.
PUT /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs
• Update an existing alert configuration. Partial updates are not supported except for one field (see PATCH below),
so you must send the entire entity.
261
PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs/ALERT-CONFIG-ID
• Use to enable/disable an alert configuration by setting the enabled field.
DELETE /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/alertConfigs/ALERT-CONFIG-ID
• Remove an alert configuration.
Sample Entity
{
"id":"yyy",
"groupId":"xxx",
"typeName":"HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName":"OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"created":"2014-02-01T12:34:12Z",
"updated":"2014-02-02T01:23:45Z",
"enabled":true,
"matchers":[{
"fieldName":"HOSTNAME",
"operator":"STARTS_WITH",
"value":"my-host-prefix"
}, {
"fieldName":"PORT",
"operator":"EQUALS",
"value":"27017"
}],
"notifications":[{
"typeName":"EMAIL",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"emailAddress":"somebody@somewhere.com"
}, {
"typeName":"HIP_CHAT",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"notificationToken":"123456abcdef",
"roomName":"|mms| Test Chat Room"
}, {
"typeName":"GROUP",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"groupId":"2847387cd717dabc348a",
"groupName":"test1",
"emailEnabled":true,
"smsEnabled":true
}, {
"typeName":"USER",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"username":"john.doe",
"emailEnabled":true,
"smsEnabled":true
}, {
"typeName":"SMS",
"intervalMin":5,
262
"delayMin":0,
"mobileNumber":"(212) 212-1212"
}, {
"typeName":"SNMP",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"snmpAddress":"somedomain.com:161"
}, {
"typeName":"PAGER_DUTY",
"intervalMin":5,
"delayMin":0,
"serviceKey":"123456abcdef"
}],
"metricThreshold":{
"metricName":"MEMORY_RESIDENT",
"operator":"GREATER_THAN",
"threshold":7,
"units":"GIGABYTES",
"mode":"TOTAL"
},
"links":[ ... ]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
id string Unique identifier.
groupId string ID of the group that owns this alert configuration.
typeName enum The type of this alert configuration. Supports the same values as the typeName field of
the alerts resource.
eventTypeNameenum The type of event that will trigger an alert. Supports the same values as the
eventTypeName field of the alerts resource.
created date When this alert configuration was created.
updated date When this alert configuration was last updated.
enabled boolean Is this alert configuration enabled?
matchers object
array
Rules to apply when matching an object against this alert configuration. Only entities that
match all these rules will be checked for an alert condition.
matchers.fieldNamestring The name of the field in the target object to match on. The available fields depend on the
typeName:
•AGENT - Not applicable.
•BACKUP - Not applicable.
•HOST and HOST_METRIC - Possible values are:
–HOSTNAME
–PORT
–HOSTNAME_AND_PORT
–REPLICA_SET_NAME
–TYPE_NAME
•REPLICA_SET - Possible values are:
–REPLICA_SET_NAME
–SHARD_NAME
–CLUSTER_NAME
Continued on next page
263
Table 2 – continued from previous page
Name Type Description
matchers.operatorenum The operator to test the field’s value. Possible values are:
•EQUALS
•NOT_EQUALS
•CONTAINS
•NOT_CONTAINS
•STARTS_WITH
•ENDS_WITH
•REGEX
matchers.valuestring The value to test with the specified operator. When matching on the TYPE_NAME field for
aHOST or HOST_METRIC alert, the possible typeName values are:
•PRIMARY
•SECONDARY
•STANDALONE
•CONFIG
•MONGOS
notificationsobject
array
Notifications to send when an alert condition is detected.
notifications.typeNameenum The type of alert notification. Possible values are:
•GROUP
•USER
•SMS (Only available to Ops Manager installations)
•EMAIL
•PAGER_DUTY
•HIPCHAT
•SNMP
notifications.delayMininteger The number of minutes to wait after an alert condition is detected before sending out the
first notification.
notifications.intervalMininteger The number of minutes to wait between successive notifications for unacknowledged alerts
that are not resolved.
notifications.emailAddressstring The email address to which to send notification. Only present for notifications of type
EMAIL.
notifications.notificationTokenstring A HipChat API token. Only present for notifications of type HIP_CHAT.
notifications.roomNamestring HipChat room name. Only present for notifications of type HIP_CHAT.
notifications.emailEnabledboolean Should email notifications be sent? Only present for notifications of type GROUP and USER.
notifications.smsEnabledboolean Should SMS notifications be sent? Only present for notifications of type GROUP and USER.
notifications.usernamestring The name of an Ops Manager user to which to send notifications. Only a user in the group
that owns the alert configuration is allowed here. Only present for notifications of type
USER.
notifications.snmpAddressstring Hostname and port to send SNMP traps to. At this time Ops Manager is only able to send
SNMP traps to the standard SNMP port (161). Only present for SNMP notifications. Ops
Manager uses SNMP v2c.
notifications.emailAddressstring Mobile number to send SMS messages to. Only present for notifications of type SMS.
notifications.snmpAddressstring Hostname and port to send SNMP traps to. Note that SNMP is only supported for Ops
Manager; also, at this time Ops Manager is only able to send SNMP traps to the standard
SNMP port (161).
notifications.serviceKeystring PagerDuty service key.
Continued on next page
264
Table 2 – continued from previous page
Name Type Description
metricThresholdobject The threshold that will cause an alert to be triggered. Only present for alerts of the
HOST_METRIC.
metricThreshold.metricNameenum The name of the metric to check. Supports the same values as the metricName field of
the alerts resource.
metricThreshold.operatorenum The operator to apply when checking the current metric value against the threshold value.
Possible values are:
•GREATER_THAN
•LESS_THAN
metricThreshold.thresholdinteger The threshold value outside of which an alert will be triggered.
metricThreshold.unitsenum The units for the threshold value. Supports the same values as the currentValue.
units field of the alerts resource.
metricThreshold.modeenum The mode to use when computing the current metric value. Possible values are:
•AVERAGE
•TOTAL
Links
Relation Description
self Me
group The group that owns this alert configuration.
alerts Open alerts triggered by this alert configuration.
Examples
Get All Alert Configurations in a Group
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alertConfigs"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount": 3,
"results": [ {
"id" : "5271259ee4b00ece6b4754ef",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "BACKUP",
"eventTypeName" : "RESYNC_REQUIRED",
"created" : "2013-10-30T15:28:30Z",
"updated" : "2014-02-12T16:11:05Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "EMAIL",
"intervalMin" : 60,
"delayMin" : 0,
"emailAddress" : "somebody@somewhere.com"
} ],
265
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "5329c8dfe4b0b07a83d67e7e",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "AGENT",
"eventTypeName" : "MONITORING_AGENT_DOWN",
"created" : "2014-03-19T16:42:07Z",
"updated" : "2014-03-19T16:42:07Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 5,
"delayMin" : 0,
"emailEnabled" : true,
"smsEnabled" : false
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "533dc40ae4b00835ff81eaee",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"created" : "2014-04-03T20:26:50Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-03T20:26:50Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ {
"field" : "hostnameAndPort",
"operator" : "EQUALS",
"value" : "mongo.babypearfoo.com:27017"
} ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "SMS",
"intervalMin" : 5,
"delayMin" : 0,
"mobileNumber" : "2343454567"
} ],
"metricThreshold" : {
"metricName" : "ASSERT_REGULAR",
"operator" : "LESS_THAN",
"threshold" : 99.0,
"units" : "RAW",
"mode" : "AVERAGE"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
} ]
}
Get an Alert Configuration
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alertConfigs/533dc40ae4b00835ff81eaee"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
266
"id" : "533dc40ae4b00835ff81eaee",
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"created" : "2014-04-03T20:26:50Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-03T20:26:50Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ {
"field" : "hostnameAndPort",
"operator" : "EQUALS",
"value" : "mongo.babypearfoo.com:27017"
} ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "SMS",
"intervalMin" : 5,
"delayMin" : 0,
"mobileNumber" : "2343454567"
} ],
"metricThreshold" : {
"metricName" : "ASSERT_REGULAR",
"operator" : "LESS_THAN",
"threshold" : 99.0,
"units" : "RAW",
"mode" : "AVERAGE"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get All Open Alerts Triggered by an Alert Configuration
curl -u "username:apiKey" --digest -i "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/alertConfigs/533dc40ae4b00835ff81eaee/alerts"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 2,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "53569159300495c7702ee3a3",
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"status" : "OPEN",
"acknowledgedUntil" : "2014-05-01T14:00:00Z",
"created" : "2014-04-22T15:57:13.562Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-22T20:14:11.388Z",
"lastNotified" : "2014-04-22T15:57:24.126Z",
"metricName" : "ASSERT_REGULAR",
"currentValue" : {
"number" : 0.0,
"units" : "RAW"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "5356ca0e300495c770333340",
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
267
"typeName" : "HOST_METRIC",
"eventTypeName" : "OUTSIDE_METRIC_THRESHOLD",
"status" : "OPEN",
"created" : "2014-04-22T19:59:10.657Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-22T20:14:11.388Z",
"lastNotified" : "2014-04-22T20:14:19.313Z",
"metricName" : "ASSERT_REGULAR",
"currentValue" : {
"number" : 0.0,
"units" : "RAW"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Create a New Alert Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03/
˓→alertConfigs" --data ’
{
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"eventTypeName" : "RESYNC_REQUIRED",
"enabled" : true,
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 5,
"delayMin" : 0,
"smsEnabled" : false,
"emailEnabled" : true
} ]
}’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03/
˓→alertConfigs/5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c
{
"id" : "5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c",
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"created" : "2014-04-23T14:29:18Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-23T14:29:18Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 5,
"delayMin" : 0,
"emailEnabled" : true,
"smsEnabled" : false
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
268
Update an Existing Alert Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X PUT
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03/
˓→alertConfigs/5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c" --data ’
{
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"eventTypeName" : "RESYNC_REQUIRED",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ {
"fieldName" : "REPLICA_SET_NAME",
"operator" : "EQUALS",
"value" : "rs1"
} ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "EMAIL",
"emailAddress" : "sos@foo.com",
"intervalMin" : 60,
"delayMin" : 5
}, {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 120,
"delayMin" : 60,
"smsEnabled" : true,
"emailEnabled" : false
} ]
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c",
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"created" : "2014-04-23T14:52:29Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-23T14:52:29Z",
"enabled" : true,
"matchers" : [ {
"fieldName" : "REPLICA_SET_NAME",
"operator" : "EQUALS",
"value" : "rs1"
} ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "EMAIL",
"intervalMin" : 60,
"delayMin" : 5,
"emailAddress" : "sos@foo.com"
}, {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 120,
"delayMin" : 60,
"emailEnabled" : false,
"smsEnabled" : true
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
269
Disable an Alert Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03/
˓→alertConfigs/5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c" --data ’
{
"enabled" : false
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c",
"groupId" : "4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03",
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"created" : "2014-04-23T14:52:29Z",
"updated" : "2014-04-23T14:56:25Z",
"enabled" : false,
"matchers" : [ {
"fieldName" : "REPLICA_SET_NAME",
"operator" : "EQUALS",
"value" : "rs1"
} ],
"notifications" : [ {
"typeName" : "EMAIL",
"intervalMin" : 60,
"delayMin" : 5,
"emailAddress" : "sos@foo.com"
}, {
"typeName" : "GROUP",
"intervalMin" : 120,
"delayMin" : 60,
"emailEnabled" : false,
"smsEnabled" : true
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Delete an Alert Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/groups/4d1b6314e528c81a1f200e03/alertConfigs/5357ce3e3004d83bd9c7864c"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Backup Configurations
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
270
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
The resource modification operation PATCH only accepts requests from whitelisted IP addressses. You can only
modify a backup configuration if the request originates from an IP address on the API user’s whitelist.
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/backupConfigs/CLUSTER-ID - Get a single
backup configuration by cluster ID. CLUSTER-ID must be the ID of either a replica set or a sharded clus-
ter.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/backupConfigs - Get all backup configurations for
a group.
•PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/backupConfigs/CLUSTER-ID - Request a state
change to an existing backup configuration. Note that these changes are generally asynchronous and will result
in a response status code of 202 (Accepted). Additionally, if you issue a GET request for a backup configuration
after a successful PATCH, the returned entity may not immediately reflect the update given the asynchronous
nature of these state transitions.
When modifying the statusName property, these are the acceptable transitions:
–STARTED - Only valid if the current status is STOPPED or INACTIVE.
–STOPPED - Only valid if the current status is STARTED.
–TERMINATING - Only valid if the current status is STOPPED.
–You cannot change the statusName to these values: INACTIVE PROVISIONING.
Sample Entity
{
"groupId":"xxx",
"clusterId":"yyy",
"statusName":"STARTED",
"authMechanismName":"MONGODB_CR",
"username":"johnny5",
"password":"guess!",
"sslEnabled":false,
"syncSource":"PRIMARY",
"provisioned":true,
"excludedNamespaces":["a","b","c.d" ]
}
271
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
groupId string ID of the group that owns this backup configuration.
clusterId string ID of the cluster that this backup configuration is for.
statusNameenum The current (or desired) status of the backup configuration. Possible values are:
•INACTIVE
•PROVISIONING
•STARTED
•STOPPED
•TERMINATING
authMechanismNameenum The name of the authentication mechanism to use when connecting to the sync source
database. Only present when using authentication. Possible values are:
•MONGODB_CR
•GSSAPI
username string The username to use to connect to the sync source database. Only present when backing up
mongod instances that require clients to authenticate.
password string The password to use to connect to the sync source database. Only present when backup the
mongod instances that require clients to authenticate. You may only send this field to Ops
Manager when updating backup configuration. GET request do not include this field.
sslEnabled boolean Is SSL enabled for the sync source database?
syncSourcestring The mongod instance to get backup data from. Possible values are either a specific host-
name or one of: PRIMARY and SECONDARY. This field is only used when updating a
backup configuration. It is not returned by a GET request.
provisionedboolean Reports if Ops Manager has provisioned the resources needed to store a backup. This field
is only present when the amount of data to be backed up exceeds a certain threshold.
excludedNamespacesstring
array
A list of database names and/or collection names that to omit from the back up. If a string
has a dot (e.g. .), then it is a fully qualified namespace in the form of <database>.
<collection>, otherwise strings are database names.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
cluster The cluster that this backup configuration is for.
group The group that owns this backup configuration.
snapshotScheduleThe snapshot schedule for this backup configuration.
Examples
Get a Single Backup Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/backupConfigs/5196e5b0e4b0fca9cc88334a"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
272
{
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"clusterId" : "5196e5b0e4b0fca9cc88334a",
"statusName" : "STARTED",
"sslEnabled" : false,
"excludedNamespaces" : [ ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get All Backup Configurations for a Group
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/backupConfigs"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 3,
"results" : [ {
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"clusterId" : "5196e5b0e4b0fca9cc88334a",
"statusName" : "STARTED",
"sslEnabled" : false,
"excludedNamespaces" : [ ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"clusterId" : "51a2ac88e4b0371c2dbf46ea",
"statusName" : "STARTED",
"sslEnabled" : false,
"excludedNamespaces" : [ ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"clusterId" : "52d33abee4b0ca49bc6acd6c",
"statusName" : "STOPPED",
"sslEnabled" : false,
"excludedNamespaces" : [ ],
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Update a Backup Configuration
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e/
˓→backupConfigs/5196e5b0e4b0fca9cc88334a" --data ’
{
"statusName": "STOPPED"
}’
HTTP/1.1 202 Accepted
273
{
"groupId" : "5196d3628d022db4cbc26d9e",
"clusterId" : "5196e5b0e4b0fca9cc88334a",
"statusName" : "STOPPED",
"sslEnabled" : false,
"excludedNamespaces" : [ ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Snapshot Schedule
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
This resource allows you to view and configure various properties of snapshot creation and retention for a replica set
or cluster. In order to modify this resource, the request must originate from an IP address on the API user’s whitelist.
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/backupConfigs/CLUSTER-ID/
snapshotSchedule - Get the snapshot schedule for a cluster. CLUSTER-ID must be the ID of
either a replica set or a sharded cluster.
•PATCH /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/backupConfigs/CLUSTER-ID/
snapshotSchedule - Change the parameters of snapshot creation and retention. Any combination
of the snapshot schedule’s attributes can be modified.
Sample Entity
{
"groupId":"xxx",
"clusterId":"yyy",
"snapshotIntervalHours":6,
"snapshotRetentionDays":3,
"clusterCheckpointIntervalMin":15,
"dailySnapshotRetentionDays":14,
"weeklySnapshotRetentionWeeks":6,
"monthlySnapshotRetentionMonths":12
}
274
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
groupId string ID of the group that owns the backup configuration.
clusterId string ID of the cluster to which this backup configuration applies.
snapshotIntervalHoursinteger Number of hours between snapshots. Supported values are 6, 8, 12, and 24.
snapshotRetentionDaysinteger Number of days to keep recent snapshots. Supported values are 1 - 5.
clusterCheckpointIntervalMininteger Number of minutes between successive cluster checkpoints. This only applies to sharded
clusters. This number determines the granularity of point-in-time restores for sharded clus-
ters.
dailySnapshotRetentionDaysinteger Number of days to retain daily snapshots. Supported values are 1 - 365.
weeklySnapshotRetentionWeeksinteger Number of weeks to retain weekly snapshots. Supported values are 1 - 52.
monthlySnapshotRetentionMonthsinteger Number of months to retain monthly snapshots. Supported values are 1 - 36.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
cluster The cluster that this backup configuration is for.
group The group that owns this backup configuration.
backupConfigThe backup configuration that this schedule belongs to.
Examples
Get a Snapshot Schedule
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/backupConfigs/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/snapshotSchedule"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotIntervalHours" : 6,
"snapshotRetentionDays" : 2,
"dailySnapshotRetentionDays" : 7,
"weeklySnapshotRetentionWeeks" : 4,
"monthlySnapshotRetentionMonths" : 13,
"links": [ ... ]
}
Update a Snapshot Schedule
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X PATCH
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/
˓→backupConfigs/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/snapshotSchedule" --data ’
{
275
"snapshotIntervalHours": 8,
"dailySnapshotRetentionDays": 14,
"monthlySnapshotRetentionMonths": 6
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotIntervalHours" : 8,
"snapshotRetentionDays" : 2,
"dailySnapshotRetentionDays" : 14,
"weeklySnapshotRetentionWeeks" : 4,
"monthlySnapshotRetentionMonths" : 6,
"links": [ ... ]
}
Snapshots
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
This resource allows you to view snapshot metadata and remove existing snapshots. A snapshot is a complete copy of
the data in a mongod instance at a point in time. In order to delete a resource, the request must originate from an IP
address on the API user’s whitelist.
Note that this resource is only meant to provide snapshot metadata. In order to retrieve the snapshot data (in order to
perform a restore, for example), you must create a Restore Job.
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/snapshots - Get all
snapshots for a cluster. CLUSTER-ID must be the ID of either a replica set or a sharded cluster.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/snapshots/
SNAPSHOT-ID - Get a single snapshot.
•DELETE /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/snapshots/
SNAPSHOT-ID - Remove a single snapshot. Note that while the two above methods return metadata about the
snapshot, this will actually remove the underlying backed-up data.
276
Sample Entity
{
"id":"5875f665da588548965b",
"groupId":"2847387cd717dabc348a",
"clusterId":"348938fbdbca74718cba",
"created":{
"date":"2014-02-01T12:34:12Z",
"increment":54
},
"expires":"2014-08-01T12:34:12Z",
"complete":true,
"isPossiblyInconsistent":false,
"missingShards":[
{
"id":"472837bcbd278abcd7",
"groupId":"2847387cd717dabc348a",
"typeName":"REPLICA_SET",
"clusterName":"Cluster 1",
"shardName":"shard002",
"replicaSetName":"rs3",
"lastHeartbeat":"2014-02-26T17:32:45Z"
}
],
"parts":[
{
"typeName":"REPLICA_SET",
"clusterId":"2383294dbcafa82928ad",
"replicaSetName":"rs0",
"mongodVersion":"2.4.8",
"dataSizeBytes":489283492,
"storageSizeBytes":489746352,
"fileSizeBytes":518263456
}, {
"typeName":"REPLICA_SET",
"clusterId":"2383294dbcafa82928b3",
"replicaSetName":"rs1",
"mongodVersion":"2.4.8",
"dataSizeBytes":489283492,
"storageSizeBytes":489746352,
"fileSizeBytes":518263456
}, {
"typeName":"CONFIG_SERVER",
"mongodVersion":"2.4.6",
"dataSizeBytes":48928,
"storageSizeBytes":48974,
"fileSizeBytes":51826
}
]
}
277
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
groupId string ID of the group that owns the snapshot.
clusterIdstring ID of the cluster represented by the snapshot.
created BSON
times-
tamp
The exact point-in-time at which the snapshot was taken.
expires timestamp The date after which this snapshot is eligible for deletion.
completeboolean Is this snapshot complete? This will be false if the snapshot creation job is still in progress.
isPossiblyInconsistentboolean Could this snapshot be inconsistent? isPossiblyInconsistent is only present for
sharded cluster snapshots. In order to take a snapshot of a sharded cluster in a consistent
state, the backup agent will temporarily turn off the balancer before creating the snapshot.
In some cases, it will not be able to turn off the balancer in a timely manner, so the snapshot
will be created with the balancer still running. If this happens, the snapshot may be in an
inconsistent state (e.g., because chunk migrations may be in progress).
missingShardsarray of
clusters
List of shards that are missing from the snapshot. Only present for a sharded cluster snap-
shot. In steady state, this array will be empty. However, if the backup agent is unable to
connect to a shard when a snapshot is created, it will be omitted from the snapshot. Each
document in the array is a cluster document containing a self link.
parts array of
parts
The individual parts that comprise the complete snapshot. For a replica set, this array will
contain a single element. For a sharded cluster, there will be one element for each shard
plus one element for the config server.
parts.
typeName
enum The type of server represented by the part. Possible values are:
•REPLICA_SET
•CONFIG_SERVER
parts.
clusterId
string ID of the replica set. Not present for a config server.
parts.
replicaSetName
string Name of the replica set. Not present for a config server.
parts.
mongodVersion
string The version of mongod that was running when the snapshot was created.
parts.
dataSizeBytes
integer The total size of the data in the snapshot.
parts.
storageSizeBytes
integer The total size of space allocated for document storage.
parts.
fileSizeBytes
integer The total size of the data files.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
cluster The cluster that this snapshot belongs to.
group The group that owns this snapshot.
278
Examples
Get All Snapshots
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/snapshots"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 3,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "53bd5fb5e4b0774946a16fad",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"created" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T15:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"expires" : "2014-07-11T15:24:37Z",
"complete" : true,
"parts" : [ {
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"replicaSetName" : "rs0",
"mongodVersion" : "2.6.3",
"dataSizeBytes" : 17344,
"storageSizeBytes" : 10502144,
"fileSizeBytes" : 67108864
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
...
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}
Get One Snapshot
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/snapshots/
˓→53bd5fb5e4b0774946a16fad"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "53bd5fb5e4b0774946a16fad",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"created" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T15:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"expires" : "2014-07-11T15:24:37Z",
"complete" : true,
279
"parts" : [ {
"typeName" : "REPLICA_SET",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"replicaSetName" : "rs0",
"mongodVersion" : "2.6.3",
"dataSizeBytes" : 17344,
"storageSizeBytes" : 10502144,
"fileSizeBytes" : 67108864
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Remove a Snapshot
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/groups/525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/snapshots/
˓→53bd5fb5e4b0774946a16fad"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Restore Jobs
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
This resource allows you to manage restore jobs. A restore job is essentially a request to retrieve one of your existing
snapshots, or a snapshot for a recent specific point-in-time, in order to restore a mongod to a previous state. In order
to initiate a restore job, the request must originate from an IP address on the API user’s whitelist.
Operations
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/restoreJobs
• Get all restore jobs for a cluster. CLUSTER-ID must be the ID of either a replica set or a sharded cluster.
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/restoreJobs?batchId=BATCH-ID
• Get all restore jobs in the specified batch. When creating a restore job for a sharded cluster, Ops Manager creates
a separate job for each shard, plus another for the config server. Each of those jobs will be part of a batch. A
restore job for a replica set, however, will not be part of a batch.
280
GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/restoreJobs/JOB-ID
• Get a single restore job.
POST /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/clusters/CLUSTER-ID/restoreJobs
• Create a restore job for the specified CLUSTER-ID. You can create a restore job for either an existing snapshot
or for a specific recent point-in-time. (The recency depends on the size of your “point-in-time window.”) See
below for examples of each. The response body includes an array of restore jobs. When requesting a restore of
a replica set, the array will contain a single element. For a sharded cluster, the array will contain one element for
each shard, plus one for the config server. Each element will also include the batchId representing the batch
to which the jobs belong.
Sample Entity
{
"id" :"53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998",
"groupId" :"525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" :"53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotId" :"53bd439ae4b0774946a16490",
"created" :"2014-07-09T17:42:43Z",
"timestamp" :{
"date" :"2014-07-09T09:24:37Z",
"increment" :1
},
"statusName" :"FINISHED",
"pointInTime" :false,
"delivery" :{
"methodName" :"HTTP",
"url" :"https://api-backup.mongodb.com/backup/restore/v2/pull/
˓→ae6bc7a8bfdd5a99a0c118c73845dc75/53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998/2292652411027442213/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a-rs0-1404897877.tar.gz",
"expires" :"2014-07-09T18:42:43Z",
"statusName" :"READY"
},
"hashes" :[
{
"typeName":"SHA1",
"fileName":"filename.0",
"hash":"5h1DziNbqx9yY2VGJUz5RFnNco0="
}
],
"links" :[ ... ]
}
281
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
groupId string ID of the group that owns the restore job.
clusterId string ID of the cluster represented by the restore job.
snapshotId string ID of the snapshot to restore.
batchId string ID of the batch to which this restore job belongs. Only present for a restore of a sharded
cluster.
created timestamp When the restore job was requested.
timestamp BSON
times-
tamp
Timestamp of the latest oplog entry in the restored snapshot.
statusNameenum Current status of the job. Possible values are:
•FINISHED
•IN_PROGRESS
•BROKEN
•KILLED
pointInTimeboolean Is this job for a point-in-time restore?
delivery object Additional details about how the restored snapshot data will be delivered.
delivery.methodNameenum How the data will be delivered. Possible values are:
•HTTP
delivery.url string The URL from which the restored snapshot data can be downloaded. Only present if
delivery.methodName is HTTP.
delivery.expirestimestamp Date after which the URL will no longer be available. Only present if delivery.
methodName is HTTP.
delivery.statusNameenum Current status of the downloadable file. Only present if delivery.methodName is
HTTP. Possible values are:
•READY
•EXPIRED
•MAX_DOWNLOADS_EXCEEDED
hashes object
array
If the corresponding delivery.url has been downloaded, each document in this array
is a mapping of a restore file to a hashed checksum. This array is present only after the file
is downloaded.
hashes.typeNameenum The hashing algorithm used to compute the hash value. Possible values are:
•SHA1
hashes.fileNamestring The name of the file that has been hashed.
hashes.hashstring The hash of the file.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
cluster The cluster to restore.
snapshot The snapshot to restore.
group The group that owns the cluster.
282
Examples
Get All Restore Jobs
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/restoreJobs"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 2,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "53bd7f38e4b0a7304e226b3f",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotId" : "53bd4356e4b0774946a16455",
"created" : "2014-07-09T17:43:20Z",
"timestamp" : {
"date" : "2014-07-08T21:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"statusName" : "FINISHED",
"pointInTime" : false,
"delivery" : {
"methodName" : "HTTP",
"url" : "https://api-backup.mongodb.com/backup/restore/v2/pull/
˓→ae6bc7a8bfdd5a99a0c118c73845dc75/53bd7f38e4b0a7304e226b3f/8924913772648127956/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a-rs0-1404854677.tar.gz",
"expires" : "2014-07-09T18:43:21Z",
"statusName" : "READY"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"id" : "53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotId" : "53bd439ae4b0774946a16490",
"created" : "2014-07-09T17:42:43Z",
"timestamp" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T09:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"statusName" : "FINISHED",
"pointInTime" : false,
"delivery" : {
"methodName" : "HTTP",
"url" : "https://api-backup.mongodb.com/backup/restore/v2/pull/
˓→ae6bc7a8bfdd5a99a0c118c73845dc75/53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998/2292652411027442213/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a-rs0-1404897877.tar.gz",
"expires" : "2014-07-09T18:42:43Z",
"statusName" : "READY"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links": [ ... ]
}
283
Get a Single Restore Job
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/restoreJobs/
˓→53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"id" : "53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotId" : "53bd439ae4b0774946a16490",
"created" : "2014-07-09T17:42:43Z",
"timestamp" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T09:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"statusName" : "FINISHED",
"pointInTime" : false,
"delivery" : {
"methodName" : "HTTP",
"url" : "https://api-backup.mongodb.com/backup/restore/v2/pull/
˓→ae6bc7a8bfdd5a99a0c118c73845dc75/53bd7f13e4b0a7304e226998/2292652411027442213/
˓→525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a-rs0-1404897877.tar.gz",
"expires" : "2014-07-09T18:42:43Z",
"statusName" : "READY"
},
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Create a Restore Job for an Existing Snapshot
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/
˓→53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/restoreJobs" --data ’
{
"snapshotId": "53bd439ae4b0774946a16490"
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 1,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "53bd9f9be4b0a7304e23a8c6",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"snapshotId" : "53bd439ae4b0774946a16490",
"created" : "2014-07-09T20:01:31Z",
"timestamp" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T09:24:37Z",
"increment" : 1
},
"statusName" : "IN_PROGRESS",
"pointInTime" : false,
284
"links" : [ ... ]
} ]
}
Create a Point-In-Time Restore Job
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a/clusters/
˓→53bc556ce4b049c88baec825/restoreJobs" --data ’
{
"timestamp": {
"date": "2014-07-09T09:20:00Z",
"increment": 0
}
}’
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 1,
"results" : [ {
"id" : "53bda0dfe4b0a7304e23b54a",
"groupId" : "525ec8394f5e625c80c7404a",
"clusterId" : "53bc556ce4b049c88baec825",
"created" : "2014-07-09T20:06:55Z",
"timestamp" : {
"date" : "2014-07-09T09:20:00Z",
"increment" : 0
},
"statusName" : "IN_PROGRESS",
"pointInTime" : true,
"links" : [ ... ]
} ]
}
Whitelist
On this page
•Operations
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Links
•Examples
The resource modification operations POST and DELETE are whitelisted. For example, you can only add an IP address
to a whitelist if the request originates from an IP address on the existing whitelist.
285
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID/whitelist - Gets the whitelist for the specified user. You
can only access your own whitelist, so the USER-ID in the URL must match the ID of the user associated with
the API Key.
•GET /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID/whitelist/IP-ADDRESS - Gets the whitelist entry for
a single IP address.
•POST /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID/whitelist - Add one or more IP addresses to the user’s
whitelist.
–The entity body must be an array of whitelist entities, even if there is only one. The only field you need to
specify for each entity is the ipAddress.
–If an IP address is already in the whitelist, it will be ignored.
•DELETE /api/public/v1.0/users/USER-ID/whitelist/IP-ADDRESS - Remove an IP address
from the whitelist.
–You cannot remove your current IP address from the whitelist.
Sample Entity
{
"ipAddress":"1.2.3.4",
"created":"2014-01-02T12:34:56Z",
"lastUsed":"2014-03-12T02:03:04Z",
"count":1234
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
ipAddress string A whitelisted IP address.
created date The date this IP address was added to the whitelist.
lastUsed date The date of the most recent request that originated from this IP address. Note that this field
is only updated when a resource that is protected by the whitelist is accessed.
count integer The total number of requests that originated from this IP address. Note that this field is only
updated when a resource that is protected by the whitelist is accessed.
Links
Relation Description
self Me
user The user that owns this whitelist.
286
Examples
Get a User’s Whitelist
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/
˓→5356823b3004dee37132bb7b/whitelist"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"totalCount" : 1,
"results" : [ {
"ipAddress" : "12.34.56.78",
"created" : "2014-04-23T16:17:44Z",
"count" : 482,
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Get a Single Whitelist Entry
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/
˓→5356823b3004dee37132bb7b/whitelist/12.34.56.78"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
{
"ipAddress" : "12.34.56.78",
"created" : "2014-04-23T16:17:44Z",
"count" : 482,
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Add Entries to a User’s Whitelist
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" -H "Content-Type: application/json" --digest -X POST
˓→"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/5356823b3004dee37132bb7b/whitelist" -
˓→-data ’
[ {
"ipAddress" : "76.54.32.10"
}, {
"ipAddress" : "2.3.4.5"
} ]’
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Location: https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/users/5356823b3004dee37132bb7b/
˓→whitelist
{
"totalCount" : 3,
"results" : [ {
"ipAddress" : "12.34.56.78",
287
"created" : "2014-04-23T16:17:44Z",
"count" : 0,
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"ipAddress" : "76.54.32.10",
"created" : "2014-04-23T16:23:44Z",
"count" : 0,
"links" : [ ... ]
}, {
"ipAddress" : "2.3.4.5",
"created" : "2014-04-23T16:23:44Z",
"count" : 0,
"links" : [ ... ]
} ],
"links" : [ ... ]
}
Delete an Entry from a User’s Whitelist
curl -i -u "username:apiKey" --digest -X DELETE "https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/
˓→v1.0/users/5356823b3004dee37132bb7b/whitelist/2.3.4.5"
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Automation Configuration
On this page
•Overview
•Operations
•Other Representations of the Automation Configuration
•Sample Automation Configuration Entity
•Entity Fields
•Examples
Overview
The Public API provides the automationConfig endpoint to let you manipulate a group’s automation configura-
tion. The processes you specify in the configuration, define the deployment that your Automation Agents will attempt
to build. These processes can include clusters, replica sets and standalones, as well as Backup and Monitoring Agents.
Each Automation Agent resides on its own host and is responsible for the processes the configuration defines for
that host. The agent runs the processes as defined by the configuration. When a running process matches its defined
configuration, the process is in “goal state.” When all processes on all hosts are in goal state, the deployment itself is
in goal state.
288
Operations
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/automationConfig
Retrieve the current automation configuration for a group.
•PUT /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/automationConfig
Update a group’s automation configuration. For steps for updating an automation configuration, see Deploy a
Cluster through the API.
Updates
To update the configuration through the automationConfig endpoint, send an object that contains a specific
subset of the configuration’s fields. This is the same subset as you receive when you retrieve the configuration through
the endpoint.
When you submit updates, Ops Manager makes internal modifications to the data and then saves your new configura-
tion version. For example, Ops Manager might add a field to each specified community MongoDB version to indicate
where the agents download them from.
The Automation Agents continuously poll Ops Manager for changes to the configuration and fetch configuration
updates when they occur. The agents then adjust the states of their live processes to match. For a tutorial on updating
a deployment using the API, see Deploy a Cluster through the API.
Concurrent Modifications Warning
There is no protection in the Public API to prevent concurrent modifications. If two administrators both start with
a configuration based on the current version, make their own modifications, and then submit their modifications, the
later modification wins.
Other Representations of the Automation Configuration
You can view the internal representation of the configuration through the Raw AutomationConfig page on the Deploy-
ment tab of the Ops Manager interface. The raw configuration shows the internal representation of the configuration
that Ops Manager stores, including fields that should not be updated through the API.
The Automation Agent also stores a copy of the configuration in the mms-cluster-config-backup.json file.
The agent stores the most recent version of configuration with which the agent was able to reach goal state. If an
agent is not able to process configuration changes, it continues to store an older version of the configuration.
Sample Automation Configuration Entity
{
"monitoringVersions":[
{
"hostname":"one.example.net",
"logPath":"/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/monitoring-agent.log",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
}
}
289
],
"backupVersions":[
{
"hostname":"one.example.net",
"logPath":"/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/backup-agent.log",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
}
}
],
"processes":[
{
"name":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_0",
"processType":"mongod",
"version":"2.6.7",
"hostname":"testAutoAPI-0.dns.placeholder",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
},
"authSchemaVersion":1,
"args2_6":{
"net":{
"port":27017
},
"storage":{
"dbPath":"/data/MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_0"
},
"systemLog":{
"path":"/data/MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_0/mongodb.log",
"destination":"file"
},
"replication":{
"replSetName":"MySHARD_0"
},
"operationProfiling":{}
}
},
...,
{
"name":"MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_8",
"processType":"mongod",
"version":"2.6.7",
"hostname":"SERVER-8",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
},
"authSchemaVersion":1,
"args2_6":{
"net":{
"port":27019
},
"storage":{
"dbPath":"/data/MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_8"
290
},
"systemLog":{
"path":"/data/MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_8/mongodb.log",
"destination":"file"
},
"sharding":{
"clusterRole":"configsvr"
},
"operationProfiling":{}
}
},
{
"name":"MyCLUSTER_MyMONGOS_9",
"processType":"mongos",
"version":"2.6.7",
"hostname":"SERVER-9",
"cluster":"myShardedCluster",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
},
"authSchemaVersion":1,
"args2_6":{
"net":{
"port":27017
},
"systemLog":{
"path":"/data/MyCLUSTER_MyMONGOS_9/mongodb.log",
"destination":"file"
},
"operationProfiling":{}
}
}
],
"replicaSets":[
{
"_id":"MySHARD_0",
"members":[
{
"_id":0,
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_0",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
},
{
"_id":1,
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_1",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
},
{
"_id":2,
291
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_0_2",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
}
]
},
{
"_id":"MySHARD_1",
"members":[
{
"_id":0,
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_1_3",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
},
{
"_id":1,
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_1_4",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
},
{
"_id":2,
"host":"MyCLUSTER_MySHARD_1_5",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
}
]
}
],
"sharding":[
{
"name":"myShardedCluster",
"configServer":[
"MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_6",
"MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_7",
"MyCLUSTER_MyCONFIG_SERVER_8"
],
"shards":[
{
"_id":"MySHARD_0",
"rs":"MySHARD_0"
},
{
"_id":"MySHARD_1",
"rs":"MySHARD_1"
292
}
],
"collections":[],
}
],
"mongoDbVersions":[
{"name":"2.4.12"},
{"name":"2.6.7"}
]
}
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
monitoringVersions array Optional. Objects that define version information for each Monitoring
Agent.
- hostname string The hostname of the machine that runs the Monitoring Agent. If the Moni-
toring Agent is not running on the machine, Ops Manager installs it.
- logPath string Optional. The directory where the agent stores its logs. The default is to
store logs in /dev/null.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
- - sizeThresholdMB number
(inte-
ger or
float)
The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
backupVersions array Optional. Objects that define version information for each Backup Agent.
- hostname string The hostname of the machine that runs the Backup Agent. If the Backup
Agent is not running on the machine, Ops Manager installs it.
- logPath string Optional. The directory where the agent stores its logs. The default is to
store logs in /dev/null.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
- - sizeThresholdMB number
(inte-
ger or
float)
The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
processes array The processes array contains objects that define the mongos and
mongod instances that Ops Manager manages. Each object defines a dif-
ferent instance.
- name string A unique name to identify the instance.
- processType string Either mongod or mongos.
- version string The name of the mongoDbVersions specification used with this in-
stance.
- hostname string Optional. The name of the host this process should run on. This defaults to
localhost.
- cluster string Optional. Required for a mongos. The name of the cluster. This must
correspond to the sharding.name field in the sharding array for the
mongos.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
Continued on next page
293
Table 3 – continued from previous page
Name Type Description
- - sizeThresholdMB number
(inte-
ger or
float)
The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
- authSchemaVersion integer Required if auth is turned on. Otherwise optional. The schema version of
the user credential documents. This should match all other elements of the
processes array that belong to the same cluster. The possible values are
1,3, and 5. The default is 3for 2.6 clusters and 1for 2.4 clusters.
- <args> object This field is named either args2_6, for MongoDB versions 2.6 and higher
(including 3.0 and higher), or args2_4, for versions 2.4 and earlier. The
field contains a MongoDB configuration document in the format appropriate
to the version. For information on format and supported MongoDB options,
see supported configuration options.
replicaSets array Optional. Objects that define the configuration of each replica set. The
Automation Agent uses the values in this array to create valid replica set
configuration documents. The agent regularly checks that replica sets are
configured correctly. If a problem occurs, the agent reconfigures the replica
set according to its configuration document. The array can contain the fol-
lowing fields from a replica set configuration document: _id;version;
and members. The members.host field must specify the host’s name as
listed in processes.name. The Automation Agent expands the host
field to create a valid replica set configuration.
sharding array Optional. Objects that define the configuration of each sharded cluster.
Each object in the array contains the specifications for one cluster. The
Automation Agent regularly checks each cluster’s state against the specifi-
cations. If the specification and cluster don’t match, the agent will change
the configuration of the cluster, which might cause the balancer to migrate
chunks.
- name string The name of the cluster. This must correspond with the value in
processes.cluster for a mongos.
- configServer array String values that provide the names of each config server’s hosts. The host
names are the same names as are used in each host’s processes.name
field.
- shards array Objects that define the cluster’s shards.
- - _id string The name of the shard.
- - rs string The name of the shard’s replica set, as specified in the replicaSets.
_id field.
- collections array Objects that define the sharded collections and their shard keys.
mongoDbVersions array The mongoDbVersions array is required and defines versions of Mon-
goDB used by the MongoDB instances.
- name string The MongoDB version.
Examples
For configuration examples, please see the following page on GitHub: https://github.com/10gen-labs/
mms-api-examples/tree/master/automation/.
294
Automation Status
On this page
•Overview
•Operation
•Sample Entity
•Entity Fields
•Example
Overview
The Public API provides the automationStatus endpoint to let you see whether each MongoDB process is up-
to-date with the current automation configuration. The endpoint returns the goalVersion field to report the current
version of the automation configuration and the lastGoalVersionAchieved fields to report the versions of the
configuration running on each server.
Operation
•GET /api/public/v1.0/groups/GROUP-ID/automationStatus
Retrieve the status of each MongoDB process in the deployment.
Sample Entity
"goalVersion":29,
"processes":[
{
"hostname":"AGENT_HOST_0",
"name":"BLUE_0",
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":28,
"plan":["Download","Start","WaitRsInit"]
},
{
"hostname":"AGENT_HOST_1",
"name":"BLUE_1",
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":29,
"plan":[]
}
]
295
Entity Fields
Name Type Description
goalVersion integer The version of the most recently submitted automation configuration. If there is
aconflict in submissions of automation configurations, this field lists the winning
configuration.
processes array The group’s deployed MongoDB instances.
- hostname string The fully qualified domain name (retrieved by issuing hostname -f) of the
server on which the MongoDB process and Automation Agent are hosted.
- name string The process name as specified in the automation configuration.
- lastGoalVersion-
Achieved
integer The last version of the automation configuration with which this process had de-
ployed as configured. If the lastGoalVersionAchieved number is not equal
to the goalVersion number, the process has not yet deployed according to the
current configuration.
- plan array Describes how a process that is not yet up-to-date with the configuration will
achieve the goal state.
Example
Retrieve status:
curl -u"username:apiKey" --digest -i"https://mms.mongodb.com/api/public/v1.0/groups/
˓→533c5895b91030606f21033a/automationStatus"
Response:
{
"processes": [
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_0_0",
"hostname":"testDeploy-0"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_0_1",
"hostname":"testDeploy-1"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_0_2",
"hostname":"testDeploy-2"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_1_3",
"hostname":"testDeploy-3"
},
{
"plan": [],
296
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_1_4",
"hostname":"testDeploy-4"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_myShard_1_5",
"hostname":"testDeploy-5"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_config_6",
"hostname":"testDeploy-6"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_config_7",
"hostname":"testDeploy-7"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_config_8",
"hostname":"testDeploy-8"
},
{
"plan": [],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"shardedCluster_mongos_9",
"hostname":"testDeploy-9"
}
],
"goalVersion":2
}
9.3 Public API Tutorials
Enable the Public API Enable the Public API for group.
Deploy a Sharded Cluster Create a cluster using the Public API.
Upgrade a Deployment’s MongoDB Version Upgrade the version of MongoDB used by the deployment’s instances.
Enable the Public API
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Procedure
297
•Additional Information
Overview
You enable the Public API on a per-group basis. To enable the Public API for a group, you must have the Owner or
Global Owner role.
Considerations
You can have up to ten keys associated to your account. Each key can be either enabled or disabled, but be aware that
they both count towards the ten key limit.
API Keys are associated to a user and therefore have the same level of access as that user.
Procedure
Step 1: Enable the Public API for each group.
The Public API is enabled on a per-group basis, so make sure to enable it for all groups that need to use it.
To enable the Public API for a group, select the Administration tab and then select Group Settings. Click the Enable
Public API button to toggle it ON.
Step 2: Generate an API key.
An API Key is like a password. Keep it secret.
To generate a key, select the Administration tab and then API Keys & Whitelists. In the API Keys section, use the
Generate button to generate a new key. Follow the prompts, being sure to copy the key once it is generated. Ops
Manager displays the full key one time only. Ops Manager displays only the partial key in the key list and provides no
access to the full key.
Step 3: Define your whitelist.
Certain API operations require a higher level of security and are protected by a whitelist. Only client requests that
originate from a whitelisted IP address will be permitted to invoke such operations.
To define your whitelist, select the Administration tab and then API Keys & Whitelists. In the API Whitelist section,
use the Add button to add a permitted IP address.
To delete an address, select the gear icon for the address and select Delete.
CIDR notation is not supported.
Additional Information
See the Public API Principles for a background on the use and operation of the Public API, and Public API Resources
for a complete reference of all resources available in the Public API.
298
Deploy a Cluster through the API
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Examples
•Procedures
•Next Steps
Overview
This tutorial manipulates the Public API’s automation configuration to deploy a sharded cluster that is owned by
another user. The tutorial first creates a new group, then a new user as owner of the group, and then a sharded cluster
owned by the new user. You can create a script to automate these procedures for use in routine operations.
To perform these steps, you must have access to Ops Manager as a user with the Global Owner role.
The procedures install a cluster with two shards. Each shard comprises a three-member replica set. The tutorial installs
one mongos and three config servers. Each component of the cluster resides on its own server, requiring a total of 10
servers.
The tutorial installs the Automation Agent on each server.
Prerequisites
Ops Manager must have an existing user with Global Owner role. The first user you create has this role. Global
owners can perform any Ops Manager action, both through the Ops Manager interface and through the API.
You must have the URL of the Ops Manager Web Server, as set in the mmsBaseUrl setting of the Monitoring Agent
configuration file.
Provision ten servers to host the components of the sharded cluster. For server requirements, see the Production Notes
in the MongoDB manual.
Each server must provide its Automation Agent with full networking access to the hostnames and ports of the Automa-
tion Agents on all the other servers. Each agent runs the command hostname -f to self-identify its hostname and
port and report them to Ops Manager.
Tip
To ensure agents can reach each other, provision the servers using Automation. This installs the Automation Agents
with correct network access. Then use this tutorial to reinstall the Automation Agents on those machines.
Examples
As you work with the API, you can view examples on the following GitHub page: https://github.com/10gen-labs/
mms-api-examples/tree/master/automation/.
299
Procedures
Retrieve API Key
This procedure displays the full API key just once. You must record the API key when it is displayed.
Note that this API key for the Public API is different from the API key for a group, which is always visible in Ops
Manager through the Group Settings tab.
Step 1: Log in as a Global Owner.
Log into the Ops Manager web interface as a user with the Global Owner role.
Step 2: Select the Administration tab and then API Keys & Whitelists.
Step 3: Generate a new API key.
In the API Keys section, click Generate. Then enter a description, such as “API Testing,” and click Generate.
If prompted for a two-factor verification code, enter the code and click Verify. Then click Generate again.
Step 4: Copy and record the key.
Copy the key immediately when it is generated. Ops Manager displays the full key one time only. You will not be
able to view the full key again.
Record the key in a secure place. After you have successfully recorded the key, click Close.
Create the Group and the User through the API
Step 1: Use the API to create a group.
Use the Public API to send a groups document to create the new group. Issue the following command, re-
placing <user@example.net> with the credentials of the global owner,<api_key> with your API key,
<app-example.net> with the Ops Manager URL, and <group_name> with the name of the new group:
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" "http://
˓→<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/groups" --digest -i -X POST --data ’
{
"name": "<group_name>"
}’
The API returns a document that includes the group’s agentApiKey and id. The API automatically sets the
publicApiEnabled field to true to allow subsequent API-based configuration.
Step 2: Record the values of agentApiKey and id in the returned document.
Record these values for use in this procedure and in other procedures in this tutorial.
300
Step 3: Use the API to create a user in the new group.
Use the /users endpoint to add a user to the new group.
The body of the request should contain a users document with the user’s information. Set the user’s roles.
roleName to GROUP_OWNER, and the user’s roles.groupId set to the new group’s‘ id.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" "http://
˓→<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/users" --digest -i -X POST --data ’
{
"username": "<new_user@example.com>",
"emailAddress": "<new_user@example.com>",
"firstName": "<First>",
"lastName": "<Last>",
"password": "<password>",
"roles": [{
"groupId": "<group_id>",
"roleName": "GROUP_OWNER"
}]
}’
Step 4: Remove global owner from the group. (Optional)
The global owner that you used to create the group is also automatically added to the group. You can remove the
global owner from the group without losing the ability to make changes to the group in the future. As long as you have
the group’s agentApiKey and id, you have full access to the group when logged in as the global owner.
GET the global owner’s ID. Issue the following command to request the group’s users, replace the credentials, API
key, URL, and group ID, with the relevant values:
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/users" --digest -i
The API returns a document that lists all the group’s users. Locate the user with roles.roleName set to
GLOBAL_OWNER. Copy the user’s id value, and issue the following to remove the user from the group, replacing
<user_id> with the user’s id value:
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/users/<user_id>" --digest -i -X DELETE
Upon successful removal of the user, the API returns the HTTP 200 OK status code to indicate the request has
succeeded.
Install the Automation Agent on each Provisioned Server
Your servers must have the networking access described in the Prerequisites.
Step 1: Create the Automation Agent configuration file to be used on the servers.
Create the following configuration file and enter values as shown below. The file uses your agentApiKey, group
id, and the Ops Manager URL.
Save this file as automation-agent.config. You will distribute this file to each of your provisioned servers.
301
# REQUIRED
# Enter your Group ID - It can be found at /settings
#
mmsGroupId=<Enter_the_value_you_retrieved_for_group_``id``>
# REQUIRED
# Enter your API key - It can be found at /settings
#
mmsApiKey=<Enter_the_value_you_retrieved_for_``agentApiKey``>
# Base url of the MMS web server.
#
mmsBaseUrl=<Enter_the_URL_of_the_|application|>
# Path to log file
#
logFile=/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/automation-agent.log
# Path to backup automation configuration
#
mmsConfigBackup=/var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation/mms-cluster-config-backup.json
# Lowest log level to log. Can be (in order): DEBUG, ROUTINE, INFO, WARN, ERROR, DOOM
#
logLevel=INFO
# Maximum number of rotated log files
#
maxLogFiles=10
# Maximum size in bytes of a log file (before rotating)
#
maxLogFileSize=268435456
# URL to proxy all HTTP requests through
#
#httpProxy=
Step 2: Retrieve the command strings used to download and install the Automation Agent.
In the Ops Manager web interface, select the Administration tab and then select the Agents page. Under Automation
at the bottom of the page, select your operating system to display the install instructions. Copy and save the following
strings from these instructions:
• The curl string used to download the agent.
• The rpm or dpkg string to install the agent. For operating systems that use tar to unpackage the agent, no
install string is listed.
• The nohup string used run the agent.
Step 3: Download, configure, and run the Automation Agent on each server.
Do the following on each of the provisioned servers. You can create a script to use as a turn-key operation for these
steps:
302
Use the curl string to download the Automation Agent.
Use rpm,dpkg, or tar to install the agent. Make the agent controllable by the new user you added to the group in
the previous procedure.
Replace the contents of the config file with the file you created in the first step. The config file is one of the following,
depending on the operating system:
•/etc/mongodb-mms/automation-agent.config
•<install_directory>/local.config
Check that the following directories exist and are accessible to the Automation Agent. If they do not, create them. The
first two are created automatically on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Amazon Linux, and Ubuntu:
•/var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation
•/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation
•/data
Use the nohup string to run the Automation Agent.
Step 4: Confirm the initial state of the automation configuration.
When the Automation Agent first runs, it downloads the mms-cluster-config-backup.json file, which de-
scribes the desired state of the automation configuration.
On one of the servers, navigate to /var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation/ and open
mms-cluster-config-backup.json. Confirm that the file’s version field is set to 1. Ops Manager
automatically increments this field as changes occur.
Deploy the New Cluster
To add or update a deployment, retrieve the configuration document, make changes as needed, and send the updated
configuration though the API to Ops Manager.
Tip
You can learn more about the configuration file by viewing it in Ops Manager. Select the Deployment tab and then
the Raw AutomationConfig page. Note that the raw configuration contains fields you should not update with the
configuration document.
The following procedure deploys an updated automation configuration through the Public API:
Step 1: Retrieve the automation configuration from Ops Manager.
Use the automationConfig resource to retrieve the configuration. Issue the following command, replacing
<user@example.net> with the credentials of the global owner,<api_key> with the previously retrieved API
key, <app-example.net> with the URL of Ops Manager, and <group_id> with the previously retrieved group
ID:
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i
303
Confirm that the version field of the retrieved automation configuration matches the version field in the
mms-cluster-config-backup.json file.
Step 2: Create the top level of the new configuration document.
Create a document with the following fields. As you build the configuration document, refer the description of an
automation configuration for detailed explanations of the settings. For examples, refer to the following page on
GitHub: https://github.com/10gen-labs/mms-api-examples/tree/master/automation/.
{
"options":{
"downloadBase":"/var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation"
},
"mongoDbVersions":[],
"monitoringVersions":[],
"backupVersions":[],
"processes":[],
"replicaSets":[],
"sharding":[]
}
Step 3: Add MongoDB versions to the configuration document.
In the mongoDbVersions array, add the versions of MongoDB to have available to the deployment. Add only
those versions you will use. For this tutorial, the following array includes just one version, 2.4.12, but you can
specify multiple versions. Using 2.4.12 allows this deployment to later upgrade to 2.6, as described in Update the
MongoDB Version of a Deployment.
"mongoDbVersions": [
{ "name": "2.4.12" }
]
Step 4: Add the Monitoring Agent to the configuration document.
In the monitoringVersions.hostname field, enter the hostname of the server where Ops Manager should
install the Monitoring Agent. Use the fully qualified domain name that running hostname -f on the server returns,
as in the following:
"monitoringVersions":[
{
"hostname":"<server_x.example.net>",
"logPath":"/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/monitoring-agent.log",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
}
}
]
This configuration example also includes the logPath field, which specifies the log location, and logRotate,
which specifies the log thresholds.
304
Step 5: Add the servers to the configuration document.
This sharded cluster has 10 MongoDB instances, as described in the Overview, each running on its own server. Thus,
the automation configuration’s processes array will have 10 documents, one for each MongoDB instance.
The following example adds the first document to the processes array. Replace <process_name_1> with any
name you choose, and replace <server_1.example.net> with the FQDN of the server. You will need to add 9
documents: one for each MongoDB instance in your sharded cluster.
The example uses the args2_4 syntax for the processes.<args> field. For MongoDB versions 2.6 and later,
use the args2_6 syntax. See Supported MongoDB Options for Automation for more information.
"processes":[
{
"version":"2.4.12",
"name":"<process_name_1>",
"hostname":"<server_1.example.net>",
"logRotate":{
"sizeThresholdMB":1000,
"timeThresholdHrs":24
},
"authSchemaVersion":1,
"processType":"mongod",
"args2_4":{
"port":27017,
"replSet":"rs1",
"dbpath":"/data/",
"logpath":"/data/mongodb.log"
}
},
...
]
Step 6: Add the sharded cluster topology to the configuration document.
Add two replica set documents to the replicaSets array. Add three members to each document. The following
example shows one replica set member added in the first replica set document:
"replicaSets":[
{
"_id":"rs1",
"members":[
{
"_id":0,
"host":"<process_name_1>",
"priority":1,
"votes":1,
"slaveDelay":0,
"hidden":false,
"arbiterOnly":false
},
...
]
},
...
In the sharding array, add the replica sets to the shards, and add the three config servers, as in the following:
305
"sharding":[
{
"shards":[
{
"tags":[],
"_id":"shard1",
"rs":"rs1"
},
{
"tags":[],
"_id":"shard2",
"rs":"rs2"
}
],
"name":"sharded_cluster_via_api",
"configServer":[
"<process_name_7>",
"<process_name_8>",
"<process_name_9>"
],
"collections":[]
}
]
Step 7: Send the configuration document.
Use the groups/<group_id>/automationConfig endpoint to to send the automation configuration docu-
ment to Ops Manager, as in the following. Replace <user@example.net> with the credentials of the global
owner,<api_key> with previously retrieved API key, <app-example.net> with the Ops Manager URL, and
<group_id> with the previously retrieved group id.
Replace <configuration_document> with the configuration document you have created in the previous steps.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" "http://
˓→<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i -
˓→X PUT --data ’
<configuration_document>
’
Upon successful update of the configuration, the API returns the HTTP/1.1 200 OK status code to indicate the
request has succeeded.
Step 8: Confirm successful update of the automation configuration.
Retrieve the automation configuration to compare it against the document you sent. In particular, confirm that the
version field equals 2.
Issue a command similar to the following. Replace the credentials, API key, <app-example.net> URL, and group
id as in previous steps.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i
306
Step 9: Check the deployment status to ensure goal state is reached.
Use the automationStatus resource to retrieve the deployment status. Issue the following command, replacing the
credentials, API key, URL, and group id as in previous steps.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationStatus" --digest -i
The command returns the processes array and the goalVersion field. The processes array contains a
document for each server that is to run a MongoDB instance, similar to the following:
{
"plan":[],
"lastGoalVersionAchieved":2,
"name":"<process_name_1>",
"hostname":"<server_1.example.net>",
}
If any document has a lastGoalVersionAchieved field equal to 1, the configuration is in the process of de-
ploying. The document’s plan field displays the remaining work. Wait several seconds and issue the curl command
again.
When all lastGoalVersionAchieved fields equal the value specified in the goalVersion field, the new
configuration has successfully deployed.
To view the new configuration in the Ops Manager web interface, select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment
page.
Next Steps
To make an additional version of MongoDB available in the cluster, follow the steps in Update the MongoDB Version
of a Deployment.
Update the MongoDB Version of a Deployment
On this page
•Overview
•Consideration
•Prerequisite
•Procedure
Overview
This tutorial describes how to use the API to migrate a MongoDB deployment to a new version of MongoDB. These
steps assume you have an existing deployment that uses a 2.4.x version of MongoDB, as would be the case if you
used the tutorial to Deploy a Cluster through the API, that you will migrate to a 2.6 or later deployment.
Beginning with version 2.6, MongoDB implemented a new format for MongoDB configuration options. These steps
describe how to modify an existing 2.4 sharded cluster to conform to the 2.6 configuration format.
307
Consideration
The API supports the MongoDB options listed on the Supported MongoDB Options for Automation page.
Prerequisite
You must have credentials to access Ops Manager as a user with the Global Owner role.
Procedure
Step 1: Retrieve the automation configuration from Ops Manager.
Use the automationConfig resource to retrieve the configuration. Issue the following command, replacing
<user@example.net> with the credentials of the global owner,<api_key> with the previously retrieved API
key, <app-example.net> with the URL of Ops Manager, and <group_id> with the previously retrieved group
ID:
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i
Confirm that the version field of the retrieved automation configuration matches the version field in the
mms-cluster-config-backup.json file.
Step 2: Open the configuration document for editing.
As you edit the configuration document in the next steps, reference the description of an automation configuration for
detailed descriptions of settings.
Step 3: Add the new MongoDB version number to the configuration document.
Update the mongoDbVersions array to include {"name": "2.6.7"}:
"mongoDbVersions": [
{"name": "2.4.12"},
{"name": "2.6.7"}
]
Step 4: Update the MongoDB configuration options to the 2.6 syntax.
Update each document in the processes array as follows.
Update the processes.version field to specify 2.6.7:
"version": "2.6.7"
Change the processes.args2_4 field to processes.args2_6:
"args2_6": {
308
Edit the options in the processes.args2_6 field to conform with the MongoDB 2.6 structure described in Con-
figuration File Options in the MongoDB manual. For example:
"args2_6": {
"net": {
"port": 27017
},
"storage": {
"dbPath": "/data/"
},
"systemLog": {
"path": "/data/mongodb.log",
"destination": "file"
},
"replication": {
"replSetName": "rs1"
},
"operationProfiling": {}
}
Step 5: Send the configuration document.
Use the automationConfig resource to send the updated automation configuration.
Issue the following command, replacing <user@example.net> with the credentials of the global owner,
<api_key> with the API key, <app-example.net> with the Ops Manager URL, and <group_id> with the
group id. Replace <configuration_document> with the entire updated configuration document.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" "http://
˓→<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i -
˓→X PUT --data ’
<configuration_document>
’
Upon successful update of the configuration, the API returns the HTTP 200 OK status code to indicate the request
has succeeded.
Step 6: Confirm successful update of the automation configuration.
Retrieve the automation configuration from Ops Manager to compare it against the document you sent. Issue a com-
mand similar to the following. Replace the credentials, API key, URL, and group id as in the previous step.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationConfig" --digest -i
Step 7: Check the deployment status to ensure goal state is reached.
Use the automationStatus resource to retrieve the deployment status. Issue the following command, replacing the
credentials, API key, URL, and group id as in previous steps.
curl -u "<user@example.net>:<api_key>" "http://<app-example.net>/api/public/v1.0/
˓→groups/<group_id>/automationStatus" --digest -i
309
Confirm that the values of all the lastGoalVersionAchieved fields in the processes array match the
goalVersion field. For more information on deployment status, see Automation Status.
To view the new configuration in the Ops Manager web interface, select the Deployment tab and then the Deployment
page.
10 Troubleshooting
On this page
•Getting Started Checklist
•Monitoring
•Authentication
This document provides advice for troubleshooting problems with Ops Manager.
10.1 Getting Started Checklist
To begin troubleshooting, complete these tasks to check for common, easily fixed problems:
1. Authentication Errors
2. Check Agent Output or Log
3. Confirm Only One Agent is Actively Monitoring
4. Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Monitored Hosts
5. Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Ops Manager Server
6. Allow Agent to Discover Hosts and Collect Initial Data
Authentication Errors
If your MongoDB instances run with authentication enabled, ensure Ops Manager has the MongoDB credentials. See
Configure MongoDB Authentication and Authorization.
Check Agent Output or Log
If you continue to encounter problems, check the agent’s output for errors. See Agent Logs for more information.
Confirm Only One Agent is Actively Monitoring
If you run multiple Monitoring Agents, make sure they are all the same version and that only one if actively monitoring.
When you upgrade a Monitoring Agent, do not forget to delete any old standby agents.
When you run multiple agents, one runs as the primary agent and the others as standby agents. Standby agents poll
Ops Manager periodically to get the configuration but do not send data.
To determine which agent is the primary agent, look at the Status value on the Administration tab’s Agents page. If
there is no last ping value for a listed agent, the agent is a standby agent.
310
See Monitoring FAQs and Add Existing MongoDB Processes to Monitoring for more information.
Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Monitored Hosts
Ensure the system running the agent can resolve and connect to the MongoDB instances. To confirm, log into the
system where the agent is running and issue a command in the following form:
mongo [hostname]:[port]
Replace [hostname] with the hostname and [port] with the port that the database is listening on.
Ensure Connectivity Between Agent and Ops Manager Server
Verify that the Monitoring Agent can connect on TCP port 443 (outbound) to the Ops Manager server (i.e. “mms.
mongodb.com”.)
Allow Agent to Discover Hosts and Collect Initial Data
Allow the agent to run for 5-10 minutes to allow host discovery and initial data collection.
10.2 Installation
Why doesn’t the monitoring server startup successfully?
Confirm the URI or IP address for the Ops Manager service is stored correctly in the mongo.mongoUri property in
the <install_dir>/conf/conf-mms.properties file:
mongo.mongoUri=<SetToValidUri>
If you don’t set this property, Ops Manager will fail while trying to connect to the default 127.0.0.1:27017 URL.
If the URI or IP address of your service changes, you must update the property with the new address. For example,
update the address if you deploy on a system without a static IP address, or if you deploy on EC2 without a fixed IP
and then restart the EC2 instance.
If the URI or IP address changes, then each user who access the service must also update the address in the URL used
to connect and in the client-side monitoring-agent.config files.
If you use the Ops Manager <install_dir>/bin/credentialstool to encrypt the password used in the
mongo.mongoUri value, also add the mongo.encryptedCredentials key to the <install_dir>/
conf/conf-mms.properties file and set the value for this property to true:
mongo.encryptedCredentials=true
10.3 Monitoring
Alerts
For information on creating and managing alerts, see Create an Alert Configuration and Manage Alerts.
311
Cannot Turn Off Email Notifications
There are at least two ways to turn off alert notifications:
• Remove the deployment from your Ops Manager account. See Remove Processes from Monitoring.
• Disable or delete the alert in Ops Manager. Click the Activity tab then click Alert Settings. To the right of an
alert, select the gear icon and select Disable or Delete.
Receive Duplicate Alerts
If the notification email list contains multiple email-groups, one or more people may receive multiple notifications of
the same alert.
Receive “Host has low open file limits” or “Too many open files” error messages
These error messages appear on the Deployment page, under a host’s name. They appear if the number of available
connections does not meet an Ops Manager-defined minimum value. These errors are not generated by the mongos
instance and, therefore, will not appear in mongos log files.
On a host by host basis, the Monitoring Agent compares the number of open file descriptors and connections to the
maximum connections limit. The max open file descriptors ulimit parameter directly affects the number of available
server connections. The agent calculates whether or not enough connections exist to meet an Ops Manager-defined
minimum value.
In ping documents, for each node and its serverStatus.connections values, if the sum of the current value
plus the available value is less than the maxConns configuration value set for a monitored host, the Monitoring
Agent will send a Host has low open file limits or Too many open files message to Ops Manager.
Ping documents are data sent by Monitoring Agents to Ops Manager. To view ping documents, click the Deployment
page, then click the host’s name, and then click Last Ping.
To prevent this error, we recommend you set ulimit open files to 64000. We also recommend setting the maxConns
command in the mongo shell to at least the recommended settings.
See the MongoDB ulimit reference page and the the MongoDB maxConns reference page for details.
Deployments
Deployment Hangs in In Progress
If you have added or restarted a deployment and the deployment remains in the In Progress state for several
minutes, click View Agent Logs and look for any errors.
If you diagnose an error and need to correct the deployment configuration:
1. Click Edit Configuration and then click Edit Configuration again.
2. Reconfigure the deployment.
3. When you complete your changes, click Review & Deploy and then Confirm & Deploy.
If you shut down the deployment and still cannot find a solution, unmanage the deployment.
312
Monitoring Agent Fails to Collect Data
Possible causes for this state:
• If the Monitoring Agent can’t connect to the server because of networking restrictions or issues (i.e. firewalls,
proxies, routing.)
• If your database is running with SSL. You must enable SSL either globally or on a per-host basis. See Configure
Monitoring Agent for SSL and Configure SSL for MongoDB for more information.
• If your database is running with authentication. You must supply Monitoring with the authentication credentials
either when you’re adding a host or by clicking the gear icon and then Edit Host to the right of the entry on the
Deployment page.
Hosts
Hosts are not Visible
Problems with the Monitoring Agent detecting hosts can be caused by a few factors.
Host not added to |mms|: In Ops Manager, select the Deployment tab, then the Deployment page, and then click the
Add Host button. In the New Host window, specify the host type, internal hostname, and port. If appropriate, add the
database username and password and whether or not Ops Manager should use SSL to connect with your Monitoring
Agent. Note it is not necessary to restart your Monitoring Agent when adding (or removing) a host.
Accidental duplicate mongods If you add the host after a crash and restart the Monitoring Agent, you might not see
the hostname on the Ops Manager Deployment page. Ops Manager detects the host as a duplicate and suppresses its
data. To reset, select the Administration tab, then Group Settings, and then the Reset Duplicates button.
Too many Monitoring Agents installed: Only one Monitoring Agent is needed to monitor all hosts within a single
network. You can use a single Monitoring Agent if your hosts exist across multiple data centers and can be discovered
by a single agent. Check you have only one Monitoring Agent and remove old agents after upgrading the Monitoring
Agent.
A second Monitoring Agent can be set up for redundancy. However, the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is robust. Ops
Manager sends an Agent Down alert only when there are no available Monitoring Agents available. See Monitoring
FAQ and Monitoring Architecture for more information.
Cannot Delete a Host
In rare cases, the mongod is brought down and the replica set is reconfigured. The down host cannot be deleted and
returns an error message, “This host cannot be deleted because it is enabled for backup.” Contact |mms| Support for
help in deleting these hosts.
For more information on deleted hosts, see Remove Hosts.
Groups
Cannot Delete a Group
Please contact your Ops Manager administrator to remove a company or group from your Ops Manager account.
313
Additional Information on Groups
Create a group to monitor additional segregated systems or environments for servers, agents, users, and other resources.
For example, your deployment might have two or more environments separated by firewalls. In this case, you would
need two or more separate Ops Manager groups.
API and shared secret keys are unique to each group. Each group requires its own agent with the appropriate API and
shared secret keys. Within each group, the agent needs to be able to connect to all hosts it monitors in the group.
For information on creating and managing groups, see Manage Groups.
Munin
Install and configure the munin-node daemon on the monitored MongoDB server(s) before starting Ops Manager
monitoring. The Ops Manager agent README file provides guidelines to install munin-node. However, new
versions of Linux, specifically Red Hat Linux (RHEL) 6, can generate error messages. See Configure Hardware
Monitoring with munin-node for details about monitoring hardware with munin-node.
Restart munin-node after creating links for changes to take effect.
“No package munin-node is available” Error
To correct this error, install the most current version of the Linux repos. Type these commands:
sudo yum install http://dl.fedoraproject.org/pub/epel/6/x86_64/epel-release-6-8.
˓→noarch.rpm
Then type this command to install munin-node and all dependencies:
sudo yum install munin-node
Non-localhost IP Addresses are Blocked
By default, munin blocks incoming connections from non-localhost IP addresses. The /var/log/munin/
munin-node.log file will display a “Denying connection” error for your non-localhost IP address.
To fix this error, open the munin-node.conf configuration file and comment out these two lines:
allow ^127\.0\.0\.1$
allow ^::1$
Then add this line to the munin-node.conf configuration file with a pattern that matches your subnet:
cidr_allow 0.0.0.0/0
Restart munin-node after editing the configuration file for changes to take effect.
Verifying iostat and Other Plugins/Services Returns “# Unknown service” Error
The first step is to confirm there is a problem. Open a telnet session and connect to iostat,iostat_ios, and
cpu:
314
telnet HOSTNAME 4949 <default/required munin port>
fetch iostat
fetch iostat_ios
fetch cpu
The iostat_ios plugin creates the iotime chart, and the cpu plugin creates the cputime chart.
If any of these telnet fetch commands returns an “# Unknown Service” error, create a link to the plugin or service
in /etc/munin/plugins/ by typing these commands:
cd /etc/munin/plugins/
sudo ln -s /usr/share/munin/plugins/<service> <service>
Replace <service> with the name of the service that generates the error.
Disk names are not listed by Munin
In some cases, Munin will omit disk names with a dash between the name and a numerical prefix, for example, dm-0
or dm-1. There is a documented fix for Munin’s iostat plugin.
10.4 Authentication
Two-Factor Authentication
Missed SMS Authentication Tokens
Unfortunately SMS is not a 100% reliable delivery mechanism for messages, especially across international borders.
The Google authentication option is 100% reliable. Unless you must use SMS for authentication, use the Google
Authenticator application for two-factor authentication.
If you do not receive the SMS authentication tokens:
1. Refer to the Administration page for more details about using two-factor authentication. This page includes any
limitations which may affect SMS delivery times.
2. Enter the SMS phone number with country code first followed by the area code and the phone number. Also try
011 first followed by the country code, then area code, and then the phone number.
If you do not receive the authentication token in a reasonable amount of time contact |mms| Support to rule out SMS
message delivery delays.
How to Delete or Reset Two-Factor Authentication
Contact your system administrator to remove or reset two-factor authentication on your account.
For administrative information on two-factor authentication, see Manage Two-Factor Authentication for Ops Manager.
LDAP
Cannot Enable LDAP
You must enable LDAP before you sign up the first user through the Ops Manager interface, as required in Au-
thentication Requirements. If you cannot enable LDAP because you have created a user through Ops Manager, you
315
must reinstall Ops Manager, being sure to enable LDAP before creating users and hosts. Please see Authentication
Requirements.
Forgot to Change MONGODB-CR Error
If your MongoDB deployment uses LDAP for authentication, and you find the following error message:
You forget to change "MONGODB-CR" to "LDAP (PLAIN)" since they both
take username/password.
Then make sure that you specified the LDAP (PLAIN) as is the authentication mechanism for both the Monitoring
Agent and the Backup Agent. See Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication and Configure Monitoring Agent
for LDAP.
All Deployments
Networking
All hosts must be able to allow communication between MongoDB ports. The default is 27017, but you can configure
alternate port ranges in the Ops Manager interface.
The Automation Agent must be able to connect to mms.mongodb.com on port 443 (i.e. https). For more
information on access to ports and IP addresses, see Security Overview.
Directory and File Permissions
The Automation Agent directories and files require the permissions describe here. Paths and filenames vary depending
on the operating system.
•Automation Agent Directory
The agent directory and the agent configuration file require Read and Execute permissions for the user that runs
the Automation Agent.
On RHEL, CentOS, Amazon Linux, & Ubuntu, the agent directory is /etc/mongodb-mms. The agent stores
its configuration in the automation-agent.config file in that directory:
On other Linux systems and on OS X, you will define the agent directory during installation. The agent stores
its configuration in the local.config file in that directory.
•Supporting Files
Supporting files include the Monitoring and Backup Agents, the MongoDB binaries, and a backup copy of
the JSON-based automation configuration file. The directory that stores these requires Read,Write, and
Execute permissions for the user that runs the Automation Agent. The agent requires write permissions are
so that the agent can write to the automation configuration file.
On RHEL, CentOS, Amazon Linux, & Ubuntu, Automation stores these in the same directory as the Automation
Agent.
On other Linux operating systems and on OS X, Automation stores these in the /var/lib/
mongodb-mms-automation directory.
•Log File
The log file requires Write permission for the user that runs the Automation Agent. By default, the agent logs
events in the following log file:
316
/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/automation-agent.log
The Automation Agent’s configuration file specifies the location of the log file, as well as the log level and
log-rotation settings.
Automation Configuration
After completing the automation configuration, always ensure that the deployment plan satisfies the needs of your
deployment. Always double check hostnames and ports before confirming the deployment.
Sizing
• Ensure that you provision machines with enough space to run MongoDB and support the requirements of your
data set.
• Ensure that you provision sufficient machines to run your deployment. Each mongod should run on its own
host.
Operating System
The Automation Agent only supports Linux and OS X hosts. The Automation Agent does not support Windows.
10.5 Backup
Logs Display MongodVersionException
The MongodVersionException can occur if the Backup Daemon’s host cannot access the internet to download
the version or versions of MongoDB required for the backed-up databases. Each database requires a version of
MongoDB that matches the database’s version. Specifically, for each instance you must run the latest stable release of
that release series. For versions earlier than 2.4, the database requires the latest stable release of 2.4.
If the Daemon runs without access to the internet, you must manually download the required MongoDB versions, as
described here:
1. Go to the MongoDB downloads page and download the appropriate versions for your environment.
2. Copy the download to the Daemon’s host.
3. Decompress the download into the directory specified in the mongodb.release.directory setting in the
Daemon’s conf-daemon.properties file. For the file’s location, see Ops Manager Configuration Files.
Within the directory specified in the mongodb.release.directory setting, the folder structure for Mon-
goDB should look like the following:
<path-to-mongodb-release-directory>/
|-- mongodb-<platform>
| |-- THIRD-PARTY-NOTICES
| |-- README
| |-- GNU-AGPL-3.0
| |-- bin
| | |-- bsondump
| | |-- mongo
| | |-- mongod
317
| | |-- mongodump
| | |-- mongoexport
| | |-- mongofiles
| | |-- mongoimport
| | |-- mongooplog
| | |-- mongoperf
| | |-- mongorestore
| | |-- mongos
| | |-- mongostat
| | |-- mongotop
10.6 System
Logs Display OutOfMemoryError
If your logs display OutOfMemoryError, ensure you are running with sufficient ulimits and RAM.
Increase Ulimits
For the recommended ulimit setting, see the FAQ on Receive “Host has low open file limits” or “Too many open files”
error messages.
Ops Manager infers the host’s ulimit setting using the total number of available and current connections. For more
information about ulimits in MongoDB, see the UNIX ulimit Settings reference page.
Ensure Sufficient RAM for All Components
• Ensure that each server has enough RAM for the components it runs. If a server runs multiple components, its
RAM must be at least the sum of the required amount of RAM for each component.
For the individual RAM requirements for the Ops Manager Application server, Ops Manager Application
database, Backup Daemon server, and Backup Blockstore database, see Ops Manager Hardware and Software
Requirements.
10.7 Automation Checklist
Ops Manager Automation allows you to deploy, configure, and manage MongoDB deployments with the Ops Man-
ager UI. Ops Manager Automation relies on an Automation Agent, which must be installed on every server in the
deployment. The Automation Agents periodically poll the Ops Manager service to determine the current goal, and
continually report their status to Ops Manager.
To use Automation, you must install the Automation Agent on each server that you want Ops Manager to manage.
11 Frequently Asked Questions
On this page
•Monitoring FAQs
318
•Backup FAQs
•Administration FAQs
This document addresses common questions about Ops Manager and its use.
11.1 Monitoring FAQs
Host Configuration
How do I add a new host or server?
See Add Existing MongoDB Processes to Monitoring.
Can Ops Manager monitor itself?
Yes. You can use Ops Manager to monitor the backing MongoDB replica sets that hold data for the Ops Manager
Application and Backup Daemon.
You cannot, however, use Ops Manager to backup or automate the backing replica sets.
Can I monitor Kerberos-enabled instances?
Yes. Monitoring does support monitoring for Kerberos-enabled MongoDB instances. See Configure the Monitoring
Agent for Kerberos for more information.
How does Ops Manager gather database statistics?
In most instances, Monitoring will scale its request cycle to limit more expensive statistics gathering. The DB Stats
information updates every 10 minutes, and the agent will throttle the frequency to reduce the impact on the database.1
Even so, the “DB stats” operation impacts the performance of your database, as is possible when installations have a
large number of databases and collections.
If the collection of database statistics impacts database performance, disable database stats collection before starting
your agent. Select the Administration tab, then the Group Settings page, and then set Collect Database Specific
Statistics to NO.
Monitoring Agent
Do I need a Monitoring Agent for every MongoDB Instance?
No. A single Monitoring Agent can connect to all MongoDB databases in your Ops Manager group. Unless you have
multiple groups, complete your initial Monitoring Agent setup with a single agent.
For redundancy, you may wish to run a second Monitoring Agent. See the Monitoring Agent Redundancy for more
information.
1DB Stats will not appear until 30 minutes after you add the host to Monitoring
319
Can I use two Monitoring Agents to connect MongoDBs in different data centers?
No, not within the same group. The group’s Monitoring Agent must connect to every server in the MongoDB deploy-
ment. Configure firewalls to allow the Monitoring Agent to connect across data centers and servers.
Use multiple Monitoring Agents within a single Ops Manager group only to provide redundancy. For each Ops
Manager group, the agent must be able to connect to every monitored MongoDB. Unless you have multiple groups,
complete your initial Monitoring Agent setup with a single agent.
What happens if a Monitoring Agent becomes unavailable? How can I ensure my MongoDBs are
always monitored?
You can run multiple Monitoring Agents. If one Monitoring Agent fails, another starts monitoring. As long as at least
one Monitoring Agent is available, Ops Manager will not trigger a Monitoring Agent Down alert. To run multiple
Monitoring Agents, see Monitoring Agent Redundancy.
You also can create an alert to notify you when an agent is down. In Ops Manager, click the Activity tab and then Alert
Settings. Click the Add Alert button then set the alert through the fields in the Create a New Alert window.
Where should I run the Monitoring Agent?
The amount of resources the Monitoring Agent requires varies depending on infrastructure size, the number of servers
and the databases it’s monitoring. Run the agent on an existing machine with additional capacity that does not run a
mongod instance. You may also run the Monitoring Agent on a smaller dedicated instance.
The Monitoring Agent load scales with the number of monitored mongod plus mongos processes and the number of
databases in your MongoDB environment.
Never install the Monitoring Agent on the same server as a data bearing mongod instance. This will allow you to per-
form maintenance on a the mongod and its host without affecting the monitoring for your deployment. Additionally
a Monitoring Agent may contend for resources with the mongod
You can install the Monitoring Agent on the same system as an arbiter, a mongos, or an application server depending
on the requirements of these services and available resources.
Can I run the Monitoring Agent on an AWS micro server?
If you monitor five or fewer mongod instances, you can use a AWS micro server.
Why can’t the Monitoring Agent connect to my host?
The most common problem is that the agent is unable to resolve the hostname of the server. Check DNS and the
/etc/hosts file.
The second most common problem is that there are firewall rules in place that prohibit access to the server from the
agent.
To test the connection, login to the server running the agent and run: mongo hostname:port/test If you are
unable to connect, the agent will not be able to connect.
In addition, Monitoring supports monitoring for Kerberos-enabled instances.
320
Why does the Monitoring Agent connect with hostnames instead of IP addresses?
By default, the Monitoring Agent tries to connect by resolving hostnames. If the agent cannot connect by resolving a
hostname, you can force the Monitoring Agent to prefer an IP address over its corresponding hostname for a specific
IP address.
To create a preferred hostname, select the Administration tab, then the Group Settings page, and then click the Add
button for the Preferred Hostnames setting. If your IP addresses have a common prefix, create a preferred hostname
with the ends-with button or click the regexp button to use a regular expression.
Preferred hostnames also allow you to specify the hostname to use for servers with multiple aliases. This prevents
servers from appearing multiple times under different names in the Ops Manager interface.
How do I download the Monitoring Agent?
You can update the Monitoring Agent from the Agents page on the Ops Manager Administration tab.
How do I setup and configure the agent?
See the README file included in the agent download.
How do I delete a Monitoring Agent from Ops Manager?
Monitoring Agents report their status to the Ops Manager. When an agent does not report for more than 24 hours, the
agent no longer appears in Ops Manager.
For more details, see Remove Monitoring Agents from Ops Manager.
Can I run the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent with Ops Manager Backup?
Yes. Both the Ops Manager Monitoring Service and Ops Manager Backup can operate in the same environment.
You will need to install and configure two separate Monitoring Agents: configure one agent for the Ops Manager
environment and the other for the Ops Manager Service.
Data Presentation
What are all those vertical bars in my charts?
Ared bar indicates a server restart.
Aorange bar indicates the server is now a primary.
Abrown bar indicates the server is now a secondary.
Why is my Monitoring Agent highlighted in red?
Your agent is out of date.
You can update the Monitoring Agent from the Agents page on the Ops Manager Administration tab.
321
Data Retention
What is the data retention policy for Ops Manager?
Ops Manager retains two distinct types of data: metrics, which describe usage; and snapshots, which back up your
data.
Data-retention policies, as defined in the Terms of Service, are always subject to change.
As of this writing, Ops Manager preserves:
• Minute-level metrics for 48 hours.
• Hourly metrics for 94 days.
• Snapshots according to their retention policy.
11.2 Backup FAQs
Ops Manager Backup creates backups of MongoDB replica sets and sharded clusters. After an initial sync to Mon-
goDB’s datacenters, Ops Manager Backup tails the operation log (oplog) to provide a continuous backup with point-
in-time recovery of replica sets and consistent snapshots of sharded clusters. For more information, please review
these frequently asked questions or create an Ops Manager Backup account.
Requirements
What version of MongoDB does Backup require?
To back up a sharded cluster, Backup requires version 2.4.3 or later.
To back up a replica set, Backup requires version 2.2 or later.
Are there any limits to the types of deployments Backup supports?
Yes. Backup does not currently support standalone deployments. Backup has full support for replica sets and sharded
clusters.
Why doesn’t Backup support standalone deployments?
After an initial sync of your data to Ops Manager, Backup copies data from the oplog to provide a continuous backup
with point-in-time recovery. Backup does not support standalone servers, which do not have an oplog. To support
backup with a single mongod instance, you can run a one-member replica set.
See also:
Convert a Standalone to a Replica Set.
How Does Ops Manager Measure Data Size?
Ops Manager uses the following conversions to measure snapshot size and to measure how much oplog data has been
processed:
• 1 MB = 10242bytes
322
• 1 GB = 10243bytes
• 1 TB = 10244bytes
Interface
How can I verify that I’m running the latest version of the Backup Agent?
If your Backup Agent is out of date, it will be highlighted in red on the Agents page of the Administration tab.
Why is my Backup Agent highlighted in red?
If your agent is highlighted in red on the Agents page of the Administration tab, your agent is out of date. For
instructions on updating the agent, see Install Backup Agent.
Operations
How does Backup work?
You install the Backup Agent on a server in the same deployment with your MongoDB infrastructure. The agent
conducts an initial sync of your data to Ops Manager. After the initial sync, the agent tails the oplog to provide a
continuous backup of your deployment.
Where should I run the Backup Agent?
The Backup Agent can run anywhere in your infrastructure that has access to your mongod instances. To avoid
contention for network and CPU resources, do not run the Backup Agent on the same hosts that provide your mongod
instances.
The Backup Agent has the same performance profile impact as a secondary. For the initial backup, the load scales
with the size of your data set. Once an initial backup exists, the load scales with oplog gigabytes used per hour.
Can I run the Backup and Monitoring Agents on a Single System?
There is no technical restriction that prevents the Backup Agent and the Monitoring Agent from running on a single
system or host. However, both agents have resource requirements, and running both on a single system can affect the
ability of these agents support your deployment in Ops Manager.
The resources required by the Backup Agent depend on rate and size of new oplog entries (i.e. total oplog gigabyte/per-
hour produced.) The resources required by the Monitoring Agent depend on the number of monitored mongod
instances and the total number of databases provided by the mongod instances.
Can I run multiple Backup Agents to achieve high availability?
You can run multiple Backup Agents for high availability. If you do, the Backup Agents must run on different hosts.
When you run multiple Backup Agents, only one agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The primary
agent performs the backups. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log their status as standbys and to
periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
323
Does the Backup Agent modify my database?
The Backup Agent writes a small token called a “checkpoint” into the oplog of the source database at a regular interval.
These tokens provide a heartbeat for Backup and have no effect on the source deployment. Each token is less than 100
bytes. See: Checkpoints for more about checkpoints.
Will the MongoDB Backup Service impact my production databases?
Backup will typically have minimal impact on production MongoDB deployments. This impact will be similar to that
of adding a new secondary toareplica set.
By default, the Backup Agent will perform its initial sync, the most resource intensive operation for Backup, against
a secondary member of the replica set to limit its impact. You may optionally configure the Backup Agent to perform
the initial sync against the replica set’s primary, although this will increase the impact of the initial sync operation.
What is the load on the database during the initial Backup sync?
The impact of the initial backup synchronization should be similar to syncing a new secondary replica set member.
The Backup Agent does not throttle its activity, and attempts to perform the sync as quickly as possible.
Can I backup my standalone deployment?
No. Backup does not currently support standalone deployments. To convert to a replica set, consult MongoDB’s
replication documentation.
How do I perform maintenance on a Replica Set with Backup enabled?
Most operations in a replica set are replicated via the oplog and are thus captured by the backup process. Some
operations, however, make changes that are not replicated: for these operations you must have the Backup service
resync from your current replica set to include the changes.
The following operations are not replicated and therefore require resync:
• Renaming or deleting a database by deleting the data files in the data directory. As an alternative, remove
databases using an operation that MongoDB will replicate, such as db.dropDatabase() from the mongo
shell.
• Changing any data while the instance is running as a standalone.
• Using compact or repairDatabase to reclaim a significant amount of space. This is not strictly necessary
but will ensure that the Ops Manager copy of the data is resized, which means quicker restores and lower costs.
See also:
Maintenance Operations for Replica Set Members.
How Do I Delete a Backup Snapshot?
You can delete replica set backup snapshots and snapshots for replica sets in a sharded cluster set if the snapshots are
not needed for point-in-time restores. See Delete Snapshots for Replica Sets and Sharded Clusters for details.
324
Configuration
What are “excluded namespaces”?
Excluded namespaces are databases and collections that Ops Manager will not back up. This is useful for large
databases or collections that contain data that you will not need to restore: caches and logs, for example.
How can I prevent Backup from backing up a collection?
Backup allows you to specify “excluded namespaces”, which are collections or databases that you do not want Ops
Manager to back up.
You can specify the namespaces to exclude when you initially enable backup on a replica set or sharded cluster, or can
edit the list at any time by selecting the “gear icon” in the Sharded Cluster Status or Replcia Set Status tables in Ops
Manager.
How can I change which namespaces are on the “excluded namespaces” list?
Click on the “gear icon” next to the name of the replica set or sharded cluster whose excluded namespaces you want to
modify in the Sharded Cluster Status or Replcia Set Status tables in Ops Manager. A modal window will open, where
you can add databases or collections to the list, or remove list items by clicking on the red xicon.
Removing a namespace from the excluded namespaces list necessitates a re-sync. Backup handles this re-sync.
How can I use backup if Backup Jobs Fail to Bind?
The most common reason that jobs fail to bind to a Backup daemon is when no daemon has space for local copy of
the backed up replica set.
To increase capacity so that the backup job can bind, you can:
• add an additional backup daemon.
• increase the size of the file system that holds the rootDirectory directory.
• move the rootDirectory data to a new volume with more space, and create a symlink or configure the file
system mount points so that the daemon can access the data using the original path.
How do I resolve applyOps Errors During Backups?
If you notice consistent errors in applyOps commands in your Backup logs, it may indicate that the daemon has run
out of space.
To increase space on a daemon to support continued operations, you can:
• increase the size of the file system that holds the rootDirectory directory.
• move the rootDirectory data to a new volume with more space, and create a symlink or configure the file
system mount points so that the daemon can access the data using the original path.
Restoration
Ops Manager Backup produces a copy of your data files that you can use to seed a new deployment.
325
How can Ops Manager provide point-in-time restores for any point in time?
Although it is faster to provide a restore for the time at which a snapshot was actually stored, this might not be ideal
when restoring a replica set or sharded cluster. In consequence, the Backup service can build a restore to any point in
time within a 24-hour period by replaying the oplog to the desired time.
For details, see the procedures for restoring replica sets and sharded clusters.
Can I take snapshots more frequently than every 6 hours?
No, Ops Manager does not support a snapshot schedule more frequent than every 6 hours. For more information, see
Snapshot Frequency and Retention Policy.
Can I set my own snapshot retention policy?
Yes. Administrators can change the snapshot frequency and retention policy through the snapshotSchedule resource
in the API.
For example, you may choose to capture more frequent snapshots for the most mission critical data, and capture
snapshots less frequently for less critical data.
How long does it take to create a restore?
Ops Manager transmits all backups in a compressed form from the Ops Manager server to your infrastructure.
In addition, point-in-time restores that require creating a new snapshot take additional time, which depends on the size
of the scheduled snapshot and the amount the oplog entries that Backup must apply to the preceding snapshot to roll
forward to the requested point-in-time of the backup.
Does Backup perform any data validation?
Backup conducts basic corruption checks and provides an alert if any component (e.g., the agent) is down or broken,
but does not perform explicit data validation. When it detects corruption, Backup errs on the side of caution and
invalidates the current backup and sends an alert.
How do I restore? What do I get when I restore?
You can request a restore via Ops Manager, where you can then choose which snapshot to restore and how you want
Backup to deliver the restore. All restores require 2-factor authentication. Ops Manager will send an authorization
code via SMS code to your administrator. You must enter the authorization code into the backup interface to begin the
restore process.
Note: From India, use Google Authenticator for two-factor authentication. Google Authenticator is more reliable
than authentication with SMS text messages to Indian mobile phone numbers (i.e. country code 91).
Backup delivers restores as tar.gz archives of MongoDB data files.
Restore delivery options are:
326
•SCP to your Infrastructure: Backup will transmit the backup to your infrastructure over a secure channel. You
must provide connection information for a host in your deployment.
•Download: Backup will make your restore data available using a custom, one-time-use URL.
How do I know an SCP restore push has completed and is correct?
When you receive restoration files through an SCP push, Ops Manager sends SHA-1 hash files, also called checksum
files, along with the restore files. The hash files have the .sha1 extension,
To ensure the restore files are complete and correct, use the Unix shasum utility:
shasum -c <checksum file>
What is the SCP public key for Ops Manager?
Ops Manager generates an SSH public key on a per user basis to use when delivering backups via SCP. To generate a
key, see the steps to grant access via SSH public key in Select Backup File Delivery Method and Format.
How does Backup handle Rollbacks?
If your MongoDB deployment experiences a rollback, then Ops Manager Backup also rolls back.
Backup detects the rollback when a tailing cursor finds a mismatch in timestamps or hashes of write operations.
Backup enters a rollback state and tests three points in the oplog of your replica set’s primary to locate a common
point in history. Ops Manager rollback differs from MongoDB secondary rollback in that the common point does not
necessarily have to be the most recent common point.
When Backup finds a common point, the service invalidates oplog entries and snapshots beyond that point and rolls
back to the most recent snapshot before the common point. Backup then resumes normal operations.
If Ops Manager cannot find a common point, a resync is required.
What conditions will require a resync?
If the Backup Agent’s tailing cursor cannot keep up with your deployment’s oplog, then you must resync the Backup
Service.
This scenario might occur, for example, if:
• Your application periodically generates a lot of data, shrinking the primary’s oplog window to the point that data
is written to the oplog faster than Backup can consume it.
• If the Backup Agent is running on an under-provisioned or over-used machine and cannot keep up with the
oplog activity.
• If the Backup Agent is down for a period of time longer than the oplog size allows. If you bring down your
agents, such as for maintenance, restart them in a timely manner. For more information on oplog size, see
Replica Set Oplog in the MongoDB manual.
• If all you delete all replica set data and deploy a new replica set with the same name, as might happen in a test
environment where deployments are regularly torn down and rebuilt.
• If there is a rollback, and Backup cannot find a common point in the oplog.
327
• If an oplog event tries to update a document that does not exist in the Backup replica set, as might happen if
syncing from a secondary that has inconsistent data with respect to the primary.
11.3 Administration FAQs
User and Group Management
How do I reset my password?
You can reset your password using the password reset form.
How do I change my password?
You can change your password by resetting your password.
What are the password requirements?
Passwords must be at least 8 characters long and contain at least one letter, one digit, and one special character.
How do I add a user to my company/group?
Instruct the user to create a new account through the URL for your Ops Manager installation.
After they have created an account, you can add their username to the company/group on the admin page.
How do I remove my company/group?
Please contact your Ops Manager administrator to remove a company or group from your Ops Manager account.
How can I configure multiple Google Authenticator apps to use the same account?
By selecting the Can’t scan the barcode? option during the procedure to Configure Two-Factor Authentication with
Google Authenticator. The option provides a common key that multiple Google Authenticator apps can use.
Activity
My alert email says my host(s) are exposed to the public Internet. What does that mean?
This alert indicates only that the Ops Manager server can connect to the mongod that it is monitoring. It does not
diagnose whether your host is exposed to the public, despite the alert message. This alert occurs if you configured a
setting called Exposed DB Host Check, which is a setting used with the Cloud version of Ops Manager.
See Manage Alerts to disable or modify the exposed host alerts.
328
How do I modify my alert settings?
To enable, disable, or modify alerts, select the Activity tab and then the Alert Settings page. For more information, see
Manage Alert Configuration.
How frequently can alerts be set?
Ops Manager processes alerts on a 5-minute interval. Therefore, the minimum frequency for an alert is 5 minutes. The
default frequency for new alert configurations is 60 minutes.
Operations
Do Web or Database Hosting Companies Integrate with Ops Manager?
Web hosting companies can offer the ability to use Ops Manager with their hosted MongoDB databases, for exam-
ple, to set up software agents to monitor and backup databases hosted on their servers. MongoDB has confirmed
compatability with MongoHQ, MongoLab, and Heroku. Implementation details depend on each hosting company.
MongoHQ offers Ops Manager upon request as part of their Database as a Service (DaaS) business.
MongoLab offers Ops Manager as part of their Database as a Service (DaaS) business. MongoLab offers the service
on their dedicated plans and shared replica set plan. They also provide instructions to tune MongoDB performance
with Ops Manager on their servers.
MongoHQ and MongoLab are MongoDB Advanced Partners.
Heroku offers web hosting with a MongoHQ add-on and MongoLab add-on to use MongoDB databases from these
database hosting companies. Heroku also offers Ops Manager monitoring of those databases with detailed setup
instructions.
About Ops Manager
What open source projects does Ops Manager use?
• Database: MongoDB
• App framework: Google Guice
• Http server: Jetty
• Web framework: Jersey
• Misc server libs: Apache Commons
• UI lib: jQuery ,Bootstrap
• Charts: dygraphs
• Graphics: Font-Awesome
12 Reference
Ops Manager Configuration Files Describes configuration options in the Ops Manager configuration files.
Automation Agent Install and configure the automation agent.
329
Monitoring Agent Install and configure the Monitoring Agent.
Backup Agent Install and configure the Backup Agent.
Audit Events An inventory of all audit events reported in the activity feed.
Monitoring Reference A reference sheet for the monitoring service.
Supported Browsers Browsers supported by Ops Manager.
Advanced Options for MongoDB Deployments Describes the advanced deployment options for replica sets and
sharded clusters.
Automation Configuration Describes the settings available in the cluster configuration file used to determine the
desired state of the MongoDB deployment.
Supported MongoDB Options for Automation Supported options for a MongoDB process in an automation configu-
ration.
12.1 Ops Manager Configuration Files
On this page
•Overview
•Settings
•Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials
•MongoDB User Access
Overview
The Ops Manager Application and the Backup Daemon use the conf-mms.properties and conf-daemon.properties con-
figuration files respectively. This document describes all available settings between the two files. Each configuration
file uses a subset of the settings described here.
conf-mms.properties
The Ops Manager Application uses the conf-mms.properties configuration file. If you installed Ops Manager
using an rpm or deb package, the file’s location is:
/opt/mongodb/mms/conf/
If you installed using a tar.gz file, the configuration file’s location is:
<install-directory>/conf/
If you installed on Windows, the file’s location is:
<install-folder>\Server\Config
By default, this is C:\MMSData\Server\Config.
330
conf-daemon.properties
The Backup Daemon uses the conf-daemon.properties configuration file. If you installed Ops Manager using
an rpm or deb package, the file’s location is:
/opt/mongodb/mms-backup-daemon/conf/
If you installed using a tar.gz file, the configuration file’s location is:
<install-directory>/conf/
If you installed on Windows, the configuration file’s location is:
<install-folder>\BackupDaemon\Config
Mandatory Settings
To start the Ops Manager Application, you must configure the Ops Manager Application URL Settings and Email
Address Settings in the conf-mms.properties file.
Security
For configuration settings that store credentials, you can either store the credentials in plain text or use the Ops Manager
credentialstool to encrypt the credentials, as described in Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
If you choose to store credentials in plain text, reduce the permissions on the configuration file. For example:
sudo chmod 600 <install_dir>/conf/conf-mms.properties
Settings
Ops Manager Application URL Settings
The following two settings are mandatory for the Ops Manager Application.
mms.centralUrl
Type: string
Required. Fully qualified URL, including the port number, of the Ops Manager Application. For example,
mms.centralUrl=http://mms.example.com:8080
If you wish to use a port other than 8080,Change the Ops Manager Ports describes how to change the ports
that Ops Manager uses.
mms.backupCentralUrl
Type: string
Required. The hostname and port of the Backup HTTP Service. For example,
mms.backupCentralUrl=http://mms.example.com:8081
331
You must set mms.backupCentralUrl, even if you are only using Ops Manager Monitoring and not Ops
Manager Backup.
If you wish to use a port other than 8081,Change the Ops Manager Ports describes how to change the ports
that Ops Manager uses.
Load Balancer
Set the following when using a load balancer with the Ops Manager Application.
mms.remoteIp.header
Type: string
Specify the name of the header that the load balancer will use to specify the original client’s IP address to the
application server.
See Configure a Highly Available Ops Manager Application for more information.
When you specify mms.remoteIp.header, do not allow clients to connect directly to any application server.
Ops Manager Application HTTPS Settings
You can configure the Ops Manager Application’s application servers to use HTTPS to encrypt connections between
the Ops Manager Application, the agents, and the web interface.
The default port for HTTPS access to the Ops Manager Application is 8443, as set in <install_dir>/conf/
mms.conf file. If you change this default, change the ports specified in the mms.centralUrl and mms.
backupCentralUrl settings.
mms.https.PEMKeyFile
Type: string
Specify the PEM file that contains the application’s valid certificate and private key.
mms.https.PEMKeyFilePassword
Type: string
Required if the PEM file contains an encrypted private key. Specify the password for PEM file. You can encrypt
the specified password using the Ops Manager credentialstool. See Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Email Settings
Email Address Settings
The following email address settings are mandatory. You must define them before the Monitoring instance will start.
mms.fromEmailAddr
Type: string
Required. The email address used for sending the general emails, such as Ops Manager alerts. You can include
an alias with the email address. For example:
mms.fromEmailAddr=|mms| Alerts <mms-alerts@example.com>
mms.replyToEmailAddr
Type: string
332
Required. The email address to send replies to general emails. For example:
mms.replyToEmailAddr=mms-no-reply@example.com
mms.adminFromEmailAddr
Type: string
Required. The email address to send messages from the Ops Manager admin. You can include an alias with the
email address. For example:
mms.adminFromEmailAddr=|mms| Admin <mms-admin@example.com>
mms.adminEmailAddr
Type: string
Required. The email address to send messages or replies to the Ops Manager admin. You can include an alias
with the email address. For example:
mms.adminEmailAddr=mms-admin@example.com
mms.bounceEmailAddr
Type: string
Required. The email address to send bounce messages, i.e. messages of non-delivery of alerts or messages from
Ops Manager admin. For example:
mms.bounceEmailAddr=bounce@example.com
Email Service Settings
mms.emailDaoClass
Type: string
The email interface to use. For AWS Simple Email Service, specify com.xgen.svc.core.dao.email.
AwsEmailDao, as in:
mms.emailDaoClass=com.xgen.svc.core.dao.email.AwsEmailDao
For AWS Simple Email Service, see also aws.accesskey and aws.secretkey.
For JavaEmailDao, specify com.xgen.svc.core.dao.email.JavaEmailDao, as in:
mms.emailDaoClass=com.xgen.svc.core.dao.email.JavaEmailDao
mms.mail.transport
Type: string
Default: smtp
Transfer protocol smtp or smtps as specified by your email provider. For example:
mms.mail.transport=smtp
mms.mail.hostname
Type: string
Default: localhost
Email hostname as specified by your email provider. For example:
333
mms.mail.hostname=mail.example.com
mms.mail.port
Type: number
Default: 25
Port number for the transfer protocol as specified by your email provider. For example:
mms.mail.port=25
mms.mail.tls
Type: boolean
Default: false
Indicator of whether the transfer protocol runs on top of TLS. For example:
mms.mail.tls=false
mms.mail.username
Type: string
User name of the email account. If unset, defaults to disabled SMTP authentication.
mms.mail.username=
mms.mail.password
Type: string
Password for the email account. If unset, defaults to disabled SMTP authentication.
mms.mail.password=emailPassword
aws.accesskey
Type: string
Required if using AWS Simple Email Service. The access key ID for AWS.
aws.accesskey=EXAMPLEAccessKeyID
aws.secretkey
Type: string
Required if using AWS Simple Email Service. The secret access key for AWS.
aws.secretkey=eXampLe/aCcESs/KEY
Twilio SMS Alert Settings
To receive alert notifications via SMS, you must have a Twilio account and specify your Twilio account information
in the configuration file.
twilio.account.sid
Type: string
Twilio account ID.
334
twilio.auth.token
Type: string
Twilio API token.
twilio.from.num
Type: string
Twilio phone number.
MongoDB Settings
The following settings configure the Ops Manager connections to the Ops Manager Application Database.
Connection String
mongo.mongoUri
Type: string
Required. The connection string used to access the backing MongoDB instance. The conf-mms.
properties file can contain multiple mongo.mongoUri settings. The following example specifies con-
nection to a replica set:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://db1.example.net:40000,db2.example.net:40000,db3.example.
˓→net:40000
If you omit the port number, Ops Manager uses the default 27017 port for all hosts.
For a backing MongoDB instance with access control, the connection string must include authentication cre-
dentials. The connecting user must possess the readWriteAnyDatabase,dbAdminAnyDatabase, and
clusterMonitor user roles. If the database is a sharded cluster, the clusterAdmin role is required in-
stead of clusterMonitor.
The following examples show the formats to use for the different authentication mechanisms.
For a MongoDB instance using the default MONGODB-CR /SCRAM-SHA-1 challenge-response mechanism,
prefix the hostname with the MongoDB username and password in the form <username>:<password>@
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodbuser1:password@mydb1.example.net:40000
For a MongoDB instance using MONGODB-X509 authentication, you must first add the value of the subject
from the client certificate as a MongoDB user, as described in Use x.509 Certificates to Authenticate Clients in
the MongoDB manual. The client certificate is contained in the PEM file you specify in the mongodb.ssl.
PEMKeyFile setting. Once you have created the user, prefix the host specified in mongo.mongoUri with
the name of the new user and append authMechanism=MONGODB-X509 after the specified port:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://<new_mongodb_user>@mydb1.example.net:40000/?
˓→authMechanism=MONGODB-X509
For a MongoDB instance using LDAP, prefix the hostname with the MongoDB user-
name and password in the form <username>:<password>@, and append the
authMechanism=PLAIN&authSource=$external options after the port:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://mongodbuser1:password@mydb1.example.net:40000/?
˓→authMechanism=PLAIN&authSource=$external
335
For a MongoDB instance using Kerberos, prefix the hostname with the Kerberos user principal and specify the
authentication mechanism, authMechanism=GSSAPI, after the port.
Kerberos user principal names have the form <username>@<KERBEROS REALM>. You must escape
the user principal, replacing symbols with the URL encoded representation. A Kerberos user principal of
username@REALM.EXAMPLE.COM would therefore become username%40REALM.EXAMPLE.COM.
The following is an example of Kerberos authentication:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://username%40REALM.EXAMPLE.COM@mydb1.example.net:40000/?
˓→authMechanism=GSSAPI
To enable Kerberos authentication between the Ops Manager Application and the backup-database, see Kerberos
Settings. See also authMechanism and authSource in the MongoDB manual.
MongoDB SSL Settings
The following settings in conf-mms.properties and conf-daemon.propeties configure Ops Manager to
use SSL to encrypt connections to the backing MongoDB instances that host the Ops Manager Application Database
and Backup Blockstore Database.
mongo.ssl
Type: boolean
Enables SSL connection to the Ops Manager Application Database when set to true.
mongodb.ssl.CAFile
Type: string
The name of the PEM file that contains the root certificate chain from the Certificate Authority that signed the
MongoDB server certificate.
mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFile
Type: string
The name of the PEM file that contains the X509 certificate and private key. Required if the MongoDB instance
is running with the --sslCAFile option. For more information on the option, see net.ssl.CAFile in the
MongoDB manual.
If you authenticate using the MONGODB-X509 authentication mechanism, you also enter this as the name of the
user in the mongoUri connection string.
mongodb.ssl.PEMKeyFilePassword
Type: string
Required if the PEM file contains an encrypted private key. Specify the password for PEM file. You can encrypt
the specified password using the Ops Manager credentialstool. See Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Encrypted Credentials
mongo.encryptedCredentials
Type: boolean
Add this property and set it to true if mongo.mongoUri contains the encrypted username and password:
mongo.encryptedCredentials=true
336
You must encrypt the username and password in mongo.mongoUri using the Monitoring
credentialstool. See Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials.
Important: The conf-mms.properties file can contain multiple mongo.mongoUri settings. If
mongo.encryptedCredentials is true, you must encrypt all user credentials found in the various
mongo.mongoUri settings.
Automation Versions Settings
The following settings in the conf-mms.properties file determine how Ops Manager knows what MongoDB
releases exist and from what servers the Automation Agent downloads the binaries for a MongoDB release.
automation.versions.source
Type: string
Default: mongodb
Selects whether the Automation Agents retrieve MongoDB binaries over the internet from MongoDB Inc. or
locally from the Ops Manager Application server. Set this to mongodb if the Automation Agents have internet
access to retrieve the binaries from MongoDB Inc. Set this to local if your Automation Agents cannot reach
the internet. If you specify local, you must set the automation.versions.directory and place .
tgz archive files for the MongoDB binaries in the specified directory. You must also provide the MongoDB
version manifest. For details, see Configure Local Mode if Ops Manager has No Internet Access.
automation.versions.directory
Type: string
Default:
When automation.versions.source is set to local, this specifies the directory on the Ops Man-
ager Application server from which the Automation Agents accesses MongoDB binaries when installing a new
deployment or changing the MongoDB version of an existing deployment. You must download the desired
MongoDB binaries as .tgz archive files and place the .tgz files in the specified directory.
Ops Manager Backup Daemon Settings
These settings are found only in the conf-daemon.properties file and are necessary only if you are using Ops
Manager Backup.
rootDirectory
Type: string
The disk partition used by the Backup Daemon to dynamically create and maintain the replica set HEAD direc-
tories. For more information on HEADs, see the Backup functional overview.
This directory must be writable by the mongodb-mms user and must end in a trailing slash. It is critical that this
partition is sized appropriately.
Important: Data in this directory is dynamically created, maintained and destroyed by the Backup Daemon.
This partition should not be used for any other purpose. This partition should not overlap with the partition used
for the Backup Blockstore database.
numWorkers
Type: number
337
The number of replica sets that should be processed at a time.
mongodb.release.directory
Type: string
Specifies the full path to the directory that contains every MongoDB release needed by the Backup Daemon.
When backing up a replica set, The Backup Daemon must use a mongod that matches the version of the replica
set being backed up.
Warning: If you use MongoDB Enterprise, you must pre-install the MongoDB Enterprise dependencies
to all servers that run MongoDB Enterprise.
If you set mongodb.release.autoDownload to false, you must download the MongoDB releases
manually. For each version needed, you must download the archive for that version and extract it into
this directory. The extracted archive creates a subdirectory that uses the following naming convention:
mongodb-<platform>-<architecture>-<version>.
Adhere to the following rules for populating the release directory:
• The release directory can contain versions from either the MongoDB Community edition or the MongoDB
Enterprise but not from both.
• For the MongoDB 3.0 Community edition, do not use platform-specific archives. Instead, for all
platforms that run MongoDB 3.0 Community, use the Linux 64-bit legacy archive from http:
//www.mongodb.org/downloads.
Important: If you are backing up MongoDB custom builds, you must manually place a matching binary
distribution for each custom build in this directory.
Beginning in Ops Manager version 1.5, the Backup Daemon uses the following rules to match the MongoDB
version of the replica set being backed up:
• If the MongoDB version uses the MongoDB standard A.B.C version format, the daemon looks for a
folder named mongodb-<platform>-<architecture>-A.B.x, where xis greater than or equal
to C.
• If the MongoDB version does not use the standard format, the daemon looks for a folder named
mongodb-<platform>-<architecture>-<version>, where <version> ends with the Mon-
goDB instance’s version. For example, if the source version is 2.4.10-abc, the daemon would match
on mongodb-linux-x86_64-production-2.4.10-abc.
mongodb.release.autoDownload
Type: boolean
If you set this to true, Backup automatically downloads the latest release of MongoDB from mon-
godb.org/downloads and stores it in the directory specified by the mongodb.release.directory setting.
Backup’s mongodb-fetch utility, located in the /opt/mongodb/backup-daemon/bin directory, runs
once an hour to perform the downloads.
If you set this to false, you must manually download and install the needed MongoDB releases to the directory
specified in the mongodb.release.directory setting. Downloads must adhere to the rules described in
the mongodb.release.directory entry above.
338
Advanced Backup Restore Settings
These settings affect Ops Manager Backup restore behaviors. They are are found only in the conf-daemon.
properties file.
mms.backup.restore.linkExpirationHours
Type: number
Default: 1
The amount of time in hours that a restore link is available.
mms.backup.restore.linkUnlimitedUses
Type: boolean
Default: false
Sets whether the link to a restored point-in-time snapshot can be used more than once. By default, when you
create a point-in-time snapshot, the link to download the snapshot can be used just once. To allow multiple
downloads of the snapshot, set this value to true.
mms.backup.restore.snapshotPITExpirationHours
Type: number
Default: 24
The length of time in hours that a link to a restored point-in-time snapshot is available. By default, the link is
available for 24 hours after creation of the point-in-time snapshot.
Session Management Setting
mms.session.maxHours
Type: number
The number of hours before a session on the Ops Manager website expires.
mms.monitoring.agent.session.timeoutMillis
Type: number
Default: 300000
Minimum: 90000
The Monitoring Agent failover time, in milliseconds. If Ops Manager does not receive a deployment status from
the primary Monitoring Agent in the time specified, Ops Manager will make a standby Monitoring Agent the
new primary. Configuring the timeout below 90000 (90 seconds) will cause Ops Manager to fail at startup with
a configuration error.
Password Policy Settings
You can configure the password policy for Ops Manager user accounts with the following settings:
mms.password.minChangesBeforeReuse
Type: number
The number of previous passwords to remember. You cannot reuse a remembered password as a new password.
mms.password.maxFailedAttemptsBeforeAccountLock
Type: number
339
The number of failed login attempts before an account becomes locked. Only an an Ops Manager Administrator
can unlock a locked account.
mms.password.maxDaysInactiveBeforeAccountLock
Type: number
The maximum number of days with no visits to the Ops Manager website before Ops Manager locks an account.
mms.password.maxDaysBeforeChangeRequired
Type: number
The number of days a password is valid before the password expires.
mms.multiFactorAuth.require
Type: boolean
Default: false
When true, Ops Manager will require two-factor authentication for users to log in or to perform certain de-
structive operations within the application.
If you configure Twilio integration, users may obtain their second factor tokens via Google Authenticator, SMS,
or voice calls. Otherwise, the only mechanism to provide two-factor authentication is Google Authenticator.
mms.multiFactorAuth.allowReset
Type: boolean
Default: false
When true, Ops Manager will allow users to reset their two-factor authentication settings via email in an
analogous fashion to resetting their passwords.
To reset two-factor authentication, a user must:
• be able to receive email at the address associated with the user account
• know the user account’s password
• know the Agent API key for any Ops Manager Group of which the user is a member
mms.multiFactorAuth.issuer
Type: string
If Google Authenticator provides two-factor authentication, this string is the issuer in the Google Authenti-
cator app. If left blank, the issuer is the domain name of the Ops Manager installation.
Public API
You can modify certain default behaviors of the Public API.
mms.publicApi.ignoreEnabledForGlobalRoles
Type: boolean
By default, a user with a global role can access any Ops Manager group through the Public API, whether or not
the Public API is enabled for that group.
To prevent access when a group’s Public API is disabled, add mms.publicApi.
ignoreEnabledForGlobalRoles to conf-mms.properties and set its value to false:
mms.publicApi.ignoreEnabledForGlobalRoles=false
340
mms.publicApi.whitelistEnabled
Type: boolean
Certain API calls require that requests originate from a whitelisted IP address. To turn off this requirement, add
mms.publicApi.whitelistEnabled to conf-mms.properties and set its value to false:
mms.publicApi.whitelistEnabled=false
SNMP Heartbeat Settings
Ops Manager uses SNMP v2c. You can configure the Ops Manager Application to send a periodic heartbeat trap
notification (v2c) that contains an internal health assessment of the Ops Manager Application. The Ops Manager
Application can send traps to one or more endpoints on the standard SNMP UDP port 162.
To configure the Ops Manager Application to send trap notifications, download the Management Information Base
(MIB) file at http://downloads.mongodb.com/on-prem-monitoring/MMS-MONGODB-MIB.txt and configure the fol-
lowing settings:
snmp.default.hosts
Type: string
Default: blank
Comma-separated list of hosts where ‘heartbeat’ traps will be sent on the standard UDP port 162. You must
set snmp.default.hosts to enable the SNMP heartbeat functionality; otherwise, leaving the setting blank
disables the SNMP heartbeat functionality.
snmp.listen.port
Type: number
Default: 11611
Listening UDP port for SNMP. Setting to a number less than 1024 will require running the Ops Manager Appli-
cation with root privileges.
snmp.default.heartbeat.interval
Type: number
Default: 300
Number of seconds between heartbeat notifications.
reCaptcha Settings
To enable reCaptcha anti-spam test on new user registration, you must have a reCaptcha account and specify the API
information in the configuration file.
reCaptcha.enabled
Type: boolean
Set to true to require reCaptcha validation when a new user registers.
reCaptcha.public.key
Type: string
The reCaptcha public key associated with your account.
reCaptcha.private.key
Type: string
341
The reCaptcha private key associated with your account.
LDAP Settings
To configure Ops Manager for LDAP, you must start with a new installation or reset your installation to a clean state.
Your Ops Manager installation cannot have existing users, groups, or hosts. For assistance, contact your MongoDB
account manager.
LDAP Server Setting
mms.userSvcClass
Type: string
The LDAP service class com.xgen.svc.mms.svc.user.UserSvcLdap; i.e.
mms.userSvcClass=com.xgen.svc.mms.svc.user.UserSvcLdap
LDAP User Settings
These settings configure Ops Manager to use an LDAP server for authentication. If you use LDAP authentication,
users must belong to an LDAP group to log into Ops Manager. You must create LDAP groups for each Ops Manager
user role.
mms.ldap.url
Type: string
The URI for the LDAP server. For example:
mms.ldap.url=ldap://acme-dc1.acme.example.net:3890
mms.ldap.bindDn
Type: string
The LDAP user used to execute searches for other users. For example:
mms.ldap.bindDn=authUser@acme.example.net
mms.ldap.bindPassword
Type: string
The credentials for the search user. For example:
mms.ldap.bindPassword=<user-password>
mms.ldap.user.baseDn
Type: string
The base Distinguished Name (DN) that Ops Manager uses to search for users. Escape the =sign with \. For
example:
mms.ldap.user.baseDn=DC\=acme,DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.user.searchAttribute
Type: string
342
The LDAP field used for the LDAP search. This is typically a username or email address.
The value of this field is also used as the Ops Manager username.
Example:
mms.ldap.user.searchAttribute=mail
mms.ldap.user.group
Type: string
The LDAP user attribute that contains the list of LDAP groups the user belongs to. The LDAP attribute can use
any format to list the groups, including Common Name (cn) or Distinguished Name (dn). All Ops Manager
settings in this configuration file that specify groups must match the chosen format.
Example:
mms.ldap.user.group=memberOf
mms.ldap.global.role.owner
Type: string
The LDAP group that has full privileges for the Ops Manager deployment, including full access to all Ops
Manager groups and all administrative permissions. Users in the specified LDAP group receive the global
owner role in Ops Manager. Specify the group using the format that is used by the LDAP attribute specified in
the mms.ldap.user.group setting.
Example:
mms.ldap.global.role.owner=CN\=MMSGlobalOwner,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme Groups,DC\=acme,
˓→DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.user.firstName
Type: string
The LDAP user attribute that contains the user’s first name. After successful LDAP authentication, Ops Manager
synchronizes the specified LDAP attribute with the first name from the Ops Manager user record.
For example:
mms.ldap.user.firstName=givenName
mms.ldap.user.lastName
Type: string
The LDAP user attribute that contains the user’s last name. After successful LDAP authentication, Ops Manager
synchronizes the specified LDAP attribute with the last name from the Ops Manager user record.
For example:
mms.ldap.user.lastName=sn
mms.ldap.user.email
Type: string
The LDAP user attribute that contains the user’s email address. After successful LDAP authentication, Ops
Manager synchronizes the specified LDAP attribute with the email address from the Ops Manager user record.
For example:
mms.ldap.user.email=mail
343
LDAP Global Role Settings
These settings assign Ops Manager global roles to the members of the specified LDAP groups. Specify groups using
the format used by the LDAP attribute specified in the mms.ldap.user.group setting. You can specify multiple
groups using the ;; delimiter. To change the default delimiter, use the mms.ldap.group.separator setting.
Each Ops Manager global role provides its level of access to all the Ops Manager groups in the deployment. To
provide access to specific groups, use group-level roles.
mms.ldap.global.role.automationAdmin
Type: string
The LDAP group whose members have the global automation admin role in Ops Manager. For example:
mms.ldap.global.role.automationAdmin=CN\=MMS-AutomationAdmin,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme
˓→Groups,DC\=acme,DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.global.role.backupAdmin
Type: string
The LDAP group whose members have the global backup admin role in Ops Manager. For example:
mms.ldap.global.role.backupAdmin=CN\=MMS-BackupAdmin,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme Groups,
˓→DC\=acme,DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.global.role.monitoringAdmin
Type: string
The LDAP group whose members have the global monitoring admin role in Ops Manager. For example:
mms.ldap.global.role.monitoringAdmin=CN\=MMS-MonitoringAdmin,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme
˓→Groups,DC\=acme,DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.global.role.userAdmin
Type: string
The LDAP group whose members have the global user admin role in Ops Manager. For example:
mms.ldap.global.role.userAdmin=CN\=MMS-UserAdmin,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme Groups,DC\=acme,
˓→DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.global.role.readOnly
Type: string
The LDAP group whose members have the global read-only role in Ops Manager. For example:
mms.ldap.global.role.readOnly=CN\=MMS-ReadOnly,OU\=MMS,OU\=acme Groups,DC\=acme,
˓→DC\=example,DC\=net
mms.ldap.group.separator
Type: string
Each of the global role values can take a delimited list of groups: for example "dbas,sysadmins".
If a group value contains the delimiter, the delimiter must be set to another value. For example, if you have the
group value "CN\=foo,DN\=bar" and the delimiter is ,then Ops Manager parses "CN\=foo,DN\=bar"
as two elements rather than as the description for a single group. Change the delimiter by adding the mms.
ldap.group.separator setting to the configuration file and specifying a different delimiter.
Starting with Ops Manager 1.5, the default delimiter is ;;.
344
Kerberos Settings
To enable Kerberos authentication between the Ops Manager Application and the Ops Manager Application Database,
configure the following settings. You must configure all required Kerberos settings to enable Kerberos authentication.
jvm.java.security.krb5.kdc
Type: string
Required if using Kerberos. The IP/FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the KDC server. The value will
be set to JVM’s java.security.krb5.kdc.
jvm.java.security.krb5.kdc=kdc.example.com
jvm.java.security.krb5.realm
Type: string
Required if using Kerberos. This is the default REALM for Kerberos. It is being used for JVM’s
java.security.krb5.realm.
jvm.java.security.krb5.realm=EXAMPLE.COM
mms.kerberos.principal
Type: string
Required if using Kerberos. The principal used to authenticate with MongoDB. This should be the exact same
user on the mongo.mongoUri above.
mms.kerberos.principal=mms/mmsweb.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM
mms.kerberos.keyTab
Type: string
Required if using Kerberos. The absolute path to the keytab file for the principal.
mms.kerberos.keyTab=/path/to/mms.keytab
mms.kerberos.debug
Type: boolean
The debug flag to output more information on Kerberos authentication process.
mms.kerberos.debug=false
Encrypt MongoDB User Credentials
If you do not want to store credentials in plain text, Monitoring provides a tool to encrypt the MongoDB credentials.
To encrypt authentication credentials:
1. Issue the following command to create an encrypted credential pair, replacing <username> with your user-
name:
sudo <install_dir>/bin/credentialstool --username <username> --password
This will prompt you to enter the password and will output the encrypted credential pair.
credentialstool requires root privileges, (i.e. sudo) when installed with rpm or deb packages, because
it modifies the /etc/mongodb-mms/gen.key file.
345
2. Use the encrypted credential pair in the mongo.mongoUri settings where needed, and add the mongo.
encryptedCredentials = true setting. For example:
mongo.mongoUri=mongodb://da83ex3s:a4fbcf3a1@mydb1.example.net:40000/admin
mongo.encryptedCredentials=true
Important: The conf-mms.properties file can contain multiple mongo.mongoUri settings. If mongo.
encryptedCredentials is true, you must encrypt all user credentials found in the various mongo.mongoUri
settings.
MongoDB User Access
The MongoDB user must have the following roles: readWriteAnyDatabase,clusterAdmin, and
dbAdminAnyDatabase. For an overview of user roles used with Ops Manager, see: Ops Manager Roles.
12.2 Automation Agent
Install the Agent Install the automation agent on existing hardware.
Automation Agent Configuration Documentation of the settings available in the Automation Agent configuration
file.
Install the Automation Agent
The Automation Agent runs on every host that runs a monitored MongoDB deployment. The agent provides the
interface for starting and managing deployments. If you run MongoDB on hardware that you provision, you must
install the Automation Agent manually on each server. If you run MongoDB through the Ops Manager integration
with Amazon Web Services (AWS), Ops Manager automatically deploys the Automation Agents every time you
provision an new EC2 instance.
Install with RPM Packages Install and start the Automation Agent using an rpm package.
Install on Ubuntu Install and start the automation Agent on Ubuntu using a deb package.
Install on Other Linux Systems Install and start the Automation Agent on other Linux systems using the tar.gz
archive packages.
Install on OS X Install and start the Automation Agent on OS X.
Install the Automation Agent with rpm Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
346
Overview
The Automation Agent runs on every host that runs a monitored MongoDB deployment. The agent provides the
interface for starting and managing deployments. If you run MongoDB on hardware that you provision, you must
install the Automation Agent manually on each server. If you run MongoDB through the Ops Manager integration
with Amazon Web Services (AWS), Ops Manager automatically deploys the Automation Agents every time you
provision an new EC2 instance.
Automation Agents can run only on 64-bit architectures.
Use this procedure to install the agent on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Amazon Linux, and other systems that use rpm
packages.
Prerequisites
Before installing the agent, review the Automation Checklist for considerations and prerequisites specific to the agent.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Automation Agent.
Install the Automation Agent with an rpm Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace amd64 with your platform, as needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-manager-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent Package
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-automation-agent-manager-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 3: Edit the automation-agent.config file.
Edit the automation-agent.config file.
sudo vi /etc/mongodb-mms/automation-agent.config
For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value. For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
For SUSE 11+ deployments only, configure the sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate setting. All other users
should omit this step.
347
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate=/etc/ssl/certs/UTN_USERFirst_Hardware_Root_CA.pem
Step 4: Prepare a directory in which to store your MongoDB data.
The directory must be owned by the mongod user. For example, use a set of commands similar to the following:
sudo mkdir /data
sudo chown mongod:mongod /data
Step 5: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms-automation-agent start
Update the Automation Agent with an rpm Package
You do not need to stop the agent to install. The update package automatically stops, unpacks, and then restarts the
agent.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace amd64 with your platform, as needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-manager-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent Package
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-automation-agent-manager-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 3: Prepare a directory in which to store your MongoDB data.
The directory must be owned by the mongod user. For example, use a set of commands similar to the following:
sudo mkdir /data
sudo chown mongod:mongod /data
Install the Automation Agent with deb Packages
On this page
•Overview
348
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Automation Agent runs on every host that runs a monitored MongoDB deployment. The agent provides the
interface for starting and managing deployments. If you run MongoDB on hardware that you provision, you must
install the Automation Agent manually on each server. If you run MongoDB through the Ops Manager integration
with Amazon Web Services (AWS), Ops Manager automatically deploys the Automation Agents every time you
provision an new EC2 instance.
Automation Agents can run only on 64-bit architectures.
Use this procedures to install the Automation Agent on Ubuntu with deb packages. For Debian systems, use the
Install the Automation Agent from an Archive procedure.
Prerequisites
Before installing the agent, review the Automation Checklist for considerations and prerequisites specific to the agent.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Automation Agent.
Install the Automation Agent with a deb Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace amd64 with your platform, as needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-manager_latest_amd64.deb
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent Package.
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-automation-agent-manager_latest_amd64.deb
Step 3: Edit the automation-agent.config file.
Edit the automation-agent.config file.
sudo vi /etc/mongodb-mms/automation-agent.config
For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value. For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
349
Step 4: Prepare a directory in which to store your MongoDB data.
The directory must be owned by the mongodb user. For example, use a set of commands similar to the following:
sudo mkdir /data
sudo chown mongodb:mongodb /data
Step 5: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo start mongodb-mms-automation-agent
Update the Automation Agent with a deb Package
You do not need to stop the agent to install. The update package automatically stops, unpacks, and then restarts the
agent.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace amd64 with your platform, as needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-manager_latest_amd64.deb
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent Package.
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-automation-agent-manager_latest_amd64.deb
Step 3: Prepare a directory in which to store your MongoDB data.
The directory must be owned by the mongodb user. For example, use a set of commands similar to the following:
sudo mkdir /data
sudo chown mongodb:mongodb /data
Install the Automation Agent from an Archive
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
350
Overview
The Automation Agent runs on every host that runs a monitored MongoDB deployment. The agent provides the
interface for starting and managing deployments. If you run MongoDB on hardware that you provision, you must
install the Automation Agent manually on each server. If you run MongoDB through the Ops Manager integration
with Amazon Web Services (AWS), Ops Manager automatically deploys the Automation Agents every time you
provision an new EC2 instance.
Use this procedure to install the Automation Agent on a Linux system not listed in the Agent Downloads list on the
Agents page in the Administration tab.
Automation Agents can run only on 64-bit architectures.
Prerequisites
Before installing the agent, review the Automation Checklist for considerations and prerequisites specific to the agent.
Procedure
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Automation Agent.
Install the Automation Agent from an Archive
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-automation-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Automation Agent is installed.
Step 3: Edit the local.config file to include your Group ID and Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Automation Agent, edit the local.config file.
• For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value.
• For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
351
Step 4: Create Automation Directory
Create the directories /var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation,/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation
and /data and ensure that the user running the agent owns the directories.
Step 5: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-automation-agent >> automation-agent.log 2>&1&
Update the Automation Agent from an Archive
Step 1: Stop any currently running Automation Agents.
Issue the following command:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-automation-agent
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed:
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
Step 3: Install the Automation Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-automation-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Automation Agent is installed.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include your Group ID and Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Automation Agent, edit the local.config file.
• For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value.
• For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
352
Step 5: Create Automation Directory
Create the directories /var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation,/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation
and /data and ensure that the user running the agent owns the directories.
Step 6: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-automation-agent >> automation-agent.log 2>&1&
Install the Automation Agent on OS X
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisites
•Procedure
Overview
The Automation Agent runs on every host that runs a monitored MongoDB deployment. The agent provides the
interface for starting and managing deployments. If you run MongoDB on hardware that you provision, you must
install the Automation Agent manually on each server. If you run MongoDB through the Ops Manager integration
with Amazon Web Services (AWS), Ops Manager automatically deploys the Automation Agents every time you
provision an new EC2 instance.
Automation Agents can run only on 64-bit architectures.
Prerequisites
Before installing the agent, review the Automation Checklist for considerations and prerequisites specific to the agent.
Procedure
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Automation Agent.
Install the Automation Agent on OS X
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace osx_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed:
353
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Automation Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive. For example:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-automation-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Automation Agent is installed.
Step 3: Edit the local.config file to include your Group ID and Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Automation Agent, edit the local.config file.
• For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value.
• For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
Step 4: Create Automation Directory
Create the directories /var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation,/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation
and /data and ensure that the user running the agent owns the directories.
Step 5: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-automation-agent --config=local.config >> /var/log/mongodb-mms-
˓→automation/automation-agent.log 2>&1&
Update the Automation Agent on OS X
Step 1: Stop any currently running Automation Agents.
Issue the following command:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-automation-agent
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Automation Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace osx_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed:
354
curl -OL <OpsManagerCentralURL>/download/agent/automation/mongodb-mms-automation-
˓→agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
Step 3: Install the Automation Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive. For example:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-automation-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Automation Agent is installed.
Step 3: Edit the local.config file to include your Group ID and Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Automation Agent, edit the local.config file.
• For mmsGroupId, enter your GroupID as the value.
• For mmsApiKey, enter your API key.
mmsGroupId=<Group ID>
mmsApiKey=<API Key>
Step 4: Create Automation Directory
Create the directories /var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation,/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation
and /data and ensure that the user running the agent owns the directories.
Step 6: Start the Automation Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-automation-agent --config=local.config >> /var/log/mongodb-mms-
˓→automation/automation-agent.log 2>&1&
Automation Agent Configuration
On this page
•Configuration File
•Settings
Configuration File
The location of the Automation Agent configuration file depends on your operating system:
355
• RHEL, CentOS, Amazon Linux, and Ubuntu all use a package manager to install the agent. The package
manager creates the following agent configuration file:
/etc/mongodb-mms/automation-agent.config
• OS X, Windows, and other Linux systems use either a tar or msi file for the installation. The Automation
Agent stores its configuration in the following file:
<installation directory>/local.config
Settings
Ops Manager provides default values for many of the Automation Agent Configuration settings. However, you must
set the mmsGroupId and mmsApiKey values.
Connection Settings
mmsGroupId
Type: string
Required. The ID of your Ops Manager group. You can find it in Ops Manager under the Group Settings page
in the Administration tab.
For example:
mmsGroupId=8zvbo2s2asigxvmpnkq5yexf
mmsApiKey
Type: string
Required. The Ops Manager agent API key for the group. To retrieve the key from the Ops Manager interface,
click the Administration tab, then the Group Settings page.
For example:
mmsApiKey=rgdte4w7wwbnds9nceuodx9mcte2zqem
mmsBaseUrl
Type: string
The URL of the Ops Manager Web Server.
Set this to the URL of your Ops Manager HTTP Service. For example:
mmsBaseUrl=http://example.com:8080
logFile
Type: string
The path to which Ops Manager should write the automation agent’s log. By default, the path is /var/log/
mongodb-mms-automation/automation-agent.log, but you can choose an alternate location if de-
sired.
For example:
logFile=/var/log/mongodb-mms-automation/automation-agent.log
356
mmsConfigBackup
Type:
The path to the file where the Automation Agent stores a backup copy of the Ops Manager automation configu-
ration, which describes the desired state of the deployment.
For example:
mmsConfigBackup=/var/lib/mongodb-mms-automation/mms-cluster-config-backup.json
Logging Settings
logLevel
Type: string
The level of logging granularity. You can choose from the following severity levels, from most verbose to least.
By default, logLevel is INFO.
•DEBUG
•ROUTINE
•INFO
•WARN
•ERROR
•DOOM
For example:
logLevel=ROUTINE
Each level includes the log items covered by the following levels. For instance, if you choose DEBUG, the
Automation Agent logs all messages, including ROUTINE,INFO,WARN,ERROR, and DOOM. By contrast, if
you choose DOOM, the Automation Agent only logs DOOM messages.
maxLogFiles
Type: integer
The maximum number of rotate log files to retain. By default, maxLogFiles is 10. You can change the value
to retain a different number of rotated log files. For example:
maxLogFiles: 15
maxLogFileSize
Type: integer
Specifies the maximum size, in bytes, that a log file can be before triggering log rotation. For example:
maxLogFileSize=536870912
HTTP Proxy Settings
httpProxy
Type: string
To configure the Automation Agent to use an HTTP proxy, specify the URL of the proxy. For example:
357
httpProxy=http://example-proxy.com:8080
12.3 Monitoring Agent
Install or Update the Agent Procedures for installing and updating the Monitoring Agent.
Monitoring Agent Configuration Documentation of the settings available in the Monitoring Agent configuration file.
Required Access for Monitoring Agent Details the permissions required for Monitoring Agent to use with MongoDB
instances that enforce access control.
Configure the Agent for Access Control If MongoDB uses Access Control, create a MongoDB user for the Monitor-
ing Agent to use to authenticate and to determine the agent’s access.
Configure the Agent for SSL Configure the Monitoring Agent for SSL.
Configure Hardware Monitoring Install and configure support for a munin-node plugin, for hardware monitoring.
Start or Stop the Agent Procedures to start and stop the Monitoring Agent.
Remove the Agent Remove the Monitoring Agent.
Install Monitoring Agent
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
service which processes and renders this data.
Install or Update with RPM Packages Install or update the Monitoring Agent using an rpm package.
Install or Update on Ubuntu Install or update the Monitoring Agent on Ubuntu using a deb package.
Install or Update on OS X Install or update the Monitoring Agent on OS X systems.
Install or Update on Other Linux Systems Install or update the Monitoring Agent on Linux systems other than
RHEL or Ubuntu.
Install or Update on Windows Install or update the Monitoring Agent on windows
Install or Update the Monitoring Agent with rpm Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
358
service which processes and renders this data. The agent initiates all connections to the Monitoring service, and
communications between the agent and the Monitoring service are encrypted. A single agent can collect data from
multiple MongoDB processes.
This tutorial will guide you through the steps necessary to install or update Monitoring on your system. You must
install the Ops Manager Monitoring server itself before installing the Monitoring Agent.
See Monitoring FAQs for additional information.
Considerations
Connectivity
You must configure the networking rules of your deployment so that:
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to all mongod and mongos instances that you want to monitor.
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to Monitoring server on port 443 (i.e. https.)
The Monitoring server does not make any outbound connections to the agents or to MongoDB instances. If Exposed
DB Host Check is enabled, the Monitoring server will attempt to connect to your servers occasionally as part of a
vulnerability check.
Ensure all mongod and mongos instances are not accessible to hosts outside your deployment.
Monitoring Agent Redundancy
A single Monitoring Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. However, you can run additional instances of the
agent as hot standbys to provide redundancy. If the primary agent fails, a standby agent starts monitoring.
When you run multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The
primary agent reports the cluster’s status to Ops Manager. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log
their status as standby agents and to periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
To install additional agents, simply repeat the installation process.
Collection Interval
If you are updating the agent, keep in mind that when the Monitoring Agent restarts, there is a five-minute delay before
that agent begins collecting data and sending pings to Monitoring. If you have multiple agents, this delay permits other
agents in your infrastructure to become the primary agent and permits Monitoring to determine which agent will be
primary.
During this interval, the restarted Monitoring Agent will not collect data.
Prerequisites
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, you must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate
access. See Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Monitoring Agent.
359
Install the Monitoring Agent with an rpm Package
Use this procedure to install the agent on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Amazon Linux, and other systems that use rpm
packages.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent package.
In a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.x86_
˓→64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command:
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
Step 5: Optional: For SUSE deployments only, configure the sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate
property.
If you’re deploying on SUSE, you must configure the sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate setting. All other
users should omit this step.
Enter the following property and value in the /etc/mongodb-mms/monitoring-agent.config file:
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate=/etc/ssl/certs/UTN_USERFirst_Hardware_Root_CA.pem
Save and close the file.
Step 6: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent start
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
360
Update the Monitoring Agent with an rpm Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent package.
In a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.x86_
˓→64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command:
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Install or Update the Monitoring Agent with deb Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
service which processes and renders this data. The agent initiates all connections to the Monitoring service, and
communications between the agent and the Monitoring service are encrypted. A single agent can collect data from
multiple MongoDB processes.
This tutorial will guide you through the steps necessary to install or update Monitoring on your system. You must
install the Ops Manager Monitoring server itself before installing the Monitoring Agent.
See Monitoring FAQs for additional information.
Considerations
Connectivity
You must configure the networking rules of your deployment so that:
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to all mongod and mongos instances that you want to monitor.
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to Monitoring server on port 443 (i.e. https.)
361
The Monitoring server does not make any outbound connections to the agents or to MongoDB instances. If Exposed
DB Host Check is enabled, the Monitoring server will attempt to connect to your servers occasionally as part of a
vulnerability check.
Ensure all mongod and mongos instances are not accessible to hosts outside your deployment.
Monitoring Agent Redundancy
A single Monitoring Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. However, you can run additional instances of the
agent as hot standbys to provide redundancy. If the primary agent fails, a standby agent starts monitoring.
When you run multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The
primary agent reports the cluster’s status to Ops Manager. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log
their status as standby agents and to periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
To install additional agents, simply repeat the installation process.
Collection Interval
If you are updating the agent, keep in mind that when the Monitoring Agent restarts, there is a five-minute delay before
that agent begins collecting data and sending pings to Monitoring. If you have multiple agents, this delay permits other
agents in your infrastructure to become the primary agent and permits Monitoring to determine which agent will be
primary.
During this interval, the restarted Monitoring Agent will not collect data.
Prerequisites
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, you must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate
access. See Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for installing and updating the Monitoring Agent on Ubuntu with deb packages.
For Debian systems, instead use the Install or Update the Monitoring Agent from Archive procedure.
Install the Monitoring Agent with a deb Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command using the system shell:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent_latest_amd64.
˓→deb
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command using the system shell:
362
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
Step 5: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo start mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Update the Monitoring Agent with a deb Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command using the system shell:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent_latest_amd64.
˓→deb
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent package.
Issue the following command using the system shell:
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 3: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo start mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
363
Install or Update the Monitoring Agent on OS X
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
service which processes and renders this data. The agent initiates all connections to the Monitoring service, and
communications between the agent and the Monitoring service are encrypted. A single agent can collect data from
multiple MongoDB processes.
This tutorial will guide you through the steps necessary to install or update Monitoring on your system. You must
install the Ops Manager Monitoring server itself before installing the Monitoring Agent.
See Monitoring FAQs for additional information.
Considerations
Connectivity
You must configure the networking rules of your deployment so that:
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to all mongod and mongos instances that you want to monitor.
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to Monitoring server on port 443 (i.e. https.)
The Monitoring server does not make any outbound connections to the agents or to MongoDB instances. If Exposed
DB Host Check is enabled, the Monitoring server will attempt to connect to your servers occasionally as part of a
vulnerability check.
Ensure all mongod and mongos instances are not accessible to hosts outside your deployment.
Monitoring Agent Redundancy
A single Monitoring Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. However, you can run additional instances of the
agent as hot standbys to provide redundancy. If the primary agent fails, a standby agent starts monitoring.
When you run multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The
primary agent reports the cluster’s status to Ops Manager. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log
their status as standby agents and to periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
To install additional agents, simply repeat the installation process.
364
Collection Interval
If you are updating the agent, keep in mind that when the Monitoring Agent restarts, there is a five-minute delay before
that agent begins collecting data and sending pings to Monitoring. If you have multiple agents, this delay permits other
agents in your infrastructure to become the primary agent and permits Monitoring to determine which agent will be
primary.
During this interval, the restarted Monitoring Agent will not collect data.
Prerequisites
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, you must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate
access. See Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Monitoring Agent on OS X
Use this procedure to install the agent OS X systems.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent archive.
In a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.osx_
˓→x86_64.tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive by issue the following command:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Monitoring Agent is installed.
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
365
Step 5: Optional: Configure the agent to use a proxy server.
If the agent will connect to Ops Manager via a proxy server, you must specify the server in the http_proxy envi-
ronment variable. To specify the server, use the export command, as in the following example:
export http_proxy="http://proxy.example.com:9000"
To connect through a proxy, you must install the agent from a .tar.gz file, not from a .deb or .rpm file.
Step 6: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent >> monitoring-agent.log 2>&1&
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Update the Monitoring Agent from a tar.gz Archive
Use this procedure to update the agent on OS X systems.
Step 1: Stop any currently running Monitoring Agents.
Issue the following command:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent archive.
In a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.osx_
˓→x86_64.tar.gz
Step 3: Install the Monitoring Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive by issue the following command:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Monitoring Agent is installed.
Step 4: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
366
Step 5: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
Step 6: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent >> monitoring-agent.log 2>&1&
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Install or Update the Monitoring Agent from Archive
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Additional Information
Overview
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
service which processes and renders this data. The agent initiates all connections to the Monitoring service, and
communications between the agent and the Monitoring service are encrypted. A single agent can collect data from
multiple MongoDB processes.
This tutorial will guide you through the steps necessary to install or update Monitoring on your system. You must
install the Ops Manager Monitoring server itself before installing the Monitoring Agent.
See Monitoring FAQs for additional information.
Considerations
Connectivity
You must configure the networking rules of your deployment so that:
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to all mongod and mongos instances that you want to monitor.
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to Monitoring server on port 443 (i.e. https.)
367
The Monitoring server does not make any outbound connections to the agents or to MongoDB instances. If Exposed
DB Host Check is enabled, the Monitoring server will attempt to connect to your servers occasionally as part of a
vulnerability check.
Ensure all mongod and mongos instances are not accessible to hosts outside your deployment.
Monitoring Agent Redundancy
A single Monitoring Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. However, you can run additional instances of the
agent as hot standbys to provide redundancy. If the primary agent fails, a standby agent starts monitoring.
When you run multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The
primary agent reports the cluster’s status to Ops Manager. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log
their status as standby agents and to periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
To install additional agents, simply repeat the installation process.
Collection Interval
If you are updating the agent, keep in mind that when the Monitoring Agent restarts, there is a five-minute delay before
that agent begins collecting data and sending pings to Monitoring. If you have multiple agents, this delay permits other
agents in your infrastructure to become the primary agent and permits Monitoring to determine which agent will be
primary.
During this interval, the restarted Monitoring Agent will not collect data.
Prerequisites
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, you must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate
access. See Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for installing and updating the Monitoring Agent on a Linux system not listed in the
Agent Downloads list on the Agents page in the Administration tab.
Install the Monitoring Agent from a tar.gz Archive
Use this procedure to install the agent on Linux systems:
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent archive.
With a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.linux_
˓→x86_64.tar.gz
368
Step 2: Install the Monitoring Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive by issue the following command:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Monitoring Agent is installed.
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
Step 5: Optional: Configure the agent to use a proxy server.
If the agent will connect to Ops Manager via a proxy server, you must specify the server in the http_proxy envi-
ronment variable. To specify the server, use the export command, as in the following example:
export http_proxy="http://proxy.example.com:9000"
To connect through a proxy, you must install the agent from a .tar.gz file, not from a .deb or .rpm file.
Step 6: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent >> monitoring-agent.log 2>&1&
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Update the Monitoring Agent from a tar.gz Archive
Use this procedure to update the agent on Linux systems:
Step 1: Stop any currently running Monitoring Agents.
Issue the following command:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
369
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Monitoring Agent archive.
With a system shell, issue the following command:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.linux_
˓→x86_64.tar.gz
Step 3: Install the Monitoring Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive by issue the following command:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Monitoring Agent is installed.
Step 4: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 5: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
Step 6: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent >> monitoring-agent.log 2>&1&
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Additional Information
If you installed the Monitoring Agent from the tar.gz archives, see /tutorial/rotate-agent-log-files to configure log
rotation.
Install or Update the Monitoring Agent on Windows
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
370
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
Overview
The Ops Manager Monitoring Agent is a lightweight component that runs within your infrastructure, connects to your
MongoDB processes, collects data about the state of your deployment, and then sends the data to the Monitoring
service which processes and renders this data. The agent initiates all connections to the Monitoring service, and
communications between the agent and the Monitoring service are encrypted. A single agent can collect data from
multiple MongoDB processes.
This tutorial will guide you through the steps necessary to install or update Monitoring on your system. You must
install the Ops Manager Monitoring server itself before installing the Monitoring Agent.
See Monitoring FAQs for additional information.
Considerations
Connectivity
You must configure the networking rules of your deployment so that:
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to all mongod and mongos instances that you want to monitor.
• the Monitoring Agent can connect to Monitoring server on port 443 (i.e. https.)
The Monitoring server does not make any outbound connections to the agents or to MongoDB instances. If Exposed
DB Host Check is enabled, the Monitoring server will attempt to connect to your servers occasionally as part of a
vulnerability check.
Ensure all mongod and mongos instances are not accessible to hosts outside your deployment.
Monitoring Agent Redundancy
A single Monitoring Agent is sufficient and strongly recommended. However, you can run additional instances of the
agent as hot standbys to provide redundancy. If the primary agent fails, a standby agent starts monitoring.
When you run multiple agents, only one Monitoring Agent per group or environment is the primary agent. The
primary agent reports the cluster’s status to Ops Manager. The remaining agents are completely idle, except to log
their status as standby agents and to periodically ask Ops Manager whether they should become the primary.
To install additional agents, simply repeat the installation process.
Collection Interval
If you are updating the agent, keep in mind that when the Monitoring Agent restarts, there is a five-minute delay before
that agent begins collecting data and sending pings to Monitoring. If you have multiple agents, this delay permits other
agents in your infrastructure to become the primary agent and permits Monitoring to determine which agent will be
primary.
During this interval, the restarted Monitoring Agent will not collect data.
371
Prerequisites
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, you must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate
access. See Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Monitoring Agent.
Install the Monitoring Agent on Windows
Use this procedure to install the agent on Windows.
Step 1: Download and run the latest version of the Monitoring Agent MSI file.
Download and run the 32-bit or 64-bit MSI file. During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for
storing configuration and log files. It is strongly advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
To download the 32-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mms-server> is the hostname of the Monitoring
server:
<mms-server>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.windows_
˓→i386.msi
To download the 64-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mms-server> is the hostname of the Monitoring
server:
<mms-server>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.windows_
˓→x86_64.msi
During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for storing configuration and log files. It is strongly
advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
Step 2: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 3: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
The default location for the agent configuration file is C:\MMSData\Monitoring\monitoring-agent.
config.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include the hostname of the Monitoring server.
Set the mmsBaseUrl property to the hostname of the Monitoring server.
372
Step 5: Start the Monitoring Agent.
Issue the following command:
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Services.
In the list of services, select the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Start.
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Update the Monitoring Agent on Windows
To update the agent on Windows systems:
Step 1: Stop any currently running Monitoring Agents.
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services.
In the list of services, select the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Stop.
Step 2: Download and run the latest version of the Monitoring Agent MSI file.
Download and run the 32-bit or 64-bit MSI file. During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for
storing configuration and log files. It is strongly advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
To download the 32-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mms-server> is the hostname of the Monitoring
server:
<mms-server>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.windows_
˓→i386.msi
To download the 64-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mms-server> is the hostname of the Monitoring
server:
<mms-server>/download/agent/monitoring/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent-latest.windows_
˓→x86_64.msi
During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for storing configuration and log files. It is strongly
advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, click the link for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step displays the actual Ops Manager API key
used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the monitoring-agent.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the <install-directory>/monitoring-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API
key.
373
Step 5: Start the Monitoring Agent.
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Services.
In the list of services, select the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Start.
Remember, that you only need to run 1Monitoring Agent for each Ops Manager group. A single Monitoring Agent
can collect data from many MongoDB instances.
Monitoring Agent Configuration
On this page
•Configuration File
•Settings
Warning: Do not edit these settings for a Monitoring Agent that is managed by an Automation Agent. If you do,
the Automation Agent will overwrite any changes you make.
Configuration File
The location of the Monitoring Agent configuration file depends on your operating system:
• RHEL, CentOS, Amazon Linux, and Ubuntu all use a package manager to install the agent. The package
manager creates the following agent configuration file:
/etc/mongodb-mms/monitoring-agent.config
• OS X, Windows, and other Linux systems use either a tar or msi file for the installation. The Monitoring
Agent stores its configuration in the following file:
<installation directory>/monitoring-agent.config
Settings
Connection Settings
For the Monitoring Agent communication with the Ops Manager servers, the following connection settings are re-
quired:
mmsApiKey
Type: string
The Ops Manager agent API key for a Ops Manager group. To retrieve the key from the Ops Manager interface,
click the Administration tab, then the Agents page, and then the link for your operating system. Ops Manager
will display the Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group.
For example:
mmsApiKey=abc123
374
mmsBaseUrl
Type: string
The URL of the Ops Manager Web Server.
Set this to the URL of your Ops Manager HTTP Service. For example:
mmsBaseUrl=http://example.com:8080
HTTP Proxy Settings
httpProxy
New in version 2.3.1.
Type: string
To connect to the Ops Manager HTTP Service via a proxy, specify the URL of the proxy. For example:
httpProxy=http://example-proxy.com:8080
MongoDB SSL Settings
Specify these settings when the Monitoring Agent is connecting to MongoDB instances with SSL.
useSslForAllConnections
Type: boolean
Set to true to enable SSL support globally and to use SSL for all MongoDB connections. Setting this to true
overrides any per-host SSL settings configured in the Ops Manager interface.
When true, use useSslForAllConnections with the sslTrustedServerCertificates setting
to specify the certificates that Ops Manager should accept.
Note: If useSslForAllConnections is true and you set
sslRequireValidServerCertificates to false, Ops Manager will accept any connection
regardless of the certificate provided. This is only recommended for testing purposes as it makes connections
susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
sslClientCertificate
Type: string
The path to the private key, client certificate, and optional intermediate certificates in PEM format. The agent
will use the client certificate when connecting to any configured MongoDB that uses SSL and requires a client
certificate, i.e., that is running using the --sslCAFile option.
For example, if you would use the following command to connect through the mongo shell to a MongoDB
process that uses both SSL and certificate validation:
mongo --ssl --sslPEMKeyFile /etc/ssl/client.pem --sslCAFile /etc/ssl/ca.pem
˓→example.net:27017
Then set the following in your Monitoring Agent configuration file:
sslTrustedServerCertificates=/etc/ssl/ca.pem
sslClientCertificate=/etc/ssl/client.pem
375
sslClientCertificatePassword
Type: string
The password needed to decrypt the private key in the file specified in sslClientCertificate. This
setting is necessary only if the client certificate PEM file is encrypted.
sslTrustedServerCertificates
Type: string
The path on disk that contains the trusted certificate authority certificates in PEM format. These certificates will
verify the server certificate returned from any MongoDB instances running with SSL. For example:
sslTrustedServerCertificates=/etc/ssl/ca.pem
sslRequireValidServerCertificates
Type: boolean
Use this option to disable certificate verification by setting this value to false. That configuration is only
recommended for testing purposes as it makes connections susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
MongoDB Kerberos Settings
See Configure the Monitoring Agent for Kerberos
krb5Principal
Type: string
The Kerberos principal used by the agent. For example:
krb5Principal=mmsagent/myhost@EXAMPLE.COM
krb5Keytab
Type: string
The absolute path to Kerberos principal’s keytab file. For example:
krb5Keytab=/etc/mongodb-mms/mms-monitoring-agent.keytab
gsappiServiceName
Type: string
The default service name used by MongoDB is mongodb can specify a custom service name with the
gssapiServiceName option.
Ops Manager Server SSL Settings
Advanced SSL settings used by the Monitoring Agent when communicating to the Ops Manager HTTP Service.
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate
By default the Monitoring Agent will use the trusted root CAs installed on the system. If the agent cannot find
the trusted root CAs, configure these settings manually.
If the Ops Manager HTTP Service uses a self-signed SSL certificate, you must specify
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate.
The path on disk that contains the trusted certificate authority certificates in PEM format. The agent will use
this certificate to verify that the agent is communicating with the designated Ops Manager HTTP Service. For
example:
376
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate=/etc/mongodb-mms/mms-certs.pem
sslRequireValidMMSServerCertificates
Type: boolean
You can disable certificate verification by setting this value to false. That configuration is only recommended
for testing purposes as it makes connections susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
Munin Settings
See Configure Hardware Monitoring with munin-node for information on configuring Munin-node.
enableMunin
Type: boolean
Set to false if you do not with the Monitoring Agent to collect hardware statistics via Munin-node. The
default is true. If the agent detects munin-node, Ops Manager will collect hardware statistics.
Deprecated Settings
MongoDB Authentication Settings
If all monitored MongoDB instances use the same MONGODB-CR credentials, you may use these settings. Setting
the username and password here will override any configuration in the Ops Manager UI.
See Required Access for Monitoring Agent for information on the privileges needed for this user.
globalAuthUsername
Type: string
The MongoDB username that the Monitoring Agent will use to connect. This value overrides all other user-
names configured for the Monitoring Agent.
Example:
globalAuthUsername=mms-monitoring-agent
globalAuthPassword
Type: string
The password for the globalAuthUsername user. This value overrides all other passwords configured
for the Monitoring Agent.
Example:
globalAuthPassword=somePassword
Required Access for Monitoring Agent
On this page
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
377
•MongoDB 2.6
•MongoDB 2.4
•Authentication Mechanisms
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent must authenticate to
MongoDB as a user with the proper access.
To authenticate, create a user with the appropriate roles in MongoDB. The following tutorials include instructions and
examples for creating the MongoDB user:
•Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR.
•Configure Monitoring Agent for LDAP.
•Configure the Monitoring Agent for Kerberos.
MongoDB user roles are separate from Ops Manager user roles and are described in the MongoDB manual beginning
with the Authorization page.
Considerations
To authenticate to sharded clusters, create shard-local users on each shard and create cluster-wide users:
• Create cluster users while connected to the mongos; these credentials persist to the config servers.
• Create shard-local users by connecting directly to the replica set for each shard.
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Monitoring when using MongoDB
2.4 with authentication.
Prerequisites
Connect to the mongod or mongos instance as a user with access to create users in the database. See db.createUser()
method page for more information.
MongoDB 2.6
To monitor MongoDB 2.6 instances, including dbStats2and database profiling information1, the monitoring agent
must authenticate to the database as a user with the following access:
Required Role
clusterMonitor role on the admin database
For mixed MongoDB versions, the specified access is inadequate to monitor deployments of since the user cannot ac-
cess the local database needed for mixed deployments. Monitoring a mixed deployment as a user with the specified
access will produce an authorization error that will appear in the mongod logs.
The monitoring agent can recover from this error, and you may safely ignore these messages in the mongod log.
2Monitoring without dbStats excludes database storage, records, indexes, and other statistics.
1Profiling captures in-progress read and write operations, cursor operations, and database command information about the database.
378
MongoDB 2.4
Monitor without Database Profiling
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 instances, including dbStats operations, the agent must authenticate as a user with the
following access:
Required Roles
clusterAdmin role on the admin database
readAnyDatabase role on the admin database
However, a user with the specified access cannot monitor with profiling. If this user tries to monitor with profiling, the
mongod log file may report the following message at the default logging level:
command denied: { profile: -1 }
You can ignore this message if you do not want Ops Manager to collect profile data. If you want to collect profile data,
configure Ops Manager monitoring as specified in Monitor with Database Profiling.
Monitor with Database Profiling
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 databases with database profiling1, the agent must authenticate as a user with the following
access:
Required Roles
clusterAdmin role on the admin database
readAnyDatabase role on the admin database
dbAdminAnyDatabase roles in the admin database
Monitor without dbStats
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 databases without dbStats2, the agent must authenticate as a user with the following
access:
Required Role
clusterAdmin role on the admin database
Authentication Mechanisms
To authenticate, create the user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. The authentication method that the Mon-
goDB deployment uses determines how to create the user as well as determine any additional agent configuration:
• For MONGODB-CR (MongoDB Challenge-Response) authentication, see Configure Backup Agent for
MONGODB-CR.
• For LDAP authentication, see Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication.
• For Kerberos authentication, see Configure the Backup Agent for Kerberos.
379
Configure Monitoring Agent for Access Control
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Monitoring Agent must authenticate to MongoDB as a user
with the proper access.
Configure for MONGODB-CR Procedure to configure the Monitoring Agent for MongoDB deployments using Mon-
goDB Challenge and Response authentication.
Configure for LDAP Procedure to configure the Monitoring Agent for MongoDB deployments using LDAP authen-
tication.
Configure for Kerberos Procedure to configure the Monitoring Agent for MongoDB deployments using Kerberos
authentication.
Add Monitoring Agent User for MONGODB-CR
On this page
•Prerequisites
•MongoDB 2.6
•MongoDB 2.4
•Host Settings
Ops Manager Monitoring Agent can use the MongoDB Challenge-Response (MONGODB-CR) to authenticate to hosts
that enforce access control.
To authenticate using MONGODB-CR, create a user in the admin database with the appropriate roles in MongoDB.
Prerequisites
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Monitoring when using MongoDB
2.4 with authentication. See Required Access for Monitoring Agent for more information.
MongoDB 2.6
To monitor MongoDB 2.6 instances, create a user in the admin database with an operation that resembles the follow-
ing:
use admin
db.createUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[ { role:"clusterMonitor", db:"admin" } ]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access.
380
MongoDB 2.4
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 instances, create a user in the admin database with an operation that resembles the follow-
ing:
use admin
db.addUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase"
]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.4 without Profiling for more information on the required access.
Monitor with Database Profiling
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 databases with database profiling, create a user in the admin database with an operation
that resembles the following:
use admin
db.addUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase",
"dbAdminAnyDatabase"
]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.4 with Profiling for more information on the required access.
Monitor without dbStats
To monitor MongoDB 2.4 instance without dbStats, create a user in the admin database with an operation that
resembles the following:
use admin
db.addUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:["clusterAdmin" ]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.4 without dbStats for more information on the required access.
381
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure Monitoring Agent for LDAP
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Create User in MongoDB
•Host Settings
Overview
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Monitoring Agent must authenticate to MongoDB as a user
with the proper access.
LDAP is a standard protocol for accessing user credential data. Starting in version 2.6, MongoDB Enterprise provides
an LDAP (plain) authentication mechanism that allows clients to authenticate to MongoDB deployments using LDAP.
Monitoring Agents support authenticating to MongoDB instances using LDAP.
If your MongoDB deployment uses LDAP to authenticate users, to authenticate the Monitoring Agent, create a user
in the $external database with the appropriate roles in MongoDB.
Considerations
You must configure LDAP authentication separately for the Monitoring Agent and for the Backup Agent.
You can configure LDAP authentication when adding a host or later by editing the host.
Prerequisites
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Monitoring when using MongoDB
2.4 with authentication. See Required Access for Monitoring Agent for more information.
Create User in MongoDB
To monitor MongoDB 2.6 instances that are using LDAP authentication, add a user to the $external database in
MongoDB with the appropriate roles. The $external database allows mongod to consult an external source (e.g.
LDAP) to authenticate.
382
db.getSiblingDB("$external").createUser(
{
user :"<username>",
roles:[ { role:"clusterMonitor", db:"admin" } ]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access.
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure the Monitoring Agent for Kerberos
On this page
•Prerequisites
•Create Kerberos Principal
•Create MongoDB User for the Principal
•Edit Agent Configuration File
•Host Settings
•Configure Kerberos Environment
MongoDB Enterprise provides support for Kerberos. Kerberos is a generic authentication protocol available starting
from MongoDB Enterprise version 2.6. The Monitoring Agents can authenticate to hosts using Kerberos.
Warning: You must install the prerequisite packages on your servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on
the servers.
You can use Ops Manager for Monitoring and Backup with Kerberos, but you cannot currently use Automation
with Kerberos. Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
Prerequisites
You must configure the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC) to grant tickets that are valid for at least four hours.
The Monitoring Agent takes care of periodically renewing the ticket. The KDC service provides session tickets and
temporary session keys to users and computers.
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Monitoring when using MongoDB
2.4 with authentication. See Required Access for Monitoring Agent for more information.
383
Create Kerberos Principal
If you are running both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent on the same server, then both agents must connect
as the same Kerberos Principal.
Step 1: Create or choose a Kerberos principal.
Create or choose a Kerberos principal for the Monitoring and/or Backup agent.
Step 2: Generate a keytab for the Kerberos principal.
Generate a keytab for the Kerberos principal and copy it to the system where the agent runs. Ensure the user that will
run the agent is the same user that owns the keytab file.
Create MongoDB User for the Principal
If you are running both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent on the same server, then both agents must connect
as the same Kerberos Principal.
Add a Kerberos principal, <username>@<KERBEROS REALM> or <username>/<instance>@<KERBEROS
REALM>, to MongoDB in the $external database. Specify the Kerberos realm in all uppercase. The $external
database allows mongod to consult an external source (e.g. Kerberos) to authenticate.
Kerberos Principal for the Monitoring Agent
For example, to add the principal for just the Monitoring Agent:
use $external
db.createUser(
{
user:"<Kerberos Principal>",
roles:[ { role:"clusterMonitor", db:"admin" } ]
}
)
See MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access for the Monitoring Agent.
Kerberos Principal for the Monitoring Agent and Backup Agent
For example, to add the same principal for both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent, specify required access
for both agents. The following example specifies access required to connect to MongoDB 3.0 or greater.
use $external
db.createUser(
{
user:"<Kerberos Principal>",
roles:[
{ role:"clusterMonitor", db:"admin" },
{ role:"backup", db:"admin" }
]
384
}
)
See MongoDB 2.6 and MongoDB 3.0 and Later for more information on the required access for the Monitoring Agent
and the Backup Agent.
Edit Agent Configuration File
Edit the /etc/mongodb-mms/monitoring-agent.config file.
Step 1: Set the krb5Principal
Set the krb5Principal to the name of the Kerberos principal. For example:
krb5Principal=mmsagent/instance@EXAMPLE.COM
Step 2: Set the krb5Keytab
Set the krb5Keytab value to the complete absolute path of the keytab file. For example:
krb5Keytab=/etc/mongodb-mms/mmsagent.keytab
Step 3: Restart the agent.
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure Kerberos Environment
Step 1: Create or configure the /etc/kerb5.conf file on the system to integrate this host into your
Kerberos environment.
Step 2: Ensure the kinit binary is available at the /user/bin/kinit path.
Configure Monitoring Agent for SSL
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Procedures
385
Overview
Ops Manager supports SSL for encrypting the following connections made by Monitoring Agents:
• Connections between the Monitoring Agents and MongoDB instances.
• Connections between the Monitoring Agents and Ops Manager.
Prerequisite
To configure the agent to use SSL, you must have a trusted CA certificate that signed the MongoDB instance’s certifi-
cate.
Procedures
Connections between Agents and MongoDB Instances
To use SSL for the Monitoring Agent’s connection to a MongoDB host, specify the host’s SSL settings when adding
the host or by editing the host’s settings.
Then configure the agent to use SSL:
Step 1: Specify path to trusted CA certificate.
If your MongoDB deployment uses SSL, then you must configure the Monitoring Agent to use SSL. To configure the
agent to use SSL, you must have a trusted CA certificate that signed the MongoDB instance’s certificate.
In the agent’s install directory, edit the monitoring-agent.config file to set
sslTrustedServerCertificates field to the path of a file containing one or more certificates in PEM
format. For example if you would use the following command to connect through the mongo shell:
mongo --ssl --sslCAFile /etc/ssl/ca.pem example.net:27017
Then you would set:
sslTrustedServerCertificates=/etc/ssl/ca.pem
By default, to connect to MongoDB instances using SSL requires a valid trusted certificate.
For testing purposes, however, you can set the sslRequireValidServerCertificates setting to false to
bypass this check. When sslRequireValidServerCertificates is false, you do not need to specify the
path to the trusted CA certificate in the sslTrustedServerCertificates setting, since Ops Manager will not
verify the certificates. This configuration is not recommended for production use as it makes connections susceptible
to man-in-the-middle attacks.
For additional information on these settings, including client certificate support, see MongoDB SSL Settings.
Step 2: Restart agent.
Note: For additional information on SSL settings, including client certificate support, see MongoDB SSL Settings.
386
Connections between Agents and Ops Manager
To ensure that the Monitoring Agents use SSL when connecting to Ops Manager, Configure Ops Manager to use SSL
for all connections. The Configure SSL Connections to Ops Manager tutorial describes how to set up Ops Manager to
run over HTTPS.
Starting with Ops Manager 1.4, the Monitoring Agent validates the SSL certificate of the Ops Manager by default.
If you are not using a certificate signed by a trusted 3rd party, you must configure the Monitoring Agent to trust Ops
Manager.
To specify a self-signed certificate for Ops Manager that the Monitoring Agent should trust:
Step 1: Copy your PEM certificate to /etc/mongodb-mms/.
Issue the following sequence of commands:
sudo cp -a mms-ssl-unified.crt /etc/mongodb-mms/
sudo chown mongodb-mms-agent:mongodb-mms-agent /etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-unified.crt
sudo chmod 600 /etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-unified.crt
Step 2: Edit the following parameter in /etc/mongodb-mms/monitoring-agent.config.
For example:
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate=/etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-unified.crt
Step 3: Restart the Monitoring Agent for the configuration update to take effect.
For example:
sudo /etc/init.d/mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent restart
Configure Hardware Monitoring with munin-node
On this page
•Overview
•Install the munin-node Package
•Configure munin-node
•Additional Considerations for munin-node
Overview
To chart the hardware statistics collected with Munin, Ops Manager supports the following munin-node plugins:
•cpu plugin, which creates the cputime chart.
387
•iostat plugin, which creates the iostat chart.
•iostat_ios plugin, which creates the iotime chart.
Install the munin-node Package
You must install the munin-node package on all of the host systems that you wish to monitor. Ensure that the
Monitoring Agent can connect to the munin-node process on port 4949 of the monitored host to collect data.
Note: munin-node and hardware monitoring is only available for MongoDB instances running on Linux hosts.
On Debian and Ubuntu systems, issue the following command to install munin-node:
sudo apt-get install munin-node
On Red Hat, CentOS, and Fedora systems, you may need to first install the EPEL repository before installing
munin-node. See https://fedoraproject.org/wiki/EPEL. To install munin-node issue the following command:
yum install munin-node
Configure munin-node
When installation is complete, ensure that munin-node:
• is running. Use the command, “ps -ef | grep "munin"” to confirm. If the process is not running, issue
the command “/etc/init.d/munin-node start”.
• will start following the next system reboot. This is the default behavior on most Debian-based systems. Red Hat
and related distributions should use the “chkconfig” command, to configure this behavior (i.e. “chkconfig
munin-node on”)
• is accessible from the system running the agent. munin-node uses port 4949, which needs to be open on the
monitored system, so the agent can access this data source. Use the following procedure to test access:
telnet [HOSTNAME]4949
fetch iostat
fetch iostat_ios
fetch cpu
Replace [HOSTNAME] with the hostname of the monitored system. Run these commands from the system
where the Monitoring Agent is running. If these “fetch” commands return data, then munin-node is running
and accessible by the Monitoring Agent.
Note: On some platforms, munin-node does not have all required plugins enabled.
For CentOS and Ubuntu, the munin-node package does not have the iostat and iostat_ios plugins enabled.
Use the following operation to enable these plugins:
sudo ln -s /usr/share/munin/plugins/iostat /etc/munin/plugins/iostat
sudo ln -s /usr/share/munin/plugins/iostat_ios /etc/munin/plugins/iostat_ios
sudo /etc/init.d/munin-node restart
388
If munin-node is running but inaccessible, make sure that you have access granted for the system running the
Monitoring Agent and that no firewalls block the port between munin-node and the Monitoring Agent. You may find
the munin-node configuration at /etc/munin-node/munin-node.conf,/etc/munin/munin-node.
conf, or /etc/munin-node.conf, depending on your distribution.
Additional Considerations for munin-node
• If you have numbered disk devices (e.g. /dev/sda1 and /dev/sda2) then you will need to configure support
for numbered disk in the munin iostat plugin. Find the configuration file at /etc/munin/plugin-conf.
d/munin-node or a similar path, and add the following value:
[iostat]
env.SHOW_NUMBERED 1
• If you have Munin enabled and do not have iostat ios data in your Munin charts, your munin-node may
not have write access to required state files in its munin/plugin-state/ directory. See the munin-node
plugin log (i.e. /var/log/munin/munin-node.log or similar depending on your distribution) for more
information.
The full path of this state directory depends on the system, but is typically /var/lib/munin/
plugin-state/.
Run the following command sequence to correct this issue. The last command in the sequence changes per-
missions for the /var/lib/munin/plugin-state/ directory to ensure access for the munin-node
plugins. Depending on your setup, you might have to use a different permission level:
touch /var/lib/munin/plugin-state/iostat-ios.state
chown -R [username]:[group]/var/lib/munin/plugin-state/
chmod -R 766 /var/lib/munin/plugin-state/
Replace [username] and [group] with the username and group that the munin-node process runs with.
• Add the host running the Monitoring Agent to the allow directive in the munin-node.conf file. The allow
directive lists hosts allowed to query the munin-node process. Otherwise, traffic from the Ops Manager host
will be allowed via firewall but will not be collected by munin.
The munin-node.conf file is located in one of the following directories, depending on your distribution:
/etc/munin-node,/etc/munin, or /etc.
If you encounter any other problems, check the log files for munin-node to ensure that there are no errors with
Munin. munin-node writes logs files in the /var/log/ directory on the monitored system.
See also:
Munin Diagnostics.
Start or Stop the Monitoring Agent
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
389
Overview
For maintenance or troubleshooting purposes, you may want to temporarily shut down or restart Ops Manager’s
Monitoring Agent. However, for proper operation of Ops Manager your Ops Manager group must have at least one
Monitoring Agent running. The group needs only one Monitoring Agent running.
Procedures
Start the Monitoring Agent
The procedure to Install the Monitoring Agent includes a step to start the agent. If you must restart the agent, use the
following procedure.
Start an Agent Installed with an rpm Package
If you installed the Monitoring Agent using an rpm package, such as on RHEL, CentOS, or SUSE, issue the following
command to start the agent:
sudo service mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent start
Start an Agent Installed with a deb Package
If you installed the Monitoring Agent using a deb package, as on Ubuntu, issue the following command to start the
agent:
sudo start mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Start an Agent Installed with a tar File
Use this command if you installed to Linux or OSX using a tar file. Issue the following command from the directory
to which you installed the Monitoring Agent:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent- >> monitoring-agent.log 2>&1 &
Start the Monitoring Agent on Windows
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services. In the list of services,
select MMS Monitoring Agent. Select the Action menu and select Start.
Stop the Monitoring Agent
You must have at least one Monitoring Agent running to monitor your deployment.
390
Stop an Agent Installed with an rpm Package
If you installed the Monitoring Agent using an rpm package, such as on RHEL, CentOS, or SUSE, issue the following
command to stop the agent:
sudo service mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent stop
Stop an Agent Installed with a deb Package
If you installed the Monitoring Agent using a deb package, as on Ubuntu, issue the following command to stop the
agent:
sudo stop mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Stop an Agent Installed with a tar File
If you installed to Linux or OSX using a tar file, issue the following command to stop the Monitoring Agent:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent
Stop the Monitoring Agent on Windows
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services. In the list of services,
select MMS Monitoring Agent. Select the Action menu and select Stop.
Remove Monitoring Agents from Ops Manager
On this page
•Remove from Ops Manager
•Delete from the Server
Ops Manager displays active Monitoring Agents on the Agents page in the Administration tab. The page displays
agents that have been active in the last 24 hours. If an agent fails to report to Ops Manager for more than 24 hours,
Ops Manager removes the agent from the Agents page.
Remove from Ops Manager
To remove a Monitoring Agent from Ops Manager, stop the agent and then wait 24 hours.
Delete from the Server
To delete the Monitoring Agent from a Linux or OSX server,stop the agent and then remove the
mongodb-mms-monitoring-agent file from the /usr/bin directory. If you installed the agent using a tar.
gz file, the agent will be in the directory you chose during installation.
391
To delete the Monitoring Agent from a Windows server,stop the agent and then use the Windows program uninstaller
to remove the MMS Monitoring Agent program.
12.4 Backup Agent
Install or Update the Agent Procedures for installing and updating the Backup Agent.
Backup Agent Configuration Documentation of the settings available in the Backup Agent configuration file.
Required Access for Backup Agent Details the permissions required for Backup Agent to use with MongoDB in-
stances that enforce access control.
Configure the Agent for Access Control If MongoDB uses Access Control, create a MongoDB user for the Backup
Agent to use to authenticate and to determine the agent’s access.
Configure the Agent for SSL Configure the Backup Agent to support SSL.
Start or Stop the Agent Procedures to start and stop the Backup Agent.
Remove the Agent Remove the Backup Agent.
Install Backup Agent
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Install with RPM Packages Install and start the Backup Agent using an rpm package.
Install on Ubuntu Install and start the Backup Agent on Ubuntu using a deb package.
Install on Other Linux Systems Install and start the Backup Agent on other Linux systems using the tar.gz archive
packages.
Install on OS X Install and start the Backup Agent on OS X.
Install on Windows Install and start the Backup Agent on Windows.
Install or Update the Backup Agent with rpm Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Next Steps
•Additional Information
392
Overview
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Considerations
MongoDB Requirements
Ops Manager only supports backing up replica sets and sharded cluster, and does not support backing up standalone
instances.
Ops Manager only supports backup for replica sets that run MongoDB 2.0 or later.
Ops Manager only supports backup for sharded clusters that run MongoDB 2.4 or later.
All backed up replica sets and config servers must be able to maintain oplog entries, by default, for at least 3 hours over
the last 24 hour period. This window is configurable with the brs.minimumReplicationOplogWindowHr
setting in the conf-mms.properties file for the Ops Manager Application. See Ops Manager Configuration
Files for more information.
Agent Architecture
To avoid resource contention, run the agent on a host other than the hosts where the MongoDB instances are running.
Be sure the agent can access the MongoDB hosts.
Running on Amazon EC2
If you run the Backup Agent on Amazon EC2, do not use the t1.micro instance type, which has a CPU scheduling
policy that does not typically provide sufficient capacity to support a Backup Agent for a production deployment. Use
a larger instance type instead.
Prerequisites
Monitoring Agent
Install and configure the Monitoring, as described in the Monitoring Agent documentation.
Firewall
If your MongoDB instances operate within a firewall, configure your network infrastructure to allow outbound con-
nections on port 443 (SSL) to api-backup.mongodb.com.
393
Access Control
If you use Backup with a MongoDB deployment that uses authentication, before installing the Backup Agent, you
must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. See Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
Backup Directory
After you install the Backup Agent, do not use the agent’s directory location for anything other than the agent itself.
The Backup Agent periodically deletes the contents of its root directory.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for both installing and updating the Backup Agent on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Ama-
zon Linux, and other systems that use rpm packages.
Install the Backup Agent with an rpm Package
Use this procedure to install the agent on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Amazon Linux, and other systems that use rpm
packages.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent package.
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent package.
Issue the following command:
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 3: Retrieve the API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agent page, click the box for your operating system. Ops Manager will then display
a procedure that includes a step to set your API key. The step displays the actual API key used by your Ops Manager
group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Configure the backup-agent.config file with the API key.
In the /etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API key.
394
Step 5: Optional: For SUSE 11+ deployments only, configure the
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate property.
If you are deploying on SUSE, you must configure the sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate setting. All other
users should omit this step.
Enter the following property and value in the /etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.config file:
sslTrustedMMSServerCertificate=/etc/ssl/certs/UTN_USERFirst_Hardware_Root_CA.pem
Save and close the file.
Step 6: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-agent start
Update the Backup Agent with an rpm Package
Use this procedure to update the agent on RHEL, CentOS, SUSE, Amazon Linux, and other systems that use rpm
packages.
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent package.
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent package.
Issue the following command:
sudo rpm -U mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.x86_64.rpm
Step 3: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-agent start
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed the Backup Agent, see Activate Backup to enable backup for a replica set.
395
Additional Information
The README included with the downloaded package also provides information about the Backup Agent.
For details about backup operations, see Backup FAQs.
Install or Update the Backup Agent with deb Packages
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Next Steps
•Additional Information
Overview
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Considerations
MongoDB Requirements
Ops Manager only supports backing up replica sets and sharded cluster, and does not support backing up standalone
instances.
Ops Manager only supports backup for replica sets that run MongoDB 2.0 or later.
Ops Manager only supports backup for sharded clusters that run MongoDB 2.4 or later.
All backed up replica sets and config servers must be able to maintain oplog entries, by default, for at least 3 hours over
the last 24 hour period. This window is configurable with the brs.minimumReplicationOplogWindowHr
setting in the conf-mms.properties file for the Ops Manager Application. See Ops Manager Configuration
Files for more information.
Agent Architecture
To avoid resource contention, run the agent on a host other than the hosts where the MongoDB instances are running.
Be sure the agent can access the MongoDB hosts.
396
Running on Amazon EC2
If you run the Backup Agent on Amazon EC2, do not use the t1.micro instance type, which has a CPU scheduling
policy that does not typically provide sufficient capacity to support a Backup Agent for a production deployment. Use
a larger instance type instead.
Prerequisites
Monitoring Agent
Install and configure the Monitoring, as described in the Monitoring Agent documentation.
Firewall
If your MongoDB instances operate within a firewall, configure your network infrastructure to allow outbound con-
nections on port 443 (SSL) to api-backup.mongodb.com.
Access Control
If you use Backup with a MongoDB deployment that uses authentication, before installing the Backup Agent, you
must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. See Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
Backup Directory
After you install the Backup Agent, do not use the agent’s directory location for anything other than the agent itself.
The Backup Agent periodically deletes the contents of its root directory.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for installing and updating the Backup Agent on Ubuntu with deb packages. For
Debian systems, use the Install or Update the Backup Agent from an Archive procedure.
Install the Backup Agent with a deb Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent package.
From a system shell, issue the following command, where <mmsUri> is the URI of your Ops Manager installation
(for example, onprem.example.net):
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent package.
Issue the following command:
397
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-backup-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Configure the backup-agent.config file with the API key.
In the /etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.config file, set the mmsApiKey property to your API key.
Step 5: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
sudo start mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Update the Backup Agent with a deb Package
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent package.
From a system shell, issue the following command, where <mmsUri> is the URI of your Ops Manager installation
(for example, onprem.example.net):
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 2: If your current Backup Agent has a version number earlier that 2.0, purge the existing agent.
Perform this step only if your current agent’s version is earlier than 2.0. To purge the existing Backup Agent, issue the
following command:
sudo dpkg -P mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Step 3: Install the Backup Agent package.
Issue the following command:
sudo dpkg -i mongodb-mms-backup-agent_latest_amd64.deb
Step 4: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
398
sudo start mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed the Backup Agent, see Activate Backup to enable backup for a replica set.
Additional Information
The README included with the downloaded package also provides information about the Backup Agent.
For details about backup operations, see Backup FAQs.
Install or Update the Backup Agent from an Archive
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Next Steps
•Additional Information
Overview
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Considerations
MongoDB Requirements
Ops Manager only supports backing up replica sets and sharded cluster, and does not support backing up standalone
instances.
Ops Manager only supports backup for replica sets that run MongoDB 2.0 or later.
Ops Manager only supports backup for sharded clusters that run MongoDB 2.4 or later.
All backed up replica sets and config servers must be able to maintain oplog entries, by default, for at least 3 hours over
the last 24 hour period. This window is configurable with the brs.minimumReplicationOplogWindowHr
399
setting in the conf-mms.properties file for the Ops Manager Application. See Ops Manager Configuration
Files for more information.
Agent Architecture
To avoid resource contention, run the agent on a host other than the hosts where the MongoDB instances are running.
Be sure the agent can access the MongoDB hosts.
Running on Amazon EC2
If you run the Backup Agent on Amazon EC2, do not use the t1.micro instance type, which has a CPU scheduling
policy that does not typically provide sufficient capacity to support a Backup Agent for a production deployment. Use
a larger instance type instead.
Prerequisites
Monitoring Agent
Install and configure the Monitoring, as described in the Monitoring Agent documentation.
Firewall
If your MongoDB instances operate within a firewall, configure your network infrastructure to allow outbound con-
nections on port 443 (SSL) to api-backup.mongodb.com.
Access Control
If you use Backup with a MongoDB deployment that uses authentication, before installing the Backup Agent, you
must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. See Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
Backup Directory
After you install the Backup Agent, do not use the agent’s directory location for anything other than the agent itself.
The Backup Agent periodically deletes the contents of its root directory.
Procedures
This section includes procedures for installing and updating the Backup Agent on a Linux system not listed in the
Agent Downloads list on the Agents page in the Administration tab.
Install the Backup Agent from a tar.gz Archive
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed: depending on your operating system:
400
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.
˓→tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Backup Agent is installed.
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
Step 5: Optional: Configure the agent to use a proxy server.
If the agent will connect to Ops Manager via a proxy server, you must specify the server in the http_proxy envi-
ronment variable. To specify the server, use the export command, as in the following example:
export http_proxy="http://proxy.example.com:9000"
To connect through a proxy, you must install the agent from a .tar.gz file, not from a .deb or .rpm file.
Step 6: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-backup-agent >> backup-agent.log 2>&1&
Update the Backup Agent from a tar.gz Archive
Step 1: Stop any currently running Backup Agents.
Issue the following command with the system shell:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-backup-agent
401
Step 2: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed: depending on your operating system:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.
˓→tar.gz
Step 3: Install the Backup Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.linux_x86_64.tar.gz
The Backup Agent is installed.
Step 4: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 5: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
Step 6: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-backup-agent >> backup-agent.log 2>&1&
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed the Backup Agent, see Activate Backup to enable backup for a replica set.
Additional Information
If you installed the Backup Agent from the tar.gz archives, see /tutorial/rotate-agent-log-files to configure log
rotation.
The README included with the downloaded package also provides information about the Backup Agent.
For details about backup operations, see Backup FAQs.
402
Install or Update the Backup Agent on OS X
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
•Next Steps
•Additional Information
Overview
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Considerations
MongoDB Requirements
Ops Manager only supports backing up replica sets and sharded cluster, and does not support backing up standalone
instances.
Ops Manager only supports backup for replica sets that run MongoDB 2.0 or later.
Ops Manager only supports backup for sharded clusters that run MongoDB 2.4 or later.
All backed up replica sets and config servers must be able to maintain oplog entries, by default, for at least 3 hours over
the last 24 hour period. This window is configurable with the brs.minimumReplicationOplogWindowHr
setting in the conf-mms.properties file for the Ops Manager Application. See Ops Manager Configuration
Files for more information.
Agent Architecture
To avoid resource contention, run the agent on a host other than the hosts where the MongoDB instances are running.
Be sure the agent can access the MongoDB hosts.
Running on Amazon EC2
If you run the Backup Agent on Amazon EC2, do not use the t1.micro instance type, which has a CPU scheduling
policy that does not typically provide sufficient capacity to support a Backup Agent for a production deployment. Use
a larger instance type instead.
403
Prerequisites
Monitoring Agent
Install and configure the Monitoring, as described in the Monitoring Agent documentation.
Firewall
If your MongoDB instances operate within a firewall, configure your network infrastructure to allow outbound con-
nections on port 443 (SSL) to api-backup.mongodb.com.
Access Control
If you use Backup with a MongoDB deployment that uses authentication, before installing the Backup Agent, you
must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. See Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
Backup Directory
After you install the Backup Agent, do not use the agent’s directory location for anything other than the agent itself.
The Backup Agent periodically deletes the contents of its root directory.
Procedures
Install the Backup Agent On OS X
Use the following procedure to install the agent on OS X:
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed: depending on your operating system:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.
˓→tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Backup Agent is installed.
404
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
Step 5: Optional: Configure the agent to use a proxy server.
If the agent will connect to Ops Manager via a proxy server, you must specify the server in the http_proxy envi-
ronment variable. To specify the server, use the export command, as in the following example:
export http_proxy="http://proxy.example.com:9000"
To connect through a proxy, you must install the agent from a .tar.gz file, not from a .deb or .rpm file.
Step 6: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-backup-agent >> backup-agent.log 2>&1&
Update the Backup Agent
Use the following procedure to update the agent on OS X:
Step 1: Download the latest version of the Backup Agent archive.
On a system shell, issue a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64 with your platform, as
needed: depending on your operating system:
curl -OL <mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.
˓→tar.gz
Step 2: Install the Backup Agent.
To install the agent, extract the archive using a command that resembles the following. Replace linux_x86_64
with your platform, as needed:
tar -xf mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.osx_x86_64.tar.gz
The Backup Agent is installed.
405
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
Step 5: Optional: Configure the agent to use a proxy server.
If the agent will connect to Ops Manager via a proxy server, you must specify the server in the http_proxy envi-
ronment variable. To specify the server, use the export command, as in the following example:
export http_proxy="http://proxy.example.com:9000"
To connect through a proxy, you must install the agent from a .tar.gz file, not from a .deb or .rpm file.
Step 6: Start the Backup Agent.
Issue the following command:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-backup-agent >> backup-agent.log 2>&1&
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed the Backup Agent, see Activate Backup to enable backup for a replica set.
Additional Information
The README included with the downloaded package also provides information about the Backup Agent.
For details about backup operations, see Backup FAQs.
Install or Update the Backup Agent on Windows
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Procedures
406
•Next Steps
•Additional Information
Overview
The Backup Agent polls the primary MongoDB instance of every backup-enabled replica set and transmits the opera-
tions to the Ops Manager service.
The Backup Agent relies on the Ops Manager Monitoring Agent to populate the list of sharded clusters and replica
sets eligible for backup. If the appropriate hosts are not added, or the Monitoring Agent is not being correctly run, the
lists may be incomplete or out-of-date. If you have not already installed and configured Monitoring, please refer to the
Install Monitoring Agent documentation.
Considerations
MongoDB Requirements
Ops Manager only supports backing up replica sets and sharded cluster, and does not support backing up standalone
instances.
Ops Manager only supports backup for replica sets that run MongoDB 2.0 or later.
Ops Manager only supports backup for sharded clusters that run MongoDB 2.4 or later.
All backed up replica sets and config servers must be able to maintain oplog entries, by default, for at least 3 hours over
the last 24 hour period. This window is configurable with the brs.minimumReplicationOplogWindowHr
setting in the conf-mms.properties file for the Ops Manager Application. See Ops Manager Configuration
Files for more information.
Agent Architecture
To avoid resource contention, run the agent on a host other than the hosts where the MongoDB instances are running.
Be sure the agent can access the MongoDB hosts.
Running on Amazon EC2
If you run the Backup Agent on Amazon EC2, do not use the t1.micro instance type, which has a CPU scheduling
policy that does not typically provide sufficient capacity to support a Backup Agent for a production deployment. Use
a larger instance type instead.
Prerequisites
Monitoring Agent
Install and configure the Monitoring, as described in the Monitoring Agent documentation.
407
Firewall
If your MongoDB instances operate within a firewall, configure your network infrastructure to allow outbound con-
nections on port 443 (SSL) to api-backup.mongodb.com.
Access Control
If you use Backup with a MongoDB deployment that uses authentication, before installing the Backup Agent, you
must create a user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. See Configure Backup Agent for Access Control.
Backup Directory
After you install the Backup Agent, do not use the agent’s directory location for anything other than the agent itself.
The Backup Agent periodically deletes the contents of its root directory.
Procedures
Install the Backup Agent On Windows
Step 1: Download and run the latest version of the Backup Agent MSI file.
To download the 64-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mmsUri> is the hostname of the Backup server:
<mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.windows_x86_64.msi
To download the 32-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mmsUri> is the hostname of the Backup server:
<mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.windows_i386.msi
During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for storing configuration and log files. It is strongly
advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
Step 2: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 3: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include the hostname of the Backup server.
In the Backup Agent installation directory, open the local.config file and set the mothership property to
hostname of the Backup server.
408
Step 5: Start the Backup Agent.
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Services.
In the list of services, select the MMS Backup Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Start.
Update the Backup Agent on Windows
Step 1: Stop all currently running Backup Agents.
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services. In the list of services,
select MMS Backup Agent. Select the Action menu and select Stop.
If you receive a message that your Backup Agent is out of date, make sure you are running an upgradeable version of
the Backup Agent. If you are running the version of the Backup Agent named MongoDBBackup, you must remove it
before upgrading. To check if you are running MongoDBBackup, issue the following command in an Administrative
command prompt:
sc query MongoDBBackup
If the command returns a result, you must remove the MongoDBBackup agent. To remove it, issue the following:
sc delete MongoDBBackup
Step 2: Download and run the latest version of the Backup Agent MSI file.
To download the 64-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mmsUri> is the hostname of the Backup server:
<mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.windows_x86_64.msi
To download the 32-bit MSI file, use the following URL, where <mmsUri> is the hostname of the Backup server:
<mmsUri>/download/agent/backup/mongodb-mms-backup-agent-latest.windows_i386.msi
During installation, the installer prompts you to specify the folder for storing configuration and log files. It is strongly
advised that you encrypt or restrict access to this folder.
Step 3: Retrieve the Ops Manager API key for your Ops Manager group.
In the Administration tab on the Agents page, select your the approriate link for the Backup agent and your operating
system. Ops Manager will then display a procedure that includes a step to set your Ops Manager API key. The step
displays the actual Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group. Copy the key.
Step 4: Edit the local.config file to include your Ops Manager API key.
In the directory where you installed the Backup Agent, locate and open the local.config file. Enter your API key
as the value for the mmsApiKey setting.
409
Step 5: Start the Backup Agent.
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Services.
In the list of services, select the MMS Backup Agent service. Select the Action menu and select Start.
Next Steps
After you have successfully installed the Backup Agent, see Activate Backup to enable backup for a replica set.
Additional Information
The README included with the downloaded package also provides information about the Backup Agent.
For details about Backup operations, see Backup FAQs.
Backup Agent Configuration
On this page
•Configuration File
•Settings
Warning: Do not edit these settings for a Backup Agent that is managed by an Automation Agent. If you do, the
Automation Agent will overwrite any changes you make.
Configuration File
The name and location of the Backup Agent configuration file depend on the operating system:
• RHEL, CentOS, Amazon Linux, and Ubuntu all use a package manager to install the agent. The package
manager creates the following agent configuration file:
/etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.config
• OS X, Windows, and other Linux systems use either a tar or msi file for the installation. The Backup Agent
stores its configuration in the following file:
<installation directory>/local.config
Settings
Connection Settings
For the Backup Agent communication with the Ops Manager servers, the following connection settings are required:
410
mmsApiKey
Type: string
The Ops Manager agent API key for a Ops Manager group. To retrieve the key from the Ops Manager interface,
click the Administration tab, then the Agents page, and then the link for your operating system. Ops Manager
will display the Ops Manager API key used by your Ops Manager group.
For example:
mmsApiKey=abc123
mothership
Type: string
The hostname of the Ops Manager Backup Web Server.
https
Type: boolean
Toggles communication with the Ops Manager Backup web server over HTTPS.
HTTP Proxy Settings
httpProxy
New in version 1.4.4.34-1.
Type: string
To connect to the Ops Manager HTTP Service via a proxy, specify the URL of the proxy. For example:
httpProxy=http://example-proxy.com:8080
MongoDB SSL Settings
Specify these settings when the Backup Agent is connecting to MongoDB instances with SSL.
sslClientCertificate
Type: string
The path to the private key, client certificate, and optional intermediate certificates in PEM format. The agent will
use the client certificate when connecting to a MongoDB instance that uses SSL and requires client certificates,
i.e. that is running using the --sslCAFile option.
sslClientCertificatePassword
Type: string
The password needed to decrypt the private key in the sslClientCertificate file. This setting is only necessary if
the client certificate PEM file is encrypted.
sslTrustedServerCertificates
Type: string
The path on disk that contains the trusted certificate authority certificates in PEM format. These certificates will
verify the server certificate returned from any MongoDBs running with SSL. For example:
sslTrustedServerCertificates=/etc/mongodb-mms/mongodb-certs.pem
411
sslRequireValidServerCertificates
Type: boolean
Use this option to disable certificate verification by setting this value to false. That configuration is only
recommended for testing purposes as it makes connections susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
MongoDB Kerberos Settings
Specify these settings if the Backup Agent authenticates to hosts using Kerberos. For more information, see Configure
the Backup Agent for Kerberos.
krb5Principal
Type: string
The Kerberos principal used by the agent. For example:
krb5Principal=mmsagent/myhost@EXAMPLE.COM
krb5Keytab
Type: string
The absolute path to Kerberos principal’s keytab file. For example:
krb5Keytab=/etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.keytab
gsappiServiceName
Type: string
The default service name used by MongoDB is mongodb can specify a custom service name with the
gssapiServiceName option.
Ops Manager Server SSL Settings
Advanced SSL settings used by the Backup Agent when communicating to the Ops Manager Backup Web Server.
sslTrustedMMSBackupServerCertificate
By default the Backup Agent will use the trusted root CAs installed on the system. If the agent cannot find the
trusted root CAs, configure these settings manually.
If the Ops Manager Backup Server is using a self-signed SSL certificate this setting is required.
The path on disk that contains the trusted certificate authority certificates in PEM format. The agent will use
this certificate to verify that the agent is communicating with the designated Ops Manager Backup Server. For
example:
sslTrustedMMSBackupServerCertificate=/etc/mongodb-mms/mms-certs.pem
sslRequireValidMMSBackupServerCertificate
Type: boolean
You can disable certificate verification by setting this value to false. That configuration is only recommended
for testing purposes as it makes connections susceptible to man-in-the-middle attacks.
Required Access for Backup Agent
412
On this page
•Considerations
•MongoDB 2.6
•MongoDB 2.4
•Authentication Mechanisms
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Ops Manager Backup Agent must authenticate to Mon-
goDB as a user with the proper access. To authenticate, create a user with the appropriate roles in MongoDB. The
following tutorials include instructions and examples for creating the MongoDB user:
•Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR.
•Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication.
•Configure the Backup Agent for Kerberos.
MongoDB user roles are separate from Ops Manager user roles.
Considerations
To authenticate to sharded clusters, create shard-local users on each shard and create cluster-wide users:
• Create cluster users while connected to the mongos; these credentials persist to the config servers.
• Create shard-local users by connecting directly to the replica set for each shard.
MongoDB 3.0 and Later
To backup MongoDB instances running 3.0 and later, the Backup Agent must authenticate as a user with the following
role:
Required Role
backup role on the admin database
MongoDB 2.6
To backup MongoDB 2.6 release series instances, the Backup Agent must be able to authenticate to with the following
roles:
Required Role
clusterAdmin role on the admin database
readAnyDatabase role on the admin database
userAdminAnyDatabase role on the admin database
readWrite role on the admin database
readWrite role on the local database
413
MongoDB 2.4
To backup MongoDB 2.4 release series instances, the Backup Agent must be able to authenticate to the database with
a user that has specified roles and otherDBRoles. Specifically, the user must have the following roles:
Required Role
clusterAdmin role on the admin database
readAnyDatabase role on the admin database
userAdminAnyDatabase role on the admin database
And the following otherDBRoles:
Required Role
readWrite role on the local database
readWrite role on the admin database
readWrite role on the config database
Authentication Mechanisms
To authenticate, create the user in MongoDB with the appropriate access. The authentication method that the Mon-
goDB deployment uses determines how to create the user as well as determine any additional agent configuration:
• For MONGODB-CR (MongoDB Challenge-Response) authentication, see Configure Backup Agent for
MONGODB-CR.
• For LDAP authentication, see Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication.
• For Kerberos authentication, see Configure the Backup Agent for Kerberos.
Configure Backup Agent for Access Control
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Backup Agent must authenticate to MongoDB as a user
with the proper access.
Configure for MONGODB-CR Procedure to configure the Backup Agent for MongoDB deployments using
MONGODB-CR authentication.
Configure for LDAP Procedure to configure the Backup Agent for MongoDB deployments using LDAP authentica-
tion.
Configure for Kerberos Procedure to configure the Backup Agent for MongoDB deployments using Kerberos au-
thentication.
Configure Backup Agent for MONGODB-CR
On this page
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•3.0 and Later
414
•MongoDB 2.6
•MongoDB 2.4
•Host Settings
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Ops Manager Backup Agent must authenticate to Mon-
goDB as a user with the proper access.
To authenticate using MONGODB-CR, create a user in the admin database with the appropriate roles in MongoDB.
MongoDB user roles are separate from Ops Manager user roles and are described in the MongoDB manual beginning
with the Authorization page.
Considerations
To authenticate to sharded clusters, create shard-local users on each shard and create cluster-wide users:
• Create cluster users while connected to the mongos; these credentials persist to the config servers.
• Create shard-local users by connecting directly to the replica set for each shard.
Prerequisites
Connect to the mongod or mongos instance as a user with access to create users in the database. See db.createUser()
method page for more information.
3.0 and Later
To backup MongoDB instances running 3.0 and later, create a user in the admin database with an operation that
resembles the following:
use admin
db.createUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[ { role:"backup", db:"admin" } ]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 3.0 for more information on the required access.
MongoDB 2.6
To backup MongoDB 2.6 release series instances, create a user in the admin database with an operation that resembles
the following:
use admin
db.createUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[
415
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase",
"userAdminAnyDatabase",
{ role:"readWrite", db:"admin" },
{ role:"readWrite", db:"local" },
]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access.
MongoDB 2.4
To backup MongoDB 2.4 release series instances, create a user in the admin database with an operation that resembles
the following:
use admin
db.addUser(
{
user:"<username>",
pwd:"<password>",
roles:[
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase",
"userAdminAnyDatabase"
],
otherDBRoles:{
local:[’readWrite’],
admin:[’readWrite’],
config:[’readWrite’]
}
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.4 for more information on the required access.
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure Backup Agent for LDAP Authentication
On this page
•Overview
•Considerations
•Prerequisites
•Create User in MongoDB
416
•Host Settings
Overview
If your MongoDB deployment enforces access control, the Backup Agent must authenticate to MongoDB as a user
with the proper access.
Starting in version 2.6, MongoDB Enterprise provides an LDAP (plain) authentication mechanism that allows clients
to authenticate to MongoDB deployments using LDAP. Backup Agents support authenticating to MongoDB instances
using LDAP.
If your MongoDB deployment uses LDAP to authenticate users, to authenticate the Backup Agent, create a user in the
$external database with the appropriate roles in MongoDB.
Considerations
You must configure LDAP authentication separately for the Backup Agent and for the Monitoring Agent.
You can configure LDAP authentication when activating backup or later by editing the backup configuration.
Prerequisites
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Backup when using MongoDB 2.4
with authentication. See Required Access for Backup Agent for more information.
Create User in MongoDB
To monitor MongoDB 2.6 instances that are using LDAP authentication, add a user to the $external database in
MongoDB with the appropriate roles. The $external database allows mongod to consult an external source (e.g.
LDAP) to authenticate.
MongoDB 3.0 or later
db.getSiblingDB("$external").createUser(
{
user :"<username>",
roles:[ { role:"backup", db:"admin" } ]
}
)
MongoDB 2.6
db.getSiblingDB("$external").createUser(
{
user:"<username>",
roles:[
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase",
417
"userAdminAnyDatabase",
{ role:"readWrite", db:"admin" },
{ role:"readWrite", db:"local" },
]
}
)
See Access Control for MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access.
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure the Backup Agent for Kerberos
On this page
•Prerequisites
•Create Kerberos Principal
•Create MongoDB User for the Principal
•Edit Agent Configuration File
•Host Settings
•Configure Kerberos Environment
MongoDB Enterprise provides support for Kerberos. Kerberos is a generic authentication protocol available starting
from MongoDB Enterprise version 2.6. The Backup Agent can authenticate to hosts using Kerberos.
Warning: You must install the prerequisite packages on your servers before deploying MongoDB Enterprise on
the servers.
You can use Ops Manager for Monitoring and Backup with Kerberos, but you cannot currently use Automation
with Kerberos. Automation will support these features in the next major Ops Manager release.
Prerequisites
You must configure the Kerberos Key Distribution Center (KDC) to grant tickets that are valid for at least four hours.
The Backup Agent takes care of periodically renewing the ticket. The KDC service provides session tickets and
temporary session keys to users and computers.
There are additional authentication configuration requirements for Ops Manager Backup when using MongoDB 2.4
with authentication. See Required Access for Backup Agent for more information.
418
Create Kerberos Principal
If you are running both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent on the same server, then both agents must connect
as the same Kerberos Principal.
Step 1: Create or choose a Kerberos principal.
Create or choose a Kerberos principal for the Monitoring and/or Backup agent.
Step 2: Generate a keytab for the Kerberos principal.
Generate a keytab for the Kerberos principal and copy it to the system where the agent runs. Ensure the user that will
run the agent is the same user that owns the keytab file.
Create MongoDB User for the Principal
If you are running both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent on the same server, then both agents must connect
as the same Kerberos Principal.
Kerberos Principal for the Backup Agent
Add a Kerberos principal, <username>@<KERBEROS REALM> or <username>/<instance>@<KERBEROS
REALM>, to MongoDB in the $external database. Specify the Kerberos realm in all uppercase. The $external
database allows mongod to consult an external source (e.g. Kerberos) to authenticate.
MongoDB 3.0 or Later
For MongoDB 3.0 or later, to add the principal for just the Backup Agent, use an operation that resembles the follow-
ing:
use $external
db.createUser(
{
user:"<Kerberos Principal>",
roles:[
{ role:"backup", db:"admin" }
]
}
)
See MongoDB 3.0 and Later for more information on the required access for the Backup Agent.
MongoDB 2.6
For the MongoDB 2.6 release series, to add the principal for just the Backup Agent, use an operation that resembles
the following:
419
use $external
db.createUser(
{
user:"<Kerberos Principal>",
roles:[
"clusterAdmin",
"readAnyDatabase",
"userAdminAnyDatabase",
{ role:"readWrite", db:"admin" },
{ role:"readWrite", db:"local" },
]
}
)
See MongoDB 2.6 for more information on the required access for the Backup Agent.
Kerberos Principal for the Monitoring Agent and Backup Agent
Add a Kerberos principal, <username>@<KERBEROS REALM> or <username>/<instance>@<KERBEROS
REALM>, to MongoDB in the $external database. Specify the Kerberos realm in all uppercase. The $external
database allows mongod to consult an external source (e.g. Kerberos) to authenticate.
For example, to add the same principal for both the Monitoring Agent and the Backup Agent, specify required access
for both agents. The following example specifies access required to connect to MongoDB 3.0 or greater.
use $external
db.createUser(
{
user:"<Kerberos Principal>",
roles:[
{ role:"clusterMonitor", db:"admin" },
{ role:"backup", db:"admin" }
]
}
)
See MongoDB 2.6 and MongoDB 3.0 and Later for more information on the required access for the Monitoring Agent
and the Backup Agent.
Edit Agent Configuration File
Edit the /etc/mongodb-mms/backup-agent.config file.
Step 1: Set the krb5Principal
Set the krb5Principal to the name of the Kerberos principal. For example:
krb5Principal=mmsagent/instance@EXAMPLE.COM
Step 2: Set the krb5Keytab
Set the krb5Keytab value to the complete absolute path of the keytab file. For example:
420
krb5Keytab=/etc/mongodb-mms/mmsagent.keytab
Step 3: Restart the agent.
Host Settings
In addition to adding the agent as a MongoDB user, you must also specify the host’s authentication settings. You can
specify the host’s authentication settings when adding the host, or you can edit the settings for an existing host.
Configure Kerberos Environment
Step 1: Create or configure the /etc/kerb5.conf file on the system to integrate this host into your
Kerberos environment.
Step 2: Ensure the kinit binary is available at the /user/bin/kinit path.
Configure Backup Agent for SSL
On this page
•Overview
•Prerequisite
•Procedures
Overview
If your MongoDB deployment uses SSL, then you must configure the Backup Agent to use SSL to connect to your
deployment’s mongod and mongos instances.
Configuring the agent to use SSL involves specifying which certificate to use to sign MongoDB certificates and turning
on the SSL option for the MongoDB instances in Ops Manager.
Prerequisite
To configure the agent to use SSL, you must have a trusted CA certificate that signed the MongoDB instance’s certifi-
cate.
Procedures
Connections between Agents and MongoDB Instances
To use SSL for the Backup Agent’s connection to a MongoDB host, specify the host’s SSL settings when adding the
host or by editing the host’s settings.
Then configure the agent to use SSL:
421
Step 1: Specify path to trusted CA certificate.
Edit the Backup Agent configuration file to set the sslTrustedServerCertificates field to the path of a file
containing one or more certificates in PEM format. For example:
sslTrustedServerCertificates=/path/to/mongodb-certs.pem
The agent configuration file is located in either the agent install directory or the /etc/mongodb-mms/ directory,
depending on your operating system.
By default, to connect to MongoDB instances using SSL requires a valid trusted certificate. For testing purposes,
however, you can set the sslRequireValidServerCertificates setting to False to bypass this check.
This configuration is not recommended for production use as it makes the connection insecure.
For additional information on these settings, see MongoDB SSL Settings.
Step 2: Restart agent.
Connections between Agents and Ops Manager
To ensure that the Backup Agents use SSL when connecting to Ops Manager, Configure Ops Manager to use SSL for
all connections. The Configure SSL Connections to Ops Manager tutorial describes how to set up Ops Manager to run
over HTTPS.
Starting with Ops Manager 1.4, the Backup Agent validates the SSL certificate of the Ops Manager server by default.
If you are not using a certificate signed by a trusted 3rd party, you must configure the Backup Agent to trust the Ops
Manager server.
To specify a self-signed certificate of the Ops Manager server that the Backup Agent should trust:
Step 1: Copy your PEM certificate to /etc/mongodb-mms/.
Issue the following sequence of commands:
sudo cp -a mms-ssl-unified.crt /etc/mongodb-mms/
sudo chown mongodb-mms-backup-agent:mongodb-mms-backup-agent /etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-
˓→unified.crt
sudo chmod 600 /etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-unified.crt
Step 2: Edit the following parameter in the Backup Agent configuration file.
For example:
sslTrustedMMSBackupServerCertificate=/etc/mongodb-mms/mms-ssl-unified.crt
Step 3: Restart the Backup Agent for the configuration update to take effect.
Start or Stop the Backup Agent
422
On this page
•Overview
•Procedures
Overview
For maintenance or troubleshooting purposes, you may want to temporarily shut down or restart Ops Manager
Backup’s Backup Agent. However, for proper operation of Ops Manager Backup your Ops Manager group must
have at least one Backup Agent running. The group needs only one Backup Agent.
Procedures
Start the Backup Agent
The procedure to Install the Backup Agent includes a step to start the agent. If you must restart the agent, use the
following procedure.
Start an Agent Installed with an rpm Package
If you installed the Backup Agent using an rpm package, such as on RHEL, CentOS, or SUSE, issue the following
command to start the agent:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-agent start
Start an Agent Installed with a deb Package
If you installed the Backup Agent using a deb package, as on Ubuntu, issue the following command to start the agent:
sudo start mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Start an Agent Installed with a tar File
Use this command if you installed to Linux or OSX using a tar file. Issue the following command from the directory
to which you installed the Backup Agent:
nohup ./mongodb-mms-backup-agent >> backup-agent.log 2>&1 &
Start the Backup Agent on Windows
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services. In the list of services,
select MMS Backup Agent. Select the Action menu and select Start.
423
Stop the Backup Agent
If you use Ops Manager Backup, you must have a Backup Agent running to ensure up-to-date backup data.
Stop an Agent Installed with an rpm Package
If you installed the Backup Agent using an rpm package, such as on RHEL, CentOS, or SUSE, issue the following
command to stop the agent:
sudo service mongodb-mms-backup-agent stop
Stop an Agent Installed with a deb Package
If you installed the Backup Agent using a deb package, as on Ubuntu, issue the following command to stop the agent:
sudo stop mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Stop an Agent Installed with a tar File
If you installed to a Linux system or OSX using a tar file, issue the following command to stop the Backup Agent:
pkill -f mongodb-mms-backup-agent
Stop the Backup Agent on Windows
In Windows Control Panel, open Administrative Tools and then Services. In the list of services,
select MMS Backup Agent. Select the Action menu and select Stop.
If you receive a message that your Backup Agent is out of date, make sure you are running an upgradeable version of
the Backup Agent. If you are running the version of the Backup Agent named MongoDBBackup, you must remove it
before upgrading. To check if you are running MongoDBBackup, issue the following command in an Administrative
command prompt:
sc query MongoDBBackup
If the command returns a result, you must remove the MongoDBBackup agent. To remove it, issue the following:
sc delete MongoDBBackup
Remove the Backup Agent from Ops Manager
Ops Manager displays active Backup Agents on the Agents page in in the Administration tab. The page displays
agents that have been active in the last 24 hours. If an agent fails to report to Ops Manager for more than 24 hours,
Ops Manager removes the agent from the Agents page.
To remove a Backup Agent from |mms|,stop the agent and then wait 24 hours.
To delete the Backup Agent from a Linux or OSX server,stop the agent and then remove the
mongodb-mms-backup-agent file from the /usr/bin directory. If you installed the agent using a tar.gz
file, the agent will be in the directory you chose during installation.
424
To delete the Backup Agent from a Windows server,stop the agent and then use the Windows program uninstaller
to remove the MMS Backup Agent program.
12.5 Audit Events
On this page
•User Audits
•Host Audits
•Alert Config Audits
•Backup Audits
•Group Audits
Ops Manager maintains an audit log of key operations that users and administrators perform in the system. Unless
otherwise stated, the Events page aggregates and displays these events.
User Audits
JOINED_GROUP
A user joined a Group.
This audit is not supported if using LDAP authentication for Ops Manager users
REMOVED_FROM_GROUP
A user was removed from a Group.
INVITED_TO_GROUP
A user was invited to a Group
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_RESET_EMAIL_SENT_AUDIT
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_RESET_EMAIL_SENT_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General
tab on the Audits page.
A user requested and was sent an email with a link that will allow them to reset their 2 factor authentication.
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_RESET_AUDIT
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_RESET_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits
page.
A user reset their two factor authentication.
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_UPDATED_AUDIT
MULTI_FACTOR_AUTH_UPDATED_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the
Audits page.
A user updated their 2FA using the form in My Profile.
PASSWORD_RESET_EMAIL_SENT_AUDIT
PASSWORD_RESET_EMAIL_SENT_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the
Audits page.
A user requested and was sent an email with a link that will allow them to reset their password.
425
PASSWORD_RESET_AUDIT
PASSWORD_RESET_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A user successfully reset their password via the reset password flow.
PASSWORD_UPDATED_AUDIT
PASSWORD_UPDATED_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A user successfully updated their password using the form in My Profile.
USER_EMAIL_ADDRESS_CHANGED_AUDIT
USER_EMAIL_ADDRESS_CHANGED_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the
Audits page.
A user changed their email address.
USER_ROLES_CHANGED_AUDIT
A user’s roles in a particular Group were changed.
SUCCESSFUL_LOGIN_AUDIT
SUCCESSFUL_LOGIN_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A user successfully authenticated with their username and password.
UNSUCCESSFUL_LOGIN_AUDIT
UNSUCCESSFUL_LOGIN_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A user entered a valid username, but an invalid password.
ACCOUNT_LOCKED_AUDIT
Ops Manager locked a user’s account from the system, as a result of manual action by the administrator, or
because of a change in account locking policies.
ACCOUNT_UNLOCKED_AUDIT
An administrator unlocked a user’s account.
USER_CREATED_AUDIT
USER_CREATED_AUDIT is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A new user was created.
Host Audits
DELETE_HOST_AUDIT
A host was suppressed by a user.
REACTIVATE_HOST_AUDIT
A host was manually reactivated by a user.
DEACTIVATE_HOST_AUDIT
A host was deactivated by the system.
ADD_HOST_AUDIT
A new host was added by a user, or auto-discovered by the system.
UNDELETE_HOST_AUDIT
A previously suppressed host was un-suppressed by a user.
HIDE_AND_DISABLE_HOST_AUDIT
The system determined that a host was a duplicate by the system, and hid that host from the interface.
DB_PROFILER_ENABLE_AUDIT
Database profiling was enabled for a host
426
DB_PROFILER_DISABLE_AUDIT
Database profiling data collection was disabled for a host
HOST_IP_CHANGED_AUDIT
A change in IP address was detected for a host.
Alert Config Audits
ALERT_ACKNOWLEDGED_AUDIT
A user acknowledged an open alert.
ALERT_UNACKNOWLEDGED_AUDIT
A user un-acknowledged an open alert.
ALERT_CONFIG_DISABLED_AUDIT
An alert configuration was disabled.
ALERT_CONFIG_ENABLED_AUDIT
An alert configuration was enabled.
ALERT_CONFIG_ADDED_AUDIT
An alert configuration was added.
ALERT_CONFIG_DELETED_AUDIT
An alert configuration was deleted.
ALERT_CONFIG_CHANGED_AUDIT
An alert configuration was edited.
Backup Audits
RS_STATE_CHANGED_AUDIT
A user started, stopped, or terminated backup for a replica set. is started, stopped. or terminated by a user
CLUSTER_STATE_CHANGED_AUDIT
A user started, stopped or terminated backup for a sharded cluster.
RESTORE_REQUESTED_AUDIT
A restore was requested.
SYNC_REQUIRED_AUDIT
A user initiates a resync of a replica set or config server.
CLUSTERSHOT_DELETED_AUDIT
A user deletes a clustershot (e.g. a cluster checkpoint.)
SNAPSHOT_DELETED_AUDIT
A user delted a snapshot for a replica set.
RS_CREDENTIAL_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the authentication credentials for a replica set.
CLUSTER_CREDENTIAL_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the authentication credentials for a sharded cluster.
RS_BLACKLIST_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the excluded namespaces for a replica set.
CLUSTER_BLACKLIST_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the excluded namespaces for a sharded cluster.
427
RS_SNAPSHOT_SCHEDULE_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the snapshot schedule for a replica set.
CLUSTER_SNAPSHOT_SCHEDULE_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the snapshot schedule for a sharded cluster.
CLUSTER_CHECKKPOINT_UPDATED_AUDIT
A user updates the checkpoint schedule for a sharded cluster.
Group Audits
GROUP_DELETED
GROUP_DELETED is only visible in the Admin section in the General tab on the Audits page.
A Group was deleted.
GROUP_CREATED
A new Group was created.
12.6 Monitoring Reference
On this page
•Host Types
•Host Process Types
•Event Types
•Alert Types
•Chart Colors
•Database Commands Used by the Monitoring Agent
This document contains references of the different types of hosts, databases, and other statuses that may occur in
Monitoring.
Host Types
The possible values for the “Type” column in the Deployment page are:
• primary
• secondary
• standalone
• master
• slave
• unknown
• recovering
The “Host Type” selector on the advanced dashboard creator also includes:
• conf
428
• mongos
Note: The host type column may also have the value “no data,” which means that Monitoring has not received any
data from the Monitoring Agent for this host. For possible causes, see Troubleshooting.
Host Process Types
Monitoring can monitor the process types:
•mongod database processes
•mongod arbiter processes
•mongos
• Monitoring Agents
Event Types
Types of events in the Events section of the Ops Manager console:
• new host
• restart
• upgrade
Alert Types
The available alert types are:
• Old Host Version
• Host Down
• Agent Down
• Now Secondary
• Now Primary
Chart Colors
• A red bar indicates a server restart.
• A purple bar indicates the server is now a primary.
• A yellow bar indicates the server is now a secondary.
Status Page
• cpu time
• db storage
• page faults
429
• repl lag
• replica
• network
• cursors
• queues
• connections
• background flush avg
• lock %1
• btree
• non-mapped virtual memory
• memory
• asserts
• opcounters-repl
• opcounters
DB Stats Page
• collections
• objects
• average object size
• data size
• storage size
• num extents
• indexes
• index size
• file size
Database Commands Used by the Monitoring Agent
• serverStatus
• buildinfo
• getCmdLineOpts
• connPoolStats
• _isSelf
• getParameter
• ismaster
1For versions of MongoDB after 2.1.1, this chart has a drop-down menu next to the tile that lists available databases, including “global” to
represent the global lock for this host. Select a database to see its lock utilization. See the documentation of lock reporting in serverStatus for more
information.
430
• getShardVersion
• netstat
• replSetGetStatus
• shards.find
• mongos.find
• config.chunks.group
• oplog.find
• collstats - oplog.rs
• sources.find (slave)
• config.settings.find
• dbstats
• db.locks
12.7 Supported Browsers
To use Ops Manager, ensure that your browser is one of the following supported browsers:
• Chrome 8 and greater.
• Firefox 12 and greater.
• IE 9 and greater.
• Safari 6 and greater.
Ops Manager will display a warning on non-supported browsers.
12.8 Advanced Options for MongoDB Deployments
On this page
•Overview
•Advanced Options
Overview
The following mongod and mongos configuration options are available through the Ops Manager Advanced Options
field when you deploy MongoDB. You select advanced options when deploying replica sets,sharded clusters, and
standalone instances.
Advanced Options
The Ops Manager Advanced Options map to the MongoDB configuration options as described here.
431
Network and HTTP
•maxConns:net.maxIncomingConnections
•jsonp:net.http.JSONPEnabled
•nohttpinterface:net.http.enabled
•rest:net.http.RESTInterfaceEnabled
Operation Profiling
•profile:operationProfiling.mode
•slowms:operationProfiling.slowOpThresholdMs
Process Management
•pidfilepath:processManagement.pidFilePath
Replication
•oplogSize:replication.oplogSizeMB
Storage and Journal
•directoryperdb:storage.directoryPerDB
•noprealloc:storage.preallocDataFiles
•nssize:storage.nsSize
•smallfiles:storage.smallFiles
•syncdelay:storage.syncPeriodSecs
•journalCommitInterval:storage.journal.commitIntervalMs
•nojournal:storage.journal.enabled
System Log
•logappend:systemLog.logAppend
•quiet:systemLog.quiet
•syslog:systemLog.destination
12.9 Automation Configuration
On this page
432
•Overview
•Fields
Overview
The Automation Agent uses an automation configuration to determine the desired state of a MongoDB deployment
and to effect changes as needed. If you modify the deployment through the Ops Manager web interface, you never
need manipulate this configuration.
If you are using the Automation Agent without Ops Manager, you can construct and distribute the configuration file
manually.
Fields
Optional fields are marked as such.
A field that takes a <number> as its value can take integers and floating point numbers.
version
"version" : <integer>
Name Type Description
version integer The version of the configuration file.
agentVersion
"agentVersion" : {
"name" : <string>,
"directoryUrl" : <string>
}
Name Type Description
agentVersion object Optional The version of the Automation Agent to run. If the running version
does not match this setting, the Automation Agent downloads the specified
version, shuts itself down, and starts the new version.
- name string The desired version of the Automation Agent (e.g. “1.8.1.1042-1”).
- directoryUrl string The URL from which to download Automation Agent.
monitoringVersions
"monitoringVersions" : [
{
"name" : <string>,
"hostname" : <string>,
"urls" : {
<platform1> : {
433
<build1> : <string>,
...,
"default" : <string>
},
...
},
"baseUrl" : <string>,
"logPath" : <string>,
"logRotate" : {
"sizeThresholdMB" : <number>,
"timeThresholdHrs" : <integer>,
"numUncompressed": <integer>,
"percentOfDiskspace" : <number>
}
},
...
]
Name Type Description
monitoringVersions array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define version information for each Monitoring
Agent.
- name string The desired version of the Monitoring Agent (e.g. “2.9.1.176-1”).
To monitor or back up MongoDB 3.0 deployments, you must install Ops
Manager 1.6 or higher. To monitor a MongoDB 3.0 deployment, you must
also run Monitoring Agent version 2.7.0 or higher.
- hostname string The hostname of the machine that runs the Monitoring Agent. If the Moni-
toring Agent is not running on the machine, Ops Manager installs the agent
from the location specified in monitoringVersions.urls.
- urls object The platform- and build-specific URLs from which to download the Moni-
toring Agent.
- - <platform> object This field has a name that identifies an operating system and optionally a
version. The field contains an object with key-value pairs, where each key
is either the name of a build or default and each value is a URL for
downloading the Monitoring Agent. The object must include the default
key set to the default download URL for the platform.
- baseUrl string The base URL used for the mmsBaseUrl setting in the Monitoring Agent
Configuration.
- logPath string Optional. The directory where the agent stores its logs. The default is to
store logs in /dev/null.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
- - sizeThresholdMB number The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
- - numUncompressed integer Optional. The maximum number of total log files to leave uncompressed,
including the current log file. The default is 5.
- - percentOfDiskspace number Optional. The maximum percentage of total disk space all log files should
take up before deletion. The default is .02.
backupVersions
"backupVersions" : [
{
434
"name" : <string>,
"hostname" : <string>,
"urls" : {
<platform1> : {
<build1> : <string>,
...,
"default" : <string>
},
...
},
"baseUrl" : <string>,
"logPath" : <string>,
"logRotate" : {
"sizeThresholdMB" : <number>,
"timeThresholdHrs" : <integer>,
"numUncompressed": <integer>,
"percentOfDiskspace" : <number>
}
},
...
],
Name Type Description
backupVersions array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define version information for each Backup Agent.
- name string The desired version of the Backup Agent (e.g. “3.1.1.263-1”).
- hostname string The hostname of the machine that runs the Backup Agent. If the Backup
Agent is not running on the machine, Ops Manager installs the agent from
the location specified in backupVersions.urls.
- urls object The platform- and build-specific URLs from which to download the Backup
Agent.
- - <platform> object This field has a name that identifies an operating system and optionally a
version. The field contains an object with key-value pairs, where each key
is either the name of a build or default and each value is a URL for
downloading the Backup Agent. The object must include the default
key set to the default download URL for the platform.
- baseUrl string The base URL used for the mothership and https settings in the
Backup Agent Configuration. For example, for "baseUrl"=https:/
/cloud.mongodb.com, the backup configuration fields would have
these values: mothership=api-backup.mongodb.com and
https"=true.
- logPath string Optional. The directory where the agent stores its logs. The default is to
store logs in /dev/null.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
- - sizeThresholdMB number The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
- - numUncompressed integer Optional. The maximum number of total log files to leave uncompressed,
including the current log file. The default is 5.
- - percentOfDiskspace number Optional. The maximum percentage of total disk space all log files should
take up before deletion. The default is .02.
435
processes
"processes" : [
{
"name" : <string>,
"processType" : <string>,
"version" : <string>,
"<args>" : <object>,
"disabled" : <Boolean>,
"manualMode" : <Boolean>,
"hostname" : <string>,
"cluster": <string>,
"numCores": <integer>,
"logRotate" : {
"sizeThresholdMB" : <number>,
"timeThresholdHrs" : <integer>,
"numUncompressed": <integer>,
"percentOfDiskspace" : <number>
},
"authSchemaVersion": <integer>,
"alias": <string>
},
...
]
436
Name Type Description
processes array
of ob-
jects
The processes array contains objects that define the mongos and
mongod instances that Ops Manager monitors. Each object defines a dif-
ferent instance.
- name string A unique name to identify the instance.
- processType string Either mongod or mongos.
- version string The name of the mongoDbVersions specification used with this in-
stance.
- <args> object This field is named either args2_6, for MongoDB versions 2.6 and higher
(including 3.0 and higher), or args2_4, for versions 2.4 and earlier. The
field contains a MongoDB configuration object in the format appropriate to
the version. For information on format and supported MongoDB options,
see supported configuration options.
- disabled Boolean Optional. Set to true to shut down the process.
- manualMode Boolean Optional. Set to true to operate this process in manual mode. The Au-
tomation Agent will take no actions on the process.
- hostname string Optional. The name of the host this process should run on. This defaults to
localhost.
- cluster string Optional. Required for a mongos. The name of the cluster. This must
correspond to the sharding.name field in the sharding array for the
mongos.
- numCores integer Optional. The number of cores the process should be bound to. The Au-
tomation Agent will spread processes out across the cores as evenly as pos-
sible.
- logRotate object Optional. Enables log rotation for the MongoDB logs for a process.
- - sizeThresholdMB number The maximum size in MB for an individual log file before rotation.
- - timeThresholdHrs integer The maximum time in hours for an individual log file before rotation.
- - numUncompressed integer Optional. The maximum number of total log files to leave uncompressed,
including the current log file. The default is 5.
- - percentOfDiskspace number Optional. The maximum percentage of total disk space all log files should
take up before deletion. The default is .02.
- authSchemaVersion integer Optional. The schema version of the user credential objects. This should
match all other elements of the processes array that belong to the same
cluster. The possible values are 1,3, and 5. The default is 3for 2.6
clusters and 1for 2.4 clusters.
- alias string Optional. A hostname alias (often a DNS CNAME) for the server on which
the process runs. If an alias is specified, the Automation Agent prefers the
alias over the host specified in processes.hostname when connecting
to the server. You can also specify this alias in replicaSets.host and
sharding.configServer.
replicaSets
"replicaSets" : [
{
"_id" : <string>,
"version" : <integer>
"members" : [
{
"_id" : <integer>,
"host" : <string>
},
437
...
],
"force" : {
"currentVersion" : <integer>
}
},
...
]
Name Type Description
replicaSets array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define the configuration of each replica set. The
Automation Agent uses the values in this array to create valid replica set
configuration documents. The agent regularly checks that replica sets are
configured correctly. If a problem occurs, the agent reconfigures the replica
set according to its configuration document. The array can contain the fol-
lowing top-level fields from a replica set configuration document: _id;
version; and members. For more information on the configuration doc-
uments, see replSetGetConfig in the MongoDB manual.
- _id string The name of the replica set.
- version integer The version of the replica set configuration.
- members array
of ob-
jects
Objects that define each member of the replica set. The members.host
field must specify the host’s name as listed in processes.name. The
Automation Agent expands the host field to create a valid replica set con-
figuration. For more information on members objects, see replSetGetCon-
fig in the MongoDB manual.
- force object Optional. An object that contains the currentVersion field set to a
version number. Automation will force a reconfiguration of the replica set
if and only if the value of currentVersion equals the current version
of the replica set. You can use force to reconfigure a replica set that has
lost members and can’t reach a majority of votes.
sharding
"sharding" : [
{
"name" : <string>,
"configServer" : [ <string>, ... ],
"collections" : [
{
"_id" : <string>,
"key" : [
[ shard key ],
[ shard key ],
...
]
},
...
],
"shards" : [
{
"_id" : <string>,
"rs" : <string>
},
438
...
]
},
...
]
Name Type Description
sharding array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define the configuration of each sharded cluster.
Each object in the array contains the specifications for one cluster. The
Automation Agent regularly checks each cluster’s state against the specifi-
cations. If the specification and cluster don’t match, the agent will change
the configuration of the cluster, which might cause the balancer to migrate
chunks.
- name string The name of the cluster. This must correspond with the value in
processes.cluster for a mongos.
- configServer array String values that provide the names of each config server’s hosts. The host
names are the same names as are used in each host’s processes.name
field.
- collections array
of ob-
jects
Objects that define the sharded collections and their shard keys.
- - _id string The namespace of the sharded collection. The namespace is the combina-
tion of the database name and the name of the collection. For example,
testdb.testcoll.
- - key array
of
arrays
The collection’s shard keys. This “array of arrays” contains a single ar-
ray if there is a single shard key and contains multiple arrays if there is a
compound shard key.
- shards array
of ob-
jects
Objects that define the cluster’s shards.
- - _id string The name of the shard.
- - rs string The name of the shard’s replica set, as specified in the replicaSets.
_id field.
balancer
"balancer": {
"<clusterName1>": <object>,
"<clusterName2>": <object>,
...
}
Name Type Description
balancer object Optional. This object contains fields named according to clusters, each
field containing an object with the desired balancer settings for the cluster.
The object uses the stopped and activeWindow fields, as described
in the procedure to schedule the balancing window in this tutorial in the
MongoDB manual.
439
auth
"auth" : {
"autoUser": <string>,
"autoPwd": <string>,
"key" : <string>,
"keyfile" : <string>,
"usersDeleted" : [
{
"user" : <string>,
"dbs" : [ <string>, ... ],
"allDbs" : <Boolean>
},
...
],
"usersWanted" : [
{
"db" : <string>,
"user" : <string>,
"roles" : [ <string>, ... ],
"pwd" : <32-character hex string>,
"initPwd" : <string>,
"userSource" : <string>,
"otherDBRoles" : {
<string> : [ <string>, ....],
...
}
},
...
]
}
440
Name Type Description
auth object Optional. Defines authentication-related settings.
- autoUser string The username that the Automation agent uses when connecting to an in-
stance.
- autoPwd string The password that the Automation agent uses when connecting to an in-
stance.
- disabled boolean Optional. Indicates if auth is disabled. If not specified, disabled defaults
to false.
- key string The contents of the key file that Ops Manager uses to authenticate to the
MongoDB processes. The key is not required if disabled is true.
- keyfile string The path and name of the key file that Ops Manager uses to authenticate to
the MongoDB processes. The keyfile is not required if disabled is
true.
- usersDeleted array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define the authenticated users to be deleted from
specified databases or from all databases. This array must contain two
fields: the auth.usersDeleted.user field and then either the auth.
usersDeleted.dbs or the auth.usersDeleted.allDbs field.
- - user string The user’s name.
- - dbs array String values that list the names of the databases from which the authen-
ticated user is to be deleted. If you use this field, do not use the auth.
usersDeleted.allDbs field.
- - allDbs Boolean If set to true, the authenticated user is deleted from all databases. If you
use this field, do not use the auth.usersDeleted.dbs field.
- usersWanted array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Contains objects that define authenticated users to add to
specified databases. Each object must have the auth.usersWanted.
db,auth.usersWanted.user, and auth.usersWanted.roles
fields, and then have exactly one of the following fields: auth.
usersWanted.pwd,auth.usersWanted.initPwd, or auth.
usersWanted.userSource.
- - db string The database to which to add the user.
- - user string The name of the user.
- - roles array String values that list the roles to be assigned the user from the user’s
database, which is specified in auth.usersWanted.db.
- - pwd 32-
character
hex
string
The MONGODB-CR hash of the password assigned to the user. If you
set this field, do not set the auth.usersWanted.initPwd or auth.
usersWanted.userSource fields.
- - initPwd string An initial cleartext password assigned to the user. If you set this field,
do not set the auth.usersWanted.pwd or auth.usersWanted.
userSource fields.
- - userSource string If you use MongoDB version 2.4, you can use this field to specify the
database that contains the user’s credentials. See the Privilege Docu-
ments page in the MongoDB 2.4 manual. If you set this field, do not set
the auth.usersWanted.pwd or auth.usersWanted.initPwd
fields.
- - otherDBRoles object Optional. If the auth.usersWanted.db field specifies admin as the
user’s database, then this object can assign to the user roles from other
databases as well. The object contains key-value pairs where the key is
the name of the database and the value is an array of string values that list
the roles be assigned from that database.
441
ssl
SSL is available only in MongoDB Enterprise or a build of MongoDB compiled with SSL support.
"ssl" : {
"CAFilePath" : <string>
}
Name Type Description
ssl object Optional. Enables SSL for encrypting connections. SSL is available only in
MongoDB Enterprise or a build of MongoDB compiled with SSL support.
- CAFilePath string The path to the certificate used to authenticate through SSL.
roles
"roles" : [
{
"role" : <string>,
"db" : <string>,
"privileges" : [
{
"resource" : { ... },
"actions" : [ <string>, ... ]
},
...
],
"roles" : [
{
"role" : <string>,
"db" : <string>
}
]
},
...
]
Name Type Description
roles array
of ob-
jects
Optional. The roles array contains objects that describe the cluster’s user-
defined roles. Each object describes a different user-defined role. Objects
in this array contain the same fields as documents in the :manual:‘ system
roles collection </reference/system-roles-collection>‘, except for the _id
field, which is not included here.
mongoDbVersions
The mongoDbVersions array defines specification objects for the MongoDB instances found in the processes
array. Each MongoDB instance in the processes array must have a specification object in this array.
"mongoDbVersions" : [
{
"name" : <string>,
442
"builds" : [
{
"platform" : <string>,
"url" : <string>,
"gitVersion" : <string>,
"bits" : <integer>,
"win2008plus" : <Boolean>,
"winVCRedistUrl" : <string>,
"winVCRedistOptions" : [ <string>, ... ],
"winVCRedistDll" : <string>,
"winVCRedistVersion" : <string>
},
...
],
},
...
]
Name Type Description
mongoDbVersions array
of ob-
jects
The mongoDbVersions array is required and defines specification ob-
jects for the MongoDB instances found in the processes array. Each
MongoDB instance in processes must have a specification object in
mongoDbVersions.
- name string The name of the specification object. The specification object is attached to
a MongoDB instance through the instance’s processes.version field
in this configuration file.
- builds array
of ob-
jects
Objects that define the builds for this MongoDB instance.
- - platform string The platform for this MongoDB instance.
- - url string The URL from which to download MongoDB for this instance.
- - gitVersion string The commit identifier that identifies the state of the code used to build the
MongoDB process. The MongoDB buildInfo command returns the gitVer-
sion identifier.
- - bits integer The processor’s bus width. Specify either 64 or 32.
- - win2008plus Boolean Optional. Set to true if this is a Windows build that requires either Win-
dows 7 later or Windows Server 2008 R2 or later.
- - winVCRedistUrl string Optional. The URL from which the required version of the Microsoft Visual
C++ redistributable can be downloaded.
- - winVCRedistOptions array Optional. String values that list the command-line options to be speci-
fied when running the Microsoft Visual C++ redistributable installer. Each
command-line option is a separate string in the array.
- - winVCRedistDll string Optional. The name of the Microsoft Visual C++ runtime DLL file that the
agent will check to determine if a new version of the Microsoft Visual C++
redistributable is needed.
- - winVCRedistVersion string Optional. The minimum version of the Microsoft Visual C++ runtime DLL
that must be present to skip over the installation of the Microsoft Visual
C++ redistributable.
443
options
"options" : {
"downloadBase" : <string>
}
Name Type Description
options object
- downloadBase string The path to the directory where automatic version downloads are targeted
and scripts for starting processes are created.
kerberos
"kerberos": {
"serviceName": <string>
}
Name Type Description
kerberos object Optional. A key-value pair that defines the kerberos service name agents
use to authenticate via kerberos.
- serviceName string The service name agents use to authenticate to a mongod or mongos via
kerberos. This name is also used to set the saslServiceName option in a
MongoDB configuration, as described on the MongoDB Server Parameters
page in the MongoDB manual.
indexConfigs
"indexConfigs" : [
{
"key" : [
[ <string> : <val> ],
...
],
"rsName" : <string>,
"dbName" : <string>,
"collectionName" : <string>
},
...
]
444
Name Type Description
indexConfigs array
of ob-
jects
Optional. Objects that define specific indexes to be built for specific replica
sets.
- key array
of
arrays
The index’s keys. This “array of arrays” contains a single array if the index
has just one key.
- rsName string The replica set that the index is build on.
- dbName string The database the index applies to.
- collectionName string The collection the index applies to.
12.10 Supported MongoDB Options for Automation
On this page
•Overview
•MongoDB 2.6 and Later Configuration Options
•MongoDB 2.4 and Earlier Configuration Options
Overview
The processes.<args> object in an automation configuration specifies the configuration options for each Mon-
goDB instance. The supported options depend on the version of MongoDB.
MongoDB 2.6 and Later Configuration Options
The processes.args2_6 object applies to MongoDB versions 2.6 and higher (including 3.0 and higher) and
supports the following MongoDB options. The object uses the MongoDB configuration format.
The processes.args2_6 object supports the following:
•config
•net.bindIp
•net.http.JSONPEnabled
•net.http.RESTInterfaceEnabled
•net.http.enabled
•net.maxIncomingConnections
•net.port
•noscripting
•notablescan
•operationProfiling.mode
•operationProfiling.slowOpThresholdMs
•processManagement.fork
445
•processManagement.pidFilePath
•replication.oplogSizeMB
•replication.replSet
•replication.replSetName
•replication.secondaryIndexPrefetch
•security.authorization
•security.keyFile
•setParameter.connPoolMaxConnsPerHost
•setParameter.connPoolMaxShardedConnsPerHost
•setParameter.enableTestCommands
•setParameter.enableLocalhostAuthBypass
•setParameter.failIndexKeyTooLong
•setParameter.internalQueryPlannerEnableIndexIntersection
•setParameter.logLevel
•setParameter.newCollectionsUsePowerOf2Sizes
•setParameter.releaseConnectionsAfterResponse
•setParameter.textSearchEnabled
•setParameter.ttlMonitorEnabled
•sharding.clusterRole
•sharding.configDB
•storage.dbPath
•storage.directoryPerDB
•storage.journal.commitIntervalMs
•storage.journal.enabled
•storage.nsSize
•storage.preallocDataFiles
•storage.quota.maxFilesPerDB
•storage.quota.enforced
•storage.smallFiles
•storage.syncPeriodSecs
•systemLog.destination
•systemLog.logAppend
•systemLog.path
•systemLog.quiet
•systemLog.timeStampFormat
•systemLog.verbosity
446
MongoDB 2.4 and Earlier Configuration Options
The processes.args2_4 object applies to MongoDB versions 2.4 and earlier and supports the following Mon-
goDB options. The object uses the 2.4 MongoDB configuration format.
The processes.args2_4 object supports the following:
•auth
•bind_ip
•config
•configdb
•configsvr
•dbpath
•directoryperdb
•fork
•journal
•journalCommitInterval
•jsonp
•keyFile
•logappend
•logpath
•maxConns
•nohttpinterface
•nojournal
•noprealloc
•noscripting
•nssize
•oplogSize
•pidfilepath
•port
•profile
•quiet
•quota
•quotaFiles
•replSet
•rest
•shardsvr
•slowms
•smallfiles
447
•syncdelay
•syslog
•v
•vv
•vv
13 Release Notes
Ops Manager Server Changelog A record of changes to the Ops Manager Application.
Automation Agent Changelog A record of changes to the Automation Agent.
Monitoring Agent Changelog A record of changes to the Monitoring Agent.
Backup Agent Changelog A record of changes to the Backup Agent.
13.1 Ops Manager Server Changelog
Ops Manager Server 1.6.4
Released 2015-08-17
• Ops Manager no longer shuts down if the Ops Manager Application Database is unreachable. (This issue was
erroneously reported as resolved in Ops Manager 1.6.3.)
Ops Manager Server 1.6.3
Released 2015-06-23
• Agent updates: Automation Agent 1.4.18.1199-1
• Added full support for restores of WiredTiger backups. Previously, Ops Manager only supported SCP Individual
File restores for WiredTiger backups.
• Added optimization to prevent some Backup Daemon background tasks from doing excessive logging when
databases are down.
• Fixed a user interface issue when displaying an empty Automation diff.
Ops Manager Server 1.6.2
Released 2015-04-28
• Fixed issue with grooms on a WiredTiger Backup Blockstore.
• Fixed a possible connection leak with the SCP Individual File restore type.
• LDAP users are now periodically synced with the LDAP server to prevent communications after a user is re-
moved from a group.
• Fixed an issue with backups of MongoDB 3.0 mongod instances running with the --setParameter
failIndexKeyTooLong=0 option.
448
Ops Manager Server 1.6.1
Released 2015-03-26
• Upgraded Automation Agent to 1.4.15.999. See: the Automation Agent release notes.
•Security Update: resolved an issue where users removed from LDAP groups were not always removed from
corresponding Ops Manager groups. This upgrade is highly recommended for anyone using LDAP authenti-
cation.
• Selecting wildcards in the Version Manager is no longer supported when automation.versions.source
is set to `local.
• Adds a 1 hour timeout to kill a Backup head database if it does not shutdown cleanly. You must perform a
resync following a hard kill.
• Windows support for Backup Daemon using Windows 64-bit 2008 R2+ MongoDB builds.
• Fix for Backups stored in WiredTiger format in which a single collection grows from under 8 GB to over 8 GB
in size.
• The time before an unreachable mongos process is deactivated is now configurable on a per group basis. See
Admin Only Group Settings.
• The time before a standby Monitoring Agent takes over after the primary Monitoring Agent stops respond-
ing is now configurable to a minimum of 90 seconds. See the mms.monitoring.agent.session.
timeoutMillis setting in Ops Manager Configuration Files.
• For Backup HTTP pull restore, the link expiration and the number of allowed uses of a link are now configurable.
See Advanced Backup Restore Settings.
Ops Manager Server 1.6.0
Released 2015-03-02
New Features
• Initial release of Automation. Automation manages many basic administrative tasks for MongoDB deployments,
including version upgrades, adding replica set members, adding shards, and changing oplog size. You can both
import existing deployments into Automation and create new deployments on your provisioned hardware.
• Windows support (Monitoring and Backup only). You can Install Ops Manager on Windows using MSI files.
Ops Manager supports Windows Server 2008 R2 and above.
• Support for MongoDB 3.0, including support for backups that use the WiredTiger storage engine.
To monitor or back up MongoDB 3.0 deployments, you must install Ops Manager 1.6 or higher. To monitor a
MongoDB 3.0 deployment, you must also run Monitoring Agent version 2.7.0 or higher.
• Support for using the SSL and MONGODB-X509 authentication mechanisms for the backing MongoDB
databases. See Configure the Connections to the Backing MongoDB Instances.
• Public API endpoints to manage Automation configuration. For more information, see Automation in the API
documentation.
449
Improvements
• The Ops Manager’s Administration interface provides more information to make it easier to monitor the health
of the Ops Manager installation.
• The Ops Manager Deployment tab now displays all deployment information on one page, with icons for select-
ing view options. The new Topology View groups all hosts by the replica set or sharded cluster they are part
of. The new Servers View shows information about MongoDB processes and Ops Manager agents grouped by
server.
• Fixed an isssue (MMS-2273) where, in certain situations, the Backup Agent was not reporting a cluster snapshot
as potentially inconsistent.
• Improved handling of cursor timeouts by the Backup Agent. To use this improvement, upgrade to the latest
Backup Agent, which is included with Ops Manager. The improvement became available with Backup Agent
version 2.3.3.209-1.
Considerations for Upgrade
• Ops Manager 1.8.0, when released, will not support MongoDB 2.4 for the Ops Manager Application Database
and Backup Blockstore Database. Ops Manager Server 1.8.0 will continue to support MongoDB 2.4 for your
monitored and backed-up databases.
• Ops Manager 1.6.0 supports direct upgrades only from MMS On Prem 1.3 and above.
• The procedure to configure Ops Manager to run with HTTPS has changed and is greatly simplified. The previous
procedure no longer works. For the new procedure, see Configure SSL Connections to Ops Manager.
• The connection string to the Backup Blockstore database is now configured through the Administration inter-
face’s Blockstores page and not through the mongo.backupdb.mongoUri field in the conf-daemon.
properties configuration file.
• Ops Manager no longer requires you to supply the replica set name of the backing MongoDB instances. The
mongo.replicaSet and mongo.backupdb.replicaSet properties have been removed from the con-
figuration files. These properties had previously controlled whether Ops Manager treated a connection to a
backing instance as a standalone or replica set, for the purpose of setting the write concern. Ops Manager now
sets write concern based on how many hosts are supplied in the connection string.
• You can disable Automation for the entire Ops Manager installation through the mms.featureFlag.
automation setting in the conf-daemon.properties configuration file.
• Removed the Dashboards view from the Ops Manager UI. You can view monitoring metrics from the Deploy-
ment tab. See: Monitoring Metrics for an overview of the available metrics and how to access them.
MMS Onprem Server 1.5.5
Released 2015-03-26
•Security Update: resolved issue where users removed from LDAP groups were not always removed from cor-
responding Ops Manager groups. This upgrade is highly recommended for anyone using LDAP authentication.
MMS Onprem Server 1.5.4
Released 2015-03-18
• Fixed race condition that could cause the Backup Daemon to hang when the MongoDB process for a head
database fails to start.
450
• Fixed an issue where a rollback occurring shortly after a terminate could step on the terminate.
• The time before an unreachable mongos process is deactivated is now configurable on a per group basis. See
Admin Only Group Settings.
• The time before a standby Monitoring Agent takes over after the primary Monitoring Agent stops respond-
ing is now configurable to a minimum of 90 seconds. See the mms.monitoring.agent.session.
timeoutMillis setting in Ops Manager Configuration Files.
• For Backup HTTP pull restore, the link expiration and the number of allowed uses of a link are now configurable.
See Advanced Backup Restore Settings.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.3
Released 2014-12-17
Significant improvements in performance for the processing of MMS OnPrem Monitoring data for MMS OnPrem
Groups with a large number of hosts
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.2
Released 2014-11-18
• Added Support for archive restores (.tar.gz) for databases whose filenames exceed 100 characters.
• API: Skip missed points in metrics data, instead of returning empty data.
• API: Return correct number of data points when querying metric data with the period option.
• Backup Agent update to 2.3.3.209-1
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.1
Released 2014-09-26
• Fix cases where replica set member alerts (e.g. no primary, number of healthy members) could send false
positives.
• Skip backup-daemon rootDirectory and mongo.backupdb.mongoUri overlap check when the
mongo.backupdb.mongoUri is on a different host.
•mms-gen-key script handles user’s effective group being different than the username.
• Security enhancements.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.5.0
Released 2014-09-02
Considerations for Upgrade
• MMS OnPrem only supports direct upgrades from 1.3 and 1.4.
• Change in configurations and policy for 2FA: Two-factor authentication must now be explicitly enabled using
the mms.multiFactorAuth.require setting.
451
• The default LDAP group separator became ;;. Previously the separator was ,. See the LDAP configuration
documentation for more information.
• Suppressed hosts will only remain suppressed for 30 minutes.
Previously, if after deleting a host, from MMS OnPrem Monitoring the hostname and port combination would
be added to a suppression list with an infinite lifetime. The suppression list prevented a race condition where
host in a cluster would be auto-discovered by another member of a deployment before the host could was fully
removed. Now, hostname and port combinations remain on the suppression list for only 30 minutes.
• Set the mms.remoteIp.header in the conf-mms.properties file if clients access the MMS OnPrem
Application via a load balancer.
•mongo.backupdb.mongoUri is no longer in conf-mms.properties. This was previously a required
field in this file. It remains in the backup daemons’s conf-daemon.properties.
• Stored MongoDB profile data is not transferred between OnPrem 1.4 and OnPrem 1.5 during the upgrade pro-
cess.
Improvements
• When an MMS OnPrem Backup job fails to bind, the system will periodically and automatically retry.
• All MMS OnPrem Backup jobs will retry indefinitely.
• Point in Time restores are now available with one second granularity.
New Features
• MMS OnPrem Public API.
• Explicit support for multiple MMS OnPrem Backup Blockstore databases and the ability to pin MMS OnPrem
Groups to specific backup daemons and databases. See Configure Multiple Blockstores in Multiple Data Centers
for more information.
• MMS OnPrem can authenticate using LDAP to both the database backing MMS OnPrem and the monitored and
backed up MongoDB deployments. See Configure Users and Groups with LDAP for Ops Manager.
• Enhanced auditing. See Audit Events for more information.
• Ability to acknowledge alerts with comments.
• New cluster page that shows individual, sum or average metrics for all shards in a cluster.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.3
Released 2014-07-22
• Addressed issues related to Backup Job assignment for 2.6.x clusters that used the clusterMonitor role to
support MMS OnPrem Monitoring.
• Fixed problem importing email addresses for users for deployments that use LDAP integration.
• Fixed rare race condition caused high CPU usage in the MMS OnPrem HTTP Service if the application cannot
connect to one of the backing databases.
• Additional security enhancements.
452
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.2
Released 2014-05-29
• Critical bug fix for backing up MongoDB 2.6 deployments that include user or custom role definitions:
–The system.version collection in the admin database will be included in all future snapshots.
–The system.roles collection in the admin database will be included after a new initial sync is per-
formed.
Users capturing backups of MongoDB 2.6 replica sets or clusters with MMS OnPrem that include custom role
definitions should perform a new initial sync. Taking a new initial sync will ensure that the role definitions are
included in the backup.
• Disable MongoDB usePowerOf2Sizes for insert-only MMS OnPrem Backup collections.
• Speed optimization for MMS OnPrem Backup HTTP pull restores.
• Fix for LDAP integration, MMS OnPrem now passes full dn correctly when authenticating the user.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.1
Released 2014-04-28
• Ability to Backup replica sets or clusters using Kerberos authentication
• Ability to Backup replica sets or clusters running specific custom MongoDB builds provided by MongoDB, Inc.
• Fix validation issue preventing Backup of MongoDB 2.6.0 clusters
• Reduced log noise from Monitoring Agent when monitoring MongoDB 2.0 or unreachable mongods
MMS OnPrem Server 1.4.0
Released 2014-04-08
• Includes MMS OnPrem Backup: continuous backup with point-in-time recovery of replica sets and cluster-wide
snapshots of sharded clusters.
• Finer-grained roles and permissions.
• Improved user interface for alerts.
• Enhanced Activity Feed for auditing of all activity.
• Monitoring Agent distributed as OS-specific binary. Python dependency removed.
• LDAP integration for managing users and groups.
MMS OnPrem 1.4.0 requires MongoDB 2.4.9+ instances for backing storage.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.3.0
Released 2013-12-01
• Packaging/support for Debian and SUSE Linux.
• Kerberos authentication support between MMS OnPrem server and backing MongoDBs, as well as between
Monitoring Agent and the MongoDBs it monitors.
• OnPrem users can be overall site administrators. (MMS OnPrem Admins)
453
• New admin section where MMS OnPrem Admins can manage user roles and message banners.
• Tunable advanced password and session management configurations.
• Encryption key rotation, more specific CORS policy, auth tokens removed from chart URLs, and other security
enhancements.
MMS OnPrem Server 1.2.0
Released 2013-07-24
• Redesigned user interface and enhanced algorithm to auto-discover hosts and derive host topology.
• SNMP monitoring.
• Ability to export charts.
• Option to store encrypted authentication credentials in the mmsDb property in the configuration file.
• Ability to classify users within an MMS OnPrem Group as group administrators or read-only users.
13.2 Automation Agent Changelog
Automation Agent 1.4.18.1199-1
Released with Ops Manager 1.6.3 on 2015-06-23
• Added support for importing an existing deployment that contains authenticated arbiters on which the hostname
does not resolve locally to the loopback interface.
• Fixed logic used for performing a rolling restart.
• Fixed issue with deriving the default port for config servers started with the --configsvr option but with no
port specified. See: MMS-2489.
Automation Agent 1.4.16.1075
Released 2015-04-28
• Fixed an issue with updating users created on MongoDB 2.4.
• Fixed an issue with config server repair that occurred if the third config server was out of sync.
Automation Agent 1.4.15.999
Released 2015-03-26
• Fixed a rare edge-case that prevented the Automation Agent from successfully enabling authentication.
Automation Agent 1.4.14.983
Released 2015-03-02
Initial release.
454
13.3 Monitoring Agent Changelog
Monitoring Agent 2.9.2.184
Released 2015-04-28
• Added an explicit timeout for SSL connections to MongoDB instances.
• Upgraded the MongoDB Go driver (mgo) version, which fixed a rare deadlock issue that could occur when
monitoring mongos instances.
Monitoring Agent 2.9.1.176
• Adds support for non-default Kerberos service names.
• Added support for authentication using MongoDB 2.4 style client certificates.
• The Monitoring Agent now identifies itself to the MMS servers using the fully qualified domain name (FQDN)
of the server on which it is running.
• Ops Manager now staggers the timing of DNS look-ups, to avoid triggering a rare issue in glibc 2.19 on Ubuntu
14.04.
• Adds support for RHEL7.
• Improved error handling on Windows.
• Improved connection management for monitored MongoDB processes.
• Improve correctness of the database statics collection.
• Now uses the listDatabases command to retrieve a list of databases.
• The default value for sslTrustedServerCertificates is now true. Users upgrading from 2.4.0 and
using SSL will need to set the value of sslTrustedServerCertificates in their configuration file. See
sslTrustedServerCertificates for more information.
Monitoring Agent 2.4.2.113
Released with OnPrem 1.5.0
• Upgraded agent to use Go 1.3.
• Updated mgo driver, which includes fix for MGO-34. All DNS lookups should now timeout appropriately.
• Added support for connecting to hosts using LDAP authentication.
• Added support for version and -version command line options.
• Agent now displays git commit hash of Monitoring Agent in the log file.
• Updates to the configuration file format.
Monitoring Agent 2.3.1.89-1
Released with OnPrem 1.4.3
• Improved logging for MongoDB 2.6 config servers when connecting with a user that has the built-in cluster-
Monitor role.
• Fixes issues with connecting to replica set members that use auth with an updated Go client library.
455
• Added support for HTTP proxy configuration in the agent configuration file.
• Agent includes support for an Offline data collection mode.
Monitoring Agent 2.1.4.51-1
Released with |mms| OnPrem 1.4.2
Prevent high CPU use when monitoring unreachable mongod.
Monitoring Agent 2.1.3.48-1
Released with OnPrem 1.4.1
Reduction in unnecessary log messages for unsupported operations on monitored MongoDB 2.2 instances.
Monitoring Agent 2.1.1.41-1
Released with OnPrem 1.4.0
Ability to monitor hosts using Kerberos authentication.
Monitoring Agent 1.6.6
Released with OnPrem1.3
• Added kerberos support for agents running on Python 2.4.x.
• Added logging when the dbstats command fails.
13.4 Backup Agent Changelog
Backup Agent 3.1.2.274
Released 2015-04-28
• Added an explicit timeout for SSL connections to MongoDB instances.
• Added an optimization for syncs of collections with lots of small documents.
Backup Agent 3.1.1.263
Released 2015-03-02
• Adds support for non-default Kerberos service names.
• Adds support for authentication using MongoDB 2.4-style client certificates.
• The Backup Agent now identifies itself to the Ops Manager servers using the fully qualified domain name
(FQDN) of the server on which it is running.
• The Backup Agent now captures a checkpoint even if it is unable to stop the balancer. These checkpoints are
not guaranteed to be consistent, because of in-progress chunk migrations. The user interface identifies these
checkpoints.
456
Backup Agent 2.3.3.209-1
Released with OnPrem 1.5.2
Use no-timeout cursors to work around MGO-53.
Backup Agent 2.3.1.160
Released with |mms| OnPrem 1.5.0
• Backup Agent now sends oplog slices in batches.
• Improved stability around oplog tokens for environments with unstable networks.
• Support for a new API that allows Ops Manager to ingest oplog entries before the entire payload has reached
the Ops Manager servers.
• Upgraded agent to use to Go 1.3.
• Added support for version and -version command line options.
• Added support for connecting to hosts using LDAP authentication.
• Agent now provides additional logging information when the Backup Agent manipulates the balancer.
• Agent now supports configuring HTTP proxies with the config file.
Backup Agent 1.5.1.83-1
Released with |mms| OnPrem 1.4.2
Critical update for users running the MongoDB 2.6 series that use authorization.
The Backup Agent now includes system.version and system.role collections from the admin database in
the initial sync.
Backup Agent 1.5.0.57-1
Released with OnPrem 1.4.1
Support for backing up Kerberos-authenticated replica sets and clusters
Backup Agent 1.4.6.42-1
Released with OnPrem 1.4.0
• Major stability update.
• Prevent a file descriptor leak.
• Correct handling of timeouts for connections hung in the SSL handshaking phase.
457

Navigation menu